summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
commite0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch)
tree60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite')
-rw-r--r--biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/README66
-rw-r--r--biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.dtx23244
-rw-r--r--biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.ins194
-rw-r--r--biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.pdfbin0 -> 622231 bytes
4 files changed, 23504 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/README b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..85499490f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/README
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+
+THE APACITE PACKAGE
+===================
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The apacite package (for LaTeX and BibTeX) implements the requirements
+of the American Psychological Association concerning citations and
+reference list. In addition, it provides a large number of options and
+other possibilities for customization, so that a wide range of citation
+styles and reference list styles can be handled. Furthermore, it also
+provides the possibility of automatically generating an author index.
+
+
+Copyright and license
+---------------------
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this package.
+
+This package may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in:
+
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+See the file apacite.dtx for more details.
+
+
+Building the package and its documentation
+------------------------------------------
+
+The generated LaTeX package (.sty), BibTeX style (.bst), and supporting
+files (.apc, .bib, .drv, .tex) are extracted by running:
+
+tex apacite.ins
+
+The documentation is then generated by the following sequence:
+
+pdflatex apacite.drv <== Produces apacite.pdf (documentation)
+bibtex apacite <== Produces apacite.bbl (reference list)
+pdflatex apacite.drv <== Include ref. list
+pdflatex apacite.drv <== Resolve citations
+pdflatex apacite.drv <== 'Labels may have changed'
+makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx <== (author index)
+pdflatex apacite.drv <== Include author index
+pdflatex apacite.drv <== Resolve table of contents
+
+Note that apacite comes with pre-built documentation (PDF format,
+U.S. letter-sized paper), so you only need to regenerate the
+documentation if you are unhappy with the documentation as
+provided. For example, if you want to generate a version for
+A4 paper, or if you want the full reference manual, including the
+documented source code and change log. In the latter case,
+edit the file apacite.drv according to your wishes (see the comments
+in that file) and insert the following lines in the sequence, after
+generating the author index:
+
+makeindex -s gind.ist apacite <== Produces apacite.ind (code index)
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo <== (change log)
+
diff --git a/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.dtx b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..30d4088ede
--- /dev/null
+++ b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,23244 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+% elsewhere in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+% version. The latest version of this license is in:
+%
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+% apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+% apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+% apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+% german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+% spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%
+% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+% the generated files.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{0}
+% \CharacterTable
+% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*dtx>
+\ProvidesFile{apacite.dtx}
+ [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite dtx file]
+%</dtx>
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{apacite.drv}
+%<package|docpkg>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{apacite}
+%<docpkg>\ProvidesPackage{apacdoc}
+%<english>\ProvidesFile{english.apc}
+%<dutch>\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc}
+%<finnish>\ProvidesFile{finnish.apc}
+%<german>\ProvidesFile{german.apc}
+%<ngerman>\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc}
+%<greek>\ProvidesFile{greek.apc}
+%<norsk>\ProvidesFile{norsk.apc}
+%<spanish>\ProvidesFile{spanish.apc}
+%<swedish>\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc}
+%<xmpl>%% apacxmpl.tex
+%<bibdb>%% apa5ex.bib
+%<bibstyle&!annotated>%% apacite.bst
+%<bibstyle&annotated>%% apacann.bst
+%<xbibstyle&!annotated>%% apacitex.bst
+%<xbibstyle&annotated>%% apacannx.bst
+%^^A
+%^^A I have to find out how I can replace the hard-coded date+version with a
+%^^A command such that the value of the command is written to the file instead
+%^^A of the name.
+%^^A
+%<driver> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite documentation driver file]
+%<package> [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA citation]
+%<docpkg> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite documentation style]
+%<english> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<dutch> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<finnish> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<german> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<ngerman> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<greek> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<norsk> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<spanish> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<swedish> [2013/07/21 v6.03 apacite language file]
+%<xmpl>%% [2013/07/21 v6.03 LaTeX file for examples]
+%<bibdb>%% [2013/07/21 v6.03 bibliography database for examples]
+%<bibstyle&!annotated>%% [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA bibliography style]
+%<*xbibstyle&!annotated>
+%% [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA bibl. style with author index info]
+%</xbibstyle&!annotated>
+%<bibstyle&annotated>%% [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA annotated bibliography style]
+%<*xbibstyle&annotated>
+%% [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA annotated bibl. style with author index info]
+%</xbibstyle&annotated>
+%
+%<*install>
+%^^A =============================================
+%^^A Here is the docstrip installation file
+%^^A It is written on first LaTeX run if it
+%^^A does not already exist
+%^^A =============================================
+\begin{filecontents*}{apacite.ins}
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version. The latest version of this license is in:
+%%
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+%% apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+%% apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+%% german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+%% spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in:
+
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\declarepreamble\drvpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in:
+
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate
+the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose
+whether or not to include the documented source code). Please
+do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\edef\noendinputpostamble{%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.%
+}
+
+\askonceonly
+\generate{%
+ \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+ \file{apacite.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{package}}
+ \file{apacdoc.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{docpkg}}
+ \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}}
+ \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}}
+ \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}}
+ \file{french.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{french}}
+ \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}}
+ \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}}
+ \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}}
+ \file{norsk.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{norsk}}
+ \file{spanish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{spanish}}
+ \file{swedish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{swedish}}
+ \file{apacxmpl.tex}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xmpl}}
+ \usepreamble\drvpreamble
+ \file{apacite.drv}{\from{apacite.dtx}{driver}}
+ \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+ \usepostamble\noendinputpostamble
+ \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}}
+ \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}}
+ \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}}
+ \file{apacann.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle,annotated}}
+ \file{apacannx.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle,annotated}}
+}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the *}
+\Msg{* following files into a directory searched by TeX: *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* All *.apc, *.sty *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* and to move the following files into a directory *}
+\Msg{* searched by BibTeX: *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* All *.bib, *.bst *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation, run the following *}
+\Msg{* script (or something similar, depending on your *}
+\Msg{* operating system): *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* bibtex apacite *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* See the README file for a brief explanation and *}
+\Msg{* the file apacite.drv for how to customize the *}
+\Msg{* manual (e.g., to include the documented source *}
+\Msg{* code. *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile
+\end{filecontents*}
+%</install>
+%<*gobble>
+\IfFileExists{apacdoc.sty}{%
+ \let\finishprematurely\relax
+}{%
+ \typeout{**************************************************%
+ ********************}%
+ \typeout{*}%
+ \typeout{* To extract the package, style, and support files
+ of apacite,}%
+ \typeout{* run TeX on apacite.ins}%
+ \typeout{*}%
+ \typeout{* To (re)generate the apacite documentation, first
+ run TeX on}%
+ \typeout{* apacite.ins and then run LaTeX on apacite.drv
+ or apacite.dtx}%
+ \typeout{*}%
+ \typeout{**************************************************%
+ ********************^^J}%
+ \makeatletter
+ \edef\finishprematurely{\csname @@end\endcsname}%
+ \makeatother
+}
+\finishprematurely
+%</gobble>
+% \fi
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\begin,\CodelineIndex,\CodelineNumbered,\def,\DisableCrossrefs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DocInput,\documentclass,\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\GetFileInfo}
+% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\OnlyDescription,\RecordChanges,\usepackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage,\ProvidesFile,\RequirePackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\LoadClass,\PassOptionsToClass,\PassOptionsToPackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareOption,\CurrentOption,\ProcessOptions,\ExecuteOptions}
+% \DoNotIndex{\AtEndOfClass,\AtEndOfPackage,\AtBeginDocument,\AtEndDocument}
+% \DoNotIndex{\InputIfFileExists,\IfFileExists,\ClassError,\PackageError}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ClassWarning,\PackageWarning,\ClassWarningNoLine}
+% \DoNotIndex{\PackageWarningNoLine,\ClassInfo,\PackageInfo,\MessageBreak}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\protect,\DeclareRobustCommand,\CheckCommand}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\renewcommand,\providecommand,\newenvironment}
+% \DoNotIndex{\renewenvironment,\newif,\newlength,\newcounter,\setlength}
+% \DoNotIndex{\setcounter,\if,\ifx,\ifcase,\ifnum,\ifdim,\else,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\texttt,\textbf,\textrm,\textsl,\textsc,\reset@font}
+% \DoNotIndex{\textup,\textit,\textmd,\textsf,\emph,\futurelet}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ttfamily,\rmfamily,\sffamily,\mdseries,\bfseries,\upshape}
+% \DoNotIndex{\slshape,\scshape,\itshape,\em,\LaTeX,\LaTeXe}
+% \DoNotIndex{\filename,\fileversion,\filedate,\let,\makeindex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@auxout,\@for,\@gobble,\@ifnextchar,\@m,\@mkboth,\@nil}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@noitemerr,\@tempa,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@warning}
+% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\arabic,\AtBeginDocument,\bf,\bibname,\chapter}
+% \DoNotIndex{\citation,\clubpenalty,\CodelineNumbered,\csname}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DisableCrossrefs,\do,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endlist}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\gdef,\global,\hbox,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if,\if@filesw,\if@tempswa,\ifx,\immediate,\itemindent,\labelsep}
+% \DoNotIndex{\labelwidth,\lastskip,\leftmargin,\list,\mbox,\newblock}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newpage,\p@enumiv,\parindent,\penalty,\refname}
+% \DoNotIndex{\relax,\section,\settowidth,\sfcode,\sloppy,\small,\string}
+% \DoNotIndex{\theenumiv,\thepage,\unskip,\uppercase,\usecounter,\vskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\z@,\catcode,\ifnum,\the}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@empty,\@ifundefined,\@latex@warning,\@minus,\@plus,\ }
+% \DoNotIndex{\document,\@namedef,\@listi,\markboth,\or,\p@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\listparindent,\noexpand,\par,\parsep,\pb,\pbf,\pbfseries}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pc,\pd,\pem,\pit,\pitshape,\pmdseries,\prm,\prmfamily,\psc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pscshape,\psf,\psffamily,\psl,\pslshape,\ptt,\pttfamily}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pupshape,\@iden,\@firstofone,\@unexpandable@protect}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if@draft,\typeout}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@ifclassloaded,\@ifstar,\@onlypreamble,\@preamblecmds}
+% \DoNotIndex{\addtolength,\endinput,\@bsphack,\begingroup,\@wrindex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@listctr,\bibname,\enddocument,\hfil,\ignorespaces,\item}
+% \DoNotIndex{\NAT@temp,\refname,\stepcounter,\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@gobbletwo,\index,\itemsep,\markright,\scriptsize}
+% \DoNotIndex{\textsuperscript,\@undefined}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@celt,\@cite@list,\@citea,\@citeb,\@compress@cite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@h@ld,\@make@cite@list,\@ne}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@sort@celt,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\delimiter,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\m@ne,\number}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@markboth,\@mkboth,\nobreak,\SK@,\SK@@citex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\SK@@label,\SK@@ref,SK@def,\SK@lbibitem,\bbl@redefine}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@safe@activesfalse,\@save@activestrue,\active@prefix}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\ ,\&,\{,\},\.,\!,\",\#,\%,\',\(,\),\*,\,,\-,\/}
+% \DoNotIndex{\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\@,\[,\\,\],\^,\_,\`,\|,\~}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@backslashchar,\@citec,\@element@,\@input@,\@nameuse}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@makeschapterhead,\@restonecolfalse,\@restonecoltrue}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@old@endthebibliography,\@oldbibpreamble,\@orig@@cite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@orig@@nocitemeta,\@orig@nocite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tmp@arg,\@xp,\AA,\aa,\addcontentsline}
+% \DoNotIndex{\afterassignment,\aftergroup,\alph,\ast,\b@ex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\backslash,\baselineskip,\BibTeX,\bigskip,\bs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\cmd,\cmdfour,\cmdthree,\cmdthreealt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cmdthreepre,\cmdtwo,\columnsep,\columnseprule,\count@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\dag,\do@url@hyp,\EM,\ensuremath,\entryname,\envirname}
+% \DoNotIndex{\evensidemargin,\fieldname,\flqq,\fname,\fontencoding}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fontfamily,\footnotesize,\footskip,\frqq}
+% \DoNotIndex{\g@addto@macro,\GlossaryPrologue,\headheight,\headsep}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hoffset,\if@mainmatter,\ifcodeline@index,\iffalse}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifhave@multicol,\index@prologue,\IndexMin,\IndexParms}
+% \DoNotIndex{\IndexPrologue,\input,\jobname,\kern,\langle,\LaTeXrtf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\latextohtml,\lbrace,\LC,\ldots,\linewidth,\lower}
+% \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter,\makeatother,\MakeIndex,\MakeUppercase}
+% \DoNotIndex{\marginparpush,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\mid}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathbin,\mathchar,\mathord,\newskip,\newwrite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\normalsize,\oddsidemargin,\oldBED,\oldBEd,\oldBEDS}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldbibinitial,\oldbibliteral,\oldbibskipbracenodot}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldBIn,\oldBRetrieved,\oldevensidemargin,\oldfootskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldheadheight,\oldheadsep,\oldhoffset,\oldlinewidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldmarginparpush,\oldmarginparsep,\oldmarginparwidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldoddsidemargin,\oldtextheight,\oldtextwidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldtopmargin,\oldvoffset,\onecolumn,\openout,\opt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\orig@printindex,\origbibDSM,\parskip,\Perl,\pfill}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pkg,\pkgoption,\protected@edef,\protected@write}
+% \DoNotIndex{\quad,\raggedright,\raisebox,\rangle,\rbrace,\rm,\sc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\simpleguillemots,\symbol,\TeX,\TeXht}
+% \DoNotIndex{\textheight,\textwidth,\thinspace,\thispagestyle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\thr@@,\times,\tiny,\topmargin,\triangleright}
+% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\undefined,\voffset,\vspace,\X,\Y}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%<driver>%\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc}
+%<driver>%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+%<driver>%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+%%
+\usepackage{apacdoc}[2013/07/21 v6.03]
+%% The |\providecommand|s make sure we don't get an error during
+%% installation.
+%% Define document-specific macros that are not interesting for
+%% users.
+\providecommand{\SetupAPACdoc}{}%
+\SetupAPACdoc
+%% Document page layout.
+\providecommand{\APACdocPageLayout}{}%
+\APACdocPageLayout
+%% Index styles for the source code documentation
+\providecommand{\SetupAPACdocPrologues}{}%
+\SetupAPACdocPrologues
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% LOADING OF PACKAGES
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% The following line is used for references to internet sources.
+%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples.
+\usepackage{url}
+%%
+%% Loading apacite with author index option.
+\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2013/07/21 v6.03]
+%%
+\raggedbottom
+%%
+%% To include the detailed explanation of the coding, comment out
+%% the next line
+\OnlyDescription
+%%
+%% To produce a command index: add the following line for one run,
+%% then run makeindex -s gind.ist apacite
+%% and reprocess, with or without this line (much faster without)
+%<driver>% \EnableCrossrefs\CodelineIndex
+%%
+%% To produce a change history: add the following line for one run,
+%% then run makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo
+%% and reprocess, with or without this line (faster without)
+%<driver>% \RecordChanges
+%%
+\DisableCrossrefs % May stay; zapped by \EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineNumbered % May stay
+%%
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{apacite.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (I have to find out how to get the following remark in the right
+% ^^A place in the documentation.)
+% ^^A The earlier version numbers have been assigned retroactively;
+% ^^A originally, apacite had only release dates.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0}{1994/11/30}{First public version}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2000/09/22}{Second packaged version, the result of
+% continuous updating over many years. Not officially released through
+% ctan because there was no update of the documentation, but this was
+% available through my homepage at the time. Many additions in terms
+% of customizability, and introduction of the author indexing
+% facilities, which were first used in my PhD thesis in 1998.}
+% \changes{v2.1}{2003/03/27}{First official release since 1994. Compared
+% to 2.0, this primarily solved some important compatibility problems
+% with other packages.}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2003/09/05}{Updated for the 5th edition of the APA
+% manual, up to date documentation and test document, reorganized the
+% material, and improved compatibility.}
+% \changes{v3.0}{2004/07/01}{Now adds initials if necessary to
+% distinguish first authors; now adds 2nd and later authors if necessary
+% to distinguish references; now truncates author list after 6th author
+% and editor list after 1st in reference list if there are more than 6
+% authors/editors; improved sorting for reference list; improved author
+% index support; added explicit support for reporting a meta-analysis.}
+% \changes{v3.1}{2005/06/01}{Introduces explicit non-English language
+% support, solves some compatibility problems.}
+% \changes{v3.2}{2005/06/08}{Fix of a small but annoying bug.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2007/09/03}{Solved many compatibility issues; improved
+% and extended language support; more extensive customizability.}
+% \changes{v4.05}{2009/03/01}{Some bug fixes; extended language support;
+% annotated bibliographies.}
+% \changes{v6.00}{2012/02/14}{First step toward compliance with v6 of
+% the APA manual; version number now indicates which version of the APA
+% manual is implemented.}
+% \changes{v6.01}{2012/02/25}{Bug fix}
+% \changes{v6.02}{2013/07/04}{Bug fixes}
+% \changes{v6.03}{2013/07/21}{Thesis formatting adapted to 6th edition
+% requirements}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{apacite.sty}
+%
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% ^^A Start documentation here.
+%
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*dtx>
+% \fi
+\MakePercentComment
+%
+% User's reference manual and test of the apacite package.
+% Written by Erik Meijer
+%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% START OF ``NORMAL'' PART OF DOCUMENT
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{The \pkg{apacite} package%
+ \thanks{This document describes \pkg{apacite} version~\fileversion{}
+ dated \filedate.}
+ \vspace{0.3\baselineskip}\\
+ \large Citation and reference list with \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{}
+ according to the rules of the American Psychological Association}
+\author{Erik Meijer\\
+ \textsf{apacite at gmail.com}
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% If ecmr (T1) font not available:
+\simpleguillemots
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\maketitle
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{abstract}
+ \noindent
+ This document describes and tests the \pkg{apacite} package
+ \APACversiondate{\filedate}. This is a package that can be used with
+ \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} to generate citations and a reference list,
+ formatted according to the rules of the American Psychological Association.
+ Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} contains an option to (almost) automatically
+ generate an author index as well. The package can be customized in many
+ ways.
+\end{abstract}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\clearpage
+\tableofcontents
+\clearpage
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Introduction}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The American Psychological Association (APA) is very strict about the style in
+which manuscripts submitted to its journals are written and formatted. The
+requirements of the APA are described in the \emph{Publication Manual of the
+American Psychological Association}, the latest version of which is the 6th
+edition \cite{APAManual6}. In the sequel, this is simply called the \emph{APA
+manual}.
+
+The APA manual discusses how candidate authors should write their manuscripts:
+writing style, parts of a manuscript and their order, presentation of the
+results in the form of tables and figures, and so forth. Candidate authors
+should study this and adhere to this.
+
+The APA manual also gives specific rules about the formatting of a manuscript.
+This includes double spacing, a running head, the typographic style of section
+headings, the placement of tables and figures on separate pages at the end of
+the document, and so forth. \LaTeX{} users will recognize these as ``style''
+elements that should be defined in a package (\fname{.sty} file) or class
+(\fname{.cls} file). Their specific documents (\fname{.tex} file) should be
+largely style-independent. This idea of separating content and logical
+structure from specific formatting is one of the basic elements of \LaTeX{}
+\cite[p.~7]{LaTeXbook}.
+
+An implementation of the formatting rules of the APA manual for use with
+\LaTeX{} is the \pkg{apa6} class by Brian Beitzel, which is a continuation of
+the earlier \pkg{apa} class by Athanassios Protopapas. This handles all kinds of
+issues about general document formatting, title page, section headings, figures
+and tables, and so forth. Therefore, if you intend to submit a manuscript to an
+APA journal, I strongly recommend using the \pkg{apa6} class.
+
+An important part of the APA style is the way citations and the reference list
+should be formatted. This takes 56 pages in the APA manual (pp.~169--224). This
+part is not handled by the \pkg{apa6} class, but by the \pkg{apacite} package.
+\pkg{apacite} can be used without \pkg{apa6}. The current document, for example,
+does not use the \pkg{apa6} class, because I find it desirable that possible
+users can study the \pkg{apacite} package and its documentation without having
+to install several other classes and packages first. Therefore, the current
+document uses standard \LaTeX{} as much as possible. (The \pkg{apa} class used
+to require the \pkg{apacite} package, but this was dropped because there is now
+also the \pkg{biblatex-apa} citation package as an alternative to
+\pkg{apacite}.)
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection*{Philosophy of \pkg{apacite}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The first priority of \pkg{apacite} is to implement the rules of the APA manual
+with regard to citation and reference list as closely as possible. However, just
+like its predecessors (culminating in Young U. Ryu's \pkg{theapa} package), and
+actually expanding much beyond their realm, \pkg{apacite} offers many
+possibilities for customization as well. Many details of \pkg{apacite},
+particularly punctuation and some fixed texts (e.g., ``Tech.\ Rep.'') can be
+changed easily by the user by redefining some commands in \LaTeX{}. Furthermore,
+\pkg{apacite} also offers several proper options to change some of its settings.
+
+Whether certain options or customizable aspects are implemented depends on two
+criteria: (1) Is it possible, easy (enough), and convenient to implement them
+without compromising the ability to adhere to the APA rules, and (2) Do I (EM)
+consider them important or useful enough to spend time to implement them.
+Actually, the decision process is the reverse of this: First, I decide whether
+I find it a relevant or useful option. If not, I will not implement it. If so,
+I will think about if and how I can implement it. If I have an idea for a
+solution that is practically feasible, I will pursue it. If I don't see a
+solution, if I think it will take me too much time, or if I think a solution
+will be inconvenient to other users, then I will not pursue it.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection*{New in this version}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Changes with respect to the previous version (v6.02,
+\APACversiondate{2013/07/04}):
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item
+Thesis formatting (\entryname{@phdthesis}, \entryname{@mastersthesis})
+rewritten in order to conform to the 6th edition of the APA Manual.
+
+\item
+Added the \cmd{\APACaddressSchool} and \cmd{\APACtypeAddressSchool}
+commands to facilitate customization of the formatting of theses.
+
+\item
+Added the \cmd{\APACredefineOnce} command to \fname{apacdoc.sty}.
+
+\item
+Added examples 31--44 from the APA manual to \fname{apacxmpl.tex} and
+\fname{apa5ex.bib}.
+
+\item
+Improved source code documentation in the \fname{.dtx} file.
+
+\item
+Some minor changes and bug fixes.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection*{About this document}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The current document describes how to use \pkg{apacite} and largely assumes
+knowledge of or access to the standard \BibTeX{} documentation, such as
+\citeA{Pata88}, \citeA[Chapter~12]{KoDa04}, or \citeA[Chapters~12 and~13]{TLC2}.
+Hence, this document does not always describe how to use some of the citation
+commands or how to construct a bibliography database file in detail if there
+is no \pkg{apacite}-specific element to it. This document comes in two
+versions. The version supplied with the distribution is the user's manual.
+As is customary with packages that are distributed in \fname{.dtx} form, it is
+also possible to regenerate the user's manual in such a way that it includes
+the documented source code of the package as well. This is currently still
+in a primitive form compared to other packages, but it will be improved
+with later releases. The \fname{README} file describes how the documented
+source code can be included in this manual. \citeA{meijer07} contains some
+simple examples in which \pkg{apacite} is compared to standard \LaTeX/\BibTeX{}
+citation, as well as a description of how \pkg{apacite} works technically.
+
+{\bfseries Note that this manual is not completely up to date.}
+This is primarily the case for the specific discussion of the examples
+in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, which focus on the 5th edition of the APA
+manual, but there may be some obsolete discussions or omissions elsewhere
+in the document as well.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Installation, package loading, and running \BibTeX{}}
+\label{sec:usage}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\pkg{apacite} is distributed as a \fname{.dtx} file, like
+most \LaTeX{} packages. The file \fname{apacite.dtx} is supplemented by a
+\fname{README} file, which gives a brief introduction and installation
+instructions, the user's manual in the file \fname{apacite.pdf} (which you are
+reading right now), and the installation file \fname{apacite.ins}. Strictly
+speaking, only the \fname{apacite.dtx} file is necessary, because the
+installation file is regenerated from it if it is not available, and the user's
+manual is generated by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.dtx}. But it is
+customary (and convenient for potential users) to include the other files as
+well.
+
+The \LaTeX{} packages, \BibTeX{} style files, and other files in the
+distribution are generated by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.ins}.
+This generates the following files:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fname{apacite.sty}] The \LaTeX{} citation package. This must
+ be placed in a directory where \TeX{} can find it.
+\item[\fname{apacite.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style. This
+ must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it.
+\item[\fname{apacitex.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style with
+ added author index support. This must also be placed in a directory
+ where \BibTeX{} can find it.
+\item[\fname{apacann.bst}]
+\item[\fname{apacannx.bst}] Versions of \fname{apacite.bst} and
+ \fname{apacitex.bst} that generate annotated bibliographies (if the
+ \fieldname{annote} and/or \fieldname{annotate} fields are provided). Again,
+ these must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it. Most
+ probably, some time in the future, the four \fname{.bst} files will be
+ combined in \fname{apacite.bst}, with the desired behavior induced by
+ options, but this is nontrivial and currently not implemented yet.
+\item[\fname{apacxmpl.tex}] \LaTeX{} file that (with the bibliography
+ database) implements the examples from the APA manual.
+ This can best be kept in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}.
+\item[\fname{apa5ex.bib}] The file with bibliographic information
+ of the examples from the APA manual, this user's manual.
+ This is useful for users to find out how
+ certain nontrivial problems can be solved. This can best be kept
+ in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}.
+\item[\fname{apacite.drv}] Documentation driver. Run \LaTeX{} on this
+ file to regenerate the user's manual. This is the current document,
+ and can also be ontained by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.dtx},
+ but you can edit the file \fname{apacite.drv} to change some settings,
+ e.g., choose whether or not the documented source code must be
+ included in the manual or not. Please don't edit \fname{apacite.dtx}
+ itself. The file \fname{apacite.drv} can best be kept
+ in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}.
+\item[\fname{*.apc}] Language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite}.
+ See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a discussion of these.
+ These must be placed in a directory where \LaTeX{} can find them.
+ The files that are currently supplied are \fname{english.apc},
+ \fname{dutch.apc}, \fname{finnish.apc}, \fname{french.apc},
+ \fname{german.apc}, \fname{ngerman.apc}, \fname{greek.apc},
+ \fname{norsk.apc}, \fname{spanish.apc}, and \fname{swedish.apc}.
+\item[\fname{apacdoc.sty}] A \LaTeX{} package that contains commands
+ and settings used in this user's manual. This can be placed in a
+ directory where \TeX{} can find it, but given that it is primarily
+ useful for processing the user's manual and not intended as a
+ package for wider usage, it can also be left in the same directory as
+ \fname{apacite.dtx}. See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for a further discussion
+ of this package.
+\end{description}
+
+The \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package is loaded by putting
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\cmdthreealt{usepackage}{options}{apacite}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+somewhere in your document between \cmd{\documentclass} and
+|\begin{document}|, or putting
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\cmdthreealt{RequirePackage}{options}{apacite}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+in your own personal \LaTeX{} package (say, \fname{mysettings.sty})
+that is loaded by your document.
+
+To load the \fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst} bibliography style in
+\BibTeX{}, put
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+|\bibliographystyle{apacite}|
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+(or |apacitex|, |apacann|, or |apacannx|) in your document
+before the \cmd{\bibliography} command. The
+position of the bibliography (reference list) is determined by the line
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\cmdtwo{bibliography}{bibfiles}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+where \opt{bibfiles} is a list of filenames with \fname{.bib} extension, which
+contain the bibliographic information that is used by \BibTeX{} to construct the
+reference list. Usually, the \cmd{\bibliographystyle} and \cmd{\bibliography}
+are kept together (immediately follow each other) in the document, although when
+you are using the \pkg{apa6} document class with \pkg{apacite} support, the
+\cmd{\bibliographystyle} is defined by the class and you are not supposed to use
+the \cmd{\bibliographystyle} command yourself. See the documentation of the
+\pkg{apa6} documentclass for details about this.
+
+If you use one of the author indexing options, the author index is put in
+the \LaTeX{} output by the line
+\begin{verbatim}
+\printindex[autx]
+\end{verbatim}
+If you put this line in your document, but don't use one of the author
+indexing options, it will be ignored. For more on author indexing, see
+section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+
+To get all parts in the final output, the following sequence of runs should
+typically be taken (when starting from scratch): (1) \LaTeX{}, (2) \BibTeX{},
+(3) \LaTeX{}, (4) \LaTeX{}, and, when author indexing is on, (5) \MakeIndex{},
+(6) \LaTeX{}, and (7) \LaTeX{}. The last one is to get the index in the table
+of contents. If the table of contents is on a regular page, i.e., an
+arabic-numbered page instead of a roman-numbered page in the front matter, it
+may even be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} another time, followed by \LaTeX{}
+once or twice. Occasionally, somewhere in the process, \LaTeX{} may complain
+about labels that may have changed, which requires even more additional
+\LaTeX{} runs at that stage. So the number of runs that are necessary to get
+everything right may become large.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Package options}
+\label{sec:options}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The following options are recognized by \pkg{apacite}:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\pkgoption{apaciteclassic}]
+\item[\pkgoption{natbibapa}]
+\item[\pkgoption{nocitation}] \mbox{}\\
+ These three option determine which citation commands are defined in
+ \pkg{apacite}. \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} defines the ``classic''
+ \pkg{apacite} citation commands \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\citeA}, \cmd{\citeNP},
+ and so forth, which use angled bracket syntax for prenotes, for example,
+ |\cite<see>[for more details]{ex1}|. These are the commands
+ described in section~\ref{sec:cite} below. This is the default in the
+ current version, but this may change in the future.
+
+ \pkgoption{natbibapa}
+ loads the \pkg{natbib} package for the citation commands. These
+ commands, such as \cmd{\citet} and \cmd{\citep}, use double square
+ brackets, for example, |\citep[see][for more details]{ex1}|.
+ Because these commands are not defined by \pkg{apacite} but by
+ \pkg{natbib}, they are not documented in this manual. See the
+ \pkg{natbib} documentation for their usage. Using \pkg{natbib} has a
+ few advantages over using the classic \pkg{apacite} commands:
+ (i) the citation commands are robust, which means they can be used
+ inside other commands, such as \cmd{\caption}, whereas the \pkg{apacite}
+ commands, like the traditional \LaTeX{} \cmd{\cite} command, are
+ fragile and must be \cmd{\protect}ed when used inside other commands;
+ (ii) the angled brackets do not normally occur in text mode and when
+ they do, they have special meaning; this may lead to incompatibilities;
+ (iii) \pkg{natbib} supports sorting citations within a citation
+ command, and has commands such as \cmd{\Citet} that capitalize the
+ first letter of a citation; the classic \pkg{apacite} commands lack
+ this functionality;
+ (iv) it is easier to switch to other styles, even to numbered styles.
+
+ When the \pkgoption{nocitation} option is requested, no citation
+ commands (except for \cmd{\nocitemeta}) are defined in \pkg{apacite}.
+ This may be useful if you want to use another citation package and
+ want to avoid potential compatibility conflicts.
+
+ The option \pkgoption{natbibapa} is different from
+ \pkgoption{nocitation} combined with loading of \pkg{natbib} by the
+ user, because \pkgoption{natbibapa} modifies \pkg{natbib}'s and
+ \pkg{apacite}'s behavior in a way that better satisfies the APA
+ rules and fixes some compatibility problems.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{BCAY}] \mbox{}\\
+ This is a technical option for backwards compatibility with old versions
+ (pre-\APACversiondate{2003/09/05}) of \pkg{apacite}. In those versions of
+ \pkg{apacite}, the \cmd{\BCAY} construction was used to pass relevant
+ citation information from the \fname{.bbl} file (\BibTeX{}'s output) to
+ \LaTeX{}. This was taken over from its immediate predecessor, Young U. Ryu's
+ \pkg{theapa}. However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize the \cmd{\BCAY}
+ construction, but it does recognize the analogous \cmd{\citeauthoryear}
+ construction, which was also used by an earlier predecessor of
+ \pkg{apacite}, \pkg{newapa}. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} has reverted to
+ \cmd{\citeauthoryear} as well. This makes different versions of
+ \pkg{apacite} incompatible with each other, because it is not possible to
+ support both constructions at the same time. This option is used to fix
+ that: In the (unlikely) event that you \emph{must} use a \fname{.bbl} file
+ that is generated by an old version of \pkg{apacite}, you can turn this
+ option on.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{mask}]
+\item[\pkgoption{unmask}] \mbox{}\\
+ Many journals use a double blind refereeing process. To conceal the
+ author's identity in such a masked review, it may be necessary to
+ suppress some citations, for example, to the working paper version
+ of the manuscript under review. \pkg{apa6} introduced masked citation
+ commands, which are now included in \pkg{apacite} as well. These
+ work as ordinary citations when the \pkgoption{mask} option is not
+ requested (or when the \pkgoption{unmask} option is chosen, which
+ is the default) and print a message mentioning suppression of citations
+ when \pkg{apacite} is loaded with the \pkgoption{mask} option.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{index}]
+\item[\pkgoption{indexpackage}]
+\item[\pkgoption{noindexpackage}] \mbox{}\\
+ The \pkgoption{index} option turns author indexing on. See
+ section~\ref{sec:autindex} for a discussion of the author indexing facility.
+ The \pkgoption{index} option should be used with the \fname{apacitex.bst}
+ (or \fname{apacannx.bst})
+ \BibTeX{} style, although it does not give errors with \fname{apacite.bst}
+ (or \fname{apacann.bst}),
+ but simply does not give author index entries, so then this option
+ typically does not have any effect (and an undesirable effect if
+ it does). The \pkgoption{indexpackage} and \pkgoption{noindexpackage}
+ select whether the author index entries should be generated according
+ to the method of the \pkg{index} package or using a more standard-\LaTeX{}
+ method.
+
+ By default, if the \pkgoption{index} option is requested, the
+ \pkgoption{indexpackage} option is turned on as well, consistent with
+ the behavior of previous versions of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{noindex}] \mbox{}\\
+ Turns author indexing off (the default). Typically used with
+ \fname{apacite.bst}, but can also be used with \fname{apacitex.bst}. In the
+ latter case, the author indexing commands are simply ignored. Therefore,
+ \fname{apacite.bst} is actually superfluous, but because author indexing
+ will be used rarely and \fname{apacitex.bst} is more likely to lead to errors
+ or incompatibilities, a ``clean'' (no author indexing) version,
+ \fname{apacite.bst}, is provided as well.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{suppresscorporate}] \mbox{}\\
+ Excludes corporate authors from the author index. The \cmd{\bibcorporate}
+ command must be used in the \fname{.bib} file to denote a corporate author;
+ see sections~\ref{subsec:fields}, \ref{subsec:labels}, and~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{includecorporate}] \mbox{}\\
+ Includes corporate authors in the author index, provided that an author index
+ is requested of course.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{stdindex}]
+\item[\pkgoption{tocindex}]
+\item[\pkgoption{emindex}]
+\item[\pkgoption{ltxemindex}] \mbox{}\\
+ These options select the style of index formatting. They all imply the
+ \pkgoption{index} option. The first three of these imply the
+ \pkgoption{indexpackage} option, whereas the fourth implies
+ \pkgoption{noindexpackage}. See section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{numberedbib}] \mbox{}\\
+ This option implies that the bibliography (reference list) is a numbered
+ section or chapter, e.g., ``6.~References'', instead of just ``References''.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{unnumberedbib}] \mbox{}\\
+ The reverse of \pkgoption{numberedbib}: The bibliography is an unnumbered
+ section or chapter. This is the default. However, it is possible that when
+ using the \pkg{apa} document class, then \pkgoption{numberedbib} works
+ better, because that class turns section numbering off anyway and it may be
+ that \pkg{apa}'s page headings work well if the reference list is a
+ \cmd{\section} and not if it is a \cmd{\section*}. I have not experimented
+ with this (yet), however.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{sectionbib}] \mbox{}\\
+ With this option, the bibliography is a section and not a chapter. Mainly
+ useful in combination with the \pkg{chapterbib} package. Therefore, it will
+ be discussed in more detail in section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{nosectionbib}] \mbox{}\\
+ With this option, the bibliography is a chapter, if the \cmd{\chapter}
+ command is defined. Otherwise, it is always a section. Again, see
+ section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{tocbib}] \mbox{}\\
+ This puts the bibliography in the table of contents, even if it is
+ unnumbered, provided of course that a table of contents is requested in the
+ document (by \cmd{\tableofcontents}). This is the default.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{notocbib}] \mbox{}\\
+ This does not put the bibliography in the table of contents if it is an
+ unnumbered section or chapter. If it's numbered, it is always in the table
+ of contents.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{bibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\
+ The bibliography is started on a new page. This is required by some journal
+ styles, including the APA manual. The \pkg{apa} class already contained this
+ in its \pkgoption{man} option, but now it has been made available directly
+ in \pkg{apacite}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{nobibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\
+ The bibliography is not explicitly started on a new page, although if the
+ bibliography is a chapter, it will be started on a new page anyway, because
+ chapters are started on a new page. This is the default in \pkg{apacite} and
+ thus is the only time a non-APA setting is used as default instead of an
+ available APA setting. Therefore, to satisfy the APA rules, you have to
+ request the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option explicitly.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{doi}] \mbox{}\\
+ Includes doi information in the reference list; the default.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{nodoi}] \mbox{}\\
+ Suppresses doi information in the reference list.
+
+\end{description}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{The citation commands}
+\label{sec:cite}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+This section describes the commands that can be used to cite a work.
+Section~\ref{sec:classic} describes the commands available with the
+\pkgoption{apaciteclassic} option selected. Section~\ref{sec:natbibapa}
+is devoted to the citation commands with the \pkgoption{natbibapa}
+command selected. Apart from differences in syntax, there are a few
+important differences between these sets of commands:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+The \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} commands are \emph{fragile}, like the
+standard \LaTeX{} \cmd{\cite} command. This means that they cannot be
+used in other commands, like \cmd{\caption}, unless they are protected
+by putting \cmd{\protect} before them, for example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\caption{Theoretical constructs from \protect\citeA{Jones01}}
+\end{verbatim}
+In contrast, the \pkg{natbib}/\pkgoption{natbibapa} commands are
+\emph{robust}, so they can be used in other commands without the
+need for \cmd{\protect}.
+\item
+The use of the angled brackets (`|<|' and `|>|') in the
+\pkgoption{apaciteclassic} commands sometimes causes compatibility
+problems, for example, with certain options of the \pkg{babel}
+package, such as \pkgoption{spanish}.
+\item
+With the \pkgoption{sort} option, \pkg{natbib} sorts citations
+within the same citation command in the same order as in the reference
+list, as required by the APA manual (p.~178). Therefore, when
+\pkg{apacite} is loaded with the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option, it
+loads \pkg{natbib} with the \pkgoption{sort} option.
+Sorting is not implemented in the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} commands,
+and thus the user will need to manually order the citations
+alphabetically.
+\item
+\pkg{natbib} provides a set of commands (e.g., \cmd{\Citet}) that
+capitalize the first letter of a citation. This can be used when
+a citation, of which the first author's name starts with a lowercase
+letter, starts a sentence (APA manual, p.~101). This behavior would
+be very hard to reproduce with the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic}
+commands.
+\end{itemize}
+Overall, I believe that the \pkg{natbibapa} option will be preferred
+by most users, and I expect that I will make this the default in a
+future release of \pkg{apacite}. However, because most users of
+\pkg{apacite} will still be working on documents that use the
+\pkgoption{apaciteclassic} commands, this is still the default in the
+current version.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{The ``classic'' \pkg{apacite} citation commands}
+\label{sec:classic}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+This section describes the default behavior of the citation commands
+that are avilable with the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} option.
+In section~\ref{sec:custom}, customization of this behavior will be
+discussed. Extensive examples are given in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}
+and the new examples file described there. Table~\ref{tab:basic-cite}
+gives a brief impression of the usage and results of the most common
+citation commands.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{table}[tp]
+\begin{center}
+\caption{Examples of usage of basic citation commands.}
+\label{tab:basic-cite}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+\hline
+Command & Result \\
+\hline
+|\cite<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}| &
+ (e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11) \\
+|\citeA<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}| &
+ e.g., Jones (2001); Ross (1987, p.~11) \\
+|\citeauthor<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}| &
+ e.g., Jones; Ross, p.~11 \\
+|\citeyear<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}| &
+ (e.g., 2001; 1987, p.~11) \\
+|\citeyearNP<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}| &
+ e.g., 2001; 1987, p.~11 \\
+|\citeNP<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}| &
+ e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11 \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Structure of the citation commands;
+ parenthetical citations}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\cite}
+The traditional \LaTeX{} citation command is \cmd{\cite}, and
+\pkg{apacite} reimplements this command. This command is used for
+\emph{parenthetical} citations. For example,
+``|\cite{Jone01}|'' results in ``(Jones, 2001)''. Here,
+|Jone01| is the \emph{key} that identifies the reference; it is
+defined in the \fname{.bib} file, see section~\ref{sec:bib}.
+An optional postfix---text that follows the actual citation---can
+be added as a standard \LaTeX{} optional argument in square brackets:
+``|\cite[p.~11]{Jone01}|'' results in ``(Jones, 2001, p.~11)''.
+Similarly, an optional prefix can be added between angled brackets:
+``|\cite<e.g.,>{Jone01}|'' results in ``(e.g., Jones, 2001)''.
+Finally, there can be both a prefix and a postfix (in that order):
+``|\cite<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01}|'' results in
+``(e.g., Jones, 2001, p.~11)''. As usual, multiple references
+can be included within the same citation:
+``|\cite<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01, Ross87}|'' results in
+(e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11). The citation keys of multiple
+citations must be separated by commas, with optional spaces after the
+commas.
+
+By default, \pkg{apacite} follows the APA rules and includes the
+citation in round parentheses, separates the author and year by a
+comma, the different references by a semicolon, and the year and
+the postfix by a comma, but this can all be changed by the user;
+see section~\ref{sec:custom}.
+
+\pkg{apacite} defines a large number of alternative citation
+commands, but they all have this same structure:
+\cmdfour{command}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}. However, the prefix, and to
+a lesser extent the postfix, are most useful with the parenthetical
+citation commands.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Text citations; splitting author and year; no
+parentheses}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\citeA}
+The \cmd{\citeA} command produces text citations:
+``|\citeA{Jone01}|'' results in ``Jones (2001)'' and.
+``|\citeA[p.~11]{Jone01}|'' results in ``Jones (2001, p.~11)''.
+Prefixes are generally not useful for text citations (you can simply
+include the prefix in the text), but supported. Multiple citations
+are also supported. These are typically only useful for cases in which
+the authors are the same and only the year is repeated:
+``|\citeA{Jone01, Jone02}|'' results in ``Jones (2001, 2002)''.
+Corresponding with the APA rules, an ``and'' before the last author
+is formatted as ``and'' in text citations, whereas it is formatted
+as ``\&'' in parenthetical citations:
+``|\citeA{SmJo03}|'' gives ``Smith and Jones (2003)'', whereas
+``|\cite{SmJo03}|'' gives ``(Smith \& Jones, 2003)''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\citeauthor}
+If a proper citation has been given in a paragraph,\footnote{Note that
+a paragraph is not a section. Nor does it need to be declared as a
+\cmd{\paragraph}. A reminder for Dutch readers: ``section'' =
+``paragraaf'' and ``paragraph'' = ``alinea''.}
+the second reference to the source may omit the year if no ambiguity
+can arise (APA manual, p.~174). The \cmd{\citeauthor} command can
+be used for such purposes:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\citeA{Jone01} argued that [...]. The empirical results of
+\citeauthor{Jone01} supported his argument.
+\end{verbatim}
+gives ``Jones (2001) argued that [\ldots]. The empirical results of
+Jones supported his argument.''
+
+\DescribeMacro{\citeyear}
+The \cmd{\citeyear} command gives just the year part of a text
+citation. This can be used for constructions like
+``|\citeauthor{Jone01}' \citeyear{Jone01} method|'', which
+gives ``Jones' (2001) method''. Note that \cmd{\citeyear} inserts the
+parentheses.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\citeyearNP}
+Some constructions may require even more flexibility. The
+\cmd{\citeyearNP} command (NP = no parentheses) omits the
+parentheses, which can be useful for a construction like
+``|In \citeyearNP{Jone01},| |\citeauthor{Jone01}| |introduced|
+|his method|'', which gives ``In 2001, Jones introduced his method''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\citeauthorNP}
+As mentioned above, text citations use ``and'' between authors,
+whereas parenthetical citations use ``\&''. The, \cmd{\citeauthor}
+command is a text citation command and thus should not be used
+in a parenthetical citation; \cmd{\citeauthorNP} is the corresponding
+parenthetical command, which gives just the authors, but now with
+``\&'' when applicable. Note that neither \cmd{\citeauthor} nor
+\cmd{\citeauthorNP} insert parentheses. In hindsight, it would have
+been more logical---following \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\citeA}---to use
+\cmd{\citeauthorA} for what is now \cmd{\citeauthor} and
+\cmd{\citeauthor} for what is now \cmd{\citeauthorNP}, but
+\cmd{\citeauthor} already existed as a text citation command in
+\pkg{apacite}'s predecessor \pkg{theapa}, it is used as such in
+some other packages (e.g., \pkg{natbib}), and I didn't realize at
+the time that \pkg{apacite} would need both. Therefore, the name
+\cmd{\citeauthorNP} is modeled after \cmd{\citeNP}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\citeNP}
+The \cmd{\citeNP} command is \cmd{\cite} without the parentheses.
+This is useful for complex constructions like
+\begin{verbatim}
+\citeauthor{Jone01} (\citeyearNP{Jone01}; see also \citeNP{SmJo03})
+\end{verbatim}
+which gives
+``Jones (2001; see also Smith \& Jones, 2003)''.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{References without citation}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\nocite}
+The standard \LaTeX{} command \cmd{\nocite} is also provided by
+\pkg{apacite}; \cmdtwo{nocite}{keys} includes the references
+corresponding with the keys in the reference list, but does not
+generate a citation in the text. Therefore, it does not allow a pre-
+or postfix. However, it does allow multiple citations. Like the
+standard \LaTeX{} command, |\nocite{*}| includes all references
+from the \fname{.bib} file in the reference list. In general, the APA
+requires (p.~174) that each reference list entry should be cited in
+the text, and thus this command will rarely be used in APA style
+manuscripts. One potential application is a meta-analysis based
+on more than 50 works. (See \cmd{\nocitemeta} below.)
+
+\DescribeMacro{\nocitemeta}
+An exception to the one-to-one correspondence requirement between
+citations and reference list is when a meta-analysis is reported.
+This is a quantitative analysis with results, e.g., regression
+coefficients, from published work used as data in the current work.
+Studies that are included in the meta-analysis should be included
+in the reference list, but do not need to be cited. They should,
+however, be marked with an asterisk in the reference list. This
+can be obtained by using \cmd{\nocitemeta}, which is otherwise
+identical to \cmd{\nocite}: the syntax is \cmdtwo{nocitemeta}{keys}
+and |\nocitemeta{*}| includes all entries from the \fname{.bib} file
+in the reference list and flags all of them with an asterisk. This
+is an unlikely situation, though. Because other packages, in particular
+\pkg{natbib} do not define \cmd{\nocitemeta} or an analogous command,
+\pkg{apacite} provides \cmd{\nocitemeta} regardless of whether the
+\pkgoption{apaciteclassic}, \pkgoption{natbibapa}, or even
+\pkgoption{nocitation} option is requested.
+
+If a meta-analysis includes more than 50 studies, these should not
+be included in the main reference list, but in a separate online
+supplemental archive (APA manual, p.~183). \pkg{apacite} currently
+does not count the number of references included in the meta-analysis,
+and thus does not check whether the references should be included in
+a separate online supplemental archive, it does not disable the
+\cmd{\nocitemeta} command, and it does not automatically generate
+the supplemental document. This is the responsibility of the user.
+If there is demand for it, I might implement such a counter so that
+\pkg{apacite} can give a warning at the end of the \LaTeX{} run that
+there are more than 50 references included in the meta-analysis.
+Presumably, in the online supplemental archive, the references are
+not marked with an asterisk, so this would be an example where
+\cmd{\nocite} can be useful.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Full and short author lists}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\fullcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullciteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullciteauthorNP}
+When citing a work with one or two authors, all authors are included
+in each citation. When citing a work with six or more authors, only
+the first author's name is included in the text, followed by
+``et al.\hbox{}''. With three to five authors, the full list is
+included the first time the work is cited, and only the first with
+``et al.\hbox{}'' in subsequent citations.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\shortcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortciteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortciteauthorNP}
+There are some special cases, where some of the authors and the year
+are the same, but not the whole author list, in which more names are
+retained on subsequent citations as well. Section~\ref{sec:xmpl}
+includes some examples of complex situations and how to deal with
+them. All of this is automatically handled by \pkg{apacite}.
+
+However, occasionally one may want to use the full
+author list even after a first citation, or the short author list in
+the first citation. For such (rare) cases, \pkg{apacite} provides
+``full'' and ``short'' versions of all citation commands that include
+an author (list) in the text. Other than forcing the full or short
+author list in the text, these commands are identical to the versions
+without ``|full|'' or ``|short|''.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Masked citations}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteauthorNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteyear}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteyearNP}
+Many journals use a ``masked'' or double-blind review process, in
+which the identities of the authors are concealed from the reviewers.
+As the APA manual states (p.~226), it is the responsibility of the
+authors to ensure that the content of the manuscript does not reveal
+their identities. This may include suppressing citations to other
+work by the authors, in particular unpublished material, such as
+the working paper version of the manuscript under review. To this
+end, the \pkg{apa6} class introduced ``masked'' citation commands,
+which produce the desired citation for the unmasked mode, but
+insert a message stating that citations have been masked in masked
+mode. Because these are citation commands, they are more properly
+included in \pkg{apacite}, and they now are. I am coordinating with
+\pkg{apa6}'s author Brian Beitzel on this issue (and other points
+of interaction between \pkg{apa6} and \pkg{apacite}).
+
+\DescribeMacro{\maskfullcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskfullciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskfullciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskfullciteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskfullciteauthorNP}
+All the citation commands introduced in this section have a
+corresponding masked version, which has the same syntax and the same
+name, except that ``|mask|'' is inserted immediately after the
+backslash. Thus, the masked version of \cmd{\cite} is \cmd{\maskcite},
+the masked version of \cmd{\fullciteauthorNP} is
+\cmd{\maskfullciteauthorNP}, and so forth.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\maskshortcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskshortciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskshortciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskshortciteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskshortciteauthorNP}
+When \pkg{apacite} is loaded with the \pkgoption{mask} option, these
+masked citation commands insert the message
+``\emph{(1\ citation removed for masked review)}'', or
+``\emph{(2\ citations removed for masked review)}'', and so forth,
+depending on the number of citations included in the citation
+command. When \pkg{apacite} is loaded with the \pkgoption{unmask}
+option (the default), the masked citation commands are equivalent
+to the same commands without the ``|mask|''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\masknocite}
+\DescribeMacro{\masktext}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\maskcitations}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\unmaskcitations}
+In addition to the masked citation commands, \pkg{apacite} also
+provides \cmd{\masknocite}, although its usefulness seems even more
+remote than \cmd{\nocite} itself in APA style documents. Because
+\cmd{\nocite} does not insert a citation, \cmd{\masknocite} does
+not remove citations in \pkgoption{mask} mode. It only prevents an
+entry in the reference list. Therefore, this command does not
+insert a message about removed citations in the text either. Hence,
+it does nothing in \pkgoption{mask} mode. An additional command
+provided by \pkg{apacite} is \cmd{\masktext}. This has one mandatory
+argument, the text that is to be masked. It also has an optional
+argument, which is the text to be inserted in \pkgoption{mask} mode.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Ad-hoc citation commands}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In order to format the examples from the APA manual correctly in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, the \fname{apacdoc.sty} package defines the
+following additional citation commands: \cmd{\DSMcite},
+\cmd{\biblecite}, and \cmd{\citesong}, and obvious variations with
+|full|, |short|, |A|, and |NP|. I have decided not to include these
+in \fname{apacite.sty}, primarily because I find it unattractive to
+introduce different types of citation commands for different types of
+citations. This also makes it more difficult to use the same document
+with another citation package. Perhaps I'll be able to provide,
+in a future version of \pkg{apacite}, more elegant solutions to the
+problems for which these commands were defined. See
+section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for a description of the \fname{apacdoc.sty}
+package and some brief usage instructions.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Using \pkg{natbib} for citations}
+\label{sec:natbibapa}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+With the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option, \pkg{apacite} loads \pkg{natbib}
+with the options \pkgoption{longnamesfirst} and \pkgoption{sort}. The
+former inserts the full author lists in the first citation and the
+short author lists in subsequent citations, in the same way the
+\pkgoption{apaciteclassic} commands do. The \pkgoption{sort} option
+sorts the citations within the same citation command in the same order
+as in the reference list, as required by the APA manual (p.~178).
+In addition to loading \pkg{natbib}, \pkg{apacite} includes some
+code to improve the interoperability, and it defines some additional
+commands that are specific to the \pkg{natbib}-\pkg{apacite}
+combination. The latter will be described below.
+
+Because the citation commands are defined by \pkg{natbib}, this is
+not the place for extensive documentation of them. See the \pkg{natbib}
+documentation. However, for completeness, I provide very brief
+information here. Table~\ref{tab:natbibapa} lists the commands and
+a brief description.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{table}[tp]
+\centering
+\caption{The \pkg{natbib} citation commands.}
+\label{tab:natbibapa}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+\hline
+Command & Description \\
+\hline
+\cmd{\citep} & Parenthetical citation \\
+\cmd{\citet} & Text citation \\
+\cmd{\citeauthor} & Author only (text citation) \\
+\cmd{\citeyear} & Year only (no parentheses) \\
+\cmd{\citeyearpar} & Year citation (with parentheses) \\
+\cmd{\citealp} & Parenthetical citation without the parentheses \\
+\cmd{\citealt} & Text citation without the parentheses \\
+\cmd{\citenum} & Number of the reference \\
+\cmd{\nocite} & No citation, only reference list entry \\
+\cmd{\Citep} etc. & Capitalized citation \\
+\cmd{\citep*} etc. & Full author lists \\
+\cmd{\shortcites} & Short author lists \\
+\cmd{\defcitealias} & Define alias (e.g., \emph{DSM-IV}) \\
+\cmd{\citepalias} & Parenthetical citation of alias \\
+\cmd{\citetalias} & Text citation of alias \\
+\cmd{\citetext} & Arbitrary text within citation parentheses \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Compared to the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} commands,
+the \pkg{natbib} commands use square brackets for both the prefix and
+the postfix: ``|\command[prefix][postfix]{keys}|''. If only one
+optional argument is present, it is interpreted as a postfix. A
+citation with only a prefix is obtained by using both optional
+arguments, but leaving the postfix empty:
+``|\command[prefix][]{keys}|''. The full author list is obtained
+by adding a star after the command, for example, |\citet*{key}|.
+There is no separate command for the short author list, but it can
+be obtained with the construction |\shortcites{key}\citet{key}|.
+The first letter of the author list is capitalized with citation
+commands that capitalize the first letter of the citation command,
+such as \cmd{\Citet}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Filling some gaps and other additions}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\citeauthorp}
+\DescribeMacro{\citeauthort}
+\DescribeMacro{\Citeauthorp}
+\DescribeMacro{\Citeauthort}
+As mentioned in section~\ref{sec:classic}, the APA requires that
+``and'' between authors is ``and'' in text citations and ``\&'' in
+parenthetical citations, and therefore the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic}
+option defines two author-citing commands: \cmd{\citeauthor} for
+text citations and \cmd{\citeauthorNP} for parenthetical citations.
+However, \pkg{natbib} only provides \cmd{\citeauthor}. For
+consistency with \cmd{\citep} and \cmd{\citet}, when loaded with the
+\pkgoption{natbibapa} option, \pkg{apacite} defines
+\cmd{\citeauthorp} for parenthetical use and \cmd{\citeauthort} for
+text use, and the corresponding capitalized versions \cmd{\Citeauthorp}
+and \cmd{\Citeauthort}. The default command \cmd{\citeauthor} is a
+text citation command, so it's equivalent to \cmd{\citeauthort}.
+
+%% \DescribeMacro{\citefullauthorp}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\citefullauthort}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\Citefullauthorp}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\Citefullauthort}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bibstyle@apacite}
+\DescribeMacro{\bibstyle@apa}
+The \pkg{natbib} package is also highly customizable, and one of
+the ways it allows customization is by the \cmd{\bibstyle@xxx}
+commands, which typically define the desired punctuation through
+\cmd{\bibpunct} and may define other customizations. These are
+executed by using the command |\citestyle{xxx}|. Furthermore, when
+\pkg{natbib} is loaded, it checks the bibliography style and if it
+is \fname{xxx.bst}, then it tries to execute |\citestyle{xxx}| if
+defined. With the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option, \pkg{apacite}
+defines \cmd{\bibstyle@apacite}, and as a synonym, \cmd{\bibstyle@apa}.
+Thus, the APA punctuation defaults can be obtained with
+|\citestyle{apacite}| or |\citestyle{apa}|, which are executed
+by \pkg{apacite}, so the user only needs to do this if the style
+has been changed.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitep}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitet}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteyear}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteyearpar}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Masked citations}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitealp}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitealt}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitenum}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitetalias}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskcitepalias}
+Section~\ref{sec:classic} described masked citation commands that
+can be used in double-blind review processes in an effort to conceal
+the identity of the authors. Because \pkg{natbib} itself does not
+define such commands, \pkg{apacite} with the \pkgoption{natbibapa}
+option defines a full set of \pkg{natbib}-style masked citation
+commands. Again, these are identical to the un-|mask| version if
+the \pkgoption{mask} option is not requested, but insert a message
+about removed citations when the \pkgoption{mask} option is requested.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCitep}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCitet}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCiteauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCitealp}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCitealt}
+%% The |\mbox{}| is necessary to avoid errors about too many
+%% unprocessed floats. This gives some ugly vertical whitespace, but
+%% the only alternative would be to write some superfluous paragraphs,
+%% which is equally unattractive.
+\mbox{}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteauthorp}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskciteauthort}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCiteauthorp}
+\DescribeMacro{\maskCiteauthort}
+\DescribeMacro{\masknocite}
+\DescribeMacro{\masktext}
+\mbox{}
+
+%% \DescribeMacro{\maskcite}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\maskcitefullauthor}
+%% \DescribeMacro{\maskCitefullauthor}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Contents of the bibliography database file}
+\label{sec:bib}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The information that is used by \LaTeX/\BibTeX{} to generate
+the citations and reference list must be stored by the user in one
+or more files with the \fname{.bib} extension.
+A detailed overview of the contents of the \fname{.bib} file is
+given in \citeA[section~12.2]{KoDa04} and \citeA[section~13.2]{TLC2}.
+Roughly speaking, the
+\fname{.bib} file consists of a collection of \emph{entries}
+of the form
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{contents}\verb+}+
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+Most entries describe a work that may be referenced, e.g., a book
+or article. There are, however, two exceptions: a \entryname{preamble}
+entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+preamble+) and a \entryname{string}
+entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+string+). There is typically
+at most one \entryname{preamble} entry. Its \opt{contents} consist of a
+string---according to \BibTeX, i.e., between double quotes (\verb+"+)
+or an additional pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). This
+string, which typically consists of \LaTeX{} commands like
+\verb+\newcommand{\SortNoop}[1]{}+, is literally included
+in the document before the bibliography. It can therefore be used
+to define commands that are used in the (other) entries of the
+\fname{.bib} file and that are not standard \LaTeX{}.
+
+A \entryname{string} entry is similar, but the contents are now not
+included in the document. Instead, the string is assigned to a kind of
+``variable'', the name of which may contain characters
+not usually associated with variable names, like colons and
+hyphens, see \citeA[p.~769]{TLC2}. An example of a
+\entryname{string} entry is
+\begin{verbatim}
+@string{ JPSP = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} }
+\end{verbatim}
+Then, if in a later entry, the journal is
+\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, you can format this
+as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ journal = JPSP,
+\end{verbatim}
+instead of the usual
+\begin{verbatim}
+ journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+\end{verbatim}
+This is not only convenient because it saves typing of common
+long journal names (and reduces the likelihood of typos), but it can
+also be used to define style-specific variations. For example, some
+styles abbreviate journal names, such as
+\emph{J.~Pers.\ Soc.\ Psych.}\hbox{} instead of
+\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}.
+You could then put the definitions of all full journal names
+in one \fname{.bib} file (\fname{fulljou.bib}, say) and the definitions
+of the abbreviated journal names in another (\fname{abbrjou.bib}, say).
+Suppose that the information about the referenced works is stored in a
+third file, say, \fname{myrefs.bib}, and that the ``NotAPA''
+style rules, implemented in the \fname{notapa.bst} \BibTeX{} style file,
+require the abbreviated journal names. Then you can use
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{notapa}
+\bibliography{abbrjou,myrefs}
+\end{verbatim}
+to obtain a reference list complying with the ``NotAPA'' rules. If
+you change your mind and decide to switch to using the rules of the
+APA manual, you only need to change the two lines above into
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{apacite}
+\bibliography{fulljou,myrefs}
+\end{verbatim}
+(and additionally load the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package
+through \cmd{\usepackage}).
+
+The remaining entry types are types that correspond with the
+type of a referenced work, e.g., \entryname{book} or
+\entryname{article}. These entry types (reference types) are
+discussed in section~\ref{subsec:types} below.
+Such entries have the following structure:
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{key}\verb+,+\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname1}\verb+ = +\opt{value1}\verb+,+\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname2}\verb+ = +\opt{value2}\verb+,+\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\vdots$\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldnameN}\verb+ = +\opt{valueN}\verb+,+\\
+\verb+}+
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+where \opt{key} corresponds to the key used in the citation
+commands and matches the entry with the citation (and should
+therefore be unique). The fieldnames are \verb+author+, \verb+year+,
+etc., which are described in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below.
+The values are strings, either defined previously by a
+\entryname{string} entry or explicitly indicated as such here
+by putting the relevant information between double quotes
+(\verb+"+) or a pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+).
+
+To be able to obey the rules of the APA manual, \pkg{apacite}
+provides several fields and reference types that are not
+described in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation
+\cite<e.g.,>[Chapter~13]{TLC2}. Furthermore,
+the meaning and usage of many fields and reference types that
+\emph{are} described there have been altered somewhat. Therefore,
+a complete description is given here.
+The symbol \LC{} will be used to indicate that the field or
+reference type is also described in \citeA[Appendix~B]{LaTeXbook},
+\citeA[Chapter~12]{KoDa04}, or \citeA[Chapter~13]{TLC2}, although, as
+mentioned above, the specific meaning of the item may have been
+changed.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Types of references}
+\label{subsec:types}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In this section, the list of reference types that are recognized by
+\pkg{apacite} is given. An overview of which fields can be used for which
+reference type is given in Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. If fields are not
+relevant, but you use them anyway in your \fname{.bib} file, they are ignored.
+The fields and their use are described in more detail in
+section~\ref{subsec:fields}, but here some specific issues will already be
+mentioned.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{table}[p]
+\centering
+\caption{List of fields that are used by the various reference types
+ (blank = not used; \X{} = used;
+ \Y{} = used, but only for citations; \A{} = only used by
+ \pkg{apacann} and \pkg{apacannx}).}
+\label{tab:fieldref}
+\small
+\makebox[0pt]{% some manipulation to squeeze the table onto the page
+\newlength{\oldtabcolsep}
+\setlength{\oldtabcolsep}{\tabcolsep}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}cccccccccc@{}}
+\hline
+ & \multicolumn{10}{c}{Reference type}\\
+ \cline{2-11}
+%
+% Normally, I would use the sideways environment of the rotating
+% package to format this nicely, but I do not want to require
+% other packages to format this document, so I choose an uglier
+% solution here.
+%
+ & article\\
+ & magazine & & & & &
+ & phdthesis
+ &
+ & manual\\
+Field
+ & newspaper & book & incollection & techreport & intechreport & lecture
+ & mastersthesis
+ & unpublished
+ & misc
+ & literal\\
+\hline
+address & &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+annote &\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A\\
+annotate &\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A\\
+author &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+booktitle & & &\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+chair & & & & & &\X& & & & \\
+chapter & & &\X& & & & & & & \\
+day &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X& \\
+doi &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X\\
+edition & &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X& &\X& \\
+editor &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& & &\X&\X& \\
+englishtitle &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+firstkey &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+howpublished &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+institution & & & &\X&\X& & & & & \\
+journal &\X& & & & & &\X& & & \\
+key &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+lastchecked &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+month &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X& \\
+note &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+number &\X&\X& &\X&\X& &\X&\X&\X& \\
+organization & & & & & & & &\X& & \\
+originaladdress &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originalbooktitle &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originaledition &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originaleditor &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originaljournal &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originalnumber &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originalpages &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originalpublisher &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originalvolume &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\
+originalyear &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+pages &\X& &\X& &\X& &\X& & & \\
+publisher & &\X&\X& & & & & &\X& \\
+school & & & & & & &\X& & & \\
+series & & & & & & & & & & \\
+symposium & & & & & &\X& & & & \\
+text & & & & & & & & & &\X\\
+title &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+translator &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+type &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+url &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+urldate &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\
+volume &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X& &\X& \\
+year &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\Y\\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}%
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{\oldtabcolsep}
+}
+%
+\end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+The following entry types (reference types) are defined in \pkg{apacite}:
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\entryname{article}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ A journal article or comparable. If the
+ ``article'' referenced to is a special issue of a journal or
+ something else that has editors instead of authors, the
+ \fieldname{author} field should be empty and the \fieldname{editor}
+ field should be used for the editors. If the journal paginates
+ by issue instead of by volume, or when you are referring to a
+ whole special issue, the issue number should be given
+ in the \fieldname{number} field. In all other cases (including
+ referring to an article within a special issue), the
+ \fieldname{number} field must not be used. The \fieldname{type}
+ field can be used to denote the type of article, for example,
+ ``\verb+Letter to the editor+'', or
+ ``\verb+Review of the book \emph{Life in the middle}+''.
+
+ \item[\entryname{magazine}] \mbox{}\\
+ A magazine article. Unlike in early versions of \pkg{apacite},
+ this is now equivalent to \entryname{article}. However, with
+ an \entryname{article}, the \fieldname{month} and \fieldname{day}
+ fields should generally not be used, unless there is a compelling
+ reason to use them. For a magazine, the \fieldname{month}, and
+ \fieldname{day} (for weeklies) fields are commonly used.
+
+ \item[\entryname{newspaper}] \mbox{}\\
+ A newspaper article. This is similar to \entryname{article} and
+ \fieldname{magazine}, except that the pages are formatted a little
+ different, with ``pp.~23--49'' instead of just ``23--49''.
+
+ \item[\entryname{book}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ An entire book. The \fieldname{type} field can be used
+ to denote a specific type of item (so generally not strictly
+ a book), e.g., ``\verb+Brochure+''. Similarly, the
+ \fieldname{number} field can be used if this is considered
+ useful. (It is used in example 24 in the APA manual, see
+ below.) This seems quite rare to me, however. It should
+ certainly \emph{not} be used for ISBN numbers and the like.
+
+ \item[\entryname{incollection}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ An article in a (usually edited) book, or other kind of larger
+ work, except a report, for which the \entryname{intechreport}
+ entry is used. The \fieldname{booktitle} field contains the
+ title of the whole collection (book). The \fieldname{type}
+ field is currently used to denote the type of article, as
+ with the \entryname{article} reference type, although in some
+ cases, it may be more naturally to let the \fieldname{type}
+ field contain the type of the whole work (e.g., CD). Therefore,
+ I may change this somewhat in future versions of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+ \item[\entryname{techreport}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ A report. This may be a ``technical'' report such as published
+ by universities, or a report from government organizations or
+ private companies. The \fieldname{type} field can be used to
+ indicate what kind of report it is, e.g.,
+ ``\verb+College Board Rep.+'' or ``\verb+{DHHS} Publication+''.
+ If the \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type
+ ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}+'' is used. (The \verb+\hbox{}+
+ ensures that \TeX{} does not view the period as the end of a
+ sentence, which would insert too much space.) If no type
+ description should
+ be given, \verb+\bibnotype+ should be used as the contents of
+ the \fieldname{type} field. The \fieldname{number} field can
+ be used to give the report number. The organization that
+ published the report should be given in the \fieldname{institution}
+ field.
+
+ \item[\entryname{intechreport}] \mbox{}\\
+ An article in a (usually edited) report. This is more or less
+ a combination of \entryname{incollection} and
+ \entryname{techreport}. It uses the same fields as the former
+ to describe the article itself, except \fieldname{type}, e.g.,
+ \fieldname{booktitle}, which is in this case the title of the
+ entire report,
+ and the same fields as the latter to describe the report.
+ In particular, the \fieldname{type}, \fieldname{number},
+ and \fieldname{institution} fields are used for the report.
+
+ \item[\entryname{lecture}] \mbox{}\\
+ A paper presented at a meeting. According to the APA manual,
+ the year and month should be given, but \pkg{apacite} also
+ uses the \fieldname{day} field when available.
+ The \fieldname{symposium} field can be used for the
+ name of the symposium and the \fieldname{chair} field for the chair of
+ the meeting. The \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used to
+ indicate the occasion at which the paper was presented if the
+ \fieldname{symposium} field is empty, e.g.,
+ ``\texttt{Paper presented at the meeting of the American
+ Professional Society on the Abuse of Children}''.
+ It can also be used to give additional information about
+ the symposium if the \fieldname{symposium} field is not empty.
+
+ \item[\entryname{phdthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ A doctoral dissertation. The \fieldname{school} field is used
+ to denote the university for which the thesis was written.
+ The \fieldname{type} field can be used for the thesis type,
+ e.g., ``\verb+PhD thesis+''. If it is empty, the default type
+ is used, which is ``\verb+Unpublished doctoral dissertation+''
+ or ``\verb+Doctoral dissertation+'', depending on whether
+ the \fieldname{journal} field is empty or not.
+
+ If the thesis is abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts
+ International} or similar, then the \fieldname{journal},
+ \fieldname{volume}, \fieldname{number}, and \fieldname{pages} fields
+ can be used as with journal articles. The \fieldname{year} field
+ should denote the year of the ``journal''.
+ The \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year
+ of the original thesis, even if it is the same as the year of the
+ abstract, provided that the original thesis is used, and not
+ the abstract. Then, the \fieldname{school} field should also
+ be used, and optionally the \fieldname{type} field. If only
+ the abstract is used, it should presumably be treated as a
+ journal article.
+
+
+ \item[\entryname{mastersthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ This is equivalent to the \entryname{phdthesis} type, except that
+ the default ``unpublished'' and ``published'' \fieldname{type}s are
+ ``\verb+Unpublished master's thesis+'' and
+ ``\verb+Master's thesis+''.
+
+ \item[\entryname{unpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ For unpublished manuscripts and similarly ``obscure'' material.
+ The \fieldname{howpublished} field will typically be used to
+ indicate what kind of work is referred to (e.g.,
+ ``\verb+Unpublished manuscript+''). The \fieldname{organization}
+ field can be used to denote the organization in which the document
+ was produced, e.g., ``\texttt{Johns Hopkins University, Center
+ for Social Organization of Schools}''. Note that the larger
+ organization should be given first and the department after that.
+ The address (city and state, etc., see the discussion of the
+ \fieldname{address} field in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below)
+ of the organization should be given in the \fieldname{address}
+ field, unless it is already mentioned in the name of the
+ organization. Presumably, if the organization is
+ ``\verb+University of Groningen+'', the city name ``Groningen''
+ should not be given in the \fieldname{address} field, but
+ the country ``The Netherlands'' should. When both the
+ \fieldname{organization} and the \fieldname{address} field
+ are available, \pkg{apacite} formats these as
+ ``organization, address''. This is different from the
+ usual ``address: publisher'' form. This behavior cannot
+ explicitly be deduced from the 5th edition, nor from the
+ 4th edition, of the APA manual, but the 3rd edition
+ \cite{APAManual3} gives an explicit example (example 53,
+ p.~131): \citeA{APA-3rd-ed-ex53}.
+
+ \item[\entryname{misc}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ For works that do not fit into the other categories, such as
+ motion pictures, cassette recordings, computer software, etc.
+ The \fieldname{type} field can be used to indicate the type
+ of work, and \pkg{apacite} recognizes a few specific types
+ that should be formatted a little differently, see the discussion
+ of the \fieldname{type} field below. If the \fieldname{address}
+ and \fieldname{publisher} fields are available, the address and
+ publisher part is formatted as with books. The \entryname{unpublished}
+ and \entryname{misc} types are very similar, but there are some
+ differences. For example, \entryname{unpublished} uses the
+ \entryname{organization} field and \entryname{misc} uses the
+ \fieldname{publisher} field, and this part is formatted differently.
+ Further, the \entryname{unpublished} type requires
+ \fieldname{author}, \fieldname{editor}, \fieldname{title}, or
+ \fieldname{type}, whereas with \fieldname{misc},
+ \fieldname{howpublished} takes the first position if these fields
+ are all empty. Finally, as briefly indicated above and discussed
+ in more detail below, \entryname{misc} recognizes some special
+ types in the \fieldname{type} field.
+
+ \item[\entryname{literal}] \mbox{}\\
+ If the other categories do not format the item correctly, this
+ category can be used. The \fieldname{text} field is copied literally
+ to the bibliography. The \fieldname{firstkey}, \fieldname{key},
+ \fieldname{year}, and possibly \fieldname{originalyear} and
+ \fieldname{translator} fields are necessary to get correct
+ in-text citations. However, I have never needed to use this
+ entry type and I think that \entryname{misc} should also
+ be able to format the entry correctly. Furthermore, the
+ correct placement of \entryname{literal} references in the
+ reference list (alphabetizing, sorting), may be problematic.
+
+ \item[\entryname{manual}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ This is treated as a \entryname{misc}, except that when the
+ \fieldname{type} field is empty, it is assumed to be a
+ \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}. See also the description of
+ the \fieldname{type} field below.
+
+ \item[\entryname{booklet}\LC]
+ \item[\entryname{inbook}\LC]
+ \item[\entryname{inproceedings}\LC]
+ \item[\entryname{proceedings}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ These categories are defined by all standard citation styles. They
+ are, however, not needed for the examples in the APA manual. For
+ compatibility, however, they are included and defined as follows:
+ \entryname{booklet} = \entryname{proceedings} =
+ \entryname{misc}; \entryname{inbook} = \entryname{inproceedings} =
+ \entryname{incollection}. \citeA[p.~230]{KoDa04} also mention
+ \entryname{conference} as being the same as \entryname{inproceedings};
+ for compatibility, this is now supported in \pkg{apacite}.
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Fields}
+\label{subsec:fields}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the
+\fname{.bib} file:
+\begin{description}
+
+ \item[\fieldname{address}\LC] \mbox{}\\%
+ The address (usually the city and state or country) of the
+ publisher, school, institution, or organization that published
+ the item or at which the item was produced. The APA manual
+ requires that the state or territory of a U.S.-city must be given
+ in the official two-letter U.S. Postal Services form.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC]
+ \item[\fieldname{annotate}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ These are used with the \pkg{apacann} and \pkg{apacannx} bibliography
+ styles to generate annotated bibliographies, see
+ section~\ref{sec:annotate}. They are simply ignored without warning by
+ the \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{apacitex} bibliography styles.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{author}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The author(s) of the work. This may also be a corporate
+ author when applicable, but some specific measures must
+ then be taken to prevent the corporate name from being
+ interpreted as a first name and last name
+ (such as ``Association, A. P.''):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ It is important to surround the \cmd{\bibcorporate}\marg{Author}
+ by an additional pair of braces. Otherwise, \BibTeX{} sorts
+ the entry as if its name was ``Bibcorporate\marg{Author}''.
+ Section~\ref{sec:xmpl} contains more examples.
+
+ As discussed in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation,
+ multiple authors must be separated by the word \verb+and+,
+ and each author's name can either be given in the form
+ ``\opt{firstnames}\verb+ +\opt{lastnames}'' or
+ ``\opt{lastnames}\verb+, +\opt{firstnames}''. However,
+ ``von'' parts and ``junior'' parts complicate issues
+ a bit. See the examples and the discussion of them.
+
+ I would generally give the full first name(s) in the \fname{.bib}
+ file, even though the APA manual only requires initials,
+ because other styles require full first name(s) and
+ \pkg{apacite} abbreviates to initials automatically.
+ I have done this only occasionally with the examples,
+ because the APA manual only gives the initials.
+ Therefore, I have only provided first names with a few
+ examples for which I knew the authors' first names.
+
+ Previous versions of the APA manual required that, if there
+ are more than six authors, only the first six should be named
+ in the reference list, followed by ``et al.'', which allowed
+ one to include only the first six plus ``|and others|'' in the
+ \fname{.bib} file. In the 6th edition, however, the APA changed
+ this. Now, when there are up to seven authors, they should
+ all be listed, but with eight or more, the first six should
+ be listed, plus dots (\ldots), plus the last author. Therefore,
+ ``|and others|'' should not be used anymore in the \fname{.bib}
+ file. (It was already discouraged in earlier versions of the
+ \pkg{apacite} documentation.) Thus, one should list all authors
+ in the \fname{.bib} file.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{booktitle}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The title of the larger work, typically book, but sometimes
+ something else, like a report, in which the referenced item
+ (article) was published.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{chair}] \mbox{}\\
+ The chair(s) of a symposium or meeting. Used for lectures.
+ It is formatted the same way as editors.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{chapter}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The chapter number if the referenced item is a chapter in
+ a larger collection. Typically used if the referenced work
+ is a chapter in an internet document. If the collection is
+ a book, page numbers (in the \fieldname{pages} field)
+ should be used instead according to the APA rules.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{crossref}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The \pkg{apacite} package does not recognize this field,
+ because the APA manual does not discuss explicit
+ cross-referencing. If the referenced work is a chapter
+ (article) in an edited book, all relevant information
+ should be given in the reference list as part of the
+ information about the referenced chapter, not as, e.g.,
+ ``In Wainrib (1992)''. If several chapters from the
+ book edited by Wainrib are referenced, the same information
+ about this book is given with each referenced chapter,
+ and the work itself is not a separate entry in the reference
+ list (unless it is explicitly referred to).
+
+ However, the \fieldname{crossref} field
+ \emph{can} be used, as part of standard \BibTeX{} usage.
+ Missing fields for the referenced work are then copied from
+ the cross-referenced entry, which must come \emph{after}
+ the referring entry in the \fname{.bib} file. If you use
+ this, remember to put the title of the book (also) in the
+ \fieldname{booktitle} field, because the \fieldname{title}
+ field of the referring entry is not empty (it contains
+ the chapter title).
+
+ I have not tested cross-referencing in detail, so I do not
+ know whether it behaves well (i.e., complies with the implicit
+ or explicit APA rules) under various circumstances.
+ Therefore, I do not recommend using it without thorough
+ testing.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{day}] \mbox{}\\
+ The day of the month on which the referenced item was published,
+ produced, or presented. Mainly used for articles in daily or
+ weekly magazines or newspapers, for lectures (although the
+ APA manual only specifies the month), and electronic documents.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{doi}] \mbox{}\\
+ Digital object identifier (DOI). The 6th edition of the APA manual
+ asks authors to supply this whenever available.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{edition}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The edition of the book or report. Traditionally, this is of the
+ form ``1st'', ``2nd'', ``3rd'', etc., or ``Rev.'' for a revised edition.
+ This form is still supported, but \pkg{apacite} now also supports
+ the form in which only the number is given: ``1'', ``2'', etc.
+ If \pkg{apacite} detects that only a number is given, it inserts
+ ``\cmd{\PrintOrdinal}\marg{number}'' in the \fname{.bbl} file.
+ This \LaTeX{} function converts the number again to ``1st'', etc.
+ The advantage of this is that the same bibliography database can be
+ used for documents in different languages: In the language-specific
+ (\fname{.apc}) files supplied with \pkg{apacite},
+ \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} is redefined according to the document
+ language.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{editor}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The editor(s) of a book, report, or special issue of a journal.
+ In the examples, this field is also ``misused'' for the
+ producer of a television series.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{englishtitle}] \mbox{}\\
+ The English translation of the title of an item with a non-English
+ title. The APA manual requires that if the referenced work has a
+ non-English title, an English translation should be given as well. For
+ an article in a journal with a non-English name or in a book with a
+ non-English title, the journal name or book title should not be
+ translated or put in this field, only the title of the referenced work
+ itself must be translated. Because, as of version
+ \APACversiondate{2005/06/01}, \pkg{apacite} contains some support of
+ other languages for the main document (see
+ section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}), this field needs rethinking, which
+ will be deferred to a future version (but, as always, suggestions
+ are welcome).
+
+ \item[\fieldname{firstkey}] \mbox{}\\
+ The \fieldname{firstkey} field, if not empty, is used as
+ ``author'' for the first citation to an item. Subsequent citations
+ then use the \fieldname{key} field. This can be used if there is
+ no author or editor field that can be used for citations, or in
+ certain cases with corporate authors, where the citation in the
+ text uses an abbreviation of the author's name for second and
+ subsequent citations, where the abbreviation is introduced in the
+ first citation. It can also be used to ``trick'' the system
+ in difficult cases. See also \fieldname{key}.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{howpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ A description of how something was ``published''. For example,
+ ``Unpublished manuscript'' or ``Paper presented at the meeting
+ of the American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children''.
+ Also used for more retrieval information about electronic
+ documents, e.g., ``Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the
+ PsycARTICLES database'', or
+\begin{verbatim}
+ howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University,
+ Institute for Learning Technologies Web site:
+ \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/
+ publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ However, if the retrieval information consists only of a
+ date and/or a URL, it is better to use the \fieldname{lastchecked}
+ and \fieldname{url} fields for this and let \pkg{apacite}
+ format this information. See also the \fieldname{note} field
+ for an alternative to the \fieldname{howpublished} field.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{institution}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The institution, university, or company that published a
+ (technical) report.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{journal}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The journal, magazine, newspaper, etc.{} in which an
+ article, a review, or an abstract of a thesis was published.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{key}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ See \fieldname{firstkey}. The \fieldname{key} field, if not
+ empty, is used for second and subsequent citations, or all citations
+ if \fieldname{firstkey} is missing. If \fieldname{author} is
+ empty and \fieldname{editor} is empty or can not be used as
+ author (e.g., in \entryname{incollection}), the \fieldname{key}
+ field may be necessary to obtain a useful citation. This is
+ so, because the APA manual requires an abbreviation of the
+ title as in-text citation, and the abbreviation must be
+ sensible. In the current version, \pkg{apacite} uses the
+ whole title if \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} are missing.
+ Therefore, if the title is considered too long to use in citations,
+ the user must provide an abbreviation in the \fieldname{key} field.
+ Furthermore, the user must then also define the formatting:
+ If the key is used for a difficult kind of author (e.g.,
+ corporate author), it should be formatted as an author,
+ i.e., in plain text, with names capitalized.
+ If the key is used for an abbreviation of an article
+ title, it should be in plain text, with major words capitalized
+ (unlike in the reference list), and between double quotes
+ (`` and ''; also unlike in the reference list).
+ If the key is used for an abbreviation of a book title, it
+ should be emphasized, with major words capitalized
+ (unlike in the reference list), but not between quotes.
+
+ In a field in the \fname{.bib} file that is also
+ used for the citations, such as the \fieldname{key} field,
+ formatting through, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\itshape Text}},
+ key = {{\em Text\/}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ can be done (note the extra pair of braces!), but the
+ seemingly more logical variations
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {\textit{Text}},
+ key = {{\textit{Text}}},
+ key = {\emph{Text}},
+ key = {{\emph{Text}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ do not work.
+ However, it is generally preferable to use as less explicit
+ formatting in the \fname{.bib} files as possible, because this
+ decreases the possibilities of successfully using the
+ same \fname{.bib} file with other styles. The following works
+ excellent:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Text}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ where the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro recognizes that the argument
+ should be formatted as a booktitle (i.e., in italics according to the
+ APA rules). This macro, and its companion \cmd{\APACciteatitle} for
+ article title formatting, are used by \pkg{apacite} if the
+ \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} fields are missing,
+ but can also be used by the user. Note that if you use such a
+ \fname{.bib} file with another style, you have to provide
+ definitions of these macros yourself (which can be copied from
+ the \pkg{apacite} source code).
+
+ \emph{Warning:} the \fieldname{key} field, which acts
+ as a kind of pseudo-author, should not be confused with the
+ (citation) \opt{key} that is used to match citations with
+ entries in a \fname{.bib} file.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{lastchecked}] \mbox{}\\
+ The date on which a web page was last visited. Only used in
+ combination with the \fieldname{url} field. Currently,
+ \pkg{apacite} does not contain language-specific code to
+ dissect this date, but copies its contents literally to the
+ \fname{.bbl} file. Hence, if you intend to use the same
+ bibliography database for documents in different languages,
+ you may have to use a self-defined command for this. You can
+ use the \pkg{apacite} commands \cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay}
+ and \cmd{\APACmonth} as templates for this. I will probably
+ provide such a facility in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{month}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The month something was published. Mainly used for
+ magazine or newspaper articles, lectures, and electronic documents.
+ Use the month macros \verb+jan+, \verb+feb+, etc. These are
+ predefined strings in the \fname{.bst} files, reverting to
+ ``\verb+{\APACmonth{01}}+'', etc. You can also use the additional
+ macros \verb+winter+, \verb+spring+, \verb+summer+, and \verb+fall+,
+ which the \fname{.bst} files translate into
+ ``\verb+{\APACmonth{13}}+''--``\verb+{\APACmonth{16}}+''.
+ The \cmd{\APACmonth} command translates the numbers to the month or
+ season names. This system allows language-specific behavior at
+ the \LaTeX{} stage.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{note}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ A note. This puts additional information between parentheses
+ at the end of a reference list entry. In the examples from
+ the APA manual, it is used for NTIS No., ERIC No., and UMI No.,
+ and for notes about how to obtain the work
+ (``Available from \opt{organization}, \opt{full address}'').
+ If however, the work has been obtained from the internet
+ or from an ``aggregated database'', then the
+ \fieldname{howpublished} or \fieldname{url} field should be
+ used, because it should not be between parentheses then.
+
+ Finally, the \fieldname{note} field is used to give the
+ recording date (i.e., year) of a song when this is different
+ from the date (year) of copyright. The latter should be
+ put in the \fieldname{year} field.
+
+ Do not use the \fieldname{note} field to denote the original
+ publication of a reprint or translation, because the
+ \fieldname{originalyear} field must be used in those cases to
+ obtain the correct citation in the text \cite<e.g.,>{ex39}.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{number}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The number of a journal issue or a report. This can be quite
+ complex, for example, ``\verb+PRM~92-01+'', or
+ ``\verb+3, Pt.~2+'', or ``\verb+1, Serial No.~231+''.
+ These latter examples imply that the generality (language and
+ style independence) of the \fname{.bib} file is somewhat lost.
+ Furthermore, if the journal paginates by year and not by issue,
+ the issue number should not be mentioned at all (except when
+ referring to a whole special issue). Of course, \pkg{apacite}
+ does not know whether the journal paginates by issue or by year.
+ If the \fieldname{number} field is available, \pkg{apacite}
+ simply assumes that it should be included. It is the user's
+ responsibility to ensure that this is indeed the case.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{organization}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ Used for the \entryname{unpublished} reference type to denote
+ the organization in which the unpublished work was produced.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{originaladdress}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originalbooktitle}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originaledition}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originaleditor}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originaljournal}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originalnumber}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originalpages}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originalpublisher}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originalvolume}]
+ \item[\fieldname{originalyear}] \mbox{}\\
+ These (\fieldname{original*-}) fields have the same
+ meaning as their counterparts without the ``original'' prefix,
+ except that they refer to the book or journal in which the
+ work was originally published. This can be used in referring to
+ translations or reprints of articles in journals or books. If the
+ original work is a book or other ``standalone'' work,
+ only the \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used. If the
+ original work is a (PhD or Master's) thesis that is also abstracted
+ in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International},
+ \emph{Masters Abstracts International}, or comparable, the
+ \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year
+ of the dissertation and the \fieldname{year} field to
+ denote the year of publication of the abstract, even if they
+ are the same.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{pages}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The (inclusive) page numbers of the article that is referred to,
+ in the journal or book in which it was published. If a range of
+ pages is given (which is usually the case), an en-dash should
+ be used: ``\verb+29--43+''. Other styles sometimes allow a
+ single hyphen (``\verb+29-43+''), which is then automatically
+ formatted as an en-dash (``29--43''), rather than as a hyphen
+ (``29-43''), but I have encountered situations, such as software
+ manuals (LISREL) and reports for the U.S. Government, in which
+ the page number was of the form ``II-3'',
+ meaning page~3 of chapter~2. In such a situation, you may
+ get page numbers like ``II-1--II-15'', where the distinction
+ between a hyphen and an en-dash becomes important. Therefore,
+ \pkg{apacite} does not perform such automatic transformations.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{publisher}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The publisher of the item. Primarily used for books.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{school}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The school or university for which a PhD thesis or
+ master's thesis was written.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{series}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ Not used, although the APA manual has a rule for series.
+ If you refer to a volume in a series, the series title,
+ volume number, and volume title should be joined into
+ a two-part title , e.g., \emph{Handbook of child psychology:
+ Vol.~4. Socialization, personality, and social development},
+ see ex.~36. In \pkg{apacite} this whole part must be put in
+ the \fieldname{title} or \fieldname{booktitle} field
+ (whichever is appropriate).
+
+ For a long time, I have intended to support the
+ \fieldname{series} field to allow disentangling such
+ situations. However, in the end, I have decided not to
+ do this. The reason for this is that, according to my
+ interpretation, the meaning of ``series'' in the APA manual
+ is quite different from the meaning of the \fieldname{series}
+ field, as intended by Oren Patashnik (the author of \BibTeX{}
+ and the original style files). Many books are published in
+ some sort of series. For example, my book with Tom Wansbeek
+ \cite{WaMe00}, is vol.~37 in the \emph{Advanced Textbooks
+ in Economics} series, of which the series editors are
+ C.~J. Bliss and M.~D. Intriligator. The intention of the
+ \fieldname{series} field is to generate a reference list entry
+ like
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{list}{\relax}{\labelsep=0em%
+ \parsep=0pt%
+ \itemsep=0pt plus .3pt\relax%
+ \leftmargin=2.5em%
+ \itemindent=-2.5em}%
+\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
+\sfcode`\.=1000\relax
+\item
+Wansbeek, T., \& Meijer, E.
+\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em
+(2000).
+\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em
+\Bem{Measurement error and latent variables in econometrics}
+(Advanced Textbooks in Economics No.~37).
+\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em
+Amsterdam: North-Holland.
+\end{list}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ In economics (and often in psychology, I guess), mentioning
+ the series usually does not add much relevant information,
+ and it is therefore typically omitted. I think this is how
+ the APA intends it as well. However, in computer science, it
+ is often very convenient, because certain series, like Springer's
+ \emph{Lecture Notes in Computer Science} (LNCS) have a certain
+ status of their own, and researchers know how to find volumes
+ in this series.
+
+ In my interpretation, the APA ``series'' refers to a single
+ multivolume work with separate editors for the constituent
+ volumes, but with a series editor who initiates the whole
+ series. In the example from the APA manual, the
+ \emph{Handbook of child psychology} is not a loose collection
+ of separate books by different authors, but a combined effort
+ managed by the series editor to give an overview of the field.
+ In this case, the series editor may be considered the primary
+ author and it makes sense to have the different volumes of the
+ series together in the reference list. With my book with
+ Tom Wansbeek, the series editors act more like journal editors,
+ and different volumes of the series are unrelated books that
+ do not need to be gathered together in the reference list.
+ It would make no sense to cite this book as
+ ``Bliss, Intriligator, Wansbeek, \& Meijer (2000)''.
+
+ Because in my interpretation, the usual meaning of the
+ \fieldname{series} field should not be included in the
+ reference list according to the APA rules, \pkg{apacite}
+ ignores the \fieldname{series} field. Perhaps I'll
+ implement the APA manual ``series'' rules by introducing
+ a \fieldname{volumetitle} field, but this will further reduce
+ compatibility with other citation styles.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{symposium}] \mbox{}\\
+ The name of the symposium or meeting at which a
+ lecture was given. This is typically used for the
+ construction ``In \opt{chair} (Chair), \opt{symposium}'',
+ see ex.~51. I have never used it myself, however,
+ I always use the ``Paper presented \dots'' form,
+ which puts this information in the \fieldname{howpublished}
+ field.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{text}] \mbox{}\\
+ Used for items of type \entryname{literal}. This field contains
+ the complete literal text to be used in the bibliography.
+ I've never used it.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{title}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The title of the work.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{translator}] \mbox{}\\
+ The translator of a book or article. This should
+ be formatted in the same way as \fieldname{author} and
+ \fieldname{editor}. If the \fieldname{translator} and
+ \fieldname{editor} fields are identical, they are
+ formatted as if there were only an editor, except that the
+ editor receives the suffix ``(Ed. \& Trans.)'' instead of
+ just ``(Ed.)'', or similarly if there is more than 1 editor.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{type}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The type of \entryname{phdthesis} (e.g.,
+ ``Doctoral dissertation''), type of \entryname{article}
+ (e.g., ``Letter to the editor''), type of \entryname{techreport}
+ (e.g., ``DHHS Publication''), type of \entryname{book}
+ (e.g., ``Brochure''), type of \entryname{misc}
+ (e.g., ``Cassette recording''), and so forth.
+
+ With a review (which is typically an \entryname{article}),
+ the \fieldname{type} field contains a lot of information
+ and formatting, e.g.:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle:
+ Psychological and social development in middle age}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ where I used the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} command introduced above in
+ the discussion of the \fieldname{key} field.
+
+ In one of the APA manual examples, I used the \fieldname{type}
+ field to give a description of the subject of an unpublished
+ raw data file (``Auditory response latencies in rat auditory
+ cortex''), leaving the \fieldname{title} field blank.
+
+ For most reference types, if the \fieldname{type} field
+ is missing, it is simply ignored and no type description
+ is given. For a \entryname{techreport}, however, if the
+ \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type
+ (``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'') is inserted. In ex.~42 of the APA manual,
+ a report without a type description is given. To make it
+ possible to format a report successfully without a
+ type description, \pkg{apacite} recognizes
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {\bibnotype},
+\end{verbatim}
+ indicating that there should be no type description.
+
+ Another special purpose use of the \fieldname{type}
+ field is for a computer program, software, programming
+ language and/or manual. These are put into a \entryname{misc}
+ entry, but unlike other \entryname{misc} types (such as
+ motion pictures) the titles of these types should not
+ be italicized. This is now recognized by \pkg{apacite}
+ in the following way: When referring to a computer program,
+ software, programming language and/or manual, you should
+ use the \entryname{misc} reference type with
+ one of the following commands in the \fieldname{type} field:\\
+ \cmd{\bibcomputerprogram},\\
+ \cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual},\\
+ \cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual},\\
+ \cmd{\bibcomputersoftware},\\
+ \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual},\\
+ \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, or\\
+ \cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}.\\
+ Using any of these commands as type designator of a
+ \entryname{misc} entry ensures that the title is not italicized,
+ as required. The \entryname{manual} entry is now equal to
+ \entryname{misc} with default type \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}
+ if the \fieldname{type} field is empty.
+
+ Similarly, if you refer to a message that has been posted to
+ a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., you should use the
+ \entryname{misc} reference type with \cmd{\bibmessage} as
+ \fieldname{type} field.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{url}] \mbox{}\\
+ The web address of a document. Used if the cited document (or
+ other work) is a website or was obtained from a website. Long
+ web addresses can cause problems, because \BibTeX{} splits long
+ lines (more than 80 characters) in the \fname{.bbl} file and inserts
+ a \TeX{} comment (percent sign). In most situations, this works fine,
+ because the percent sign ``hides'' the line break, which would be
+ processed as an undesired space by \TeX{}. But within the argument of
+ a \cmd{\url} command, a percent sign is copied to the output, because
+ it is a valid character in a URL. To prevent this problem, insert
+ line breaks and/or spaces in the URL in the \fname{.bib} file:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ url = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/
+ 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001.
+ language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow},
+\end{verbatim}
+ Then \BibTeX{} breaks lines at the spaces/line breaks if a line
+ break in the output is considered necessary (but not otherwise).
+ These spaces are suppressed by default in the output, which is usually
+ the desired behavior. But see the \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{url}
+ documentation if you want this differently. Also note that in the
+ \fieldname{url} field, special characters like `|%|'
+ and `|#|' should be entered without a backslash, unlike the normal
+ situation if they would be used in the text.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{urldate}] \mbox{}\\
+ See \fieldname{lastchecked}. This one is apparently defined in the
+ \pkg{jurabib} package. It is unfortunate that different packages define
+ different fields for the same function.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{volume}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The volume or volumes of the referenced book(s) or
+ of the book in which the referenced article was published,
+ or the volume of the journal (magazine, newspaper, \ldots)
+ in which the referenced article was published.
+
+ \item[\fieldname{year}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+ The year in which the referenced item was published, or
+ if it was not published, the year in which it was written
+ or presented. For manuscripts or books that are accepted
+ for publication but have not yet been published, ``in press''
+ should be used according to the APA rules. The best way to do
+ this is to use the ``\cmd{\BIP}'' command, which can be redefined
+ by the user if the language or editorial style requires
+ something else than ``in press''. Furthermore, \cmd{\BIP}
+ is recognized by \pkg{apacite} and treated a little differently,
+ because for multiple ``in press'' references with the same
+ author(s), a hyphen (``-'') should be inserted between the
+ ``year'' (i.e., ``in press'') and the ``a'', ``b'', etc., that
+ follow it to distinguish the works, whereas this hyphen must
+ be omitted if the ``year'' is an ordinary year (1991a, 1991b).
+
+ If no date is explicitly given in (or on) the referenced work,
+ a ``n.d.'' (no date) should be given as year description.
+ For this, \pkg{apacite} supports the \cmd{\bibnodate}
+ command. This sometimes leads to different formatting as well,
+ e.g., by referencing a translation of a work of which there
+ is no original date. Then the \fieldname{originalyear}
+ field should be \cmd{\bibnodate} and the \fieldname{year} field
+ is then, e.g., \verb+1931+. If the \fieldname{translator}
+ field is not empty, the citation in the text is then formatted
+ as, e.g., ``\citeA{3.100-2}''.
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Overriding the default sorting orders}
+\label{subsec:sort}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Occasionally, it may be necessary to override \BibTeX's default sorting.
+For example, the way \BibTeX{} handles accents and other nonstandard
+characters, which is typically fine for documents in English, may
+not be acceptable for documents in other languages:
+``\verb+\"{u}+'' is treated as ``\verb+u+'', ``\verb+\ss+'' is treated as
+``\verb+ss+'', and ``\verb+\ae+'' is treated as ``\verb+ae+''.
+In non-English languages this sorting may not be appropriate and one
+may desire that ``\verb+\"{u}+'' is treated as ``\verb+ue+''.
+Numerous problems are caused by different conventions in different languages.
+Some examples are given in the documentation of the \textsf{amsrefs}
+package. Non-latin scripts (Greek, Hebrew, Arabic, Chinese, etc.) may not be
+handled correctly as well. I am not able to judge this, nor does it seem
+to be a problem that must be solved in \textsf{apacite}. It has been
+announced that \BibTeX~1.0, when it will be released, will support
+non-English languages as well.
+
+An issue that occurs in English (APA) documents is that, according to
+the APA, numbers should be sorted as if they were spelled in words:
+``2003'' must be sorted as if it says ``\mbox{twothousandandthree}'';
+see example~4.04 in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\APACSortNoop}
+Overriding the default sorting order can be done by using the
+\cmd{\APACSortNoop} command in the \fname{.bib} file. This is a \LaTeX{}
+command provided by \pkg{apacite}. It has one mandatory argument, but it
+outputs nothing. However, \BibTeX{} does not know this and uses the
+contents of this command to sort the entry. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd},
+\end{verbatim}
+is sorted as ``\verb*+muller g+'', whereas
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {{\APACSortNoop{Mueller}}M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd},
+\end{verbatim}
+is sorted as ``\verb*+muellermuller g+'', which typically results
+in the correct ordering. In the typeset document, both look like
+``M{\"{u}}ller''. Note that the extra pair of braces around the
+\cmd{\APACSortNoop} command are necessary to suggest to \BibTeX{}
+that it is an ``accent''. The specification
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {\APACSortNoop{Mueller}M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd},
+\end{verbatim}
+is sorted as ``\verb*+apacsortnoopmuellermuller g+'', which is
+incorrect.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Customization}
+\label{sec:custom}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The description in the previous sections, with the exception of
+section~\ref{sec:options}, primarily discussed the default behavior of
+\pkg{apacite}. However, as mentioned in the introduction, in addition to the
+options, \pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization. Most
+punctuation used in the citations and reference list are implemented through
+\LaTeX{} commands instead of explicit symbols. Consequently, the user can
+fine-tune the behavior of \pkg{apacite} by redefining these commands, through
+\cmd{\renewcommand} after \pkg{apacite} has been loaded. Analogously, most
+fixed texts, like ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'' and ``Eds.\hbox{}'' are implemented
+through \LaTeX{} commands as well, and can similarly be changed by the user.
+The commands used by \pkg{apacite} are discussed in this section. Of course,
+the defaults are based on the rules of the APA manual.
+
+Some commands, predominantly punctuation, are used both in citations and in
+the reference list. If you want their definitions in citations to be different
+from their definitions in the reference list, you can simply redefine their
+definitions before starting the bibliography.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Punctuation and small formatting issues}
+\label{sec:custom-punct}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The following punctuation commands are provided and used for
+the citations and reference list.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BAstyle}
+\DescribeMacro{\BAastyle}
+\cmd{\BAstyle} defines the text style of the authors (or whatever
+takes their place) for an in-text citation. It defaults to nothing:
+The authors use the same fonts as the text surrounding it. Introduced
+because some journals use a different style. For example,
+\emph{Statistica Neerlandica} uses small caps, so for that journal,
+you would define
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}
+\end{verbatim}
+Do not use the \cmd{\textsc}-type commands, but \cmd{\scshape},
+\cmd{\bfseries}, and so forth. The \cmd{\BAstyle} command is used for
+the author part by the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} citation commands,
+except the author-only citation commands. \cmd{\BAastyle} is the same
+as \cmd{\BAstyle}, except that \cmd{\BAastyle} is used for the
+author-only citation commands.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\APACrefauthstyle}
+\cmd{\APACrefauthstyle} is similar to \cmd{\BAstyle}, except
+that this one is used for formatting authors in the reference list.
+In the current implementation, it also applies to editors in the
+author position, but not to editors in the editor position and
+not to titles and other elements that take the position of authors
+if there are no authors and editors.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BBAA}
+\DescribeMacro{\BBAB}
+\DescribeMacro{\BAnd}
+\cmd{\BBAA} is the ``and'' between authors in a parenthetical
+citation and in the reference list, as in
+``(Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)'' or ``Mooijaart, A., \&
+Bentler, P.~M. (1986).''. Its default is ``\&''.
+\cmd{\BBAB} is the same ``and'' in a text citation, as in
+``Mooijaart and Bentler (1986)''. Its default is ``and''.
+The third ``and'', \cmd{\BAnd}, is used in the reference list
+if someone is both editor and translator:
+``In J. Strachey (Ed. \& Trans.),''. Default is ``\&''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BBOP}
+\DescribeMacro{\BBCP}
+\cmd{\BBOP} (opening parenthesis) and \cmd{\BBCP} (closing parenthesis)
+are used for the parentheses in a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973)'' or
+``Rao (1973)'', and the year in the reference list, as in
+``Rao, C.~R. (1973).'' By default, they are round parentheses
+``('' and ``)''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BAP}
+\cmd{\BAP} is inserted after the prefix and before the first citation
+in a parenthetical citation. It defaults to an ordinary space. Note
+that if the prefix ends with a period, \TeX{} interprets this as a
+sentence ending and typically inserts a larger space, which is often
+not desirable. The standard way to avoid this would be to insert an
+explicit space (``|\ |''), but this does not work in a prefix. The
+solution is to insert an empty |\hbox{}| after the period:
+|\cite<cf.\hbox{}>{Jone01}|.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BBAY}
+\DescribeMacro{\BBYY}
+\DescribeMacro{\BBN}
+\cmd{\BBAY} is the punctuation between author(s) and year in a
+parenthetical citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973)''. \cmd{\BBYY} is the
+punctuation between two subsequent years, if two works by the same
+author(s) are referenced in a single citation command, as in
+``(Rao, 1965, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1965, 1973)''. \cmd{\BBN} is the
+punctuation before a note (postfix) after a citation, as in
+``(Rao, 1973, p.~25)''. Default for all three is a comma and a
+space (``, '').
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BBC}
+\cmd{\BBC} is the punctuation between multiple cites, as in
+``(Rao, 1973; Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)''. Default is a semicolon
+and a space (``; '').
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BBOQ}
+\DescribeMacro{\BBCQ}
+\cmd{\BBOQ} (opening quote) and \cmd{\BBCQ} (closing quote) are the
+quotes around an article title in the reference list, for example the
+double quotes in ``Random polynomial factor analysis.'' Default is
+the empty string: no quotes are used. (The \pkg{theapa} package
+required the closing period to be part of the closing quote, but this
+has been changed, because the period must be left out if title
+comments, such as type, English translation of non-English title, or
+translator follow the title.)
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BPBI}
+\cmd{\BPBI} is the period between initials. Default is a period and a
+non-breaking space (``.~''), as required by the APA manual. However,
+many users prefer removing or reducing the space and in some
+non-English speaking countries this is customary. This can be achieved
+by redefining this command to, for example, just a period (no space),
+or ``|.\,|'' (small space). This command cannot be used to remove
+periods altogether, because there is still a period at the end. That
+is, redefining it as an empty string gives awkward results like
+``Bentler, PM., \& Mooijaart, A.''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BHBI}
+\cmd{\BHBI} is the hyphen between initials. Introduced for analogy with
+\cmd{\BPBI} and used for authors who have two or more first names
+with a hyphen between them, e.g., Jean-Paul Sartre. Default is
+a period and a hyphen. Unlike \cmd{\BPBI}, I think this one will not be
+changed often, although \BibTeX{} suppresses hyphens when it suppresses
+spaces between initials as well, so there are people who have different
+preferences. (Hence, \pkg{apacite} partly bypasses the standard
+\BibTeX{} formatting functions to make this work.)
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BCBT}
+\DescribeMacro{\BCBL}
+\cmd{\BCBT} is the comma between authors in the reference section when
+there are two authors, as in
+``Mooijaart, A., \& Bentler, P.~M. (1986).'' The comma after the ``A.''
+is this one. Default is a comma. The APA manual requires it, but other
+styles leave out this comma. In such a case, you would redefine this
+``comma'' to be the empty string:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+Analogously, \cmd{\BCBL} is the comma before the last author when there
+are three or more authors in a citation and in the reference section,
+as in ``(Gill, Murray, \& Wright, 1981)'' or
+``Gill, P.~E., Murray, W., \& Wright, M.~H. (1981).'' Its default is
+also a comma, as required by the APA manual, which is standard U.S.
+usage. Other styles, particularly European, such as British English,
+omit this comma. Again, in such a case, you would redefine this
+``comma'' to be the empty string. (This is in fact done in several of
+the language files. See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}.)
+
+\DescribeMacro{\BDBL}
+\cmd{\BDBL} is the dots before the last author in the reference
+section when the reference has more than seven authors. The default
+is ``|, \dots{} |''. The APA manual seems to imply that there
+shouldn't be space around the dots, but I think it's better to have
+the space and I assume editors won't mind. However, if they insist on
+removing the space, you can redefine \cmd{\BDBL} accordingly.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\theBibCnt}
+\DescribeMacro{\BCnt}
+\DescribeMacro{\BCntIP}
+\DescribeMacro{\BCntND}
+If there are multiple citations with the same author and year, a
+letter should be added to the year to distinguish the references.
+For example, one may refer to two or more articles by J.~Smith
+published in 1982. They should be referred to as ``Smith (1982a)'',
+``Smith (1982b)'', and so forth. To accomplish this, the counter
+|BibCnt| is defined in \fname{apacite.sty}. The \cmd{\theBibCnt}
+command defines how the value of |BibCnt| is formatted. The default
+is ``|\alph{BibCnt}|'', that is, as a plain lowercase letter. To
+emphasize (italicize) the ``a'', ``b'', and so forth, you can redefine
+this as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}
+\end{verbatim}
+(This presumably works better than ``\verb+\emph{\alph{BibCnt}}+''.)
+To control this behavior, redefining the \cmd{\theBibCnt} command
+should normally be sufficient. However, the complete formatting
+commands are \cmd{\BCnt}, \cmd{\BCntIP}, and \cmd{\BCntND}. The
+second of these is for ``in press'' works, which need an extra hyphen
+between ``in press'' and the ``a'' and ``b'' suffixes. The third is
+similar, for works without a date, which is formatted as
+``n.d.\hbox{}'' in APA style. Their default definitions
+in \fname{apacite.sty} are
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\APACciteatitle}
+\DescribeMacro{\APACcitebtitle}
+\cmd{\APACciteatitle} determines the formatting of the title of an
+article (or similar work) when used as a citation in the text when no
+author or editor is available for that purpose. Its default definition
+is
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}
+\end{verbatim}
+that is, the title is put between double quotes. Similarly,
+\cmd{\APACcitebtitle} determines the formatting of the title of a book
+(or other independent work) when used as a citation in the text when no
+author or editor is available for that purpose. Its default definition
+is
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}
+\end{verbatim}
+that is, the title is emphasized (in italics) but not put between
+double quotes.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\APACmetastar}
+\cmd{\APACmetastar} is the asterisk that precedes an item in the
+bibliography to denote that it is included in the meta-analysis.
+The default value is ``\verb+\ensuremath{{}^\ast}+'', which
+prints as ``\APACmetastar''.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bibnewpage}
+If the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option is chosen, \cmd{\bibnewpage} is
+included before the bibliography. Its default definition is
+\cmd{\clearpage}, but \fname{apa.cls} used \cmd{\newpage} in a
+similar construction with its \pkgoption{man} option. See
+\citeA[p.~215]{LaTeXbook} or \citeA[p.~37]{KoDa04} for the differences
+between \cmd{\clearpage} and \cmd{\newpage}.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bibliographytypesize}
+\cmd{\bibliographytypesize} is used before the reference list, but
+after the section or chapter heading. It is intended for the font size
+of the reference list: For \citeA{WaMe00}, I defined it as \cmd{\small}
+(and even then the reference list took up 34 pages). The default value
+is \cmd{\normalsize}.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bibleftmargin}
+\DescribeMacro{\bibindent}
+\DescribeMacro{\bibitemsep}
+\DescribeMacro{\bibparsep}
+\DescribeMacro{\biblabelsep}
+Several parameters determine the layout of the reference list.
+\cmd{\bibleftmargin} gives the indentation of the second and subsequent
+lines of a reference list entry, relative to the usual left margin. It
+is not a proper command, but a rubber length, which means that it is
+not changed by \cmd{\renewcommand} but by \cmd{\setlength}. Its default
+value is 2.5em. \cmd{\bibindent} gives the indentation of the
+first line of a reference list entry, relative to the second line. It
+is also a rubber length, with default value is |-\bibleftmargin|, which
+means that the first line starts at the original left margin, and the
+second and subsequent lines are indented by 2.5em. \cmd{\biblabelsep}
+gives the horizontal separation between the reference list label and
+the rest of the entry. Normally, there are no reference list labels
+when using \pkg{apacite}, but this command allows one to define them
+through redefining \cmd{\@biblabel} and \cmd{\@lbibitem} without having
+to redefine the whole \envirname{bibliography} environment. I once used
+this to generate a numbered reference list for my CV. It is a rubber
+length in principle, but the default is a fixed length of 0pt.
+\cmd{\bibitemsep} gives the vertical separation between two reference
+list entries. It is also a rubber length, with default value
+``|0pt plus .3pt|'', i.e., 0pt, but it may be stretched a little to
+fill the page nicely. If you want to change it, e.g., to get a blank
+line between reference list entries, you can use
+\begin{verbatim}
+\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}
+\end{verbatim}
+Finally, \cmd{\bibparsep} gives the vertical separation between two
+paragraphs within the same reference list entry. Such a situation does
+not occur in the default setup, so it is not used, but it is
+conceivable that certain customizations lead to its use. It is a
+rubber length with default value 0pt.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Labels}
+\label{subsec:labels}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+There are many specific pieces of text that can be put into the reference
+list or a citation by \pkg{apacite}. Here, these pieces are called
+\emph{labels}. Almost all of these are to some extent language-specific, and
+sometimes style-specific even within the same language. Therefore, they are
+implemented through \LaTeX{} commands, so that users can easily change them.
+In this section, these commands and their purposes are described, and their
+(U.S.\ English) defaults are given. Section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} below will
+discuss how these commands are changed if another language is used.
+
+The following label commands are used:
+\begin{description}
+
+ \item[\cmd{\onemaskedcitationmsg}] \DescribeMacro{\onemaskedcitationmsg}
+ \item[\cmd{\maskedcitationsmsg}] \DescribeMacro{\maskedcitationsmsg}
+ These commands have one mandatory argument (which should always
+ be 1 for \cmd{\onemaskedcitationmsg}) and define a message
+ stating that citations are removed for a masked review. The
+ default messages are
+ ``\emph{(1\ citation removed for masked review)}'' and
+ ``\emph{(}|#1|\emph{\ citations removed for masked review)}'',
+ respectively.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibmessage}] \DescribeMacro{\bibmessage}
+ This is the first of 9 specific type
+ commands that are recognized by \pkg{apacite}. If you
+ define the \fieldname{type} field of a \entryname{misc}
+ entry as ``\cmd{\bibmessage}'', the formatting of the
+ entry is changed (e.g., the title is not italicized),
+ see the discussion of the \fieldname{type} field in
+ section~\ref{subsec:fields} above. This one is used for
+ messages in newsgroups, internet forums, etc.
+ Default is ``\verb+Msg+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogram}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcomputerprogram}
+ Default is ``\verb+Computer program+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}
+ Default is ``\verb+Computer program manual+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}
+ Default is ``\verb+Computer program and manual+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftware}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcomputersoftware}
+ Default is ``\verb+Computer software+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}
+ Default is ``\verb+Computer software manual+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}
+ Default is ``\verb+Computer software and manual+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}] \DescribeMacro{\bibprogramminglanguage}
+ Default is ``\verb+Programming language+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibnotype}] \DescribeMacro{\bibnotype}
+ This one is a bit different from the previous 8. It is used for
+ \entryname{techreport} entries to indicate that the type specifier
+ should be suppressed. Its default value is the empty string, but this
+ will not have an effect on \pkg{apacite} behavior, because the type
+ specifier is suppressed anyway by \pkg{apacite}. However, by defining it
+ as the empty string, formatting may become better (i.e., closer to the
+ desired formatting) with other styles.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibnodate}] \DescribeMacro{\bibnodate}
+ Used in the \fieldname{year} and
+ \fieldname{originalyear} fields to indicate that no
+ publication date has been given. Default value is ``\verb+n.d.\hbox{}+''.
+ The ``\verb+\hbox{}+'' ensures that \TeX{} does not treat
+ the last period as a sentence-ending period, after which
+ more space is inserted. This also applies to several other
+ labels discussed below.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BOthers}] \DescribeMacro{\BOthers}
+ Used for ``others'' if the number of authors
+ or editors is too large, as in ``(Gill et al., 1981)''.
+ The default is ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ However, the definition contains a slight adaptation, because
+ in a previous version of \pkg{apacite}, there was a problem
+ implying that in some cases \BibTeX{} might put an extra period after
+ \cmd{\BOthers}, not recognizing that it already contains a period,
+ so that you would get ``et al.\hbox{}.'', which is undesirable.
+ It depends on the definition of \cmd{\BOthers} whether there should
+ be a period or not: If it is defined as ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+'',
+ there should not be an additional period, but if it is defined
+ as, say, ``\verb+and others+'', then there should be an additional
+ period. But \BibTeX{} does not know what the (later) definition
+ of this command will be in \LaTeX{}. Therefore, the \cmd{\BOthers}
+ command is defined to have one argument. In \BibTeX,
+ \pkg{apacite} inserts \verb+\BOthers{.}+ in the output, so no
+ additional period is inserted by \BibTeX. By default, this
+ command is defined as ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+'', and the argument is
+ simply ignored.
+
+ If you redefine the \cmd{\BOthers} command and need the additional
+ period, you can redefine it appropriately. However, in the current
+ version, the \cmd{\BOthers} command is distinguished from the
+ \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} command and I think the mentioned problems
+ do not occur anymore. Nevertheless, I have kept the definition of the
+ previous version. I may decide, after thorough testing, to change
+ this again in a next version.
+
+ There is still a complication, however. If you use a \cmd{\citeauthor}
+ at the end of a sentence, there may be a period too many, if
+ you end the sentence explicitly with it and \cmd{\BOthers} is
+ ``et al.\hbox{}''. On the other hand, if you omit the sentence-finishing
+ period but decide to redefine \cmd{\BOthers} to ``and others'',
+ the period is missing. Therefore, it seems wise not to end a sentence
+ with a \cmd{\citeauthor}, or you could define a command, e.g.,
+ \cmd{\finishsentence}, and insert it in an appropriate place.
+ Then, this command should be changed along with \cmd{\BOthers}.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BOthersPeriod}] \DescribeMacro{\BOthersPeriod}
+ Also used for ``others'' if the number of
+ authors or editors is too large, as in
+ ``Gill, P. E., et al.\hbox{} (1981)''.
+ But this one is used for situations when it should always end with
+ a period. The default is ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibcorporate}] \DescribeMacro{\bibcorporate}
+ This command can be used in the \fieldname{author}
+ field (and \fieldname{editor} and \fieldname{translator}) to tell
+ \pkg{apacite} that the author is a corporate author. See
+ section~\ref{subsec:fields} for an example of its usage. In combination
+ with the \pkgoption{includecorporate} and \pkgoption{suppresscorporate}
+ options, it can be used to include or exclude corporate authors from
+ the author index. The usage as described above is structured as if
+ \cmd{\bibcorporate} has an argument, the corporate author name, but
+ by default, this argument simply would have to be copied to the output
+ without further processing. Therefore, in the actual implementation,
+ \cmd{\bibcorporate} does not have an argument and reduces to \cmd{\relax},
+ i.e., it does nothing in \LaTeX{} and exerts its influence at the
+ \BibTeX{} stage.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BIP}] \DescribeMacro{\BIP}
+ ``In press'', the string to be used as year for
+ in-press references. In the \fname{.bib} file, the \fieldname{year}
+ field should be ``\verb+\BIP+'', so that \pkg{apacite} can recognize
+ this and use appropriate formatting and sorting.
+ The default value is ``\verb+in press+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BIn}] \DescribeMacro{\BIn}
+ Used for \entryname{incollection} and
+ \entryname{intechreport}, for ``In \opt{editor} (Ed.\hbox{}),
+ \opt{booktitle}'', and similar phrases. Default value is ``\verb+In+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BCHAP}] \DescribeMacro{\BCHAP}
+ Used for \entryname{incollection} if the
+ \fieldname{pages} field is empty, to denote the chapter number
+ of the referenced work in the collection. Used primarily for
+ internet documents, where there are no page numbers.
+ Default value is ``chap.\hbox{}''. Note that in the text, in
+ particular in a citation, the APA (p.~179) prescribes ``Chapter'':
+ ``(Shimamura, 1989, Chapter~3)''. This is, however, something that
+ would be typed by the author of the manuscript, not inserted by
+ \pkg{apacite}, and thus \pkg{apacite} does not have a command
+ for this.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BCHAPS}] \DescribeMacro{\BCHAPS}
+ Just like \cmd{\BCHAP}, but this one is used
+ if the \fieldname{chapter} field refers to more than 1 chapter.
+ Default value is ``chap.\hbox{}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BED}] \DescribeMacro{\BED}
+ Editor in reference list, as in
+ ``In P. R. Krishnaiah (Ed.\hbox{})''. Default is ``\verb+Ed.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BEDS}] \DescribeMacro{\BEDS}
+ Editors (more than one editor) in reference list,
+ as in ``In C.~R. Rao \& J.~K. Ghosh (Eds.\hbox{})''.
+ Default is ``\verb+Eds.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BTRANS}] \DescribeMacro{\BTRANS}
+ Translator, as in ``(J. Strachey, Trans.\hbox{})''.
+ Default is ``\verb+Trans.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BTRANSS}] \DescribeMacro{\BTRANSS}
+ Translators. Default is ``\verb+Trans.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BTRANSL}] \DescribeMacro{\BTRANSL}
+ Translation. Used in a text citation when
+ referring to a translated work for which there is no date
+ for the original work. This is then formatted as
+ ``Aristotle (trans.\hbox{} 1931)''. Default is
+ ``\verb+trans.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BCHAIR}] \DescribeMacro{\BCHAIR}
+ Chair of a symposium, etc.
+ Default is ``\verb+Chair+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BCHAIRS}] \DescribeMacro{\BCHAIRS}
+ Chairs. Default is ``\verb+Chairs+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BVOL}] \DescribeMacro{\BVOL}
+ Volume, as in ``Vol.\hbox{}~1''.
+ Default is ``\verb+Vol.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BVOLS}] \DescribeMacro{\BVOLS}
+ Volumes, as in ``Vols.\hbox{} 1--4''.
+ Default is ``\verb+Vols.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BNUM}] \DescribeMacro{\BNUM}
+ Number, as in ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}
+ No.\hbox{}~12''.
+ Default is ``\verb+No.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BNUMS}] \DescribeMacro{\BNUMS}
+ Numbers, as in ``Nos.\hbox{} 3--5''.
+ Default is ``\verb+Nos.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BEd}] \DescribeMacro{\BEd}
+ Edition, as in ``2nd ed.\hbox{}''.
+ Default is ``\verb+ed.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BPG}] \DescribeMacro{\BPG}
+ Page, default is ``\verb+p.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BPGS}] \DescribeMacro{\BPGS}
+ Pages, default is ``\verb+pp.\hbox{}+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BTR}] \DescribeMacro{\BTR}
+ The (default) technical report type name, which can be
+ overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+ ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}+''
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BPhD}] \DescribeMacro{\BPhD}
+ The (default) PhD thesis type name, which can be
+ overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+ ``\texttt{Doctoral dissertation}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BUPhD}] \DescribeMacro{\BUPhD}
+ The (default) Unpublished PhD thesis type name,
+ which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+ ``\texttt{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BMTh}] \DescribeMacro{\BMTh}
+ The (default) master's thesis type name, which can be
+ overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+ ``\texttt{Master's thesis}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BUMTh}] \DescribeMacro{\BUMTh}
+ The (default) unpublished master's thesis type name,
+ which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+ ``\texttt{Unpublished master's thesis}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BOWP}] \DescribeMacro{\BOWP}
+ ``Original work published'', default is
+ ``\texttt{Original work published}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BREPR}] \DescribeMacro{\BREPR}
+ ``Reprinted from'', default is
+ ``\texttt{Reprinted from}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\Bby}] \DescribeMacro{\Bby}
+ ``by'' in the construction
+ ``by P.~R. Krishnaiah, Ed.\hbox{}'' referring to the original
+ editor of a reprinted work. Default is ``\verb+by+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BAuthor}] \DescribeMacro{\BAuthor}
+ ``Author'' as a description of the publisher
+ if the author and publisher are the same. Default is
+ ``\verb+Author+''
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BAvailFrom}] \DescribeMacro{\BAvailFrom}
+ ``Available from''. This is used in versions
+ of \pkg{apacite} up to [2009/03/01] if the \fieldname{url}
+ field is specified but the \fieldname{lastchecked} field is not.
+ This is now superseded by \cmd{\BRetrievedFrom}.
+ Default is ``\verb+Available from\ +''. Note the extra space.
+ This construction allows customization by redefining this command
+ as being empty, thereby omitting the phrase altogether, without
+ undesirable extra space.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BRetrieved}] \DescribeMacro{\BRetrieved}
+ ``Retrieved from'', used if both the
+ \fieldname{url} field and the \fieldname{lastchecked} field are
+ specified. It has one argumnt: the date, i.e., the contents of
+ the \fieldname{lastchecked} field. The default is
+ ``\verb+Retrieved {#1}, from\ +'', again with extra space.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BRetrievedFrom}] \DescribeMacro{\BRetrievedFrom}
+ ``Retrieved from'', used if the \fieldname{url}
+ field is specified but the \fieldname{lastchecked} field is not.
+ This was introduced, because the APA manual (p.~192) now states
+ that retrieval dates should be omitted ``unless the source
+ material may change over time'', and prescribes ``Retrieved from''
+ (p.~199).
+ Default is ``\verb+Retrieved from\ +'', again with extra space.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\BMsgPostedTo}] \DescribeMacro{\BMsgPostedTo}
+ Used for messages to newsgroups and the like.
+ Default is ``\verb+Message posted to\ +'', with space.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\refname}] \DescribeMacro{\refname}
+ Name of the reference list if it's a section.
+ (So it's the section name.) Default is ``\verb+References+''.
+ A problem with the current implementation is, that if you use
+ \pkg{babel}'s \cmd{\selectlanguage} command, then \cmd{\refname}
+ and \cmd{\bibname} are overwritten. Because \pkg{babel}'s
+ definitions of these commands are often (for various languages)
+ different from the names prescribed by the APA manual and analogous
+ bodies in other countries, it will often be necessary to redefine
+ \cmd{\refname} or \cmd{\bibname} if you have used
+ \cmd{\selectlanguage}. I hope to provide a fix in a next version
+ of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibname}] \DescribeMacro{\bibname}
+ Name of the reference list if it's a chapter.
+ Default is ``\verb+References+''. See also \cmd{\refname}.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\bibliographyprenote}] \DescribeMacro{\bibliographyprenote}
+ This command is used before
+ the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading,
+ and immediately after \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}.
+ It is intended for an optional note just before the references
+ in the reference list. It defaults to nothing, but can be changed
+ to a list of commands (e.g., if some commands should be different
+ in the reference list than in the text) and/or some text.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\APACmetaprenote}] \DescribeMacro{\APACmetaprenote}
+ If a meta-analysis is reported, the
+ works included in the meta-analysis should in the bibliography be
+ preceded by an asterisk, see the description of \cmd{\APACmetastar}
+ above. This should then be explained in a note before the references.
+ This command contains the text of that note. Default is
+ ``\texttt{References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+ included in the meta-analysis.}''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\authorindexname}] \DescribeMacro{\authorindexname}
+ Name (heading) of the author index.
+ Default is ``\verb+Author Index+''.
+
+ \item[\cmd{\doiprefix}] \DescribeMacro{\doiprefix}
+ String that is printed before a DOI.
+ Default is ``\verb+doi:+''.
+
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{More drastic formatting changes to the reference list}
+\label{sec:custom-big-formatting}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, most of the formatting of the
+reference list was done in the \BibTeX{} stage, i.e., by the \fname{.bst}
+files. This corresponds with most other \BibTeX{} styles. This makes
+it difficult for users to customize the formatting of the reference
+list: They would have to make their own \fname{.bst} file, by adapting
+\fname{apacite.bst}. Certain small changes are relatively easy to make,
+but \BibTeX's ``bst'' language is not easy to understand for most users,
+and thus most desired changes, though seemingly small, may be too
+complicated to implement. Another drawback of this setup is that, each
+time I release a new version of \pkg{apacite}, users would have to make
+the same adaptations again. In the early days of \pkg{apacite}, wasting
+disk space was another drawback, but this is not important anymore.
+
+To overcome the most salient of these problems, \pkg{apacite} has always
+deferred some formatting choices to the \LaTeX{} stage, by using tailor-made
+formatting commands instead of explicit formatting, as discussed in
+sections~\ref{sec:custom-punct} and~\ref{subsec:labels} above. The amount of
+formatting thus handled has slightly grown over time, but still most choices
+were hard wired in the \BibTeX{} styles.
+
+Since the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} version of \pkg{apacite}, a big step
+has been made in transferring these choices to the \LaTeX{} domain. Hence,
+a much larger set of commands, with wider-ranging scope, has been defined,
+and considerably fewer choices are made at the \BibTeX{} stage. For
+example, \fname{apacite.bst} now inserts
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\mbox{\cmd{\APACjournalVolNumPages}%
+ \marg{journal}%
+ \marg{volume}%
+ \marg{number}%
+ \marg{pages}%
+ }
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+in the \fname{.bbl} file for an \entryname{article} entry, and
+the actual formatting of this information is defined in
+\fname{apacite.sty}. If all four components are available, the
+default (APA manual) formatting of this looks like
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\mbox{\Bem{Acta Paedopsychiatrica},
+ \Bem{38}(9),
+ {229--231}}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+but by redefining this command, users can change this, e.g., to
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\mbox{\Bem{Acta Paedopsychiatrica}
+ \textbf{38}, No.~9:
+ {229--231}}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+The advantage of this is that users can fairly easily construct a
+customized style by redefining only a few commands in \LaTeX, by
+using \cmd{\renewcommand}. Users will generally find it much easier
+to do this than adapt the \fname{.bst} files. Furthermore, only
+the affected commands need to be redefined, so that, when a new
+version of \pkg{apacite} becomes available, all the new features
+can be used---with the exception of the redefined commands, of
+course---without having to adapt everything again. The drawback
+is that the \fname{.bbl} file becomes less readable and more
+difficult to adapt: Previously, it was easy to make ad-hoc changes
+by editing the \fname{.bbl} file, but this has now become more
+difficult. However, I intend to make this facility more user-friendly
+in the future, e.g., by introducing options in the \LaTeX{} package
+(say, \pkgoption{boldvolume}) or by introducing user-friendly
+commands that accomplish the same (say, \cmd{\boldvolume}), so that
+the advantages will clearly outweigh the disadvantages for the vast
+majority of users.
+
+Some packages (\pkg{amsrefs} and \pkg{biblatex} are the ones I am aware of)
+handle the formatting of the reference list completely in the \LaTeX{} domain,
+using \BibTeX{} only for sorting the reference list. The current version of
+\pkg{apacite} does not go that far; there are still certain choices that are
+hardwired in the \BibTeX{} code. Examples are the ordering of the various blocks
+(most notably the position of the year; some styles have this at the end) and
+the formatting of names. It is doubtful whether \pkg{apacite} will follow the
+path toward the end, like these other packages. Some formatting choices are
+closely connected with sorting of entries (e.g., by title if there is no author;
+this assumes that the title then takes the author position) or other cross-entry
+relations (such as adding `a' and `b' suffixes to the year). Therefore, it does
+not seem useful to disconnect these choices by handing them over to \LaTeX.
+
+The following commands are currently implemented to format the reference
+list. If you want to customize them, you can study the source code in
+the file \fname{apacite.sty}, copy it to you own package file, and adapt
+the code as desired.\\[-0.3\baselineskip]
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACmonth}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACmonth}}
+\makebox{Month name (as function of a number)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefYear}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefYear}}
+\makebox{Year in the reference list}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefYearMonthDay}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay}}
+\makebox{Year + month + day}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefatitle}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefatitle}}
+\makebox{Title (article style, default upright)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefbtitle}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefbtitle}}
+\makebox{Title (book style, default italicized)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefaetitle}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefaetitle}}
+\makebox{English translation of title (article)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefbetitle}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefbetitle}}
+\makebox{English translation of title (book)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACjournalVolNumPages}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACjournalVolNumPages}}
+\makebox{Journal, volume, number, and pages}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACaddressPublisher}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACaddressPublisher}}
+\makebox{Address and publisher}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACaddressInstitution}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACaddressInstitution}}
+\makebox{Address and institution (for technical reports)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}}
+\makebox{Address and publisher if the publisher is the author}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth}}
+\makebox{Address and institution if the latter is the author}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACaddressSchool}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACaddressSchool}}
+\makebox{Address and school (for theses)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACtypeAddressSchool}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACtypeAddressSchool}}
+\makebox{Type, address, and school (for theses)}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APAChowpublished}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APAChowpublished}}
+\makebox{\fieldname{howpublished} field}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACorigED}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACorigED}}
+\makebox{Original editor for reprints and translations}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACorigEDS}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACorigEDS}}
+\makebox{Ditto, multiple editors}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACrefnote}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACrefnote}}
+\makebox{Formatting of \fieldname{note} field}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACorigyearnote}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACorigyearnote}}
+\makebox{Original year + optional note}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACorigjournalnote}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACorigjournalnote}}
+\makebox{Original journal (+ volume, number, pages) + optional note}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACorigbooknote}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACorigbooknote}}
+\makebox{Formatting of ``original'' information if the original is a book}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACbVolEdTR}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACbVolEdTR}}
+\makebox{Technical report information}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}}
+\makebox{Ditto, for \entryname{intechreport}}
+\par\noindent\DescribeMacro{\doi}
+\makebox[2.1in][l]{\cmd{\doi}}
+\makebox{Formatting of DOI string}\\[0.7\baselineskip]
+In addition, the following environments are used:\\[-0.3\baselineskip]
+\par\noindent\DescribeEnv{APACrefauthors} \makebox[1.3in][l]{\envirname{APACrefauthors} } \makebox{Formatting of authors (or editors acting as authors) in the reference list.}
+\par\noindent\DescribeEnv{APACrefURL} \makebox[1.3in][l]{\envirname{APACrefURL} } \makebox{Formatting of \fieldname{url} field}
+\par\noindent\DescribeEnv{APACrefDOI} \makebox[1.3in][l]{\envirname{APACrefDOI} } \makebox{Formatting of \fieldname{doi} field}
+\par\noindent\DescribeEnv{APACrefURLmsg} \makebox[1.3in][l]{\envirname{APACrefURLmsg} } \makebox{Formatting of \fieldname{url} field for messages}
+\par\noindent\DescribeEnv{APACrefannotation}\makebox[1.3in][l]{\envirname{APACrefannotation}} \makebox{Formatting of \fieldname{annote} or \fieldname{annotate} fields for annotated bibliographies.}
+\\[0.7\baselineskip]
+It is likely that these lists will be expanded in future versions of
+\pkg{apacite}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Language support}
+\label{sec:compat-babel}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The APA is, of course, American, and therefore the rules in the APA manual
+are also based on the (U.S.) English language. Because \pkg{apacite} was
+primarily designed to implement the APA rules, and because I write all
+my scientific work in English, \pkg{apacite} originally did not contain
+explicit support for other languages. However, most language-specific
+elements have been implemented in the form of \LaTeX{} commands, so that
+users could define their own \LaTeX{} package in which these elements were
+changed. The labels discussed in section~\ref{subsec:labels} above are the
+most important part of this.
+
+Furthermore, when writing in a non-English language, the \pkg{babel} package
+will usually be loaded. The \pkg{babel} package is an extensive package that
+facilitates using \LaTeX{} for documents in languages other than English.
+There have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{babel} and
+\pkg{apacite}, and therefore since 2003 \pkg{apacite} contained some
+explicit code to overcome the compatibility problems. I think this works
+well, provided that \pkg{apacite} is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{babel}.
+
+Thus, although \pkg{apacite} did not support non-English languages
+explicitly, it did facilitate them. Supporting non-English languages is
+not a main objective of \pkg{apacite}, because it is not needed for
+the APA. Nevertheless, it potentially is a useful addition. Many journals in
+non-English languages and universities in countries where other languages
+are spoken base their rules on the APA manual. Therefore, it is
+efficient if, with a few adaptations, \pkg{apacite} can also be used in
+these circumstances. For this reason, and based on user requests,
+\pkg{apacite} has contained some explicit language support since June 2005.
+
+The unpacked \pkg{apacite} distribution contains files that have names
+according to the construction \opt{language}\fname{.apc}, i.e.,
+\fname{english.apc}, \fname{dutch.apc}, etc.
+These files define the language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite},
+mainly translations of terms like ``and'', ``Ed.\hbox{}'', etc. They have been
+written by \pkg{apacite} users who are (native) speakers of the languages
+involved. If the \pkg{babel}, \pkg{german}, or \pkg{ngerman} package is
+loaded, \pkg{apacite} is able to determine the language of the document that
+is processed. Then the corresponding \fname{.apc} file, when available, is
+read. In this way, language-specific elements are changed to the relevant
+language. This is done fully automatically, the user does not have to do
+anything explicitly. However, sometimes an \fname{.apc} file makes some
+assumptions or choices that are nontrivial. Therefore, look at the source
+code of the \fname{.apc} file (or in the Implementation section of this
+manual if you have generated this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation}
+option) if you obtain unexpected results. These files contain some brief
+documentation of the specific issues relevant for the language at hand.
+
+The list with available \fname{.apc} files has been given in
+section~\ref{sec:usage}. One file is defined for each ``language'', which can
+be used for several ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel} terminology). For example,
+\fname{english.apc} is also used if the language is ``american''. See the
+documentation of the \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} packages for a list of
+dialects of the language files supplied. If an \fname{.apc} file is not
+available for the language you need, you can use one of the supplied ones as a
+template and write your own. If you send it to me, I can include it in a next
+version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+The \pkg{babelbib} package offers very sophisticated support of
+different languages. Perhaps some of the features that it offers are
+useful additions to \pkg{apacite} as well, and these may be included
+in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Language-specific issues}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+This section lists issues that are specific to one or more language
+files. It is currently very incomplete. Again, I suggest you study
+the \fname{.apc} file of your language for more information.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsubsection*{Spanish}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\pkg{apacite}'s usage of |<| and |>| for pre-notes, as in
+|\cite<e.g.,>{jones06}| (inherited from its predecessor, \fname{theapa.sty}),
+conflicts with \pkg{babel}'s \pkgoption{spanish} option, which makes |<| and |>|
+active characters. Hence, either you must avoid using prenotes with
+\pkg{apacite}'s construction or you must disable \pkg{babel}'s behavior by
+inserting the command \cmd{\deactivatequoting} after loading \pkg{babel}.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\usespanishe}
+The default ``and'' between authors in Spanish is `y', but when the
+subsequent author's last name starts with an `I', this should be `e'.
+Therefore, \fname{spanish.apc} introduces the command \cmd{\usespanishe},
+which takes a comma-separated list of citation keys as argument. The ``and''
+in these citations is then formatted as `e'. So
+\begin{verbatim}
+\citeA{AnIn93},
+\citeA{AnIn95},
+\usespanishe{AnIn93, AnIn95}
+\citeA{AnIn93},
+\citeA{AnIn95}.
+\end{verbatim}
+gives as output ``Anderson y Ingram (1993), Anderson y Ingram (1995),
+Anderson e Ingram (1993), Anderson e Ingram (1995).''
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Setting up \MiKTeX}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\MiKTeX{} preloads the \pkg{babel} package and often uses \pkgoption{french}
+as the default language. The result is that \pkg{apacite} formats
+the heading of the reference list and other text strings in French.
+(Other distributions also preload \pkg{babel} but use
+\pkgoption{english} or \pkgoption{nohyphenation} as default.)
+I have received many reports from \pkg{apacite} users who use \MiKTeX{},
+who just want the default English, but get French output and don't
+know how to turn this off. Therefore, even though I believe this is a
+\MiKTeX{} issue and not an \pkg{apacite} issue, I\footnote{Actually,
+most of this investigation, testing, etc., was done by David Huffer,
+because I don't have \MiKTeX. Thanks, David!} have reluctantly
+decided to investigate this issue, and as a result of my investigation,
+provide this section.
+
+So here is the way to solve this problem (for \MiKTeX{} version 2.7;
+presumably it works similar for other versions):
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Click Start $\rightarrow$ Programs $\rightarrow$ MiKTeX 2.7 $\rightarrow$
+Settings to open the \MiKTeX{} Options window. Click on the Languages tab.
+\item
+Select ``\pkgoption{english}'', ``\pkgoption{nohyphenation}'', or whatever
+else you'd like to be the default language, and use the Down button to move
+this to the bottom. The \emph{last} checked language is the default main
+document language.
+\item
+Click on the General tab and click on Update Formats.
+\end{enumerate}
+If you do this with ``\pkgoption{english}'' or ``\pkgoption{nohyphenation}''
+as default language, \pkg{apacite} will use English strings and punctuation.
+
+If you want to override the default (and/or you are not able to set the
+default, perhaps because you don't have the administrative permissions),
+you can also insert the line
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[english]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+in your document, before loading \pkg{apacite}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Compatibility}
+\label{sec:compat}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Generally speaking, I would want \pkg{apacite} to be compatible with other
+packages, of course. However, what does compatibility mean? It can mean
+various things:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \label{compat1}%
+ The same \fname{.bib} file can be used with
+ different \BibTeX{} styles and \LaTeX{} citation packages;
+\item \label{compat2}%
+ The same citation commands as other citation packages;
+\item \label{compat3}%
+ Another \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a
+ \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by the \pkg{apacite}
+ \BibTeX{} style;
+\item \label{compat4}%
+ The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a
+ \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by another \BibTeX{} style;
+\item \label{compat5}%
+ The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be loaded at the
+ same time as other packages without errors or undesirable
+ side-effects.
+\end{enumerate}
+Because of the complicated rules of the APA manual, it is not always possible
+to achieve all kinds of compatibility with all other packages. Later in this
+section, I will discuss compatibility issues with other packages with which
+known incompatibility problems exist or have existed. A first example of this,
+the \pkg{babel} package, has already been mentioned above in
+section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}.
+
+Point~\ref{compat1} is the most important. If you have to write a completely
+different \fname{.bib} file for different citation styles, there does not seem
+to be an advantage in using \BibTeX{}. You might as well write the reference
+list explicitly in \LaTeX{} then. However, not even this point can be achieved
+completely, although the vast majority of the items will be the same for
+different styles. But there remain a number of choices that are style-specific
+and that lead to differences in the \fname{.bib} file. Examples from the APA
+manual are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If a referenced book is volume~III according to its title
+ page, this should be referenced as Vol.~3 according to the
+ APA manual rules, but that may not be the case with other
+ styles;
+\item Journal names are abbreviated by some styles, but not
+ according to the APA manual rules;
+\item Publisher names should be abbreviated according to the
+ APA manual, e.g., ``John Wiley \& Sons'' becomes ``Wiley''.
+ Other styles do not do this;
+\item The issue number of a journal should only be given if
+ the journal starts each issue with page~1, not if page
+ numbers of different issues in the same volume are consecutive.
+ Other styles may require the issue number in all cases;
+\item Page ranges are given as ``341--351'' in APA style, whereas
+ other styles use ``341--51'';
+\item The APA rules require a capital after a colon (`\verb+:+'),
+ so that subtitles start with a capital as well. Other styles
+ may not do this;
+\item The APA has specific rules about the address: For a U.S. city,
+ the state (or territory) should be given as a 2-letter code
+ from the U.S. Postal Services, and the province and country
+ should be given if it is a non-U.S. city. There
+ are some exceptions if the name of the state (and sometimes
+ even city) is already mentioned in the university name and
+ the university acts as publisher;
+\item Yearbooks like \emph{Annual Review of Psychology} should be treated
+ as journals according to the APA rules, whereas other styles
+ treat these as books;
+\item The additional fields (such as \fieldname{translator} and the
+ \fieldname{original*}-fields) that are used by \pkg{apacite} but are
+ not defined in other \BibTeX{} styles are of course
+ \pkg{apacite}-specific.
+\end{itemize}
+Some of these problems can be handled relatively elegantly. For example,
+the user could use a command like ``\verb+\RomanVol{3}+'' in the
+\fieldname{volume} field. Then, the user could define a counter,
+\verb+RomanVolcounter+, say, in \LaTeX{} and then define
+\cmd{\RomanVol} (similar to \cmd{\BCnt} discussed earlier) as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\RomanVol}[1]{%
+ \setcounter{RomanVolcounter}{#1}\theRomanVolcounter}
+\end{verbatim}
+where \cmd{\theRomanVolcounter} is defined as \verb+\arabic{RomanVolcounter}+
+if \pkg{apacite} is loaded and as \verb+\Roman{RomanVolcounter}+ if another
+package is loaded that desires this. The example with style-specific
+\fname{.bib} files that contain the definitions of journal-strings was already
+given in section~\ref{sec:bib} above. However, many users will not go through
+all this trouble, and not all problems can be solved in this way. So we have
+to realize that not all entries in the \fname{.bib} file will be suitable for
+all citation styles. On the other hand, most citation styles and journals are
+not as critical as APA journals and many styles in psychology and other social
+sciences (including economics) are very similar, so a \fname{.bib} file that
+is tailor-made for \pkg{apacite} is likely to be suitable enough for the
+styles of most relevant alternative journals.
+
+Point~\ref{compat2} above is currently not fulfilled. The \pkg{apacite}
+citation commands are directly based on those of its immediate
+predecessor, \pkg{theapa}. But the use of `|<|' and `|>|' for prefixes
+is not used by other packages. The \pkg{chicago} package uses
+\cmd{\citeA} instead of \cmd{\citeauthor}, many ``numerical'' citation
+styles only recognize \cmd{\cite}, and so forth. Because \pkg{natbib}
+is widely used and versatile, the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option loads
+\pkg{natbib} for the citation commands, thereby allowing at least a
+little ``compatibility'' (actuallu, borrowing) of citation commands.
+
+I think that points~\ref{compat3} and~\ref{compat4} are not that
+important. It seems to me that there is not much wrong with defining
+a style through a combination of a \fname{.sty} and \fname{.bst} file,
+each requiring the other to work. However, given the possibilities and
+philosophy of the \pkg{natbib} package, it is desirable that
+\fname{natbib.sty} can be used with \fname{apacite.bst}. This is the
+case, especially with the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option.
+
+Point~\ref{compat5} is very important, especially with other packages that are
+complementary to \pkg{apacite} in some sense. It would be very annoying having
+to choose between using \pkg{babel} and \pkg{apacite}, or between
+\pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{apacite}, etc. These packages serve totally different
+purposes, cannot usefully be compared, and are more valuable when they can be
+used jointly. The rest of this section addresses this issue for a number of
+packages with which compatibility problems are known to exist or have existed.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{\pkg{natbib}}
+\label{sec:compat-natbib}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{natbib} package is a general purpose citation package that is
+intended to work with a broad range of \BibTeX{} (and non-\BibTeX{}) styles
+that generate the bibliography. The \pkg{natbib} package is quite advanced and
+can be used to switch easily between completely different citation styles.
+Furthermore, the apparent popularity of \pkg{natbib} has inspired writers of
+packages that would otherwise be incompatible with \pkg{natbib} to write code
+to resolve these incompatibilities. I will mention some of these packages
+below.
+
+Using \pkg{natbib} for the citations has some advantages over using
+\pkg{apacite} for the citations. Apart from the abovementioned sorting
+of citations within a single citation command, these are mainly
+\pkg{natbib}'s better compatibility with some other important packages,
+although many compatibility problems with \pkg{apacite} have now been
+solved.
+
+When you want to use \pkg{natbib} for citation and \pkg{apacite} for the
+reference list, you still need to load the \LaTeX{} package \fname{apacite.sty}
+(with \cmd{\usepackage}), because of the commands that are included in the
+\BibTeX{} output (as defined in section~\ref{sec:custom} above). The best
+interoperability is obtained by loading \pkg{apacite} with the
+\pkgoption{natbibapa} option. There is then no need to load
+\pkg{natbib} explicitly, because \pkg{apacite} already does this.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{\pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{backref}, and \pkg{url}}
+\label{sec:compat-hyper}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{hyperref} package turns (\mbox{cross-}) references into hypertext
+links. This can be used in conjunction with a program such as \latextohtml{} to
+compose \fname{.html} files with clickable links, to internet pages or within
+the same document, or it can be used to create a \fname{.pdf} document with
+clickable crossreferences. Evidently, citations are also references. Therefore,
+the \pkg{hyperref} package transforms these into hypertext links as well, and
+needs to redefine the citation commands and reference list commands in order to
+do so. These redefinitions have caused severe incompatibility problems between
+\pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref} in the past. These incompatibility
+problems have been solved and \pkg{apacite} is compatible with \pkg{hyperref},
+provided that \pkg{apacite} is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{hyperref}.
+However, some of the ``dirty tricks'' I needed for
+complicated examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} still conflict with
+\pkg{hyperref}. You will probably not encounter these problems very often, but
+if you do these can be easily solved by editing the \fname{.bbl} file instead of
+using dangerous tricks; see also section~\ref{sec:autindex} below.
+
+The \pkg{backref} package adds to each entry in the bibliography a list of pages
+(or sections) on which it is referenced. Hence, it serves as an alternative to
+an author index, in which not the entries themselves are backreferenced, but the
+authors of these entries, see section~\ref{sec:autindex}. Note that \pkg{natbib}
+offers yet another possibility, viz.\ the citations in the standard index, or a
+separate citation index, see the \pkg{natbib} documentation. In my opinion, the
+\pkg{backref} way of indexing the page numbers of the citations is more logical.
+Moreover, it is more condensed as well.
+
+Obviously, the \pkg{backref} package has to change the citation commands and
+reference list to be able to do its backreferencing. Because \pkg{apacite}
+redefines these as well, they are conflicting to some degree. A similar
+compatibility problem between \pkg{backref} and \pkg{natbib} was noticed by the
+author of \pkg{backref}. Therefore, \pkg{backref} contains some code to make it
+compatible with \pkg{natbib}. This code has been adapted for \pkg{apacite} and
+incorporated in \pkg{apacite}. Thus, \pkg{backref} as a standalone package has
+been made compatible with \pkg{apacite}. The drawback of this solution is that
+if changes are made in the \pkg{backref} package, this may result in new
+incompatibilities with \pkg{apacite} unless \pkg{apacite} is changed as well.
+Whether, and if so, when, this will occur will be a question for the future.
+
+Apart from being a standalone package, \pkg{backref} can also be combined with
+\pkg{hyperref}. It is then not loaded separately, but through the
+\pkgoption{backref} or \pkgoption{pagebackref} option of the \pkg{hyperref}
+package. In this case, the backreferences become hypertext links. See the
+discussion of the \pkg{hyperref} package above.
+
+The \pkg{url} package provides the \cmd{\url} command for formatting URLs, i.e.,
+web addresses. It is typically loaded if \pkg{hyperref} is also loaded, but it
+is very useful on its own as well. There are no compatibility problems with
+\pkg{apacite} and it is not required when using \pkg{apacite}. However, if you
+use the \fieldname{url} field, \pkg{apacite} puts it into a \cmd{\url} command.
+If the \cmd{\url} command is not defined by another package, \pkg{apacite}
+provides a crude definition, so that no errors are generated. But the formatting
+thus obtained usually does not satisfy the APA rules about formatting,
+especially its rules about line breaking within a URL. The default line breaking
+rules of the \pkg{url} package are fairly close to the APA rules, but there are
+some differences. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} provides several URL-styles that
+adhere to the APA line breaking rules, supplemented by the additional
+suggestions in \citeA[p.~645]{chicago}. These styles apply to URL formatting
+through the \cmd{\url} command anywhere in the document, not only in the
+reference list and not only in the \fieldname{url} field.
+
+The only difference between the URL styles defined by \pkg{apacite} is which
+font family they use: \verb+APACtt+ uses \cmd{\ttfamily}, \verb+APACsf+ uses
+\cmd{\sffamily}, \verb+APACrm+ uses \cmd{\rmfamily}, and \verb+APACsame+ does
+not define a font family, and thus uses the font family that is active at the
+start of the URL. \verb+APACtt+ is selected by default, but you can select
+another URL style by inserting the command \cmd{\urlstyle}\marg{style} in your
+document, after \verb+\begin{document}+. See the documentation of the \pkg{url}
+package for more details.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Multiple bibliographies}
+\label{sec:compat-chapterbib}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{chapterbib} package allows separate bibliographies for separate
+chapters of a book, or, technically, separate \cmd{\include}d files. To work
+properly, it needs some small changes to the citation package, which are
+clearly described in the \pkg{chapterbib} documentation. These changes have
+been incorporated in \pkg{apacite}, and therefore \pkg{apacite} is compatible
+with \pkg{chapterbib}.
+
+It is generally advisable not to use the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option of
+\pkg{chapterbib}, because this redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which
+interferes with the redefinition by \pkg{apacite}. You can use the
+\pkgoption{sectionbib} option of \pkg{apacite} to accomplish that the
+bibliography or bibliographies are sections, rather than chapters.
+
+Moreover, \pkg{apacite} is configured such that it takes a section as default
+if it is in the main matter (signified by \cmd{\mainmatter}) of the document.
+In the back matter (\cmd{\backmatter}) the bibliography is put in a chapter.
+This is also the case if \cmd{\chapter} is defined but \cmd{\mainmatter} not.
+(Is this possible? Perhaps for reports?) Consequently, the
+\pkgoption{sectionbib} option is only useful in specific circumstances. The
+\pkgoption{nosectionbib} forces the bibliography to be a chapter, provided
+\cmd{\chapter} is defined. (I figured a \pkgoption{chapterbib} option would be
+a bit confusing, so I stuck with \pkgoption{nosectionbib}.)
+
+The \pkg{bibunits} package is an alternative to \pkg{chapterbib}. It allows a
+greater flexibility in choosing the scope of a bibliography (chapter, section,
+or arbitrarily defined part of the document). In previous versions, there
+have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{bibunits},
+but these have now been solved.
+
+The \pkg{multibib} and \pkg{multibbl} packages support using multiple
+bibliographies simultaneously. Thus, one can cite entries from multiple
+bibliographies in the same part of the document. This may be useful of one
+wants thematically different bibliographies or separate bibliographies for
+references in different scripts (e.g., Latin and Greek). These packages
+accomplish this by introducing different citation commands for the different
+bibliographies. \pkg{apacite} contains compatibility code such that these
+packages can be used jointly with \pkg{apacite}.
+
+The \pkg{bibtopic} package offers a similar functionality, but instead of
+using separate citation commands, it requires the user to keep the references
+in different \fname{.bib} files, so that there is one bibliography per
+\fname{.bib} file. \pkg{apacite} contains a little bit of compatibility code,
+which largely seems to work, but ``and'' between authors is always ``\&'', even
+in \cmd{\citeA}. I hope to fix this in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+Another package that offers similar functionality is \pkg{splitbib}. This
+uses neither different citation commands, nor separate \fname{.bib} files.
+rather, it requires the user to declare the ``category'' of each cited
+reference, typically at the beginning of the document. Again, \pkg{apacite}
+contains compatibility code such that simultaneous redefinitions of some
+of the citation and reference list commands do not conflict.
+
+A few caveats must be mentioned here. First, simultaneous bibliographies
+only work well if it is guaranteed that there are no ambiguities in the
+reference lists. With a single bibliography, ambiguities are resolved at the
+\BibTeX{} stage by adding initials to ambiguous first author names,
+adding additional authors before (or instead of) ``et al.\hbox{}'' to
+ambiguous multiple-author lists, and adding ``a'' and ``b'' suffixed to
+the year for references to different documents with the same authors published
+in the same year. Because, with the exception of \pkg{splitbib}, these
+packages require multiple \BibTeX{} runs on separate selections of references,
+\fname{apacite.bst} can only resolve ambiguities within the same bibliography.
+When there are cross-bibliography ambiguities, these are not resolved. It
+seems like these packages are primarily intended to work with numbered
+citation styles, or otherwise labeled citation styles, so that unique
+cross-bibliography numbers or labels can be generated at the \LaTeX{} stage.
+
+Second, I wrote the compatibility code in early 2006 and have not
+recently tested it thoroughly.
+Please let me know if you encounter problems. Then I'll
+try to fix them or at the least mention them in the next version of the
+manual. In particular, I believe that usage of \cmd{\nocitemeta} is not
+prefectly integrated yet: You may get the ``References marked\dots'' message
+even if the relevant bibliography does not contain marked references,
+or references that are \cmd{\nocitemeta}'d for one bibliography but not
+for another are marked for both. I don't think the \cmd{\nocitemeta}
+command is used much, so I would be surprised if anybody encountered
+such problems, but please let me know if you do. Then I'll try to fix them.
+
+Third, the compatibility code for all of these packages either follows
+instructions given in those packages, or brutally redefines part of the
+code of those packages. If these packages change, this may mean that
+new compatibility problems are created, or that improved features of
+these packages are not available when combined with \pkg{apacite}. I do
+not have the time to regularly check for updates of these packages and
+then study changes and/or test compatibility again. Instead, I only take
+action when a user notifies me of a problem, or I coincidentally find out
+myself. Therefore, again, please let me know if you encounter problems.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{\pkg{bibentry}}
+\label{sec:compat-bibentry}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\pkg{bibentry} is a package that allows including a complete reference
+list entry in the text (or a footnote, which is arguably more common).
+Previous versions of \pkg{apacite} were incompatible with \pkg{bibentry},
+but I believe this has been fixed now. However, the APA reference format,
+which uses periods to separate the elements of a reference list entry and
+not commas, does not appear to be very suitable for in-text use, so this
+is most likely only useful for footnotes that do not contain any other text.
+Also note that the final period of the reference entry is not suppressed.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Programs for conversion to html, rtf, etc.}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+There are several programs that convert \LaTeX{} files to other types
+of files, most notably \fname{html} and \fname{rtf}. This may, for example,
+be useful if you want to publish your document on the internet or if you
+are requested to send a ``Word'' file to a journal. I have received reports
+that \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} do not handle documents that use
+\pkg{apacite} well. Therefore, I have studied these programs. This section
+contains my observations. Note that these are quite old and not updated, and
+it is quite likely that the software mentioned in this section has been
+altered (improved) considerably. Therefore, the information may be outdated.
+Please let me know if there are major changes that I should be aware of.
+
+\latextohtml{} is a \Perl{} program that converts a \LaTeX{} input
+file into one or more \fname{.html} files, so that a document that is prepared
+with \LaTeX{} can be used as a (user-friendly) internet document.
+Similarly, \LaTeXrtf{} is a standalone program that converts a \LaTeX{}
+document to \fname{.rtf} format, which can be read by most word processors.
+This may be convenient if you (a \LaTeX{} user) want to share a document with
+someone who does not work with \LaTeX{}, or as mentioned above, if you are
+required to send a ``Word'' file to a journal.
+Both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} implement \LaTeX{} macros etc.\ in
+another programming language (\latextohtml{}: \Perl{}; \LaTeXrtf{}: C) and
+process the \fname{.tex} files directly. This design implies that the
+conversion program must know the definitions of all \LaTeX{} macros that
+are used. A drawback of this design is that essentially the same code has
+to be written in different programming languages (\LaTeX{} macros for the
+\fname{.sty} file, \Perl{} for \latextohtml{}, and C for \LaTeXrtf{}), but
+typically with some adaptations specific for the application at hand.
+
+With \LaTeXrtf{}, the \LaTeX{} macros that it is able to process are included
+in the C source code that is compiled. Consequently, no user additions are
+possible in principle. However, the source code is freely available, so if you
+define a \LaTeX{} macro, you could adapt \LaTeXrtf{}'s source code and
+recompile \LaTeXrtf{}. It is obvious that this is very inconvenient,
+especially if \LaTeX{} macros are defined differently for different styles or
+if they are defined differently in different parts of the same document.
+Version~1.9.15 and higher of \LaTeXrtf{} contains some support for
+\pkg{apacite}, but lags a few versions of \pkg{apacite} behind and thus
+doesn't work with recent versions of \pkg{apacite}. Moreover, even if this
+would be fixed, e.g., because I (or you) send patches to the \LaTeXrtf{}
+authors, this wouldn't do justice to the flexibility of \pkg{apacite}, i.e.,
+its customization options.
+
+In contrast with this, \latextohtml{} allows the possibility to supply
+external \Perl{} scripts. If \latextohtml{} encounters a
+\cmdtwo{usepackage}{package} command in the document, it attempts to read the
+corresponding \opt{package}\fname{.perl} \Perl{} script. \latextohtml{} is
+shipped with many such \Perl{} scripts. There is not one for \pkg{apacite},
+but there is one for \pkg{natbib}, which could possibly be adapted for
+\pkg{apacite}. Alternatively, you could use the \pkg{natbib} citation commands
+and use the \pkg{natbib} package (e.g., through loading \pkg{apacite}
+with the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option), which should work.
+
+An alternative to both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} is \TeXht{}. This is
+a collection of programs and style files that convert \LaTeX{} to
+various formats, such as html, xml, and OpenOffice format. If you have
+OpenOffice, the latter can be used to convert to Word (or rtf) format.
+The principle of \TeXht{} is to let \LaTeX{} do most of the formatting and
+processing of commands, and do the conversion at low-level \TeX{} commands.
+In this way, all newly defined commands and user-defined changes are
+automatically supported. This even carries over to redefinitions of macros
+in the middle of a document. However, for some specific purposes, there are
+some additional things that must be arranged. Therefore, \TeXht{} contains a
+large list of \fname{.4ht} files that are necessary to support various
+\LaTeX{} packages. One of these is the \fname{apacite.4ht} file. The main
+purpose of this file is to make citations into hyperlinks to the corresponding
+entries in the reference list. Currently, this only works partially, but
+the citation text itself is formatted correctly, so this is only a
+relatively minor inconvenience. But, of course, it would be better if this
+would work perfectly. Perhaps I'll study the problems in the future and
+solve this for a future version (although, technically, it is a \TeXht{}
+problem and not an \pkg{apacite} problem).
+
+The choice of which converter to use will typically not (only) depend on how
+good it works in conjunction with \pkg{apacite}. Furthermore, apart from the
+converters mentioned above, there are several additional converters that I
+haven't studied at all. I will only study them if I receive reports about
+incompatibility and even then it is far from certain that I will be willing or
+able to fix the problems. It would be very demanding if I would have to define
+the \pkg{apacite} commands in a large number of programming languages for a
+large number of different converters. Because I prefer the design of \TeXht{}
+and because this converter seems to work best at the moment, I will give a
+bit more attention to this one.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Generating an author index}
+\label{sec:autindex}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{apacite} package contains an option to (almost) automatically
+generate an author index. This is done by using the \fname{apacitex.bst}
+\BibTeX{} style file instead of \fname{apacite.bst} and loading the
+\fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package with the \pkgoption{index} option,
+either explicitly or implicitly through one of the \pkgoption{stdindex},
+\pkgoption{tocindex}, \pkgoption{emindex}, or \pkgoption{ltxemindex} options.
+
+In earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, the \pkgoption{index} option
+automatically loaded the \pkg{index} package for multiple indexes, so that
+you can have a subject index as well as an author index. However,
+the current document uses the standard \pkg{ltxdoc} class for documenting
+\LaTeX{} packages, and this class uses another method for supporting
+multiple indexes, which appears incompatible with the \pkg{index} package.
+I have been unable to resolve these compatibility problems and,
+therefore, have implemented another way to generate an author index in
+addition to other indexes. This uses the same principles as \pkg{ltxdoc}
+and thus does work for this user's manual. As a consequence,
+\pkg{apacite} now offers options that generate the author index either
+with the \pkg{index} package or without it.
+
+The \pkgoption{indexpackage} option implies that author indexing is done
+according to the \pkg{index}-scheme, whereas the \pkgoption{noindexpackage}
+uses the \pkg{ltxdoc}-based scheme. These options are ignored if the
+\pkgoption{index} option of \pkg{apacite} is not requested. When the
+\pkgoption{index} option is requested, the \pkgoption{indexpackage} option
+loads the \pkg{index} package. This is the default unless it is disabled
+by using either the \pkgoption{noindexpackage} option or the
+\pkgoption{ltxemindex} option.
+
+Obviously, the \pkg{index} package must be available in a directory that
+is read by \LaTeX{} if the \pkgoption{indexpackage} option is requested,
+either explicitly or implicitly. If a subject index is desired, it must be
+defined by the user, it is not defined by \pkg{apacite}. See the manual of
+the \pkg{index} package on how to do this. A default author index \emph{is}
+defined by \pkg{apacite}. The author index is then requested by putting
+\begin{verbatim}
+\printindex[autx]
+\end{verbatim}
+at the point in the \LaTeX{} document where the index is supposed to appear.
+To include the author index in the processed document, the following sequence
+must be followed: First, \LaTeX{}, which puts citation entries in the
+\fname{.aux} file. Second, \BibTeX{}, which generates the bibliography in the
+\fname{.bbl} file. Third, \LaTeX{} (at least) twice, which puts index entries
+in a \fname{.adx} file, Fourth, \MakeIndex{}, which uses the \fname{.adx} file
+as input and puts the formatted index in a \fname{.and} file, which can be
+processed by \LaTeX{}. So, if the main document is \fname{filename.tex}, then
+\MakeIndex{} must be called as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+makeindex -o filename.and filename.adx
+\end{verbatim}
+although the command with which the \MakeIndex{} program must be called
+may on some systems be slightly different, e.g., \fname{makeinde} or
+\fname{makeindx}. Furthermore, several additional options may be chosen
+on the \MakeIndex{} command line. Fifth, run \LaTeX{} again, which
+(finally) includes the formatted author index in the typeset document
+(\fname{.dvi} or \fname{.pdf} file).
+
+The \pkg{apacite} package provides some options to change the appearance of
+the index somewhat. With (only) the \pkgoption{index} option, the indexing
+facility is turned on, but the \envirname{theindex} environment is not explicitly
+(re)defined by \pkg{apacite}. This means that this environment is defined just
+like in standard \LaTeX{}, or the \pkg{index} package, or some other package
+that has been loaded that redefines this environment.
+
+The \pkgoption{stdindex} option explicitly uses the definition of the
+\envirname{theindex} environment that is defined in the \pkg{index} package
+[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)].
+With this definition, the index does not appear in the table of contents. With
+the \pkgoption{tocindex} option, this definition is augmented with a table of
+contents entry. With the \pkgoption{emindex} option, there are some alternative
+definitions. It writes a table of contents entry as well, but the index itself
+is now set in two columns using the \pkg{multicol} package instead of the
+\cmd{\twocolumn} command, the text of the index is set in small type, and the
+page head is not put in uppercase. The \pkgoption{ltxemindex} option uses
+the same style as the \pkgoption{emindex} option, except that it does not
+load the \pkg{index} package and is thus tailored to a somewhat different
+indexing method.
+
+When a table of contents entry is desired, another additional \LaTeX{} run is
+required to obtain the table of contents with the author index included. In
+exceptional cases, the extra line in de table of contents may cause the text
+to be moved as well, so that it may be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} a second
+time, followed by yet one or two more \LaTeX{} runs.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\APACstdindex}
+\DescribeMacro{\APACtocindex}
+\DescribeMacro{\APACemindex}
+\DescribeMacro{\APACltxemindex}
+The definitions of the index discussed apply to all indexes in the
+document, so to, for example, the subject index as well as the author
+index. This may be undesirable, and therefore \pkg{apacite} provides
+the \cmd{\APACstdindex}, \cmd{\APACtocindex}, \cmd{\APACemindex}, and
+\cmd{\APACltxemindex} commands to switch index styles.
+These correspond to the package options \pkgoption{stdindex},
+\pkgoption{tocindex}, \pkgoption{emindex}, and \pkgoption{ltxemindex},
+respectively. Note, however, that the \pkgoption{ltxemindex} option
+and/or the \cmd{\APACltxemindex} command generally cannot be used in
+a document that uses one of the other styles, and vice versa, because
+the way \pkg{index} works is incompatible with how standard \LaTeX{}
+indexing works.
+
+If you want a different index style, either for all indexes in your document or
+only for some indexes, you can define such a style using the
+\cmd{\renewenvironment} command in the appropriate place. See the standard
+\LaTeX{} documentation for this command. The source code of the four commands
+mentioned here can be used as a template for such a style definition.
+
+Finally, some elements of the formatting of the index itself can be changed
+by using (and/or writing) an \fname{.ist} file containing the preferred
+options. \MakeIndex{} should then be called with the filename of this index
+style file after a ``\verb+-s+'' option on the command line, so, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+makeindex -s mystyle.ist -o filename.and filename.adx
+\end{verbatim}
+The \MakeIndex{} documentation discusses the possible options that can be put
+into the \fname{.ist} file.
+
+As discussed in sections~\ref{sec:options}, \ref{subsec:fields}, and
+\ref{subsec:labels}, the \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} and
+\pkgoption{includecorporate} options can be used to either
+exclude corporate authors from the author index or include them in it.
+The \cmd{\bibcorporate} command must be used in the \fname{.bib} file
+to denote a corporate author.
+
+For some of the examples from the APA manual, I had to use quite advanced
+\LaTeX{} tricks to obtain the correct formatting in the text, the reference
+list, and the author index; see section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. This will
+typically not be necessary in practice. In the unlikely event that you
+encounter similar difficult cases, it will usually be sufficient to use
+a relatively simple trick in the \fname{.bib} file. In rare situations,
+this may still give incorrect formatting, most likely in the author index.
+Somewhat less rare is the situation when there is such a problematic case
+but you also want to use the \pkg{hyperref} package. The tricks I used
+conflict with \pkg{hyperref}.
+
+An easy solution to incorrect formatting and/or sorting in the author index is
+to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually. This should be done at a time when
+\BibTeX{} will not have to be run again. Otherwise, the changes would be
+overwritten by the next \BibTeX{} run. This editing of the \fname{.bbl} file
+is not in the \TeX-spirit, but in my experience---I used it for two books
+with lots of references \cite{meijer1998, WaMe00}, with a previous version of
+\pkg{apacite} that caused a fair amount of problematic cases---this takes very
+little time, usually only minutes. Compare that with the time spent on writing
+a book, or with the time that would be necessary to manually make an author
+index. I also used it more recently for an edited book \cite{dLMe08a}
+with an adapted version of \pkg{apacite}, with essentially the current
+author indexing code, and had to do very little editing. The author index
+of the current document is automatically generated and does not contain
+any manual editing, although it does contain some advanced \LaTeX{} code
+to fix some issues.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\AX}
+The connection between the \fname{.bbl} file and the author index is through
+\cmd{\AX} commands that are entered by \fname{apacitex.bst} in the
+\fname{.bbl} file. These are responsible for the author indexing facilities.
+By looking at the contents of the \fname{.bbl} file, it is not difficult
+to see how problematic cases must be edited. For example, the entry for Bender
+is generated by the following lines:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AX{bender jdirector
+@Bender, J\BPBI
+ {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}.}%
+\end{verbatim}
+This can be changed to
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AX{bender j
+@Bender, J.}%
+\end{verbatim}
+which is formatted correctly in the author index without the need for
+advanced \LaTeX{} code, and conflicts with \pkg{hyperref} are resolved.
+Note that \pkg{apacite} uses the \opt{key}|@|\opt{visual} form of
+indexing. This form is used in \MakeIndex{} to distinguish between the actual
+representation in the index and the place where it should occur. The \opt{key}
+is used by \MakeIndex{} to sort the entry, but the entry actually appearing in
+the index is \opt{visual}. In the \opt{key} part as formatted by
+\pkg{apacite}, all names are in lower case letters and all accents and
+punctuation are removed. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} inserts \emph{two} spaces
+between surname and initials, and to \MakeIndex{}, two spaces are different
+from one space. Spaces between surnames are removed, as well as spaces between
+initials. Finally, note that \pkg{apacite} always inserts a new line before
+the ``|@|''. This is to avoid bad line breaks by \BibTeX. To \MakeIndex,
+this means that each citation \opt{key} ends with a space.
+
+The author index of the current document does not contain entries for the authors
+Shocked and Goodenough as cited in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, although it does for
+the reference list part. The reason for this is that the \fieldname{key} field was
+used for the citations. If you use the \fieldname{key} (and \fieldname{firstkey})
+field and you want the authors in the author index as well, you have to include
+the index command \cmd{\AX} explicitly. For example, the \fieldname{key} field
+for Michelle Shocked is
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the
+ Waterfall}{track~5}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+and if we change this into
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked\AX{shocked m
+ @Shocked, M.}}{1992}{Over the Waterfall}{track~5}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+then citations to her are included in the author index.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\corporateAX}
+For corporate authors, the \cmd{\corporateAX} command is used instead of the
+\cmd{\AX} command. Depending on whether the \pkgoption{suppresscorporate}
+option or the \pkgoption{includecorporate} option is requested, either explicitly
+or implicitly, \cmd{\corporateAX} either swallows its argument or is equivalent
+to \cmd{\AX}. To make sure that this ends up correctly in the author index,
+it is important that this command as entered in the \fieldname{key} and/or
+\fieldname{firstkey} field is exactly as output by \fname{apacite.bst} for
+the \fieldname{author} field. The easiest way to accomplish this is to start
+with \fieldname{key} and/or \fieldname{firstkey} fields that do not have
+the \cmd{\corporateAX} command yet. Then, run \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} and
+extract the correct \cmd{\corporateAX} command from the \fname{.bbl} file
+and insert this in the \fieldname{key} and/or \fieldname{firstkey} fields.
+Rerun \BibTeX{} and after that proceed as usual. For example, the following
+is an excerpt from an entry for one of the examples from section~3.96 in the
+APA manual:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+ firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}},
+ key = {{NIMH}},
+\end{verbatim}
+If I run \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} on the current document, the \fname{.bbl}
+file contains the lines
+\begin{verbatim}
+\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+@{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+Note the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command and the additional braces. If these
+are left out,
+\begin{verbatim}
+ firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health
+ [NIMH]}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+ @{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+ key = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+ @{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+then this organization gets two separate entries in the author index, which
+is incorrect. Instead, if we copy them literally,
+\begin{verbatim}
+ firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health
+ [NIMH]}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+ @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}},
+ key = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+ @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+then everything is as desired. The additional spaces before the ``\verb+@+''
+sign make no difference, but percentage signs should not be included in
+the \fname{.bib} file at the end of lines to hide a line break (as in
+\LaTeX{}), because \BibTeX{} does not recognize the percentage sign as
+a comment. Rather, it includes it in the \fname{.bbl} file and sometimes
+puts additional code behind it, which would then not be read by \LaTeX{}
+because \LaTeX{} does interpret the percent sign as a comment. This
+behavior has now become less likely, because \pkg{apacite} inserts
+numerous line breaks in the \fname{.bbl} file to avoid this problem and,
+more importantly, line breaks inserted by \BibTeX{} at undesired
+locations (e.g., in the middle of a command name or in the argument of
+a \cmd{\url} command), but is still a possibility.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Annotated bibliographies}
+\label{sec:annotate}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Annotated bibliographies can be obtained by requesting
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{apacann}
+\end{verbatim}
+instead of
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{apacite}
+\end{verbatim}
+or
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{apacannx}
+\end{verbatim}
+instead of
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{apacitex}
+\end{verbatim}
+The \BibTeX{} style files \fname{apacann.bst} and \fname{apacannx.bst} are
+almost identical to \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst}, respectively.
+The only relevant difference is that these styles include the contents of the
+\fieldname{annote} or \fieldname{annotate} field in the output, thereby
+generating an annotated bibliography.
+
+According to \citeA[pp.~810--811]{TLC2}, the \pkg{annotation} style uses the
+\fieldname{annote} field for annotations, whereas the \pkg{annotate} style
+defines the \fieldname{annotate} field for this purpose. To be compatible with
+both, \pkg{apacann} and \pkg{apacannx} support both of these fields. However,
+they are not both included in the output for the same reference, in case
+someone wants to make a file that is compatible with both the \pkg{annotate}
+and \pkg{annotation} styles and thus duplicates the information. In such a case,
+the contents of the \fieldname{annote} field is included in the output.
+
+\DescribeEnv{APACrefannotation}
+The annotation is inserted in the \fname{.bbl} file within a
+\envirname{APACrefannotation} environment. Hence, its formatting can be
+changed by the user by redefining this environment.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Auxiliary, ad hoc, and experimental commands in
+ \fname{apacdoc.sty}}
+\label{sec:apacdoc}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below cites all examples from the APA manual.
+This is a test of \pkg{apacite} and a proof that it does what it's
+supposed to do---format citations and reference lists complying with
+the APA rules. However, the APA manual discusses many nonstandard
+issues and several of them need nonstandard treatment. Some of these
+can only be formatted by what I call ``tricking'' the system. This
+has been done by defining several \LaTeX{} commands that are too
+specifically tailored for a certain reference, or ad hoc in other
+ways, or more generally experimental and not well tested, and likely
+to lead to more (compatibility) errors. Therefore,
+I do not consider these commands suitable for inclusion in the
+\pkg{apacite} package proper, that is, the file \fname{apacite.sty}.
+
+They are not important enough for that, and thus you would rarely need
+them, and for most of them I anticipated (or hoped) at one point that
+better solutions would be available in the future. Thus, it seemed
+quite likely that major changes in these commands would be made,
+and I didn't want to feel obliged to keep supporting them for backwards
+compatibility. Rather, I considered these as illustrations of the
+power of \LaTeX{} and templates that users can base their own tricks
+upon. I still largely feel the same way about these commands, although
+I'm not convinced anymore that within reasonable time I will come up
+with elegant solutions that make them obsolete. Nevertheless, I still
+make improvements in this direction.
+
+These auxiliary, ad hoc, and experimental commands are defined in a
+supplementary package file, \fname{apacdoc.sty}. As
+this name indicates, it is a package that is intended to be used
+for the \pkg{apacite} documentation (i.e., the current document).
+It contains several commands and settings (like page margins) that
+are not interesting outside this document. However, as mentioned
+above, I needed many of the commands defined in this file for the
+examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. Thus, you might encounter
+similar situations as well, and these commands may be useful for you.
+
+Because most of the commands in \fname{apacdoc.sty} will not be
+useful for you, it is generally not a good idea to load this file with
+\cmd{\usepackage} to use the commands that are useful to you.
+Instead, if you want to use them, you can copy their definitions
+to the top of your own document or personal style file (say,
+\fname{mysettings.sty}), study their behavior, and perhaps improve
+them. This reflects the ``illustration'' or ``template'' nature
+of these commands.
+
+Accordingly, this section briefly mentions the commands that may
+be useful outside the context of the current document. Thorough
+documentation is outside the scope of this manual; their definitions
+can be studied in the source code of \fname{apacdoc.sty}, and their
+usage is illustrated in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. I will mildly
+support them, though: If you want to use them, you can ask me
+questions, but I will not put as much effort in fixing possible
+problems as I do with proper \pkg{apacite} issues.
+
+The list below mentions (some of) the numbered examples in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} in which the commands are used.
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[\cmd{\biblecite}]
+\DescribeMacro{\biblecite}
+\DescribeMacro{\bibleciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\bibleciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullbiblecite}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullbibleciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullbibleciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortbiblecite}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortbibleciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortbibleciteNP}
+This command, and its siblings \cmd{\bibleciteA}, \cmd{\bibleciteNP},
+\cmd{\fullbiblecite}, \cmd{\fullbibleciteA}, \cmd{\fullbibleciteNP},
+\cmd{\shortbiblecite}, \cmd{\shortbibleciteA}, and
+\cmd{\shortbibleciteNP} are commands for citing the Bible. They
+have one mandatory argument: the relevant chapter and verse, for
+example, |\biblecite{1~Cor.\ 13:1}| (ex.~3.100-3).
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibleversion}]
+\DescribeMacro{\bibleversion}
+This defines the version of the Bible used:
+|\bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}|. Use this before using
+the bible citing commands, typically in the preamble of your document.
+Note that the Bible is not included in the reference list. You can use
+these commands as templates for references to other ``classic'' works.
+See ex.~3.100-3.
+
+\item[\cmd{\citesong}]
+\DescribeMacro{\citesong}
+\DescribeMacro{\citeAsong}
+\DescribeMacro{\citesongNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullcitesong}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullciteAsong}
+\DescribeMacro{\fullcitesongNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortcitesong}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortciteAsong}
+\DescribeMacro{\shortcitesongNP}
+This command and its siblings \cmd{\citeAsong}, \cmd{\citesongNP},
+\cmd{\fullcitesong}, \cmd{\fullciteAsong}, \cmd{\fullcitesongNP},
+\cmd{\shortcitesong}, \cmd{\shortciteAsong}, and \cmd{\shortcitesongNP}
+cite a song as required by the APA (except for the relative
+placement of closing quotes and comma). See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibsong}]
+\DescribeMacro{\bibsong}
+For \cmd{\citesong} and its siblings, the \fieldname{key} field
+(and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) should contain the relevant
+information in the form of a protected \cmd{\bibsong} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibInstring}]
+\DescribeMacro{\bibInstring}
+This command has one argument. The macro changes the definition of
+the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the argument and then immediately changes
+the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time
+change. Used to change ``In'' a book to ``On'' a CD for citing songs.
+See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\BOn}]
+\DescribeMacro{\BOn}
+``On'', for citing songs ``On'' a CD. See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\DSMcite}]
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMfullcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMfullciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMfullciteNP}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMshortcite}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMshortciteA}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMshortciteNP}
+This command and its siblings \cmd{\DSMciteA}, \cmd{\DSMciteNP},
+\cmd{\DSMfullcite}, \cmd{\DSMfullciteA}, \cmd{\DSMfullciteNP},
+\cmd{\DSMshortcite}, \cmd{\DSMshortciteA}, and \cmd{\DSMshortciteNP}
+cite the DSM. See ex.~29. They can also be used for other
+``named'' works. \pkg{natbib} offers a similar functionality
+through the definition of an \emph{alias}, but I think that to
+get this working in the way the APA wants (i.e., the alias is not
+used for the first citation, but only for second and subsequent
+citations), it cannot be directly used. But the technical
+implementation of its functionality may form a useful basis
+for a better (more elegant) solution for this type of citation.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibDSM}]
+\DescribeMacro{\bibDSM}
+For \cmd{\DSMcite} and its siblings, the \fieldname{key} field
+(and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) should contain the relevant
+\cmd{\bibDSM} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric Association}{Diagnostic
+ and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}{4th
+ ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+See ex.~29.
+
+\item[\cmd{\DSMauthor},
+\cmd{\DSMfulltitle},
+\cmd{\DSMedition},
+\cmd{\DSMshorttitle}]
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMauthor}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMfulltitle}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMedition}
+\DescribeMacro{\DSMshorttitle}
+These four commands extract the four elements of a \cmd{\bibDSM}
+command. They are used in the \cmd{\DSMcite} command and its
+siblings, but may occasionally be useful by themselves.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibliteral}] \DescribeMacro{\bibliteral}
+This command is used in some of the examples in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} to put some literal text into the
+reference list that would otherwise be abbreviated to a
+single ``initial'' at the \BibTeX{} stage. For example, in
+ex.~4.08, the authors are ``Bulatao, E. (with Winford, C.~A.)'',
+where ``(with Winford, C.~A.)'' is inserted by wrapping it
+in a \cmd{\bibliteral} command, which itself is wrapped in
+an additional pair of braces, so that \BibTeX{} treats it a
+a complicated ``accent'' and the argument as a complicated
+single character. This text should not be put in the author
+index, and therefore some manipulation through redefining
+the meaning of this command before and after the reference
+list is used to suppress this text, as well as an additional
+period, there. Used in examples 4.08, 65, 66, 68, and 70.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibinitial}] \DescribeMacro{\bibinitial}
+This command is similar to \cmd{\bibliteral}. It is used in
+one example (ex.~67), where the ``author'' is a ``(Producer)'',
+but the initial of the author is put in the text because there
+is another author with the same surname (Miller). This
+causes problems not encountered in the examples where
+\cmd{\bibliteral} is used, and after a lot of trial and error,
+the current definition of \cmd{\bibinitial} was developed
+to format this particular author correctly in text, reference
+list, and author index. It looks like this is an improved
+version of the \cmd{\bibliteral} command, so perhaps in the
+next release I'll use \cmd{\bibinitial} for all the examples
+in which now \cmd{\bibliteral} is used.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibreftext}] \DescribeMacro{\bibreftext}
+This command takes two arguments. By default, it ignores the
+first and inserts the second in the output. In this manual,
+it is redefined before the reference list to ignore its
+second argument and insert the first argument in the output.
+This is used in ex.~17, where the year in the in-text
+citation should be ``1992/1993'', whereas in the reference
+list, it should be 1992 (and the 1993 is mentioned elsewhere).
+For reprints and translations, this is handled automatically
+by \pkg{apacite} if you use the \fieldname{original*} fields,
+but this one is different.
+
+\item[\cmd{\Dutchvon}] \DescribeMacro{\Dutchvon}
+This command is equivalent to \cmd{\bibreftext}, but is used
+for a different situation, and therefore, depending on
+language, subtle style differences, and other preferences,
+you might want to change the definition of one but not of
+the other. This one illustrates how the Dutch way to treat
+``von'' parts of surnames can be handled. It is discussed
+in ex.~B-2, although it is not actually used in the examples,
+because the Dutch way to treat ``von'' parts is not APA
+style.
+
+\item[\cmd{\SwapArgs}] \DescribeMacro{\SwapArgs}
+This command takes two arguments and swaps their order. This
+is useful if you cite a work whose title, (corporate) author,
+or other element starts with an article that should be
+disregarded for ordering. \pkg{apacite} disregards ``a'',
+``an'', and ``the'' in the sorting of titles, but these are
+obviously English. For French, you could say
+\begin{verbatim}
+ title = {\SwapArgs{Marseillaise}{La }},
+\end{verbatim}
+which is thus alphabetized under M. (Not used in the examples.)
+
+\item[\cmd{\swallownext}] \DescribeMacro{\swallownext}
+Eats up the next character. Dangerous but sometimes useful.
+Used in the definitions of some of the following commands.
+
+\item[\cmd{\swallowdot}] \DescribeMacro{\swallowdot}
+Eats up the next character, but only if it's a dot (`.').
+Used in the definitions of some of the following commands.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibnodot}] \DescribeMacro{\bibnodot}
+Used as |\bibnodot{.}|. Eats the period, but prevents \BibTeX{}
+from adding one. Used in examples 78, 79, 87, 91, and 95.
+This is likely to be useful for many users, and is stable, so it
+may be upgraded to \fname{apacite.sty} in the next release of
+\pkg{apacite}. The only thing against this is that it is used in
+highly unelegant manual formatting of a fairly large piece of the
+description of a reference to a website in a
+\fieldname{howpublished} field. I'd prefer to avoid this, but that
+would require either adding another idiosyncratic field or even
+less elegant trickery in the \fname{.bib} file.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}] \DescribeMacro{\bibskipbracenodot}
+Suppresses the period after a subsequent closing brace. Quickly leads
+to errors because it uses very low level \TeX{} code that (locally)
+changes some fundamental settings. This is used in some examples
+(65, 68) where \cmd{\bibliteral} is used to insert a description
+of a first ``author'', such as ``(Producer)''. This is
+interpreted by \BibTeX{} as a complicated one-letter first
+name, and thus it adds a period to make it into an initial.
+This period is the one that's eaten by this command.
+Used in examples 65 and 68.
+
+\item[\cmd{\indexskipbracenodot}] \DescribeMacro{\indexskipbracenodot}
+This serves the same purpose as \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}, and it
+uses the same code, but whereas \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot} is
+activated for the reference list, \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot}
+is only activated for the author index. This has technical
+reasons and it does not work under all circumstances. Used in
+examples 4.08-3, 65, 66, and 68.
+
+\item[\cmd{\APACredefineOnce}] \DescribeMacro{\APACredefineOnce}
+This macro takes two arguments: (1) the name of a command (without the
+backslash) and (2) arbitrary \TeX{} code. It then redefines the
+command (1) to the \TeX{} code (2) as a one-time change, so after the
+command (1) has been invoked once, it reverts to its definition before
+\cmd{\APACredefineOnce} was issued. This can be used to redefine, say,
+\cmd{\BRetrievedFrom} from ``Retrieved from'' to ``Retrieved from
+Poverty Alleviation website'' for a single reference but restore it
+to ``Retrieved from'' immediately afterwards.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibeditortype}] \DescribeMacro{\bibeditortype}
+This has one argument. The macro changes the definitions of the macros
+\cmd{\BED} and \cmd{\BEDS} to the argument and then immediately
+changes the definitions back to their old definitions. So it makes a
+one-time change. This is used when there is someone in an ``editor-type''
+role, but with another designation, such as ``producer'' or ``director''.
+Ex.\ 36, 67, and 68.
+
+\item[\cmd{\renewbibeditortype}] \DescribeMacro{\renewbibeditortype}
+The above-mentioned definition of \cmd{\bibeditortype} is only relevant
+in the reference list: In the citations in the text and in the author
+index, the command should do nothing. Therefore, the command is
+initially defined as ``nothing''. The definition discussed above is
+initialized by \cmd{\renewbibeditortype}. This command is executed
+just before the reference list in the current document. (After the
+reference list, \cmd{\bibeditortype} becomes ``nothing'' again.)
+
+\item[\cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}] \DescribeMacro{\BAbstractRetrieved}
+This command is similar to \cmd{\BRetrieved}, except that it
+inserts ``Abstract retrieved'' instead of ``Retrieved''. Used in
+examples 82 and 83.
+
+\item[\cmd{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}]
+\DescribeMacro{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}
+This command functions much like \cmd{\bibeditortype}: It replaces
+the next instance of \cmd{\BRetrieved} by \cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}.
+Used in examples 82 and 83.
+
+\item[\cmd{\noedition}] \DescribeMacro{\noedition}
+Suppresses the ``ed.'' (or ``\cmd{\BEd}'', rather) of an
+\fieldname{edition}. Used in examples 92 and 94 to format a
+string like ``Version~4'' as an \fieldname{edition}.
+
+\item[\cmd{\APACmanBeforeBib}] \DescribeMacro{\APACmanBeforeBib}
+Illustrates how some of the commands defined above are used in practice:
+This command is given just before the \cmd{\bibliography} command, and
+redefines some of the commands above, so that their meaning
+is different in the reference list from their meaning in the main text.
+Similar commands: \cmd{\APACmanBeforeIndex}, \cmd{\APACmanAfterIndex}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Known problems and todo-list}
+\label{sec:todo}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+With any kind of software, there is usually a list with known problems (bugs)
+and desirable future work (to-do), and \pkg{apacite} is no exception. These
+subjects will be discussed in this section.
+
+A class of problems was already discussed in section~\ref{sec:compat} above.
+This concerns the incompatibility of the \fname{.bib} file with other citation
+styles, through \pkg{apacite}-specific fields, APA-specific contents of
+fields, or through special tricks. These lead to correctly formatted
+references in APA style, but may cause problems with using the \fname{.bib}
+file with other styles (in case APA journals reject your article~\ldots). As
+discussed there, however, this problem is unavoidable and presumably not a
+very big problem to most users.
+
+An incomplete list of other known problems and things that I would
+like to do with \pkg{apacite} follows below. Several items of this list
+are the direct result of the tricks I had to use for the examples in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Fix a bug (which is unlikely to show up) in the \fname{.bst} file:
+ If there are two or more references, published in the same year, each
+ with 6 authors, the first 5 of which are the same but the 6th authors
+ are different, then these lead to ambiguous citations. The same thing
+ happens when one has 6 authors and another 7, with the same first 6
+ authors.
+\item In an \entryname{unpublished} entry, if \fieldname{author} and
+ \fieldname{organization} are equivalent, maybe we should replace
+ the latter with
+ ``Author'' in the output, analogous to the situation where
+ \fieldname{publisher} or \fieldname{institution} are equal to
+ \fieldname{author} in several of the other entry types.
+\item Solve several other rare cases where \pkgoption{apacite} does not
+ correctly implement the APA rules: (p.~175) If additional authors
+ are needed to resolve an ambiguity, end with ``et al.\hbox{}'',
+ even if this is only one author; (p.~179) citing the Qur'an;
+ (p.~184) same last name and same initials, but different first name;
+ (p.~185) ``ca.\hbox{}''; (p.~198) Advance online publication;
+ (p.~202) Abstract retrieved from; (pp.~208, 212) better deal with
+ named archives; (p.~214) uncertain author;
+ update the language files (\fname{.apc}) with correct definitions
+ of new text string commands; finish the examples file.
+ Many of these cases will not be a feature, but an ad-hoc workaround,
+ similar to the tricks that are described in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}.
+ Please contact me if you encounter any of these (or other
+ formatting errors) and need a workaround.
+\item Study referencing legal materials (Appendix~7.1).
+\item Support nonstandard types of authors, like ``Director'' and
+ ``Series Ed.\hbox{}''. This currently must be tricked in a
+ nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) can think of a better solution.
+\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This
+ currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you)
+ can think of a better solution.
+\item Add more options and/or commands for easier customization of reference
+ list and author index.
+\item Continue with transferring reference list formatting code from
+ \BibTeX{} to \LaTeX.
+\item Introduce options for the \BibTeX{} part, e.g., index vs.\ noindex (so
+ that \fname{apacitex.bst} becomes superfluous); full first names
+ instead of only initials, or perhaps options for putting initials
+ in front of (2nd and later) author names; unsorted reference lists
+ or lists sorted chronologically (forward or reverse; for CVs); etc.
+\item Extend the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command with an optional argument that
+ gives the abbreviated form, so that the \fieldname{firstkey} and
+ \fieldname{key} fields do not have to be used for this common situation.
+\item Define \BibTeX{} macros or strings for commonly encountered
+ journals (at least the APA journals).
+\item Allow \fieldname{lastchecked} fields of the form |2009-02-01| and/or
+ |2009/02/01| and/or other schemes, and translate these into
+ language-specific date strings.
+\item Rewrite and reorganize the documentation; perhaps create a ``getting
+ started'' document.
+\item Improve the source code documentation, esp.\ the formatting,
+ indexing, and cross-referencing. (You only see this if you regenerate
+ this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation} flag set.)
+\end{itemize}
+Quite likely, other problems will come up when using the current version of
+\pkg{apacite}. I have lots of ideas for improvements, extensions, options, and
+so forth, but not much time to devote to it. Therefore, it is difficult to give
+a good estimate of when I will release a new update. However, in the meantime,
+if you have questions, remarks, suggestions, or bug reports, you can e-mail them
+to me.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Examples of the APA manual}
+\label{sec:xmpl}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\bfseries Note: the text of this section has not been updated and
+reflects the working of the [2009/03/01] version of \pkg{apacite}
+vis-\`a-vis the 5th edition of the APA manual. The actual formatting
+is done by the current version of \pkg{apacite} and thus may not
+correspond to the text. This section is retained for the moment, because
+the majority may still be relevant and I haven't finished incorporating
+the examples from the 6th edition yet, and because it describes various
+workarounds and tips that may still be useful.}
+
+In this section, the \pkg{apacite} package is tested by citing the examples of
+the 5th edition of the APA manual \cite[pp.~207--281]{APAManual5}, and some
+additional references for additional purposes.
+
+The following list gives the examples from chapter~3 of the 5th edition of
+the APA manual, with
+section number. For these and all later examples, whenever I thought it
+necessary or desirable, I added some comments. These are indicated by the \EM{}
+symbol. Especially for later examples (from Chapter~4), the comments frequently
+pertain to the corresponding reference list entry.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[3.94] \citeA{3.94-1} compared reaction times\\
+ In a recent study of reaction times \cite{3.94-1}\\
+ In \citeyearNP{3.94-1} \citeauthor{3.94-1} compared
+ reaction times\\
+ In a recent study of reaction times, \citeA{3.94-1}
+ described the method\ldots. \citeauthor{3.94-1} also found
+\item[3.95] \citeA{3.95-1} found\\
+ \citeA{3.95-1} found\\
+ \citeauthor{3.95-1} found\\
+ \fullcite{3.95-2} and \fullcite{3.95-3}\\
+ \citeA{3.95-2} and \citeA{3.95-3}\\
+ \EM It seems that if ``et al.\hbox{}'' would refer to one additional
+ author, then this author is named instead of the ``et al.\hbox{}''
+ clause.\\
+ \citeA{3.95-4} and \citeA{3.95-5}\\
+ as \citeA{3.95-6} demonstrated\\
+ \EM The comma after ``Nightlinger'' in the reference list
+ does not look right, but is explicitly required by the APA.
+ Of course, with people as authors,
+ one almost always has initials (although I have seen
+ an example of an econometrician who only had
+ one name), so this problem is not likely to occur.
+ With nicknames (``screen names'' as they are called in the
+ APA manual below ex. 85) in messages to newsgroups, initials
+ are typically missing, but then there is usually (always?)
+ only one author, so the problem does not exist either.
+ The problem can, however, come up when there are two authors,
+ the first of which is a corporate author, or with artists,
+ e.g., the song ``Into the Groove'' is written by
+ Madonna and Stephen Bray. \\
+ as has been shown \cite{3.95-7}
+\item[3.96] \cite{3.96-1}\\
+ \cite{3.96-1}\\
+ \cite{3.96-2}\\
+ \EM If the \fieldname{firstkey} field is different for different
+ references
+ and the \fieldname{key} field is the same, then, analogous
+ to the use of extra authors in 3.95 above, \pkg{apacite}
+ uses the \fieldname{firstkey} field for all citations:\\
+ \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6};\\
+ \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6}.\\
+ Although this is a constructed example, these organizations
+ really exist. The ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond''
+ is the Royal Dutch Chess Association and the
+ ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond'' is the Royal Dutch
+ Skating Association. Both are abbreviated to KNSB and
+ presumably, both publish an annual report each year.
+ Furthermore, in these examples, I copied the contents of the
+ \fieldname{author} field to the \fieldname{publisher} field.
+ \pkg{apacite} recognizes this and puts the APA-requirement
+ ``Author'' as publisher description in the reference list.
+ Other styles may prefer the full publisher name again.
+\item[3.97] on free care \cite{3.97-1}\\
+ \EM The order of the
+ closing quotes and the comma is different from the
+ APA manual. I think this one is more logical, although the
+ APA manual's is the conventional one, presumably for
+ aesthetic reasons. I hope to implement this in a future
+ version.\\
+ the book \citeA{3.97-2}\\
+ \cite{3.97-3}\\
+ \EM If two articles both have no author and the title and
+ the year are the same, a's and b's should be used:
+ \citeA{3.97-4}, \citeA{3.97-5}, and \citeA{3.97-6}.
+ The latter two entries are correctly sorted by month,
+ through the way the month macros are defined in
+ the \fname{.bst} files.
+\item[3.98] \citeA{3.98-1} and \citeA{3.98-2} also found\\
+ \citeA{3.98-3} and \citeA{3.98-4} studied
+\item[3.99] Past research \cite{3.99-1,3.99-2}\\
+ Past research \cite{3.99-3,3.99-4,3.99-5}\\
+ Several studies
+ \cite{3.99-6,3.99-7,3.99-8,3.99-9,3.99-10,3.99-11}\\
+ Several studies \cite{3.99-12,3.99-13,3.99-14}\\
+ \EM \pkg{apacite} does not (yet?) sort the cited
+ references in the text (of course it does for the reference
+ list), as required by the APA manual.\\
+ (\citeNP{3.99-15}; see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})\\
+ \EM Note that I had to use \cmd{\citeNP} here.
+\item[3.100] \cite{3.100-1}\\
+ \EM This is not an example, but a rule in the text.
+ The ``\bibnodate'' is handled by the \cmd{\bibnodate}
+ macro. It is not clear whether it is really meant that the
+ in-text form is \citeauthor{3.100-1}, \citeyearNP{3.100-1}
+ or the more logically consistent \citeA{3.100-1}.
+ The former can (currently) only be accomplished by using
+ \cmd{\citeauthor} and \cmd{\citeyearNP} explicitly,
+ whereas the latter is simply obtained by \cmd{\citeA}.\\
+ \cite{3.100-1b}\\
+ \EM Again, this is not an example, but a rule in the text.\\
+ \cite{3.100-2}\\
+ \citeA{3.100-3}\\
+ \EM For citations to the bible, I used \cmd{\biblecite} and
+ several obvious variations on it, as discussed in
+ section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}:\\
+ \cmd{\bibleciteA}, first cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+ \cmd{\bibleciteA}, second cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+ \cmd{\biblecite}, first cite: \fullbiblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+ \cmd{\biblecite}, second cite: \biblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+ (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, first cite:
+ \fullbibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\
+ (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, second cite:
+ \bibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\
+ \EM Here, there probably should be a comma if it's the first
+ cite and not a comma when it's a later cite. A difficult one.\\
+ \EM Ancient Greek and Roman works should be treated similarly,
+ i.e., not be listed in the reference list. But it seems to me
+ that title and/or author must be given in the text as well.
+ Maybe I will try to construct a tentative example of this in
+ a future release.
+\item[3.101] \cite[p.~332]{3.101-1}\\
+ \cite[Chapter~3]{3.101-2}\\
+ \EM If you like, you can use the \pkg{apacite}-defined
+ abbreviation commands \verb+\BPG+ and \verb+\BCHAP+.\\
+ \cite[\P~5]{3.101-3}\\
+ \cite[Conclusion section, para.~1]{3.101-4}
+\item[3.102] \EM Personal communication is not really citation and should
+ be done manually:\\
+ T.~K. Lutes (personal communication, April 18, 2001)\\
+ (V.-G. Nguyen, personal communication, September 28, 1998)
+\item[3.103] \cite<see Table~2 of>[for complete data]{3.103-1}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\noindent
+Chapter~4 of the APA manual deals with the reference list
+and only mentions some in-text citation issues in passing.
+Therefore, the rest mainly requires a lot of moving back and forth
+between the reference list and this part. I start with the
+more general part, sections 4.01--4.15, presented similar to
+the sections from chapter~3 as presented above.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[4.04] \EM First, some examples mentioned in the text:\\
+ \citeA{4.04-t1},
+ \citeA{4.04-t2},
+ \citeA{4.04-t3},
+ \citeA{4.04-t4},
+ \citeA{4.04-t5},
+ \citeA{4.04-t6},
+ \citeA{4.04-t7},
+ \citeA{4.04-t8},
+ \citeA{4.04-t9}\\
+ \EM The APA manual states that prefixes must be treated
+ according to the rules of the language of origin. These rules
+ can differ a lot between languages (and countries) and it
+ is impossible to know all these rules. The APA manual gives two
+ examples, one in which ``De Vries'' is treated as the surname,
+ and one in which ``Helmholtz'' is the surname and ``von'' is
+ the ``von'' part of the name.
+
+ In the former case, the author is referred to as, say, ``De Vries
+ (1999)'' in text and ``De Vries, J. (1999).'', alphabetized under
+ ``D'' in the reference list. In the second example, the author is
+ referred to as, say, ``Helmholtz (1870)'' and listed in the
+ reference list as ``Helmholtz, H. L. F. von. (1870).'',
+ alphabetized under ``H''. To get this right, the author must be
+ defined as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {H. L. F. von Helmholtz},
+\end{verbatim}
+ or
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.},
+\end{verbatim}
+ then \BibTeX{} will assign the correct parts to the first names,
+ ``von''-part, and last name. The seemingly logical
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {Helmholtz, H. L. F. von},
+\end{verbatim}
+ will not be formatted correctly, because ``von'' is now
+ considered to be part of the first names and therefore
+ abbreviated to ``v.''.
+
+ Below, under example B-2, I will further discuss some
+ issues about ``von'' parts.
+
+ \EM The APA manual requires that numerals are alphabetized
+ as if they were spelled out. This is not done by \pkg{apacite},
+ so when applicable should be done by the user, e.g.\ by using
+ the \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command as discussed in
+ section~\ref{subsec:sort}. I give one fictitious example
+ \cite{4.04-t10}.
+
+ \citeA{4.04-1}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-2}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-3}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-4}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-5}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-6}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-7}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-8}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-9}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-10}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-11}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-12}\\
+ \EM As stated in the APA manual, an exception to the rule
+ of sorting by title if author and year are the same occurs
+ when the works are identified as a series. Then ordering
+ the parts of the series sequentially can be done using the
+ \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command.\\
+ \EM Here, it says that only ``A'' and ``The'' are excluded
+ from the sorting (if they are the initial words), but I
+ assume they mean ``An'' as well. This is how it is
+ implemented in \pkg{apacite}.
+
+ \citeA{4.04-13}\\
+ \citeA{4.04-14}\\
+ \EM I have not (yet?) studied referencing legal materials.
+ In the first version of \pkg{apacite}, I defined a
+ \entryname{literal} type, so that the users can
+ literally format such entries themselves. This is still
+ available. However, I think that if you need to refer to
+ legal cases, you can find a way to use the
+ \entryname{misc} type to get it right. I might study this
+ and give examples in a next version of \pkg{apacite}.
+\item[4.05] \citeA{4.05-1}\\
+ \nocitemeta{4.05-2}\citeA{4.05-2}\\
+ \EM Here I used the \cmd{\nocitemeta} command to let
+ \pkg{apacite} know that a meta-analysis is reported and this
+ work is included in it. As you can see, you can still cite
+ the work by using the normal citation commands such as
+ \cmd{\citeA}.
+\item[4.08] \citeA{4.08-1}\\
+ \citeA{4.08-2}\\
+ \citeA{4.08-3}\\
+ \EM To obtain the ``(with \dots)'' description in the
+ reference list, I used the \cmd{\bibliteral} command.
+ Furthermore, to get this formatted correctly in the author
+ index, I used the \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} command to
+ suppress an additional period. These commands are described
+ in section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}.
+
+ To \BibTeX{}, the \cmd{\bibliteral} construction is a complicated
+ accented character, which is the second initial of the author.
+ Consequently, this does not work properly with styles that put
+ the initials \emph{before} the surnames, and care must be
+ exercised with ``junior'' parts (see ex.~70). Furthermore,
+ this construction must be put between a pair of
+ braces in order for \BibTeX{} to treat it as an accented letter,
+ instead of abbreviating it.
+\item[4.09] \citeA{4.09-1}
+\item[4.10] \citeA{4.10-1}\\
+ \citeA{4.10-2}
+\item[4.11] \citeA{4.11-1}\\
+ \citeA{4.11-2}\\
+ \EM Note that in the \fname{.bib} file, the ``junior'' part comes
+ directly after the surname and a comma, with the initials
+ after the ``junior'' part, whereas in the formatted
+ reference list, the more logical order \opt{surname},
+ \opt{initials}, \opt{junior}, is used.
+\item[4.12] \citeA{4.12-1}
+\item[4.13] \citeA{4.13-1}\\
+ \EM ``For substantial reference works with a large editorial
+ board, naming the lead editor followed by \texttt{et al.} is
+ acceptable''. This is now implemented in \pkg{apacite} as
+ follows: If there are 7 or more editors, only the first one
+ is named, followed by ``et al.\hbox{}'' \cite{4.13-2}.
+\item[4.15] \citeA{4.15-1}\\
+ \EM Here I used the new \fieldname{url} and
+ \fieldname{lastchecked} fields.\\
+ \citeA{4.15-2}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\noindent
+The rest is from section~4.16, the examples section. The section number
+is omitted, but A--I are used instead for the unnumbered examples. For
+the numbered examples, only the number is given.
+The following enumerated list gives the example number, and
+the two basic in-text citation commands, both in a full and
+short form, of the examples.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[A-1] \cite{A-1} \\ \cite{A-1} \\ \fullciteA{A-1} \\ \citeA{A-1}
+\item \cite{ex1} \\ \cite{ex1} \\ \fullciteA{ex1} \\ \citeA{ex1}
+\item \cite{ex2} \\ \cite{ex2} \\ \fullciteA{ex2} \\ \citeA{ex2}
+\item \cite{ex3} \\ \cite{ex3} \\ \fullciteA{ex3} \\ \citeA{ex3}
+\item \cite{ex4} \\ \cite{ex4} \\ \fullciteA{ex4} \\ \citeA{ex4}\\
+ \cite{ex4-2} \\ \cite{ex4-2} \\ \fullciteA{ex4-2} \\ \citeA{ex4-2}\\
+ \EM Note that the list of authors can be finished with
+ ``\verb+and others+'' if there are more than 6 authors, or
+ all authors can be given, in which case \pkg{apacite} truncates
+ the list after the first~6. For compatibility with other styles,
+ the latter is preferable.
+\item \cite{ex5} \\ \cite{ex5} \\ \fullciteA{ex5} \\ \citeA{ex5}
+\item \cite{ex6} \\ \cite{ex6} \\ \fullciteA{ex6} \\ \citeA{ex6}
+\item \cite{ex7} \\ \cite{ex7} \\ \fullciteA{ex7} \\ \citeA{ex7}\\
+ \EM Here, I used
+\begin{verbatim}
+ month = spring,
+\end{verbatim}
+ using the new \verb+spring+ macro defined in the \fname{.bst} files.
+\item \cite{ex8} \\ \cite{ex8} \\ \fullciteA{ex8} \\ \citeA{ex8}\\
+ \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the
+ following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.\\
+ \EM The \fieldname{month} field is formatted as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ month = aug # "/" # sep,
+\end{verbatim}
+ which uses the month macros and \BibTeX's concatenation
+ operator `\verb+#+'.
+\item \cite{ex9} \\ \cite{ex9} \\ \fullciteA{ex9} \\ \citeA{ex9}\\
+ \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the
+ following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.
+\item \cite{ex10} \\ \cite{ex10}\\ \fullciteA{ex10}\\ \citeA{ex10}
+\item \cite{ex11} \\ \cite{ex11}\\ \fullciteA{ex11}\\ \citeA{ex11}\\
+ \EM Apparently, a weekly newspaper is not a magazine and should
+ therefore include ``p.\hbox{}'' or ``pp.\hbox{}'' in front of
+ the page
+ number(s), whereas a magazine article should not. I do not
+ understand the distinction very well and find it not very
+ useful as well, but will adhere to it. It means that the
+ \entryname{newspaper} type gets the ``pp.\hbox{}'', whereas
+ \entryname{magazine} and \entryname{article}, which are now
+ identical, do not.
+\item \cite{ex12} \\ \cite{ex12}\\ \fullciteA{ex12}\\ \citeA{ex12}\\
+ \EM Here, \verb+\emph{DSM-IV}+ must be entered without an extra
+ pair of braces in the title field; see ex.~73 for the intricacies
+ of braces and \verb+\emph+ in the title field.
+\item \cite{ex13} \\ \cite{ex13}\\ \fullciteA{ex13}\\ \citeA{ex13}\\
+ \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+1, Serial No.~231+.
+\item \cite{ex14} \\ \cite{ex14}\\ \fullciteA{ex14}\\ \citeA{ex14}\\
+ \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+3, Pt.~2+.
+\item \cite{ex15} \\ \cite{ex15}\\ \fullciteA{ex15}\\ \citeA{ex15}
+\item \cite{ex16} \\ \cite{ex16}\\ \fullciteA{ex16}\\ \citeA{ex16}
+\item \cite{ex17} \\ \cite{ex17}\\ \fullciteA{ex17}\\ \citeA{ex17}\\
+ \EM This case is the opposite of the more common situation where a
+ reprint is cited and an original publication year is given. I could
+ implement similar code to handle this case (and I may if I get requests
+ to do this), but for the moment, I decided to trick the system: I
+ used the \cmd{\bibreftext} command mentioned in
+ section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}. It must be called with two
+ arguments. Initially, it places the second argument in the text, but
+ just before the bibliography, its definition is changed so that the
+ first argument is placed in the reference list. By defining
+\begin{verbatim}
+ year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ in the \fname{.bib} file, the year is ``1992'' in the reference
+ list and ``1992/1993'' in the text citations. The \cmd{\protect}
+ is necessary to make sure that the \cmd{\bibreftext} macro is not
+ written out in the label-part of the bibliography, because then
+ only ``1992'' would appear in the text reference. The additional
+ pair of braces are necessary to make sure that the entry
+ is alphabetized correctly. When these are omitted, the entry
+ is alphabetized under the ``P'' of ``protect''. Of course, the
+ latter is only important if the reference list contains
+ multiple works by the same author(s), but the same phenomenon
+ is encountered when the \fieldname{author} or \fieldname{editor}
+ field starts with a command, or when there is no author or editor
+ and the \fieldname{title} field starts with a command, as in
+ the entry \citeA{4.04-t10} introduced in 4.04 above.
+
+ Of course, you can save yourself a lot of trouble by
+ obtaining the original article and citing that.
+\item \cite{ex18} \\ \cite{ex18}\\ \fullciteA{ex18}\\ \citeA{ex18}\\
+ \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+Suppl.~2+.
+\item \cite{ex19} \\ \cite{ex19}\\ \fullciteA{ex19}\\ \citeA{ex19}\\
+ \EM Other styles treat the \emph{Annual Review} as a book
+ (\emph{Sociological Methodology} is an even stronger example),
+ so this is a point where the \fname{.bib} file becomes
+ highly incompatible between styles. This cannot be avoided.
+\item \cite{ex20} \\ \cite{ex20}\\ \fullciteA{ex20}\\ \citeA{ex20}\\
+ \EM Here, the \fieldname{englishtitle} field is used for the
+ English translation of the German title. To get the German
+ capitalization of the title right, the capitalized words must
+ be protected by an additional pair of braces.
+\item \cite{ex21} \\ \cite{ex21}\\ \fullciteA{ex21}\\ \citeA{ex21}\\
+ \EM Apparently, a translator and original publication date
+ do not have to be mentioned here.
+\item Seidenberg and McClelland's study \cite<as cited in>{ex22}\\
+ %\cite{ex22} \\ \cite{ex22}\\ \fullciteA{ex22}\\ \citeA{ex22}\\
+ \EM The APA website (\url{http://www.apastyle.org/faqs.html})
+ mentions that the year should generally also be mentioned,
+ making it a complete cite, except that there is no reference
+ list entry. In my opinion, it would be better to list the
+ complete original work in the reference list as well, in case
+ readers do have access to the original work, but not to the
+ secondary source. But this is not the APA rule. \\
+ \EM You may like to have the authors of the unlisted reference
+ in the author index as well. Use the \cmd{\AX} command for
+ this, as explained in section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+\item[B-1] \cite{B-1} \\ \cite{B-1} \\ \fullciteA{B-1} \\ \citeA{B-1}
+\item \cite{ex23} \\ \cite{ex23}\\ \fullciteA{ex23}\\ \citeA{ex23}\\
+ \EM Here, and in several other references, I put \verb+\hbox{}+
+ after the ``\verb+Jr.+'', so that \TeX{} does not consider the
+ period as a sentence-ending period.\\
+ \EM \pkg{apacite} now supports only an integer value (``\verb+3+'')
+ in the \fieldname{edition} field, and transforms this to
+ ``3rd''.
+\item \cite{ex24} \\ \cite{ex24}\\ \fullciteA{ex24}\\ \citeA{ex24}\\
+ \EM The APA manual gives a number, which would not ordinarily be
+ done with proper books and which suggests that it could also
+ be treated as a report. In that case, the default
+ ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}''
+ description should be left out, however. This can be accomplished
+ by defining
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {\bibnotype},
+\end{verbatim}
+ which flags that the type must be left out, see ex.~42.
+ However, for books, it now works fine leaving the \fieldname{type}
+ field empty and giving the number in the \fieldname{number} field.
+\item \cite{ex25} \\ \cite{ex25}\\ \fullciteA{ex25}\\ \citeA{ex25}\\
+ \EM According to the note after ex.~25 in the APA manual,
+ an edited book with ``just one'' author should list
+ the editor (and translator, when available) after the
+ title, just like the translator. An example of this is
+ \citeA{ex25-t1}. (Should the original years of publication
+ be used here?)
+
+ However, what does ``just one author'' mean here? Does it mean that if
+ there are 2 authors and 1 or more editors, the editors should
+ not be mentioned, or the authors should not be mentioned?
+ Presumably, it means the following:
+ In the default case, an edited book consists of several chapters,
+ with different chapters written by different authors. In this case,
+ the reference to the whole book lists only the editor(s).
+ If every chapter is written by the same author, and there are 1
+ or more editors, their condition holds. I think that if all
+ chapters are written by the same $n$ ($\geq 2$) authors, it should
+ also be treated in this way, i.e., with the authors in the
+ author position and the editor behind the title. A difficult
+ case would appear if the book were a collection of works of, say,
+ 2 authors, with some chapters written by one and some by the
+ other, and some jointly, as in \citeA{ex25-t2}. These choices have
+ to be made by the user, however, \pkg{apacite} will format author,
+ editor, and translator, whenever available.
+\item \cite{ex26} \\ \cite{ex26}\\ \fullciteA{ex26}\\ \citeA{ex26}\\
+ \EM According to section~3.97, the title should be in italics.
+ In this example, in the citation, it is not given in italics,
+ but this must be an error, because they do give it in italics
+ on p.~219 (but give no date there).
+\item \cite{ex27} \\ \cite{ex27}\\ \fullciteA{ex27}\\ \citeA{ex27}\\
+ \EM Here, the \fieldname{edition} field has value
+ ``\verb+Rev.\hbox{}+'' and \pkg{apacite} handles this
+ noninteger value correctly as well.
+\item \cite{ex28} \\ \cite{ex28}\\ \fullciteA{ex28}\\ \citeA{ex28}\\
+ \EM Use the en-dash (``\verb+--+'') and not simply a hyphen
+ (``\verb+-+''), because the latter is not considered to mean
+ ``to'' by \pkg{apacite} (cf.\hbox{} ``Vol.~A-1'').
+\item \EM As mentioned in section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}, \fname{apacdoc.sty}
+ provides the \cmd{\DSMcite} macro and some related
+ alternatives to get the \emph{DSM} references right. On rereading
+ the description in the APA manual, I discovered that previous
+ versions of \pkg{apacite} did not format the first citation
+ correctly, although the description is a bit ambiguous as to
+ how exactly the first citation should be formatted. Therefore,
+ I looked at a recent issue of
+ \emph{Journal of Abnormal Psychology}, \emph{116}(3); and
+ \emph{Psychological Assessment}, \emph{19}(2). These show
+ some slight variations, some of which have good reasons, but
+ others seem arbitrary. In all articles I looked at, the first
+ citation was an in-text citation, and the following form was
+ the most frequently used, and thus implemented in
+ \fname{apacdoc.sty}:\\
+ \cmd{\DSMciteA}, first citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\
+ \EM The following citations then only use the abbreviated title:\\
+ \cmd{\DSMciteA}, second citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\
+ \EM Because I haven't found a parenthetical first cite, I
+ have to use some logic and common sense to define it:\\
+ \cmd{\DSMcite}, first citation: \DSMfullcite{ex29} \\
+ \EM Subsequent parenthetical cites are formatted as\\
+ \cmd{\DSMcite}, second citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\
+ \EM Finally, here are ``\verb+NP+'' versions of them:\\
+ \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, first citation: \DSMfullciteNP{ex29} \\
+ \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, second citation: \DSMciteNP{ex29} \\
+ To use these citation commands, you have to provide a
+ \fieldname{key} field that contains a \cmd{\bibDSM}
+ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric Association}{Diagnostic
+ and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}{4th
+ ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ As is evident from this example, the four arguments are
+ author, full title, edition, short title. Thus, because
+ all this information is provided in the \fname{.bib}
+ entry (and not preprogrammed in \pkg{apacite}), it is
+ conceivable that this command is useful for other types
+ of works as well. The generality is a bit limited, though,
+ because all four arguments must be available and have
+ meaningful content (i.e., should not be empty). But it
+ is relatively straightforward to write your own specialized
+ citation commands, based on the \cmd{\DSMcite} code,
+ which do not require all parts to be available.
+
+ However, the \cmd{\DSM*} macros are still very rough. Multiple
+ citations are not handled well, so only one work should
+ be cited with such a macro. Furthermore, the pre- and
+ postfixes (through \verb+<...>+ and \verb+[...]+) are not
+ available. Note also that the edition should be spelled
+ out as ``\verb+4th ed.\hbox{}+''. When I experimented with
+ just ``\verb+4+'', trying to use the \cmd{\PrintOrdinal}
+ function, things went terribly wrong. Even if I put
+ \verb+\PrintOrdinal{4}+ in the \fieldname{key} field, it
+ didn't work. Finally, the ``ed.\hbox{}'' must be added
+ to allow reference to the ``3rd ed., rev.\hbox{}'' and the
+ ``4th ed., text rev.\hbox{}'' as well.
+
+ \EM In some of the articles I studied, ordinary citations
+ were used, esp.\ when page numbers were given in
+ parenthetical cites. Thus, you can also use\\
+ \verb+\cite[p.~25]{ex29}+: \cite[p.~25]{ex29}
+\item \cite{ex30} \\ \cite{ex30}\\ \fullciteA{ex30}\\ \citeA{ex30}\\
+ \EM Here, ``6th ed.'' comes before ``Vols.\ 1--20'', so it is
+ Vols.\ 1--20 of the 6th edition. Pre-[2003/09/05] versions
+ of \pkg{apacite} placed volumes before editions,
+ which is appropriate when different volumes of a series
+ are not updated jointly, so that you may have the 3rd edition
+ of Vol.~2, but only the 1st edition of Vol.~6. Should you
+ want this, you have to trick the system by putting both
+ elements in the \fieldname{edition} field:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ edition = {\BVOLS\ 1--20, 6th},
+\end{verbatim}
+ and leaving the \fieldname{volume} field empty.\\
+ \EM Does the remark about large editorial boards mean that the
+ APA intended to add ``et al.\hbox{}'' here? Anyway, here is an
+ example of such a situation: \citeA{ex30-2}.
+\item \cite{ex31} \\ \cite{ex31}\\ \fullciteA{ex31}\\ \citeA{ex31}
+\item \cite{ex32} \\ \cite{ex32}\\ \fullciteA{ex32}\\ \citeA{ex32}
+\item \cite{ex33} \\ \cite{ex33}\\ \fullciteA{ex33}\\ \citeA{ex33}\\
+ \EM This illustrates that a \fieldname{type} field can be used
+ with a \entryname{book} entry.
+\item[B-2] \cite{B-2} \\ \cite{B-2} \\ \fullciteA{B-2} \\ \citeA{B-2} \\
+ \EM This is a suitable point to discuss ``von'' parts further.
+ One of the editors in the current example is called
+ P. van den Broek. I am Dutch and I recognize this as a Dutch
+ name, so let's assume that this person is Dutch. Let us now
+ consider the situation that this person is the (only) author.
+ Then according to the Dutch rules, this person would be listed in the
+ reference list as ``Broek, P. van den. (1992)'' and listed under ``B'',
+ but referred to in the text as ``Van den Broek (1992)'', including
+ the ``von'' part and capitalizing the first letter. When an
+ initial precedes the ``von'' part (e.g., when there are two
+ primary authors with this surname, but with different initials),
+ then this person would be referred to in the text as
+ ``P. van den Broek (1992)'', including the ``von'' part, but now
+ in lower case. The Dutch rules are very difficult to do right in
+ \BibTeX{}/\LaTeX{} and they conflict with the rules for other
+ languages, and presumably with the rules of the APA, which would
+ require this person to be alphabetized under ``V'', at least.
+
+ For the current editor position, there is no big problem with
+ the APA rules. The ``von'' part can really be put in the ``von''
+ part as recognized by \BibTeX{}, which I did, or it can be enclosed
+ in braces, making the whole last name one part. Either will come
+ out right and the editor will not be referred to in the text
+ anyway. With styles that put the initials behind the surname,
+ it will only work right when put in the ``von'' part. In the
+ author position, however, things are different. Then this author
+ could be formatted as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {Van {\lowercase{D}}en Broek, P.},
+\end{verbatim}
+ where the \verb+{\lowercase{D}}+ construction is used to prevent
+ \BibTeX{} from interpreting it as a ``von'' part, or
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {Van{\ }den{\ }Broek, P.},
+ author = {{Van den Broek}, P.},
+\end{verbatim}
+ which in most situations gives the correct version according to the
+ Dutch rules with the correct alphabetizing according to the APA
+ rules. Only in situations when the initial would appear
+ \emph{before} the surname (when there are other authors with the
+ same surname or when using other styles), this would lead to
+ unwanted results.
+
+ If you really want to alphabetize according to the Dutch rules
+ (which is \emph{not} APA in my interpretation), you can use the
+ following trick. \fname{apacdoc.sty} defines a macro \cmd{\Dutchvon}
+ with two arguments, which is equivalent to the \cmd{\bibreftext}
+ macro discussed in ex.~17 above. That is, in the beginning
+ of the document, it is defined as echoing its second argument,
+ and just before the reference list, it is redefined to echo
+ its first argument. Then define the author as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ author = {van den {\protect\Dutchvon{Broek}{Van den Broek}}, P.},
+\end{verbatim}
+ which, combined with the \pkg{apacite} formatting implies
+ that in text, ``Van den Broek'' is used, whereas the author
+ is alphabetized under ``B'' in the reference list, and listed
+ as ``Broek, P. van den''. Of course, we could simply have
+ used \cmd{\bibreftext} again, but that was used to cover a
+ completely different situation, and I can easily imagine that
+ when switching to another citation style, the former application
+ (i.e., 1992/1993) must be kept, but the ``von'' part is handled
+ differently, so that \cmd{\Dutchvon} must be redefined.
+ Based on this example, users should be able to define their
+ own tricks for similar peculiarities.
+
+ Finally, note that in Belgium, where many people
+ speak Dutch as well, it is customary to alphabetize under ``V''
+ anyway (``Van Damme'').
+\item \cite{ex34} \\ \cite{ex34}\\ \fullciteA{ex34}\\ \citeA{ex34}
+\item \cite{ex35} \\ \cite{ex35}\\ \fullciteA{ex35}\\ \citeA{ex35}\\
+ \EM The series title, volume number, and volume title are all
+ put into the \fieldname{booktitle} field.
+\item \cite{ex36} \\ \cite{ex36}\\ \fullciteA{ex36}\\ \citeA{ex36}\\
+ \EM Again, the series title, volume number, and volume title are
+ all put into the \fieldname{booktitle} field.\\
+ \EM I had to use some tricks to get the Series and Volume Editors'
+ descriptions right. The ``(Series Ed.\hbox{})'' is according to
+ \BibTeX{} part of the last name of the first editor,
+ and I used the \cmd{\bibeditortype} macro from
+ \fname{apacdoc.sty} to get the volume editor right.
+ See section~\ref{subsec:fields} for my interpretation of
+ APA's usage of the term ``series''.
+\item \cite{ex37} \\ \cite{ex37}\\ \fullciteA{ex37}\\ \citeA{ex37}\\
+ \EM Note that ``Van'' in the first editor's surname is
+ capitalized here, as in the APA manual. In the original Dutch,
+ this would be in lower case.
+\item \cite{ex38} \\ \cite{ex38}\\ \fullciteA{ex38}\\ \citeA{ex38}
+\item \cite{ex39} \\ \cite{ex39}\\ \fullciteA{ex39}\\ \citeA{ex39}\\
+ \EM Here, it is stated that the translator's name should be put
+ after the editor's name when both are different, but in ex.~40,
+ the translators are put after the title, before the editors.
+ Apparently, if the book is a collection of works by one
+ author(-group), edited and translated, then the translator
+ should come after the editor, but if different chapters
+ are translated by different translators, or perhaps not all
+ are translated works, then the translator should come after
+ the title. Of course, \pkg{apacite} has no way of knowing this.
+ In the current implementation, for an \entryname{incollection},
+ if the editor and translator are the same, they are formatted as
+ in this example, whereas if they are different, they are treated
+ as in ex.~40 below. I think this will be satisfactory in
+ most cases. If you really want the translator after the editor
+ when they are different, you can trick the system in a way
+ similar to ex.~36.
+\item \cite{ex40} \\ \cite{ex40}\\ \fullciteA{ex40}\\ \citeA{ex40}\\
+ \EM See my comments to ex.~39 above.
+
+ A test of the \fieldname{originaljournal} formatting:
+ \citeA{ex40-t1}.
+\item[C-1] \cite{C-1} \\ \cite{C-1} \\ \fullciteA{C-1} \\ \citeA{C-1}\\
+ \EM The APA manual initially formats the number with an
+ en-dash: ``91--5''. When it discusses the number separately,
+ however (p.~256), it uses a single hyphen: ``91-5''. Logically,
+ the latter makes more sense to me (and is generally used in
+ other numbers in the APA manual as well), so that's what I
+ did here. Moreover, if the en-dash would be entered as
+ ``\verb+--+'' in the \fieldname{number} field, \pkg{apacite}
+ would interpret this as ``to'' and insert ``Nos.\hbox{}''
+ instead of ``No.\hbox{}''. Thus, if you want the en-dash,
+ you have to put this in the \fname{.bib} file in a different
+ way, e.g., using the \cmd{\textendash} command.
+\item \cite{ex41} \\ \cite{ex41}\\ \fullciteA{ex41}\\ \citeA{ex41}
+\item \cite{ex42} \\ \cite{ex42}\\ \fullciteA{ex42}\\ \citeA{ex42}\\
+ \EM I used the \cmd{\bibnotype} command to suppress the default
+ ``(Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{})'' description. Actually, I don't think
+ there is anything wrong with calling a report a report, be it
+ ``technical'' by default, or by specifying
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {Report},
+\end{verbatim}
+ except that it's not done so in this specific example in the
+ APA manual. But there does not seem to be a rule against it.
+
+ \EM The NTIS information is put in a \fieldname{note} field.
+\item \cite{ex43} \\ \cite{ex43}\\ \fullciteA{ex43}\\ \citeA{ex43}\\
+ \EM The ERIC number is given in the \fieldname{note} field.
+\item \cite{ex44} \\ \cite{ex44}\\ \fullciteA{ex44}\\ \citeA{ex44}
+\item \cite{ex45} \\ \cite{ex45}\\ \fullciteA{ex45}\\ \citeA{ex45}
+\item \cite{ex46} \\ \cite{ex46}\\ \fullciteA{ex46}\\ \citeA{ex46}\\
+ \EM Note that in the example in the APA manual, ``Western Australia''
+ \emph{is} mentioned in the publisher location, whereas their rule
+ explicitly states that this should not be the case in this
+ situation, and they stress that again below the example.
+ Therefore, I did not mention ``Western Australia'' in the
+ \fieldname{publisher} field.
+\item \cite{ex47} \\ \cite{ex47}\\ \fullciteA{ex47}\\ \citeA{ex47}
+\item \cite{ex48} \\ \cite{ex48}\\ \fullciteA{ex48}\\ \citeA{ex48}
+\item \cite{ex49} \\ \cite{ex49}\\ \fullciteA{ex49}\\ \citeA{ex49}
+\item \cite{ex50} \\ \cite{ex50}\\ \fullciteA{ex50}\\ \citeA{ex50}
+\item \cite{ex51} \\ \cite{ex51}\\ \fullciteA{ex51}\\ \citeA{ex51}\\
+ \EM As of this version of \pkg{apacite}, the location of a
+ \entryname{lecture} can be given in the \fieldname{address}
+ field.
+\item \cite{ex52} \\ \cite{ex52}\\ \fullciteA{ex52}\\ \citeA{ex52}
+\item \cite{ex53} \\ \cite{ex53}\\ \fullciteA{ex53}\\ \citeA{ex53}
+\item \cite{ex54} \\ \cite{ex54}\\ \fullciteA{ex54}\\ \citeA{ex54}
+\item \cite{ex55} \\ \cite{ex55}\\ \fullciteA{ex55}\\ \citeA{ex55}\\
+ \EM It seems logical to suppress the original year in the
+ citation if it's the same as the year of the abstract, cf.\
+ the comment to ex.~17 in the APA manual (5th ed., p.~245).
+
+ \EM According to example 54 and the text below it, an ``A''
+ or ``B'' should be added to the volume number of \emph{DAI}
+ of this entry, presumably an ``A'', but because they did not
+ give one, I left it out as well.
+\item \cite{ex56} \\ \cite{ex56}\\ \fullciteA{ex56}\\ \citeA{ex56}
+\item \cite{ex57} \\ \cite{ex57}\\ \fullciteA{ex57}\\ \citeA{ex57}\\
+ \EM In ex.~59, the city should not be mentioned because it is
+ already mentioned in the name of the university. Here, the
+ city \emph{is} mentioned again, which seems contradictory.
+ This is all in the \fname{.bib} file; \pkg{apacite} uses
+ whatever is given there, so this is not a formatting problem
+ for \pkg{apacite} itself.
+\item \cite{ex58} \\ \cite{ex58}\\ \fullciteA{ex58}\\ \citeA{ex58}
+\item \cite{ex59} \\ \cite{ex59}\\ \fullciteA{ex59}\\ \citeA{ex59}\\
+ \EM See ex.~57 for the city issue.
+\item \cite{ex60} \\ \cite{ex60}\\ \fullciteA{ex60}\\ \citeA{ex60}
+\item \cite{ex61} \\ \cite{ex61}\\ \fullciteA{ex61}\\ \citeA{ex61}\\
+ \EM The description of the data goes into the
+ \fieldname{type} field. It may be more logical to put it
+ in the \fieldname{title} field, with some trickery to indicate
+ that it's a description and not a title, but putting it in the
+ \fieldname{type} field already ensures that it's formatted
+ correctly, so I think I'm gonna be lazy on this one. The same
+ applies more or less to reviews (G-1, 63, 64), although there
+ it is logical to put at least ``Review'' in the \fieldname{type}
+ field, so as we're already there, we might as well make it
+ complete.
+\item \cite{ex62} \\ \cite{ex62}\\ \fullciteA{ex62}\\ \citeA{ex62}\\
+ \EM ``Available from'' an address should be spelled out in the
+ \fieldname{note} field, to get the parentheses. ``Available
+ from'' a website is without parentheses, see ex.~95.
+\item[G-1] \cite{G-1} \\ \cite{G-1} \\ \fullciteA{G-1} \\ \citeA{G-1}\\
+ \EM See my comments to ex.~61 above about the logic of the
+ \fieldname{type} field. For a review, the \fieldname{type}
+ field must contain the message that it is a review of a
+ \emph{book} (or motion picture, or whatever it is a review of)
+ and give the title of the reviewed work in italics, which must
+ be manually formatted, e.g., by using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle}
+ macro. The author of the reviewed work should apparently not be
+ mentioned.
+\item \cite{ex63} \\ \cite{ex63}\\ \fullciteA{ex63}\\ \citeA{ex63}
+\item \cite{ex64} \\ \cite{ex64}\\ \fullciteA{ex64}\\ \citeA{ex64} \\
+ \EM Here, the title of the motion picture,
+ \APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}, is capitalized,
+ whereas this was not done with book titles in ex.~G-1 and 63.
+ I don't know whether this is an error or an implicit rule,
+ but this formatting must be done in the \fname{.bib} file,
+ so it's up to the user to do this as desired.
+\item \EM The rules for movies, television series, etc.\ do not appeal
+ very much to me, although they are not nearly as bad as those
+ for music recordings (ex.~69 and further, see below). My
+ primary objection is that when referring to movies and TV series,
+ the title is the most important characteristic. The director
+ may be a good second in some cases, but producers and writers are
+ almost always unknown to the general public and not relevant
+ when referring to them. You talk about the movie \emph{Jaws}
+ and not about Spielberg (1975) or whoever wrote the script.
+ Recognizing the primary creative input or authorship may be
+ politically correct, but not particularly informative.
+ However, you may think that my objections are mainly
+ driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries
+ in \BibTeX{}. Anyway, here are my attempts to implement
+ the APA rules.\\
+ \cite{ex65-1} \\ \cite{ex65-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-1}\\ \citeA{ex65-1} \\
+ \EM I find ``United States'' a somewhat uninformative address.
+
+ \cite{ex65-2} \\ \cite{ex65-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-2}\\ \citeA{ex65-2} \\
+ \EM Note again that this and the following ``Available from''
+ must be between
+ parentheses (accomplished by putting it in the \fieldname{note} field),
+ whereas ``Available from'' some web site must not be between
+ parentheses, cf.\ ex.~95.
+
+ \EM In these examples, I used the \cmd{\bibliteral},
+ \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}, and \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} commands
+ from \fname{apacdoc.sty}.\\
+ \cite{ex65-3} \\ \cite{ex65-3}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-3}\\ \citeA{ex65-3}\\
+ \EM Here, I simply let ``(Producer)'' be part of the author name,
+ but because of this addendum, the entry is not sorted correctly
+ in the reference list: It should be before \citeA{APAManual6},
+ but because of the addendum, the authors are different to \BibTeX{}
+ and this one comes after \citeA{APAManual6}. The ordering can be
+ corrected by using the \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command as discussed in
+ section~\ref{subsec:sort}. However, the authors of these entries will
+ still be different. If it's important that they are the same (e.g.,
+ for the author index), the \fname{.bbl} file should be edited manually.
+ This seems an extremely rare event, though.
+\item \cite{ex66} \\ \cite{ex66}\\ \fullciteA{ex66}\\ \citeA{ex66} \\
+ \EM Here, I used the same tricks as in ex.~65.
+\item \cite{ex67} \\ \cite{ex67}\\ \fullciteA{ex67}\\ \citeA{ex67} \\
+ \EM I used several tricks introduced before: the \cmd{\bibeditortype}
+ (cf.\ ex.~36) construction to be able to use ``(Producer)'' in
+ the editor position instead of ``(Ed.\hbox{})'', and the ones used
+ in the previous examples. Because there is another Miller as well,
+ the initial is given here. To make sure that \BibTeX{} thinks
+ that there is only one initial, but the ``(Producer)'' is formatted
+ correctly, the name is defined as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ editor = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ using the \cmd{\bibinitial} and \cmd{\bibeditortype} commands from
+ \fname{apacdoc.sty}.
+ It is then formatted correctly both in the text and in the reference
+ list if \cmd{\bibeditortype} is defined to swallow its argument
+ in the text, and redefined prior to the bibliography. After the
+ bibliography (before the index), it has to be redefined again
+ to swallow its argument.
+\item \cite{ex68} \\ \cite{ex68}\\ \fullciteA{ex68}\\ \citeA{ex68}\\
+ \EM Again, I used several tricks that were also used in the previous
+ examples.
+\item \EM The rules for music recordings do not make any sense, and they
+ are not entirely clear as well. It would seem to me that
+ most pop, rock, and other ``light'' music songs are almost always
+ attributed to the performing artist. You can usually read who the
+ composer and lyricist of the song are on the inlay-details
+ of the CD, but if you want the reader to refer to ``My Way'',
+ the reader will easier find it (in a CD store or on the
+ internet, for example) under ``Frank Sinatra'' than under
+ the composer's name (whoever that may be). Furthermore, the
+ year of release of the CD (or other medium) seems more relevant
+ in referring to the CD than the year of copyright of the
+ specific song, or the recording date.
+
+ For classical music, things are different. Then, the writer (composer)
+ is often more important than the performing artist, although
+ the percentage of people who know who wrote the lyrics for
+ Mozart's operas may not be high. Furthermore, it may be
+ time-consuming and not very relevant for most authors and
+ readers to find the year in which a certain piece was written,
+ although strictly speaking, we should use the ``date of copyright'',
+ which is not relevant for a lot of classical music.
+
+ However, when referring to Beethoven's 9th symphony, say, it will
+ typically not be very informative to refer to a specific recording on a
+ specific CD, unless that specific recording is the subject of interest,
+ but then it would seem that the ``performing artist'' (conductor or
+ orchestra) should take the role of ``author''. For example, when
+ comparing a performance of this symphony conducted in 1975 by Masur with
+ a performance of this symphony conducted in 1990 by Bernstein (assuming
+ this exists), it does not seem logical to compare ``9th Symphony''
+ (Beethoven, 1823a, tracks~1--4) with ``9th Symphony'' (Beethoven, 1823b,
+ tracks~1--4), but more logical to compare Masur (1975) with
+ Bernstein (1990).
+
+ Finally, it seems a bit strange that the track number should be
+ mentioned in text, but not in the reference list.
+
+ Again, you may think that my objections are mainly
+ driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries
+ in \BibTeX. Nevertheless, here are my attempts to implement
+ the APA rules, using variations of the \cmd{\citesong}
+ command, defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}:\\
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \cmd{\citeAsong}: & \citeAsong{ex69-1} \\
+ \cmd{\citesong}: & \citesong{ex69-1} \\
+ \cmd{\citesongNP}: & \citesongNP{ex69-1}\\
+ \cmd{\citeAsong}: & \citeAsong{ex69-2} \\
+ \cmd{\citesong}: & \citesong{ex69-2} \\
+ \cmd{\citesongNP}: & \citesongNP{ex69-2}
+ \end{tabular}\\
+ \EM The \fieldname{key} field contains the relevant
+ information in the form of a protected \cmd{\bibsong} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ Furthermore, I used some tricks to get the reference list
+ entry right. I used the \entryname{incollection} type as
+ a basis, with the CD title in the \fieldname{booktitle} field.
+ At first sight, it seems natural to define
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {CD},
+\end{verbatim}
+ but with an \entryname{incollection}, the \fieldname{type}
+ field is put after the title, not after the book title.
+ I may change this for music-types (CD, record, etc.),
+ but this is currently not yet implemented. This means that the
+ ``[CD]'' description must be put in the \fieldname{booktitle}
+ field, after the CD title and with explicit formatting
+ commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ On the other hand, we can now use the \fieldname{type}
+ field to put the recording artists in for the second example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett},
+\end{verbatim}
+ We have to change the ``In'' string to ``On''
+ (``In'' a book versus ``On'' a CD). This is done with a
+ macro similar to the \cmd{\bibeditortype} macro discussed
+ in ex.~36. In this case, the macro is \cmd{\bibInstring},
+ defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty},
+ which has one argument. The macro changes the definition of
+ the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the argument and then immediately changes
+ the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time
+ change. Of course, the \cmd{\bibInstring} macro only works
+ if it is executed \emph{before} the \cmd{\BIn} macro. The latter
+ macro comes before the \fieldname{booktitle}, so
+ \cmd{\bibInstring} must be added to a field that comes before
+ that. I put it in the \fieldname{title} field:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+ where \cmd{\BOn} is defined by default as ``\BOn''.
+ Finally, the recording date of the second example (1990) must
+ be put in the \fieldname{note} field.
+
+ If you want an author index, you would want the authors of
+ these works in the index as well. Because of the usage of the
+ \fieldname{key} field, this is not automatically done for the
+ citations. The \cmd{\AX} command has to be inserted explicitly,
+ see section~\ref{sec:autindex} above.
+
+ Note that this is all trickery within the \LaTeX{} domain
+ and the \fname{.bib} file, i.e., the user-definable and
+ user-customizable area.
+\item \cite{ex70} \\ \cite{ex70}\\ \fullciteA{ex70}\\ \citeA{ex70}
+\item \cite{ex71-1} \\ \cite{ex71-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-1}\\ \citeA{ex71-1} \\
+ \cite{ex71-2} \\ \cite{ex71-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-2}\\ \citeA{ex71-2} \\
+ \EM In contrast with earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, in which
+ the ``Retrieved \dots'' message had to be formatted in the
+ \fieldname{howpublished} field, this is now formatted
+ automatically by using the \fieldname{url} and
+ \fieldname{lastchecked} fields.
+\item \cite{ex72} \\ \cite{ex72}\\ \fullciteA{ex72}\\ \citeA{ex72}
+\item \cite{ex73} \\ \cite{ex73}\\ \fullciteA{ex73}\\ \citeA{ex73} \\
+ \EM Note that the APA manual breaks a line \emph{after} a
+ period instead of before, against their own rules. Furthermore,
+ the APA manual uses a typeface in which `1' (one) and `l' (ell)
+ are not distinguishable. This requires some guessing of the
+ correct URLs. I think that this conflicts with their own stress
+ on accuracy w.r.t.\ URLs.
+
+ \EM Note the subtle use of braces to get \emph{Homo sapiens}
+ correctly formatted: The capital in \verb+\emph{Homo}+
+ is retained by \BibTeX, whereas the capital in
+ \verb+{\emph{Sapiens}}+ is changed into a lower case letter
+ by \BibTeX, because of the extra pair of braces.
+\item \cite{ex74} \\ \cite{ex74}\\ \fullciteA{ex74}\\ \citeA{ex74}
+\item \cite{ex75} \\ \cite{ex75}\\ \fullciteA{ex75}\\ \citeA{ex75}\\
+ \EM Note that \BibTeX{} does not consider a question mark
+ or an exclamation point as the end of the title and the beginning
+ of the subtitle. Hence, if there is a subtitle after it, the
+ capitalization of its first word is not retained (unlike
+ after a colon), so we have to protect it using braces in the
+ \fname{.bib} file.
+\item \cite{ex76} \\ \cite{ex76}\\ \fullciteA{ex76}\\ \citeA{ex76}
+\item \cite{ex77} \\ \cite{ex77}\\ \fullciteA{ex77}\\ \citeA{ex77}
+\item \cite{ex78} \\ \cite{ex78}\\ \fullciteA{ex78}\\ \citeA{ex78}\\
+ \EM For this example, the source is not simply the URL, but
+ with the qualification ``Columbia University, Institute for
+ Learning Technologies Web site:''. This means that we cannot
+ simply use the \fieldname{lastchecked} and \fieldname{url}
+ fields, but must revert to the way I proposed to format
+ references to electronic sources in previous versions of
+ \pkg{apacite}: by putting all the information in a
+ \fieldname{howpublished} field. This includes explicitly using
+ the \cmd{\url} command and adding ``\verb+\bibnodot{.}+''
+ immediately after the URL. The \cmd{\bibnodot} command,
+ defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}, swallows the period, so that
+ there is no period after the URL in the reference list, thus
+ complying with the APA rules. This also applies to examples
+ 79, 87, 91, and 95, and all the examples that do not list
+ a specific URL, but only a description, like
+ ``the PsycARTICLES database'' (ex.~88).
+\item \cite{ex79} \\ \cite{ex79}\\ \fullciteA{ex79}\\ \citeA{ex79}
+\item \cite{ex80} \\ \cite{ex80}\\ \fullciteA{ex80}\\ \citeA{ex80}
+\item \cite{ex81} \\ \cite{ex81}\\ \fullciteA{ex81}\\ \citeA{ex81}
+\item \cite{ex82} \\ \cite{ex82}\\ \fullciteA{ex82}\\ \citeA{ex82}\\
+ \EM Here and in ex.~83, I used the \cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}
+ and \cmd{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved} commands defined in
+ \fname{apacdoc.sty} to replace ``Retrieved'' by
+ ``Abstract retrieved''.
+\item \cite{ex83} \\ \cite{ex83}\\ \fullciteA{ex83}\\ \citeA{ex83} \\
+\item \cite{ex84} \\ \cite{ex84}\\ \fullciteA{ex84}\\ \citeA{ex84}
+\item \cite{ex85} \\ \cite{ex85}\\ \fullciteA{ex85}\\ \citeA{ex85} \\
+ \EM When referring to a message to a newsgroup, internet forum, etc.,
+ use the \entryname{misc} type. Then define
+\begin{verbatim}
+ type = {\bibmessage},
+\end{verbatim}
+ and use the \fieldname{number} field when relevant. The URL
+ of the message is given in the \fieldname{url} field. Then
+ the entry is formatted
+ correctly: If the message has a number, say 1, it reverts to
+ ``\verb+[\bibmessage~1]+'', i.e., ``[Msg~1]'' with the default
+ definition of \cmd{\bibmessage}. If there is no number, the
+ type identifier is omitted (because it is mentioned as
+ ``Message posted to [\dots]'' anyway). In both cases,
+ the title is formatted as an article title, i.e., not
+ italicized.
+\item \cite{ex86} \\ \cite{ex86}\\ \fullciteA{ex86}\\ \citeA{ex86}
+\item \cite{ex87} \\ \cite{ex87}\\ \fullciteA{ex87}\\ \citeA{ex87}
+\item \cite{ex88} \\ \cite{ex88}\\ \fullciteA{ex88}\\ \citeA{ex88}
+\item \cite{ex89} \\ \cite{ex89}\\ \fullciteA{ex89}\\ \citeA{ex89}
+\item \cite{ex90} \\ \cite{ex90}\\ \fullciteA{ex90}\\ \citeA{ex90} \\
+ \EM Here, ``de Ridder'' may well be a Dutch name. If the APA
+ manual is serious about its rule to format names as they
+ should according to the rule of the country of origin,
+ this name should then be formatted as ``De Ridder''.
+\item \cite{ex91} \\ \cite{ex91}\\ \fullciteA{ex91}\\ \citeA{ex91}
+\item \cite{ex92} \\ \cite{ex92}\\ \fullciteA{ex92}\\ \citeA{ex92}\\
+ \EM From ex.~94 below, I deduce that the version information
+ should be treated as an edition and not as part of the title.
+ Therefore, in this example and ex.~94, the version is formatted
+ in the \fieldname{edition} field:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces},
+\end{verbatim}
+ using the \cmd{\noedition} command from \fname{apacdoc.sty},
+ which temporarily redefines \cmd{\BEd} to do nothing, and
+ \cmd{\ignorespaces}, which eats up the space that is ordinarily
+ present between the edition number and the ``ed.\hbox{}'' string.
+\item \cite{ex93} \\ \cite{ex93}\\ \fullciteA{ex93}\\ \citeA{ex93}\\
+ \EM To test the \entryname{manual} entry: \citeA{ex93-t1}.
+\item \cite{ex94} \\ \cite{ex94}\\ \fullciteA{ex94}\\ \citeA{ex94}\\
+ \EM The example in the APA manual does not list a date, not even
+ a ``n.d.\hbox{}''. Given the logic of the APA manual, this seems
+ an error to me, so I added a ``\cmd{\bibnodate}'' in the
+ \fieldname{year} field, which becomes ``\bibnodate'' in the
+ output. If it would really be the rule to omit the year, then
+ it is not clear when a year must be omitted and when not, or
+ replaced by ``n.d.\hbox{}''. Furthermore, formatting in both
+ the \fname{.sty} file and the \fname{.bst} file would have to
+ be adapted to anticipate a missing year. Currently, I assume
+ that there should always be something that acts like a date
+ (a year, an ``in press'', or a ``n.d.\hbox{}'').
+
+ \EM See ex.~92 for the treatment of the version.
+\item \cite{ex95} \\ \cite{ex95}\\ \fullciteA{ex95}\\ \citeA{ex95}\\
+ \EM Note that here, unlike ex.~44 and ex.~91,
+ ``U.S.'' is omitted before ``Department of Health and Human
+ Services''.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\StopEventually{%
+\MakePercentComment
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Change History
+\PrintChanges
+%
+% Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography.
+\APACmanBeforeBib
+%
+% Request apacite or apacitex bibliography style
+% depending on whether an index option was requested or not.
+\bibliographystyle{\APACbibstyle}%
+% Include the bibliography
+\bibliography{apa5ex}%
+%
+% Again redefine commands.
+\APACmanBeforeIndex
+%
+% Include the author index if the index option is on.
+\printindex[autx]
+%
+% Again redefine commands.
+\APACmanAfterIndex
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\PrintIndex
+\MakePercentIgnore
+}
+%
+\MakePercentIgnore
+% \iffalse
+%</dtx>
+% \fi
+%
+% \clearpage
+% \APACcodePageLayout
+% \section{Implementation}
+% The following sections describe the source code of the various
+% constituent parts of \pkg{apacite}.
+%
+%
+% \section{\LaTeX\ package (\fname{apacite.sty})}
+% This is the \LaTeX\ package part of \pkg{apacite}. We start with some
+% comments at the top of the package to recognize borrowed code.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%%
+%% apacite.sty : citation and reference list according to APA manual
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% Contains code adapted from
+%% index.sty [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)],
+%% hyperref.dtx [6.71, 2000/10/04],
+%% babel.def [2001/03/01, v3.7h],
+%% backref.dtx [1.20, 2002/06/09],
+%% ltbibl.dtx [2004/02/15 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)],
+%% bibtopic.dtx [2002/08/22 v1.0k],
+%% multibib.dtx [2004/01/28 v1.3 Multiple bibliographies for one document.],
+%% multibbl.dtx [2004/07/27 v1.1],
+%% amsrefs.dtx [2004/06/30 v2.0]
+%% ltidxglo.dtx [1996/01/20 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Index and Glossary)]
+%% doc.dtx [2004/02/09 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)]
+%% and code (used with permission) provided by:
+%% Stefan Bj\"ork.
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Options}
+%
+% ^^A There does not appear to be a \cmd{\DescribeOption} command.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Backwards compatibility}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@year@}
+% The \pkg{theapa} package used the \cmd{\BCAY} command where \pkg{newapa}
+% used \cmd{\citeauthoryear} for the same purpose. Because the first version
+% of \pkg{apacite} descended from \pkg{theapa}, it used \cmd{\BCAY} as well.
+% However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize \cmd{\BCAY}, but it does
+% recognize \cmd{\citeauthoryear}. Therefore, since
+% \APACversiondate{2003/09/05}, \pkg{apacite} uses \cmd{\citeauthoryear}.
+% Unfortunately, the construction below can only be defined for one of them.
+% Therefore, this is a backwards compatibility option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3} % default
+\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% compatibility with old .bbl files
+ \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Citation}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@classic@cite}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@natbib@emu}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@natbib@apa}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@classic@or@emu}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@any@natbib}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@anycitation}
+% Allow different sets of citation commands through different options,
+% implemented through |\if| commands that enable and disable the relevant
+% parts of the code. \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} is the default, but this
+% may change in the future.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APAC@classic@cite
+\newif\if@APAC@natbib@emu
+\newif\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+\newif\if@APAC@classic@or@emu
+\newif\if@APAC@any@natbib
+\newif\if@APAC@anycitation
+\DeclareOption{apaciteclassic}{%
+ \@APAC@classic@citetrue
+ \@APAC@natbib@emufalse
+ \@APAC@natbib@apafalse
+ \@APAC@classic@or@emutrue
+ \@APAC@any@natbibfalse
+ \@APAC@anycitationtrue
+}
+\DeclareOption{natbibemu}{%
+ \@APAC@classic@citefalse
+ \@APAC@natbib@emutrue
+ \@APAC@natbib@apafalse
+ \@APAC@classic@or@emutrue
+ \@APAC@any@natbibtrue
+ \@APAC@anycitationtrue
+}
+\DeclareOption{natbibapa}{%
+ \@APAC@classic@citefalse
+ \@APAC@natbib@emufalse
+ \@APAC@natbib@apatrue
+ \@APAC@classic@or@emufalse
+ \@APAC@any@natbibtrue
+ \@APAC@anycitationtrue
+}
+\DeclareOption{nocitation}{%
+ \@APAC@classic@citefalse
+ \@APAC@natbib@emufalse
+ \@APAC@natbib@apafalse
+ \@APAC@classic@or@emufalse
+ \@APAC@any@natbibfalse
+ \@APAC@anycitationfalse
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The \pkgoption{mask} option masks citations that are flagged as
+% self-citations with the |\mask|-citation commands. The
+% \pkgoption{unmask} option (default) ignores the masking.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APAC@mask
+\DeclareOption{mask}{\@APAC@masktrue}
+\DeclareOption{unmask}{\@APAC@maskfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}
+%
+% Various options for changing the formatting of the reference list. Most of
+%% ^^A \cmd{\if} somehow gives an error
+% these are implemented through |\if| commands, deferring the actual
+% implementation.
+% \begin{macro}{\if@numberedbib}
+% Should the bibliography section or chapter be numbered?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@numberedbib
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% The bibliography is a section or chapter with a number (e.g.,
+% section~6 or chapter~10). This does not work properly when the section or
+% chapter is in the backmatter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{numberedbib}{\@numberedbibtrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The bibliography is a section or chapter without a number (i.e.,
+% a section* or chapter*). This is the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{unnumberedbib}{\@numberedbibfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next options determine whether the bibliography should be a section or
+% a chapter.
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectionbib}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectionbibdefault}
+% With the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option, the bibliography is a section. This
+% is typically used with the \pkg{chapterbib} package; then each chapter has a
+% bibliography section. The \pkgoption{nosectionbib} option makes the
+% bibliography a chapter (if chapters are defined). If none of these options
+% are requested, \pkg{apacite} tries to guess the most logical choice. The
+% bibliography is a section if chapters are not defined or if we are in the
+% ``mainmatter'' of a document. Otherwise, i.e., in the ``backmatter'' of a
+% document that has chapters, it is a chapter. |\if@sectionbibdefault|
+% registers whether the default should be used (neither
+% \pkgoption{sectionbib} nor \pkgoption{nosectionbib} chosen) and if
+% the default is not used, |\if@sectionbib| registers which option was
+% chosen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@sectionbib
+\newif\if@sectionbibdefault
+\@sectionbibfalse
+\@sectionbibdefaulttrue
+\DeclareOption{sectionbib}{%
+ \@sectionbibdefaultfalse
+ \@sectionbibtrue
+}
+\DeclareOption{nosectionbib}{%
+ \@sectionbibdefaultfalse
+ \@sectionbibfalse
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@tocbib}
+% These options determine whether the bibliography should be in the table of
+% contents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@tocbib
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The bibliography in the table of contents, even if it's unnumbered. This is
+% the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tocbib}{\@tocbibtrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The bibliography not in the table of contents if it's unnumbered. This is
+% ignored if it's numbered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{notocbib}{\@tocbibfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibnewpage}
+% Start the bibliography on a new page? This is ignored if it's a chapter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{bibnewpage}{\def\@bibnewpage{\bibnewpage}}
+\DeclareOption{nobibnewpage}{\let\@bibnewpage\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doi}
+% Should DOI information be printed in the reference list?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@doi
+\DeclareOption{doi}{\@doitrue}
+\DeclareOption{nodoi}{\@doifalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Author indexing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@index}
+% No author index.
+%% ^^A \cmd{\if} somehow gives an error
+% The |\if| is necessary because packages can not be required here, so
+% we must handle the consequences of the \pkgoption{index} and
+% \pkgoption{noindex} options later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APAC@index
+\DeclareOption{noindex}{\@APAC@indexfalse}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Request author index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{index}{\@APAC@indextrue}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@include@corporate}
+% Include corporate authors in index?
+%% ^^A \cmd{\if} somehow gives an error
+% Use an |\if| here, the real definitions are handled within the index
+% options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APAC@include@corporate
+\DeclareOption{includecorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatetrue}%
+\DeclareOption{suppresscorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatefalse}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@index@package}
+% Use \pkg{index} package or standard \LaTeX\ index? Again, we only define the
+% boolean.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APAC@index@package
+\DeclareOption{indexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagetrue}%
+\DeclareOption{noindexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagefalse}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{index}
+% Some options for changing the \envirname{index} environment. The actual
+% definitions are done through macros below; here these macros are used.
+%
+% The first option uses the definition from the \pkg{index} package
+% |[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)]|,
+% which is the same code as in |(v3.02, 15 September 1993)|,
+% i.e., without table of contents entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{stdindex}{%
+ \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index
+ \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% This option requires the index package
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\APACstdindex}% index environment as in index package
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next option adds a table of contents entry to the standard index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tocindex}{%
+ \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index
+ \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% This option requires the index package
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\APACtocindex}% index environment as in index package
+ %% with toc entry added
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This option defines my (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{emindex}{%
+ \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index
+ \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% This option requires the index package
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\APACemindex}% EM's index environment (see below)
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next option is a variation on the \pkgoption{emindex} option, but uses
+% standard \LaTeX\ code (adapted from the \pkg{ltxdoc} class) instead of the
+% the \pkg{index} package to support multiple indexes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{ltxemindex}{%
+ \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index
+ \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}% Don't use the index package
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\APACltxemindex}% EM's index environment without the index
+ %% package (see below)
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Obsolete compatibility options}
+%
+% For compatibility with older versions of \pkg{apacite}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hyper}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `hyper' ignored}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{nohyper}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `nohyper' ignored}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{accentfix}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `accentfix' ignored}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `noaccentfix' ignored}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Option processing}
+%
+% Execute default options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{apaciteclassic,noindex,indexpackage,unnumberedbib,tocbib,%
+ nobibnewpage,suppresscorporate,doi,unmask}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Execute user-requested options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Citation commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthoryear}
+% The \cmd{\citeauthoryear} command is defined within the citation commands,
+% but some packages (\pkg{splitbib}, \pkg{bibentry}) choke if it has not
+% been defined. Therefore, we start with defining it to do nothing. However,
+% \pkg{natbib} defines this with a \cmd{\newcommand}, so if \pkg{natbib} is
+% loaded after \pkg{apacite}, defining it here would give an error. Therefore,
+% we postpone this to |\begin{document}| and only initialize it then if it
+% hasn't been defined before.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{citeauthoryear}{\def\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{}}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\themaskedRefs}
+% A counter for the number of masked citations, which should be
+% defined for all the citation options.
+% This construction ensures that there is no conflict if the
+% |maskedRefs| counter has already been defined (in \fname{apa6.cls}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{themaskedRefs}{\newcounter{maskedRefs}}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Shared code between the \pkgoption{apaciteclassic} and
+% \pkgoption{natbibemu} options}
+%
+% Define a few |\if|s outside the main |\if|, because \TeX{} otherwise
+% chokes.
+% \begin{macro}{\if@F@cite}
+% First citation in a multi-citation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@F@cite\@F@citetrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@A@cite}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@Y@cite}
+% Two flags to denote whether only the author or only the year must be cited
+% or both.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@A@cite\@A@citefalse
+\newif\if@Y@cite\@Y@citefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@classic@or@emu
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nocite}
+% This induces an entry in the reference list, but not in the text. It is
+% also called by the other citation commands to handle some bookkeeping.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nocite#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No flag-setting in \cmd{\nocite}: a no-cite is not a citation, so a
+% subsequent citation may be the first one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@bsphack
+ \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are after |\begin{document}|, so we can do the citations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd{\@newciteauxhandle} is for compatibility with \pkg{multibib}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+ \fi
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check for |\nocite{*}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
+ \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy
+ \else
+ \G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+ \fi
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{apacite} has no compatibility problems with \LaTeX~2.09, because it
+% does not work with \LaTeX~2.09 anyway, so we can do the following,
+% suggested in \fname{ltbibl.dtx}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}%
+ \fi
+ \@esphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For compatibility with \pkg{multibib}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@restore@auxhandle
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\B@my@dummy}
+% This needs to be initialized to avoid errors with \pkg{tex4ht}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\global\def\B@my@dummy{*}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifauthorsequalc@de}
+% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal(s) previous.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de#1{%
+ \if@F@cite
+ \@F@citefalse
+ \else
+ \if@Y@cite
+ {\@BBY}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@Y@cite
+ \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+ {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \hyper@natlinkend
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifauthorsunequalc@de}
+% Code to be executed if current author(s) do(es) not equal previous.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{%
+ \if@F@cite
+ \@F@citefalse
+ \else
+ \if@Y@cite
+ {\@BAY}%
+ \fi
+ {\@BBC}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\@cite@undefined{?}%
+ \def\BBA{\@BBA}%
+ \if@A@cite
+ \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+ {\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \hyper@natlinkend
+ \if@Y@cite
+ {\@BBAY}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@Y@cite
+ \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+ {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \hyper@natlinkend
+ \fi
+ \let\BBA\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% End of shared code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{apacite} ``classic'' commands}
+%
+% This defines the citation commands and syntax with angled brackets that
+% have traditionally been used by \pkg{apacite}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@classic@cite
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcite}
+% Parenthetical citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cite{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<% % >
+ {\@cite}%
+ {\@cite<>}%
+}
+\def\fullcite{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<% % >
+ {\@cite}%
+ {\@cite<>}%
+}
+\def\shortcite{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<% % >
+ {\@cite}%
+ {\@cite<>}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteNP}
+% Parenthetical citation commands, but without the actual parentheses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\citeNP{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<%% >
+ {\@cite}%
+ {\@cite<>}%
+}
+\def\fullciteNP{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<%% >
+ {\@cite}%
+ {\@cite<>}%
+}
+\def\shortciteNP{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<%% >
+ {\@cite}%
+ {\@cite<>}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
+% Second layer of the parenthetical and NP citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cite<#1>{%
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{\BBAY}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citetrue% % cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@@cite<#1>}%
+ {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeA}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteA}
+% In-text citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\citeA{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeA}%
+ {\@citeA<>}%
+}
+\def\fullciteA{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeA}%
+ {\@citeA<>}%
+}
+\def\shortciteA{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeA}%
+ {\@citeA<>}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citeA}
+% Second layer of in-text citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@citeA<#1>{%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis.
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{\BBCP}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citetrue% % cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@@cite<#1>}%
+ {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullciteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthorNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullciteauthorNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthorNP}
+% Commands that only cite the author, for parenthetical and in-text citations,
+% the difference being that `\&' is used in the parenthetical versions,
+% whereas the in-text versions use `and' between the authors. Note that all
+% are without parentheses; \cmd{\citeauthorA} would be a better name for
+% \cmd{\citeauthor} to clarify its role (cf.~\cmd{\citeA}, \cmd{\cite}, and
+% \cmd{\citeNP}), but for backwards compatibility and compatibility with
+% some other citation packages, it is \cmd{\citeauthor}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\citeauthor{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeauthor}%
+ {\@citeauthor<>}%
+}
+\def\fullciteauthor{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeauthor}%
+ {\@citeauthor<>}%
+}
+\def\shortciteauthor{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeauthor}%
+ {\@citeauthor<>}%
+}
+\def\citeauthorNP{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeauthorNP}%
+ {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+\def\fullciteauthorA{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeauthorNP}%
+ {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+\def\shortciteauthorA{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar<% %>
+ {\@citeauthorNP}%
+ {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citeauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\@citeauthorNP}
+% Second layer of the author citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@citeauthor<#1>{%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@@cite<#1>}%
+ {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+\def\@citeauthorNP<#1>{%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@@cite<#1>}%
+ {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeyear}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeyearNP}
+% Cite only the year; parenthetical and without parentheses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\citeyear{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<% % >
+ {\@citeyear}%
+ {\@citeyear<>}%
+}
+\def\citeyearNP{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar<% % >
+ {\@citeyear}%
+ {\@citeyear<>}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citeyear}
+% Second layer of the year citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@citeyear<#1>{%
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BAstyle{}% % text style of authors
+ \@A@citefalse% % do not cite authors
+ \@Y@citetrue% % cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@@cite<#1>}%
+ {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We are now arriving at the core citation routines. The following commands
+% must have been defined:\\
+% \begin{tabular}{@{\qquad}ll@{}}
+% \cmd{\@BBOP} & open parenthesis \\
+% \cmd{\@BAP} & after precitation before first citation \\
+% \cmd{\@BBA} & `and' between authors \\
+% \cmd{\@BBAY} & between author and year \\
+% \cmd{\@BAY} & after year \\
+% \cmd{\@BBY} & between years of multiple citations with same author \\
+% \cmd{\@BBC} & between cites \\
+% \cmd{\@BBN} & after last citation before note/postcitation \\
+% \cmd{\@BBCP} & close parenthesis \\
+% \cmd{\@BAstyle} & formatting style of authors (e.g., \cmd{\scshape})
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@cite}
+% The core citation command. Standard \LaTeX{} and other packages use
+% \cmd{\@citex} for this. It may be useful to change this as well, to increase
+% the likelihood of compatibility with some packages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write citation(s) to .aux file(s)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nocite{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The previous cite, for multiple citations with same author.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@citeP{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Open parenthesis and pre-note. The \cmd{\mbox} is to avoid \pkg{hyperref}
+% problems if a \cmd{\citeA} follows an \cmd{\item}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \mbox{\@BBOP}%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else%
+ {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}%
+ \fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Loop over citation entries
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that, e.g.,
+% \verb*+\cite{key1, key2}+ can be done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \pkg{backref}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \back@cite{\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether the citation is defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+ %% The following is now handled by \nocite
+ %% \G@refundefinedtrue
+ %% \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+ }%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the citation is defined, check whether the flag has been set that
+% identifies that this is not the first citation to the work. If this
+% flag has not been set, it will be set to |DUMMY|. If this is the first
+% citation to the work, the full citation is used; else the short version
+% is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\global\expandafter
+ \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+ \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##1}}%
+ }%
+ {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether the current author(s) is (are) equivalent to the
+% previous. If so, only the year is cited in the text and a \cmd{\@BBY}
+% (probably comma and space) is inserted between the two years. The
+% \cmd{\protected@edef} fixes the problem with authors with accents
+% (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Older versions of \pkg{apacite} solved this
+% less elegantly (\pkgoption{accentfix} option). This fix was provided by
+% Robert Schlicht. See also the new definition of \cmd{\@citeP} below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname
+ b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy
+ \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ \else
+ \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Store the current author(s) for comparison in the next citation (if
+% any).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \let\BCA\relax
+ }%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of the loop over citation entries. Add the post-note and closing
+% parenthesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else%
+ {\@BBN #2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if@Y@cite%
+ {\@BAY}%
+ \fi%
+ {\@BBCP}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We're finished with this citation command. Initialize for the next
+% \cmd{\@@cite} call.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@F@citetrue %
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitations}
+% \begin{macro}{\unmaskcitations}
+% \begin{macro}{\masknocite}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskfullcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskshortcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskfullciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskshortciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskfullciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskshortciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskfullciteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskshortciteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteauthorNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskfullciteauthorNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskshortciteauthorNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteyear}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteyearNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\masktext}
+% These commands allow masking of (self-)citations for a masked
+% review.
+% The \cmd{maskcitations} command defines the masked citation commands;
+% \cmd{unmaskcitations} does the same, but lets them be equal to the
+% non-mask versions. The advantage of putting these definitions within
+% a command is that we can switch between masked and unmasked within
+% the same document. This is not likely to be used very often in
+% practice, but is useful for writing tutorials.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\maskcitations}{%
+ \def\masknocite##1{}%
+ \def\maskcite{%
+ \@ifnextchar<% % >
+ {\mask@cite}%
+ {\mask@cite<>}%
+ }%
+ \def\mask@cite<##1>{%
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\mask@@cite<##1>}%
+ {\mask@@cite<##1>[]}%
+ }%
+ \def\mask@@cite<##1>[##2]##3{%
+ \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Count number of masked references.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setcounter{maskedRefs}{0}%
+ \@for\@citeb:=##3\do{%
+ \addtocounter{maskedRefs}{1}%
+ }%
+ \ifnum\value{maskedRefs} = 1%
+ \onemaskedcitationmsg{\themaskedRefs}%
+ \else
+ \maskedcitationsmsg{\themaskedRefs}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Let all other citation commands be identical to \cmd{\maskcite}.
+% We could try to do fancy things with parentheses, but it's unlikely
+% we will be able to cover all cases of interest, and users can easily
+% change their document if they don't like how this comes out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\maskfullcite\maskcite
+ \let\maskshortcite\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteNP\maskcite
+ \let\maskfullciteNP\maskciteNP
+ \let\maskshortciteNP\maskciteNP
+ \let\maskciteA\maskcite
+ \let\maskfullciteA\maskciteA
+ \let\maskshortciteA\maskciteA
+ \let\maskciteauthor\maskcite
+ \let\maskfullciteauthor\maskciteauthor
+ \let\maskshortciteauthor\maskciteauthor
+ \let\maskciteauthorNP\maskciteauthor
+ \let\maskfullciteauthorNP\maskciteauthorNP
+ \let\maskshortciteauthorNP\maskciteauthorNP
+ \let\maskciteyear\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteyearNP\maskciteyear
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A user command to flexibly mask or unmask certain pieces of text.
+% An environment is technically more stable than a command, but less
+% intuitive for users. Under masking, this command prints the optional
+% alternative text |#1|, which defaults to nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\masktext}[2][]{##1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The ``mask'' citation commands revert to the same commands without
+% ``mask'' if the \pkgoption{mask} option is not set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\unmaskcitations}{%
+ \let\masknocite\nocite
+ \let\maskcite\cite
+ \let\maskfullcite\fullcite
+ \let\maskshortcite\shortcite
+ \let\maskciteNP\citeNP
+ \let\maskfullciteNP\fullciteNP
+ \let\maskshortciteNP\shortciteNP
+ \let\maskciteA\citeA
+ \let\maskfullciteA\fullciteA
+ \let\maskshortciteA\shortciteA
+ \let\maskciteauthor\citeauthor
+ \let\maskfullciteauthor\fullciteauthor
+ \let\maskshortciteauthor\shortciteauthor
+ \let\maskciteauthorNP\citeauthorNP
+ \let\maskfullciteauthorNP\fullciteauthorNP
+ \let\maskshortciteauthorNP\shortciteauthorNP
+ \let\maskciteyear\citeyear
+ \let\maskciteyearNP\citeyearNP
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Unmasked, this command prints the mandatory second argument |#2|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\masktext}[2][]{##2}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% End of ``classic'' citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Emulation of \pkg{natbib} citation commands}
+%
+% If requested, this section defines the \pkg{natbib} citation commands,
+% using the same syntax, without actually loading \pkg{natbib}. We also
+% define a few additional commands that \pkg{natbib} did not implement,
+% but that fit the scheme and serve some useful purpose for APA style
+% citation.
+%
+% |\if@APAC@alias@cite| needs to be defined outside the
+% |\if@APAC@natbib@emu| because otherwise \TeX{} does not process the
+% nested |\if|'s below correctly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APAC@alias@cite
+\@APAC@alias@citefalse
+\if@APAC@natbib@emu
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citep}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcitep}
+% Parenthetical citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citep{%
+ \@ifstar{% full cite
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ }{% else
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\APACNAT@citep}%
+ {\APACNAT@citep[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortcitep{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\APACNAT@citep}%
+ {\APACNAT@citep[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citealp}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcitealp}
+% Parenthetical citation commands, but without the actual parentheses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citealp{%
+ \@ifstar{% full cite
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ }{% else
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar[%% ]
+ {\APACNAT@citep}%
+ {\APACNAT@citep[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortcitealp{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar[%% ]
+ {\APACNAT@citep}%
+ {\APACNAT@citep[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACNAT@citep}
+% Second layer of the parenthetical and alp citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\APACNAT@citep{}
+\def\APACNAT@citep[#1]{%
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{\BBAY}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citetrue% % cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@citex[#1]}%
+ {\@citex[][#1]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citet}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcitet}
+% In-text citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citet{%
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ }{% else
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\APACNAT@citet}%
+ {\APACNAT@citet[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortcitet{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\APACNAT@citet}%
+ {\APACNAT@citet[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citealt}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcitealt}
+% Text citation commands, but without the actual parentheses. Not sure when
+% this would be useful, but \pkg{natbib} defines them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citealt{%
+ \@ifstar{% full cite
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ }{% else
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BBAY{ }%% between author and year
+ \@ifnextchar[%% ]
+ {\APACNAT@citet}%
+ {\APACNAT@citet[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortcitealt{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BBAY{ }%% between author and year
+ \@ifnextchar[%% ]
+ {\APACNAT@citet}%
+ {\APACNAT@citet[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACNAT@citet}
+% Second layer of in-text and alt citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\APACNAT@citet{}
+\def\APACNAT@citet[#1]{%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis.
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors
+%% \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{\BBCP}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citetrue% % cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@citex[#1]}%
+ {\@citex[][#1]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\citefullauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthor}
+% Commands that only cite the author, for parenthetical and in-text citations,
+% the difference being that `\&' is used in the parenthetical versions,
+% whereas the in-text versions use `and' between the authors. Note that all
+% are without parentheses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeauthort{%
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ }{% else
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthort}%
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthort[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortciteauthort{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthort}%
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthort[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeauthorp{%
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+ }{% else
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthorp}%
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthorp[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortciteauthorp{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthorp}%
+ {\APACNAT@citeauthorp[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeauthor{\citeauthort}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citefullauthor{\citeauthort*}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortciteauthor{\shortciteauthort}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACNAT@citeauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACNAT@citeauthorp}
+% Second layer of the author citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\APACNAT@citeauthort{}
+\def\APACNAT@citeauthort[#1]{%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@citex[#1]}%
+ {\@citex[][#1]}%
+}
+\newcommand\APACNAT@citeauthorp{}
+\def\APACNAT@citep[#1]{%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+ \@A@citetrue% % cite authors
+ \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@citex[#1]}%
+ {\@citex[][#1]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeyearpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeyear}
+% Cite only the year; parenthetical and without parentheses. Note that these
+% are the \pkg{natbib} conventions, so unlike traditional \pkg{apacite}
+% \cmd{\citeyear}, \cmd{\citeyear} here does not include the parentheses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeyearpar{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\APACNAT@citeyear}%
+ {\APACNAT@citeyear[]}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeyear{%
+ \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+ \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\APACNAT@citeyear}%
+ {\APACNAT@citeyear[]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACNAT@citeyear}
+% Second layer of the year citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\APACNAT@citeyear{}
+\def\APACNAT@citeyear[#1]{%
+ \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+ \def\@BBA{}% % `and' between authors
+ \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year
+ \def\@BAY{}% % after year
+ \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author
+ \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites
+ \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+ \def\@BAstyle{}% % text style of authors
+ \@A@citefalse% % do not cite authors
+ \@Y@citetrue% % cite years
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\@citex[#1]}%
+ {\@citex[][#1]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACNAT@citex}
+% The core citation command. We will let \cmd{\@citex} revert to this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\APACNAT@citex{}
+\def\APACNAT@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write citation(s) to \fname{.aux} file(s)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nocite{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The previous cite, for multiple citations with same author.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@citeP{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Open parenthesis and pre-note. The \cmd{\mbox} is to avoid \pkg{hyperref}
+% problems if a citation command follows an \cmd{\item}. Better to change
+% this to using \cmd{\citetext}; for the todo list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \mbox{\@BBOP}%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else%
+ {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}%
+ \fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Loop over citation entries
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that, e.g.,
+% \verb*+\cite{key1, key2}+ can be done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \pkg{backref}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \back@cite{\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this is an alias cite, we should include the alias but not author
+% or year, so the code is slightly different.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@APAC@alias@cite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether the alias is defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{al@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\PackageWarning{apacite}{Undefined alias for citation \@citeb}
+ \expandafter\def\csname al@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+ }{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Replace the authors by the alias and don't cite years.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@Y@citefalse % do not cite years
+ \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle \csname
+ al@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use the ``unequal'' code because the alias takes the place of the
+% authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The usual author and/or year citation. Check whether the citation is
+% defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the citation is defined, check whether the flag has been set that
+% identifies that this is not the first citation to the work. If this
+% flag has not been set, it will be set to |DUMMY|. If this is the first
+% citation to the work, the full citation is used; else the short version
+% is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\global\expandafter
+ \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+ \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##1}}%
+ }%
+ {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether the current author(s) is (are) equivalent to the
+% previous. If so, only the year is cited in the text and a \cmd{\@BBY}
+% (probably comma and space) is inserted between the two years. The
+% \cmd{\protected@edef} fixes the problem with authors with accents
+% (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Older versions of \pkg{apacite} solved this
+% less elegantly (\pkgoption{accentfix} option). This fix was provided by
+% Robert Schlicht. See also the new definition of \cmd{\@citeP} below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname
+ b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy
+ \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ \else
+ \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Store the current author(s) for comparison in the next citation (if
+% any).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname
+ b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \let\BCA\relax
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of the loop over citation entries. Add the post-note and closing
+% parenthesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else%
+ {\@BBN #2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if@Y@cite%
+ {\@BAY}%
+ \fi%
+ {\@BBCP}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We're finished with this citation command. Initialize for the next
+% \cmd{\APACNAT@citex} call.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@F@citetrue %
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citetext}
+% To place any arbitrary text inside the citation braces, use
+% \cmd{\citetext}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\citetext[1]{\mbox{}\BBOP{}#1\BBCP}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citex}
+% The core citation command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@citex\APACNAT@citex
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% The use of \cmd{\cite} is considered deprecated in \pkg{natbib}, but
+% we provide it as a backwards compatibility definition just like \pkg{natbib}.
+% Without optional arguments, it reverts to \cmd{\citep} and with optional
+% arguments (even empty ones), it reverts to \cmd{\citet}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cite{%
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\citep*}%
+ {\citet*}%
+ }{%
+ \@ifnextchar[% %]
+ {\citep}%
+ {\citet}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Citet}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citep}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citealt}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citealp}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citeauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citeauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citeauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citefullauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\Cite}
+% Commands that capitalize the first name in a citation, to be used at the
+% beginning of a sentence. These are currently not implemented yet, so let's
+% just define them to be equal to the non-capitalized versions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citet{\citet}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citep{\citep}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citealt{\citealt}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citealp{\citealp}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citeauthort{\citeauthort}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citeauthorp{\citeauthorp}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citeauthor{\citeauthor}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citefullauthor{\citefullauthor}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Cite{\cite}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCitet{\shortcitet}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCitep{\shortcitep}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCitealt{\shortcitealt}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCitealp{\shortcitealp}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCiteauthort{\shortciteauthort}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCiteauthorp{\shortciteauthorp}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\shortCiteauthor{\shortciteauthor}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcites}
+% This declares a list of citations that should be cited in their
+% short form. This can be overridden by using the starred form of
+% the citation commands later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\shortcites[1]{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \global\expandafter
+ \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\defcitealias}
+% \begin{macro}{\citetalias}
+% \begin{macro}{\citepalias}
+% Define an ``alias'', which can be an arbitrary text string, and use
+% this instead of the author and year in a citation. Adapted from
+% \fname{natbib.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\defcitealias[2]{%
+ \@ifundefined{al@#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{}
+ {\PackageWarning{apacite}{Overwriting existing alias for citation #1}}
+ \@namedef{al@#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{#2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citetalias{%
+ \@APAC@alias@citetrue
+ \citet
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citepalias{%
+ \@APAC@alias@citetrue
+ \citep
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Define \cmd{\citeindextype}, |\citeindextrue|, and |\citeindexfalse|
+% for compatibility with \pkg{natbib}. However, these don't do anything
+% in \pkg{apacite}, which supports author indexes using one of the
+% ``index'' options and back referencing of specific citations using
+% the \pkg{backref} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifciteindex \citeindexfalse
+\newcommand\citeindextype{default}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citenumfont}
+% The \pkg{natbib} command \cmd{\citenum} is undefined and thus gives an
+% error, but the \cmd{\citenumfont} declaration is harmless and can stay.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\citenumfont=\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% This sets various punctuation commands equal to its arguments.
+% In contrast with the \pkg{natbib} implementation, the 5th argument
+% (4th mandatory argument) is ignored, because \pkg{apacite} currently
+% only supports author-year citations. Also, in contrast to the
+% \pkg{natbib} implementation, this does not disable subsequent
+% \cmd{\bibstyle} commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bibpunct[7][, ]%
+ {\gdef\BBOP{#2}\gdef\BBCP{#3}\gdef\BBC{#4}%
+ \gdef\BBAY{#6}\gdef\BBYY{#7}\gdef\BBN{#1}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@apacite}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@apa}
+% These commands define the punctuation to be the \pkg{apacite}
+% default. This is normally not very useful, because this only
+% defines things as they are by default in \pkg{apacite} anyway, but
+% it may be useful as a simple reset if different parts of the
+% document need to use different styles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bibstyle@apacite{%
+ \bibpunct[, ]{(}{)}{; }{a}{, }{, }%
+ \setlength{\bibhang}{2.5em}%
+ \setlength{\bibsep}{0pt}%
+}
+\let\bibstyle@apa=\bibstyle@apacite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citestyle}
+% This command selects a predefined citation punctuation style.
+% In contrast to the \pkg{natbib} implementation, this is not
+% deactivated at |\begin{document}|, so it's possible to change
+% to a different style in the document body.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\citestyle[1]{\csname bibstyle@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setcitestyle}
+% This sets individual punctuation parameters. Adapted from
+% \fname{natbib.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\setcitestyle[1]{%
+ \@for\@tempa:=#1\do
+ {\def\@tempb{round}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBOP{(}\renewcommand\BBCP{)}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{square}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBOP{[}\renewcommand\BBCP{]}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{angle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBOP{$<$}\renewcommand\BBCP{$>$}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{curly}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBOP{\{}\renewcommand\BBCP{\}}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{semicolon}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBC{; }\fi
+ \def\@tempb{colon}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBC{: }\fi
+ \def\@tempb{comma}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \renewcommand\BBC{, }\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{apacite} supports author-year citation only, so |authoryear|,
+% |numbers|, and |super| are ignored. (Alternatively, we could have
+% issued an error for |numbers| and |super|.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@tempb{authoryear}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \fi
+ \def\@tempb{numbers}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \fi
+ \def\@tempb{super}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\APAC@find@eq\@tempa=\relax\@nil
+ \if\@tempc\relax\else
+ \expandafter\APAC@rem@eq\@tempc
+ \def\@tempb{open}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \xdef\BBOP{\@tempc}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{close}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \xdef\BBCP{\@tempc}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{aysep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \xdef\BBAY{\@tempc}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{yysep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \xdef\BBYY{\@tempc}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{notesep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \xdef\BBN{\@tempc}\fi
+ \def\@tempb{citesep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \xdef\BBC{\@tempc}\fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\def\APAC@find@eq#1=#2\@nil{\def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempc{#2}}
+\def\APAC@rem@eq#1={\def\@tempc{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% End of \pkg{natbib} emulation code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Using \pkg{apacite} with \pkg{natbib} for citations}
+%
+% If requested, this section loads \pkg{natbib} with the options
+% \pkgoption{longnamesfirst} and \pkgoption{sort}, which are
+% necessary for APA-style adherence. Then, we redefine some
+% \pkg{natbib} and \pkg{apacite} commands to improve APA adherence of
+% the combination. We also define a few additional commands that
+% \pkg{natbib} did not implement, but that fit the scheme and serve
+% some useful purpose for APA style citation. Defer loading this part
+% until the end of the package, after loading the bibliography part.
+% (This needs to be fixed.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BBA@nat}{%
+ \ifNAT@swa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% parenthetical; ``\&''
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \BBAA
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% in-text; ``and''
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \BBAB
+ \fi
+}
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \if@sectionbibdefault
+ \RequirePackage[longnamesfirst,sort]{natbib}
+ \else\if@sectionbib
+ \RequirePackage[longnamesfirst,sort,sectionbib]{natbib}
+ \else
+ \RequirePackage[longnamesfirst,sort]{natbib}
+ \fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@parse@date}
+% Redefine \pkg{natbib}'s date parsing function to avoid dropping the
+% year in ``(2008a, 2008b)''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\NAT@parse@date{}
+\def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{%
+ \def\NAT@year{#1#2}\def\NAT@exlab{{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% ``and'' vs.\ ``\&''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BBA}{\BBA@nat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the reflist ``\&''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\orig@nat@@lbibitem\@lbibitem
+\def\@lbibitem{\NAT@swatrue\orig@nat@@lbibitem}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make sure we're in parenthetical mode when in \cmd{\citetext}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\citetext[1]{\NAT@open\begingroup\NAT@swatrue
+ #1\endgroup\NAT@close}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\citefullauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\citefullauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citeauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citeauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citefullauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\Citefullauthorp}
+% There's only one \cmd{\citeauthor}, but we need to distinguish
+% between parenthetical and in-text. The most common is in-text, so
+% let \cmd{\citeauthor} be the in-text one, but define
+% \cmd{\citeauthort} to be the same, and add \cmd{\citeauthorp}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeauthort{\citeauthor}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citeauthort{\Citeauthor}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\citeauthorp
+ {\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\let\NAT@ctype\@ne\NAT@parfalse
+ \@ifstar{\NAT@fulltrue\NAT@citetp}{\NAT@fullfalse\NAT@citetp}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Citeauthorp
+ {\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\let\NAT@ctype\@ne\NAT@parfalse
+ \let\NAT@up\NAT@Up
+ \@ifstar{\NAT@fulltrue\NAT@citetp}{\NAT@fullfalse\NAT@citetp}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For completeness of the system.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Citefullauthor}{\Citeauthor*}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\citefullauthort}{\citeauthort*}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\citefullauthorp}{\citeauthorp*}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Citefullauthort}{\Citeauthort*}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Citefullauthorp}{\Citeauthorp*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@apacite}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@apa}
+% Other settings. I think the \pkg{natbib} defaults are good, but
+% let's define this explicitly and allow the usual \pkg{apacite}
+% customization options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\bibstyle@apacite{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{natbib} is inconsistent with adding space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \bibpunct[\BBN ]{\BBOP }{\BBCP }{\BBC }{a}{\BBAY }{\BBYY }%
+ \setlength{\bibhang}{2.5em}%
+ \setlength{\bibsep}{0pt}%
+}
+\providecommand\bibstyle@apa{\bibstyle@apacite}
+\citestyle{apacite}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% End of \pkg{natbib}--\pkg{apacite} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}% end \cmd{\AtEndOfPackage}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Shared code for \pkgoption{natbibemu} and
+% \pkgoption{natbibapa}}
+%
+% This section defines some extensions of \pkg{natbib} that are
+% useful with both the \pkgoption{natbibemu} and \pkgoption{natbibapa}
+% options.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@any@natbib
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitations}
+% \begin{macro}{\unmaskcitations}
+% \begin{macro}{\masknocite}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitep}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitealp}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitet}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitealt}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitefullauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteyearpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteyear}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitetalias}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitepalias}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCitet}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCitep}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCitealt}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCitealp}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCiteauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskcitenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskciteauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCitefullauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCiteauthort}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskCiteauthorp}
+% \begin{macro}{\masktext}
+% These commands allow masking of (self-)citations for a masked
+% review.
+% The \cmd{maskcitations} command defines the masked citation commands;
+% \cmd{unmaskcitations} does the same, but lets them be equal to the
+% non-mask versions. The advantage of putting these definitions within
+% a command is that we can switch between masked and unmasked within
+% the same document. This is not likely to be used very often in
+% practice, but is useful for writing tutorials.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\maskcitations}{%
+ \def\masknocite##1{}%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand\maskcite{%
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\mask@cite}%
+ {\mask@cite[]}%
+ }%
+ \def\mask@cite[##1]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[% % ]
+ {\mask@@cite[##1]}%
+ {\mask@@cite[##1][]}%
+ }%
+ \def\mask@@cite[##1][##2]##3{%
+ \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Count number of masked references.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setcounter{maskedRefs}{0}%
+ \@for\@citeb:=##3\do{%
+ \addtocounter{maskedRefs}{1}%
+ }%
+ \ifnum\value{maskedRefs} = 1%
+ \onemaskedcitationmsg{\themaskedRefs}%
+ \else
+ \maskedcitationsmsg{\themaskedRefs}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Let all other citation commands be identical to \cmd{\maskcite}.
+% We could try to do fancy things with parentheses, but it's unlikely
+% we will be able to cover all cases of interest, and users can easily
+% change their document if they don't like how this comes out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\maskcitep\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitealp\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitet\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitealt\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteauthor\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitefullauthor\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteyearpar\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteyear\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitetalias\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitepalias\maskcite
+ \let\maskCitet\maskcite
+ \let\maskCitep\maskcite
+ \let\maskCitealt\maskcite
+ \let\maskCitealp\maskcite
+ \let\maskCiteauthor\maskcite
+ \let\maskcitenum\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteauthort\maskcite
+ \let\maskciteauthorp\maskcite
+ \let\maskCitefullauthor\maskcite
+ \let\maskCiteauthort\maskcite
+ \let\maskCiteauthorp\maskcite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A user command to flexibly mask or unmask certain pieces of text.
+% An environment is technically more stable than a command, but less
+% intuitive for users. Under masking, this command prints the optional
+% alternative text |#1|, which defaults to nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\masktext}[2][]{##1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The ``mask'' citation commands revert to the same commands without
+% ``mask'' if the \pkgoption{mask} option is not set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\unmaskcitations}{%
+ \let\masknocite\nocite
+ \let\maskcitep\citep
+ \let\maskcitealp\citealp
+ \let\maskcitet\citet
+ \let\maskcitealt\citealt
+ \let\maskciteauthor\citeauthor
+ \let\maskcitefullauthor\citefullauthor
+ \let\maskciteyearpar\citeyearpar
+ \let\maskciteyear\citeyear
+ \let\maskcite\cite
+ \let\maskcitetalias\citetalias
+ \let\maskcitepalias\citepalias
+ \let\maskCitet\Citet
+ \let\maskCitep\Citep
+ \let\maskCitealt\Citealt
+ \let\maskCitealp\Citealp
+ \let\maskCiteauthor\Citeauthor
+ \let\maskcitenum\citenum
+ \let\maskciteauthort\citeauthort
+ \let\maskciteauthorp\citeauthorp
+ \let\maskCitefullauthor\Citefullauthor
+ \let\maskCiteauthort\Citeauthort
+ \let\maskCiteauthorp\Citeauthorp
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Unmasked, this command prints the mandatory second argument |#2|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\masktext}[2][]{##2}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% End of \pkg{natbib} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This is part of the shared code, but has to be put after loading
+% of \pkg{natbib}, so we'll put it here for the moment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@anycitation
+ \AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \if@APAC@mask
+ \maskcitations
+ \else
+ \unmaskcitations
+ \fi
+ }%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Meta analysis}
+%
+% To my knowledge. \cmd{\nocitemeta} is not defined by any other citation
+% package, so we'll provide it here regardless of the citation option
+% chosen.
+% \begin{macro}{\definemetaflag}
+% \begin{macro}{\nocitemeta}
+% This induces an entry in the reference list, but not in the text, and
+% compared to \cmd{\nocite} defines an additional flag that indicates that the
+% reference has been used in the meta-analysis reported. The construction
+% with \cmd{\definemetaflag} is necessary to support \cmd{\nocitemeta} in
+% an appendix \emph{after} the reference list. However, the previous version
+% did not require the |\if@filesw|, which suggests that that would work if
+% we can't write to the \fname{.aux} file, whereas the current one wouldn't.
+% I don't know under what conditions this would happen or be useful, but it
+% seems extremely rare. If somebody complains, I'll make a fix.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\definemetaflag#1{%
+ \@bsphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define the note that precedes the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\def
+ \csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{%
+ \APACmetaprenote}%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define the meta-analysis flag for the current item.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\global\expandafter
+ \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+ }%
+ {}%
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+}
+\def\nocitemeta#1{%
+ \nocite{#1}%
+ \@bsphack
+ \if@filesw
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \immediate\write
+ \@newciteauxhandle{\string\definemetaflag{\@citeb}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \@esphack
+ \@restore@auxhandle
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Bibliography structure}
+%
+% Here we define commands and environments that handle the structure of the
+% reference list, various global style parameters, and the communication with
+% the citation commands. Commands for detailed aspects of the entries
+% themselves are defined below.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibnewpage}
+% Macro for starting a new page before the bibliography, if requested.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
+% No labels in the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@biblabel#1{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lbibitem}
+% Label-bibitem. If \pkg{natbib} is loaded after \pkg{apacite} (or
+% \pkg{apacite} is loaded with the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option),
+% this is overwritten. I should introduce an option that disables
+% \pkg{apacite}'s bibliography-defining commands and/or senses whether
+% \pkg{natbib} is loaded, so this is never defined in such cases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{%
+ \def\BBA{\BBAA}% ``\&''
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For compatibility with \pkg{chapterbib}, \pkg{bibunits}, \pkg{backref}, and
+% \pkg{hyperref}. Adapted from \fname{natbib.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ \@biblabel{#1}%
+ \hyper@natanchorend]%
+ \if@filesw{%
+ \def\BBA{\string\BBA}%
+ \let\protect\noexpand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{bibunits} redefines \cmd{\bibcite} through \cmd{\AtBeginDocument}
+% in a way that is incompatible with \pkg{apacite}'s definition. The
+% simplest way to get things working automatically seems to be
+% introducing the parallel \cmd{\APACbibcite} command. This should also
+% solve many other compatibility problems.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}%
+ \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}%
+ \def\BBA{\BBAA}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACbibcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcite}
+% These commands pass the author-year information from the reference list to
+% the citation commands. See above for the necessity for \cmd{\APACbibcite}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\APACbibcite#1#2{%
+ \global\expandafter
+ \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}% names
+ \global\expandafter
+ \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We don't need this one anymore, but other packages may use it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibcite\APACbibcite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\st@rtbibsection}
+% Start a new section for the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\st@rtbibsection{%
+ \@bibnewpage% start a new page if desired
+ \if@numberedbib%
+ \section{\refname}% e.g., 6. References
+ \else%
+ \section*{\refname}% e.g., References
+ \if@tocbib%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
+ \fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Ideally, we'd use something like |\sectionmark{{\refname}}|, so that
+% user-defined page heading styles are respected. But this does not work
+% properly, because it generates section numbers. Therefore, we define the
+% complete headings here. I need to find a better solution for this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{chapter}
+ {\@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}}%
+ {\markright{{\refname}}}%
+ \fi%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\st@rtbibchapter}
+% Start a new chapter for the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\st@rtbibchapter{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here no \cmd{\@bibnewpage}, because it is assumed that the \cmd{\chapter}
+% starts a new page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@numberedbib%
+ \chapter{\bibname}% e.g., 6. References
+ \else%
+ \chapter*{\bibname}% e.g., References
+ \if@tocbib%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}%
+ \fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Again, \cmd{\chaptermark} and \cmd{\sectionmark} don't work properly, so
+% define headings at a lower level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@mkboth{{\bibname}}{{\bibname}}%
+ \fi%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
+% This environment contains the reference list. For historical reasons, it is
+% defined in the plain \TeX{} way through definition of the
+% \cmd{\thebibliography} and \cmd{\endthebibliography} macros instead of
+% \cmd{\renewenvironment}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thebibliography#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \cmd{\chapter} is not defined, start a bibliography section.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+ {\st@rtbibsection}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Else, chapter is defined. Check first whether an explicit option has been
+% chosen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\if@sectionbibdefault
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No explicit option chosen, so we have to speculate. If \cmd{\mainmatter}
+% is not defined (typically a report), assume that the bibliography is
+% a chapter. If \cmd{\mainmatter} is defined, a bibliography in the
+% main matter is typically a chapter-specific one, so generate a
+% bibliography section. A bibliography in the back matter is most likely
+% a global one, so then generate a bibliography chapter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}%
+ {\st@rtbibchapter}%
+ {\if@mainmatter
+ \st@rtbibsection
+ \else
+ \st@rtbibchapter
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If an explicit option has been chosen, simply use this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \if@sectionbib
+ \st@rtbibsection
+ \else
+ \st@rtbibchapter
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Insert some code between the chapter or section heading and the reference
+% list. \cmd{\bibliographytypesize} will typically be used for some font
+% settings and \cmd{\bibliographyprenote} for explanatory text, but this is
+% up to the user. The ``metaprenote'' is a fixed text indicating that
+% marked references are included in the meta-analysis reported.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bibliographytypesize % e.g., to put the bibliography in \small type
+ \bibliographyprenote % some explanatory note before the references
+ \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {}% skip
+ {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Initialize the list environment that holds the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \list{\relax}{\labelsep=\biblabelsep
+% \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \parsep=\bibparsep
+ \itemsep=\bibitemsep
+ \leftmargin=\bibleftmargin
+ \itemindent=\bibindent}% changed to cope with 4th ed.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\newblock} is inserted between ``blocks'' of a reference entry and
+% inserts some stretchable and shrinkable extra space between the blocks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
+ \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax %'
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For compatibility with \pkg{bibtopic}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bt@beg@thb@hook
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To overrule \pkg{backref}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APACrestorebibitem
+}
+\def\endthebibliography{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For compatibility with \pkg{bibtopic}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bt@end@thb@hook
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Warning if no item was included in the list and return to normal font size.
+% If \cmd{\bibliographytypesize} includes other formatting as well, the user
+% has to reset this explicitly after the bibliography, at least if there is
+% text after it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@noitemerr{%
+ \@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}%
+ }%
+ \endlist\normalsize
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Reference list formatting}
+%
+% Traditionally, the reference list formatting is almost completely done by
+% the bibliography style (\fname{.bst} file). Modeled after its predecessor,
+% \pkg{theapa}, \pkg{apacite} has always supported some possibilities for
+% customization through redefinable macros in the reference list. Due to my
+% own customization needs, requests by users, and the language support, an
+% increasing amount of reference list formatting is handled in this way. This
+% section defines the default implementation of these macros, which users
+% thus can redefine.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@connect@with@commas}
+% An auxiliary function: Make a comma-separated output list of the input,
+% recognizing empty arguments. Must be called with one argument, and the
+% argument contains a comma-separated list of elements. The elements of this
+% should generally be enclosed in braces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@connect@with@commas#1{%
+ \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }%
+ \let\@connect@string\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Loop over elements.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\@element@:=#1\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@empty\@element@%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first nonempty
+% element, a comma and space afterwards).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@connect@string\@element@%
+ \let\@connect@string\@comma@space
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \let\@connect@string\@undefined
+ \let\@comma@space\@undefined
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACmetastar}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACinsertmetastar}
+% Insert an asterisk before the names in the reference list for entries that
+% are used in a meta-analysis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}}
+\def\APACinsertmetastar#1{%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {}% skip
+ {{\APACmetastar}}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{APACrefauthors}
+% An environment that allows some limited customization of author
+% formatting in the reference list. In this implementation customization
+% is handled through the \cmd{\APACrefauthstyle} macro, which allows some
+% style definition, in particular font changes such as \cmd{\sc}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{APACrefauthors}{%
+ \begingroup \APACrefauthstyle
+}{\endgroup }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefYear}
+% Formatting of the year in the reference list. Note that instead of redefining
+% this command, one can also redefine the parentheses themselves. The argument
+% should never be empty. The companion macro \cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay} is
+% defined below in the language-specific section.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefYear}[1]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}{\BBCP}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Title formatting. In these, |#1| is the capitalized title and |#2| is the
+% sentence-case title.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefatitle}
+% Article title (roman, not capitalized).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefatitle}[2]{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefbtitle}
+% Book title (italic, not capitalized).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefbtitle}[2]{\Bem{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefaetitle}
+% English translation of a foreign article title (bracketed, roman, not
+% capitalized).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefaetitle}[2]{[#2]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefbetitle}
+% English translation of a foreign book title (bracketed, roman, not
+% capitalized).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefbetitle}[2]{[#2]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACjournalVolNumPages}
+% Journal, volume, number, pages
+% (|#1| = journal, |#2| = volume, |#3| = number, |#4| = formatted pages).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{%
+ \Bem{#1}% journal
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, \Bem{#2}% volume
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip({#3})% issue number
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#4}% pages
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressPublisher}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressInstitution}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressSchool}
+% Address and publisher, institution, or school (|#1| = address,
+% |#2| = publisher).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ {#2}% publisher
+ \fi
+ \else
+ {#1}% address
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip: {#2}% publisher
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\APACaddressSchool}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ {#1}% address
+ \fi
+ \else
+ {#2}% school
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#1}% address
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACtypeAddressSchool}
+% Type, school, and address in parenthese after the title in a thesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\APACtypeAddressSchool}[3]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ ({#2})% address
+ \fi
+ \else
+ ({#3}% school
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% address
+ \fi
+ )%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ ({#1}% type
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% address
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% school
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% address
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ )%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth}
+% Address and publisher/institution if the latter is also the author.
+% (|#1| = address, |#2| = publisher).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ {\BAuthor{}}% Publisher formatted as ``Author''
+ \else
+ {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}% Address: Author
+ \fi
+}
+\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APAChowpublished}
+% Formatting of the \fieldname{howpublished} field. The
+% \cmd{\APAChowpublished} macro is only inserted in the \fname{.bbl} file if
+% the argument is nonempty. Because we don't want any special formatting, and
+% |\def\APAChowpublished#1{#1}| leads to problems with hash marks (`|#|') in
+% url's that may be present in \fieldname{howpublished}, we simply pretend
+% that \cmd{\APAChowpublished} does not have an argument and does nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\APAChowpublished\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{APACrefURL}
+% URL formatting. Use an environment instead of a macro to avoid some problems
+% with url's as arguments of macros. The optional argument is the date that
+% the url was last checked.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{APACrefURL}[1][]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \BRetrievedFrom % Retrieved from
+ \else
+ \BRetrieved{#1}% Retrieved <date>, from
+ \fi
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{APACrefDOI}
+% DOI formatting. Use an environment instead of a macro to avoid some problems
+% with url's as arguments of macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{APACrefDOI}{%
+ \global\let\old@doi\doi
+ \if@doi
+ \doiprefix
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Suppression of DOIs. For non-APA styles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\doi\@gobble
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore definition of \cmd{\doi}, in case a user wants to use this
+% command explicitly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{\global\let\doi\old@doi }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{APACrefURLmsg}
+% URLs of messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{APACrefURLmsg}{%
+ \BMsgPostedTo
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACorigED}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACorigEDS}
+% Original editor(s) for reprints and translations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACorigED}[1]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}% ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)''
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACorigEDS}[1]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}% ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)''
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACbVolEdTR}
+% Volume, edition, type, number, for a technical report (|#1| = formatted
+% edition + volume, |#2| = formatted technical report type + number).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ {(#2)}% (Technical Report No.\ <no>)
+ \fi
+ \else
+ ({#1}% (2nd ed., Vol.~1
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip; {#2}% ; Technical Report No.\ <no>
+ \fi
+ )% Final parenthesis.
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}
+% Volume, edition, type, number, pages for an \entryname{@intechreport}.
+% Arguments: |#1| = formatted edition + volume, |#2| = formatted technical
+% report type + number, |#3| = formatted pages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ {(#3)}%% (pp. 10--30)
+ \fi
+ \else
+ %% (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30)
+ (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ ({#1}% (2nd ed., Vol.~1
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip; {#3}% ; pp. 10--30
+ \fi
+ \else
+ %% ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30
+ \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}%
+ \fi
+ )% Final parenthesis.
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Various note formatting functions.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefnote}
+% Only a note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefnote}[1]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ ({#1})%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACorigyearnote}
+% Original year + optional note (|#1| = year, |#2| = note).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACorigyearnote}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Original year empty: format note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APACrefnote{#2}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check for \cmd{\bibnodate}. I think the following command does not check
+% whether |#1| = `\cmd{\bibnodate}', but expands them; but that should also
+% be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \cmd{\expandafter} commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\bibnodate#1\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Original year unknown: Format (only) note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APACrefnote{#2}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Original year has been given: ``Original work published''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ (\BOWP{} {#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Insert note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip; {#2}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Final parenthesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ )%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACorigjournalnote}
+% Original journal + optional note.
+% Arguments: |#1| = year, |#2| = journal, |#3| = volume, |#4| = issue number,
+% |#5| = formatted pages, |#6| = note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{%
+ (\BREPR{} % ``(Reprinted from '' (note the space)
+ \Bem{#2}% Journal (should not be empty)
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#1}% , year
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, \Bem{#3}% , volume
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip{[#4]}% [issue number]
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#5\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#5}% , pages
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#6\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip; {#6}% ; note
+ \fi
+ )% Final parenthesis
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACorigbooknote}
+% Original book + optional note. Arguments:
+% |#1| = year, |#2| = formatted editor, |#3| = formatted title,
+% |#4| = formatted edition, |#5| = formatted volume, |#6| = formatted pages,
+% |#7| = address, |#8| = publisher, |#9| = note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACorigbooknote}[9]{%
+ %% ``(Reprinted from '' (note the space)
+ (\BREPR{} %
+ %% Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here, because it's
+% done in the \fname{.bst} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@connect@with@commas{%
+ {#3},{#4},{#5},{#6},{#2},{#1},{\APACaddressPublisher{#7}{#8}}%
+ }%%
+ \ifx\@empty#9\@empty
+ \else
+ ; #9%% ; note
+ \fi
+ )% Final parenthesis.
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{APACrefannotation}
+% Annotations; for annotated bibliographies. Cf.~\citeA[pp.~810--811]{TLC2}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{APACrefannotation}{%
+ \begin{quotation}\noindent\ignorespaces
+}{\end{quotation}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Various specific style settings and utility macros}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BAstyle}
+% Text style of authors for citations that include the year as well
+% (\cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\shortcite}, \cmd{\fullcite}, \cmd{\citeA},
+% \cmd{\shortciteA}, \cmd{\fullciteA}, \cmd{\citeNP}, \cmd{\shortciteNP},
+% \cmd{\fullciteNP}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BAstyle}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BAastyle}
+% Text style of authors for \cmd{\citeauthor} and its variants
+% (\cmd{\shortciteauthor}, \cmd{\fullciteauthor}, \cmd{\citeauthorNP},
+% \cmd{\shortciteauthorNP}, \cmd{\fullciteauthorNP}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BAastyle}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefauthstyle}
+% Text style of authors in reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefauthstyle}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACciteatitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACcitebtitle}
+% Formatting of ``article'' and ``book'' titles when they are used in a
+% citation, typically when there is no author and the title takes this role.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}
+\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACyear}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACexlab}
+% Formatting of the year and the extra label (`a', `b', etc.) that is used to
+% distinguish different works by the same author(s) in the same year. These
+% macros have been introduced to solve some problems with \pkg{natbib}'s
+% parsing macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}%
+\newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theBibCnt}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCnt}
+% The |BibCnt| counter is used to distinguish multiple citations with the same
+% author(s) and year. Using a counter allows the user control over its
+% formatting. The default formatting (APA style) is to add roman lowercase
+% letters: ``(Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b)''. The \cmd{\protect} is necessary when
+% \pkg{natbib} is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{BibCnt}
+\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BCntIP}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCntND}
+% Variations of \cmd{\BCnt} for in-press and no-date citations. The \cmd{\mbox}
+% prevents a line break at the hyphen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographytypesize}
+% Font size of the references, but this macro can be abused to insert lots of
+% other style commands and/or text between the section or chapter heading and
+% the actual references as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographyprenote}
+% An optional note just before the references in the reference list (but after
+% \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}). It defaults to nothing, but can be changed to
+% a list of commands (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the
+% reference list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibleftmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibparsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitemsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\biblabelsep}
+% Declare a few length parameters for the reference list and give them
+% default values. Supporting the \pkg{natbib} length \cmd{\bibhang} would
+% be nice, but I don't see a way to do this in a user-friendly way that
+% allows loading \pkg{apacite} both with and without \pkg{natbib} and
+% also allows changing \cmd{\bibindent} and \cmd{\bibleftmargin}
+% separately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip{\bibleftmargin}
+\newskip{\bibindent}
+\newskip{\bibparsep}
+\newskip{\bibitemsep}
+\newskip{\biblabelsep}
+\setlength{\bibleftmargin}{2.5em}
+\setlength{\bibindent}{-\bibleftmargin}
+\setlength{\bibparsep}{0pt}
+\setlength{\bibitemsep}{0pt plus .3pt}
+\setlength{\biblabelsep}{0pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcorporate}
+% Formatting of corporate (group) authors. Its primary function is in the
+% \BibTeX{} stage. It is recognized by \fname{apacite.bst}, which handles
+% such authors slightly differently from ordinary authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibcorporate\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BBA}
+% Initialize this command, which formats the ``and'' between authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA}% `\&'
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Bem}
+% Emphasis in the bibliography. A relic from \pkg{theapa}. It allows to use
+% underlining in the bibliography and italics in the text, but the default is
+% italics.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\Bem\emph
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibnotype}
+% This macro indicates that the type information should be left empty. It is
+% used for \entryname{@techreport} and \entryname{@intechreport}, where
+% ``\cmd{\BTR}'' is the default type if the field is left empty. As such, it
+% primarily modifies the behavior of \fname{apacite.bst}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibnotype}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACSortNoop}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibphant}
+% The \cmd{\APACSortNoop} macro can be used to change the sorting order:
+% When put between a pair of braces at the beginning of a field, the entry is
+% sorted on the argument of this command, but the argument is never displayed.
+% \cmd{\bibphant} is the same as \cmd{\APACSortNoop}, so it is not discussed
+% in the main documentation. It is only kept for backwards compatibility with
+% old versions of \pkg{apacite}, in which it was documented.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACSortNoop}[1]{}
+\let\bibphant\APACSortNoop
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makehashother}
+% \begin{macro}{\makehashmacropar}
+% Setting the catcode of the hash mark `|#|'. This is mainly useful in some
+% cases in which the bibliography contains urls containing `|#|' symbols.
+% These are analogous to \cmd{\makeatother} and \cmd{\makeatletter}.
+% (They are undocumented in the main documentation!)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax}
+\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Author index setup and index styles}
+%
+% Here, the author index options are implemented. It also defines some index
+% styles and defines most of the index-related commands to do nothing in case
+% no author index is requested.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AX}
+% \begin{macro}{\corporateAX}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AXfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\currentindexname}
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintAX}
+% \begin{macro}{\orig@printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\check@printindex}
+% Define the author-indexing macros and the index-printing commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@index
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Author index requested.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@APAC@index@package
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Load \pkg{index} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define the author index. This may be changed in the preamble of the
+% document (or in a user-provided package) by a \cmd{\renewindex}
+% command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Author indexing command. Some trial and error and adapting code from
+% other packages to get this right, esp.\ when \pkg{hyperref} is also
+% loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{%
+ \if@filesw{%
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+ \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{%
+ \string\string\string
+ \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Without the \pkg{index} package, using standard \LaTeX{}. This includes
+% a bit of code adapted from \fname{ltidxglo.dtx} and \fname{doc.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newwrite\@AXfile
+ \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx
+ \typeout
+ {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{%
+ \protected@write\@AXfile{}%
+ {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}%
+ }%
+ \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}%
+ \@input@{\jobname.and}%
+ \global\let\PrintAX\@empty
+ }%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that \cmd{\printindex} is defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now, redefine \cmd{\printindex} to accommodate both \cmd{\printindex}
+% without argument and |\printindex[autx]|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\orig@printindex\printindex
+ \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{%
+ \orig@printindex}}%
+ \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Include corporate authors in the author index?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@APAC@include@corporate
+ \let\corporateAX\AX
+ \else
+ \let\corporateAX\@gobble
+ \fi
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No author index. Wait until |\begin{document}| for checking whether another
+% package is loaded that defines \cmd{\printindex}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{printindex}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\printindex} has not been defined. Define \cmd{\printindex} so
+% that it suppresses the indexes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{%
+ \check@printindex[]}}%
+ \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }%
+ }%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\printindex} has been defined, so save its definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\orig@printindex\printindex
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Redefine \cmd{\printindex} so that it suppresses the author index
+% but does not change other indexes: (1) If there is no optional
+% argument, use the original definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% (2) If there is an optional argument, check whether it is equal to
+% ``|autx|''. If so, suppress this (author) index. If not, use the
+% original definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\check@printindex[#1]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use a clumsy way to check whether |#1| = |autx|, but seemingly more
+% elegant ways somehow didn't work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+ \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}%
+ {\orig@printindex[#1]}%
+ {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Empty author indexing commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AX\@gobble
+ \let\corporateAX\@gobble
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{theindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACstdindex}
+% The \envirname{index} environment as defined in the \pkg{index} package;
+% literally copied from \fname{index.sty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACstdindex}{%
+ \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[%
+ \section*{\indexname}%
+ \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+ \index@prologue
+ \bigskip
+ \fi
+ ]%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ }{%
+ \if@restonecol
+ \onecolumn
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ }
+ }{%
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[%
+ \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}%
+ \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+ \index@prologue
+ \bigskip
+ \fi
+ ]%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ }{%
+ \if@restonecol
+ \onecolumn
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACtocindex}
+% The \envirname{index} environment as defined in the \pkg{index} package, but
+% with a table of contents entry added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACtocindex}{%
+ \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[%
+ \section*{\indexname}%
+ \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+ \index@prologue
+ \bigskip
+ \fi
+ ]%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line added by EM.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ }{%
+ \if@restonecol
+ \onecolumn
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ }
+ }{%
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[%
+ \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}%
+ \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+ \index@prologue
+ \bigskip
+ \fi
+ ]%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line added by EM.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ }{%
+ \if@restonecol
+ \onecolumn
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACemindex}
+% An alternative style for the \envirname{index} environment, such that
+% automatically a chapter or section title is generated, with a corresponding
+% table of contents entry. The index is now in a \envirname{multicol}
+% environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACemindex}{%
+ \RequirePackage{multicol}
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \edef\@indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+ \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+ {\section*{\@indexname}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}%
+%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers
+ }%
+ {\chapter*{\@indexname}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}%
+%% \chaptermark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers
+%% % (except in the backmatter)
+%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers
+ }%
+ \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% Hence we need this.
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \setlength{\columnsep}{2em}
+ \small
+ \begin{multicols}{2}
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+ {\end{multicols}\normalsize
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACltxemindex}
+% A variation on \cmd{\APACemindex}, but without using the \pkg{index} package,
+% which conflicts with the standard \LaTeX{} documentation classes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACltxemindex}{%
+ \RequirePackage{multicol}
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The index naming scheme of the \pkg{index} package is also absent.
+% Therefore, try to guess an index name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{%
+ \@ifundefined{indexname}{%
+ \edef\@indexname{Index}%
+ }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}%
+ }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}%
+ \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+ {\section*{\@indexname}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}%
+%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers
+ }%
+ {\chapter*{\@indexname}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}%
+%% \chaptermark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers
+%% % (except in the backmatter)
+%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers
+ }%
+ \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% Hence we need this.
+ \def\pfill{\relax{}}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \setlength{\columnsep}{2em}
+ \small
+ \begin{multicols}{2}
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+ {\end{multicols}\normalsize
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting of urls}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@force@Tilde}
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACdot}
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACcomma}
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACquestionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACexclamation}
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@APAChyphen}
+% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACunderscore}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACurlBreaks}
+% \begin{macro}{\url@APACttstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\url@APACrmstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\url@APACsfstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\url@APACsamestyle}
+% The APA manual requires breaking of urls \emph{after} a slash or
+% \emph{before} a dot. In particular, there should not be a break between
+% ``|http:|'' and ``|//|''. This differs from the standard line breaking
+% style of the \pkg{url} package. Therefore, we define an APA-style for
+% url formatting here. (Maybe this should be part of the \pkg{apa} class,
+% but urls occur most often in the reference list, so we do it here.)
+% The \pkg{url} package also defines many other (punctuation) symbols at
+% which a line break may occur. The APA manual does not mention these, but
+% it seems in the spirit of the APA manual to use these as well. See also
+% \citeA[pp.~645--646]{chicago}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{url}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To circumvent an ``undefined'' error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The original dot. Simply using `|.|' causes an infinite loop. This command
+% is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved easier by redefining
+% \cmd{\Url@APACdot}. The same argument holds for the other punctuation
+% marks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }%
+ \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }%
+ \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }%
+ \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }%
+ \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }%
+ \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define the APA-style line breaks for urls.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\APACurlBreaks{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Remove dot (`|.|') and slash (`|/|') from the ordinary breaks and add
+% the slash to the big breaks, so that |http://| is broken after the second
+% slash instead of after the colon. The \cmd{\UrlNoBreaks} and
+% \cmd{UrlOrds} are the default ones from the \pkg{url} package, but they
+% are repeated here to obtain a complete style, so that we don't have to
+% rely on what is the \pkg{url} default (which might change).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}%
+ \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}%
+ \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% \)
+ \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define the dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may
+% occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur).
+% \citeA{chicago} requires the same treatment of a few other punctuation
+% marks, different from \pkg{url}'s default behavior. We implement these
+% as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\UrlSpecials{%
+ \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }%
+ \do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }%
+ \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }%
+ \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }%
+ \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }%
+ \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }%
+ \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}%
+ \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde
+ }%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Change the underscore for when a non-tt font is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do
+ \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do
+ \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in
+% \fname{url.sty}, and use the |APACtt|-style as default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+ \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+ \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+ \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }%
+ \urlstyle{APACtt}%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\url}
+% In case \cmd{\url} is undefined, define a very simple version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{url}{%
+ \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doi}
+% \begin{macro}{\doiprefix}
+% Similarly, define \cmd{\doi}. Adapted from code in \fname{plainnat.bst}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax
+ \providecommand{\doi}[1]{#1}\else
+ \providecommand{\doi}{\begingroup \urlstyle{APACsame}\Url}\fi
+}
+\@ifundefined{doiprefix}{%
+ \newcommand{\doiprefix}{doi:\penalty0{}}%
+}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility code}
+%
+% Many other packages redefine citation commands and reference list commands,
+% or at least affect them, even if that is not their core business. This leads
+% to all kinds of compatibility problems. Here, these are repaired.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{babel}}
+%
+% From \fname{hyperref.dtx}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% Package \pkg{babel} redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with macro
+% \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten to avoid the warning
+% ``Label(s) may have changed.''.
+% \end{quote}
+% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted. The
+% other \cmd{\bibcite}-restoring compatibility code above does something
+% similar, but does not do the job correctly if \pkg{babel} is loaded (why?).
+% This only works if \pkg{babel} is loaded before \pkg{apacite}; putting it in
+% a \cmd{\AtBeginDocument} does not work well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{%
+ \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{%
+ \let\bibcite\APACbibcite
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{natbib}}
+%
+% Above, we implemented some code for the \pkgoption{natbibapa} option.
+% The code here is intended as a fix for more general cases, but we
+% have to make sure not to conflict with the code above. This applies
+% to the redefinition of the \cmd{\NAT@parse@date} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+\else
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Redefine a \pkg{natbib} command. This may be ethically dubious, but without
+% it, \pkg{natbib} simply cannot handle \pkg{apacite}-generated \fname{.bbl}
+% files. The only reason I can think of why both \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{natbib}
+% would be loaded is exactly the situation when you want to use \pkg{natbib}
+% for the citations and \pkg{apacite} for the reference list. In this
+% situation you would load \fname{apacite.sty}, not for the citation commands,
+% but for the punctuation commands and labels defined by \pkg{apacite}. In this
+% situation, the redefinition below is necessary and therefore I do this here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{%
+ \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{natbib} redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which interferes a little with
+% our purposes. Therefore, add some patches. This goes wrong if
+% \cmd{\bibpreamble} is redefined later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't
+% come up with a better hack yet.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
+ \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble
+ \def\bibpreamble{%
+ \@oldbibpreamble%
+ \bibliographytypesize%
+ \bibliographyprenote%
+ \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {}% skip
+ {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ }%
+ \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography
+ \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography%
+ \normalsize}%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}}
+%
+% The code here is adapted from \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{natbib}, and their
+% respective documentation, to make use of their interoperability.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{%
+ \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}%
+ \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{%
+ \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}%
+ \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{%
+ \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}%
+ \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{%
+ \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}%
+ \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{%
+ \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}%
+ \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{%
+ \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Remove spaces from hyperlinks (\pkg{hyperref} keeps them, even if they are
+% removed from the visible output, so you'd get awkward results like
+% |\href{http://my .link}{http://my.link}|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next should always be true, but just to be sure\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{url}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Is \pkgoption{obeyspaces} option requested? If not, then remove spaces
+% from hyperlinks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty
+ \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}%
+ \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}%
+ \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}%
+ \fi
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{backref}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\back@cite}
+% \begin{macro}{\CurrentBib}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintBackRefs}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrestorebibitem}
+% A bit of code that makes life a little easier, adapted from
+% \fname{amsrefs.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\back@cite{}%
+\def\CurrentBib{}%
+\def\PrintBackRefs{}%
+\def\APACrestorebibitem{}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that \cmd{\ifBR@verbose} is defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{%
+ \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse
+ \let\fi\fi}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better readable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\back@cite#1{%
+ \ifBR@verbose
+ \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}%
+ \fi
+ \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Adaptation of the \cmd{\bibitem} command so that \pkg{backref} does not
+% scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly done
+% through \cmd{\PrintBackRefs}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\APACrestorebibitem{%
+ \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{%
+ \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}%
+ \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Printing the backrefs: Revert to the standard \pkg{backref} macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Else: \pkg{backref} not loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\back@cite\@gobble
+ \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BR@@lbibitem}
+% Frankly, at the moment, I do not completely understand why we need this. But
+% I'm sure it was for a good reason when I included this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{%
+ \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3%
+ \BR@backref{#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{chapterbib}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@extra@b@citeb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@extra@binfo}
+% From the instructions of the \pkg{chapterbib} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{}
+\gdef\@extra@binfo{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@extra@b@citeb}
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@extra@binfo}
+% Replacements of the \pkg{chapterbib} \cmd{\@extra@b@citeb} and
+% \cmd{\@extra@binfo} commands. These accumulate all kinds of additional flags
+% to accommodate multiple bibliographies of various packages (\pkg{chapterbib},
+% \pkg{bibunits}, \pkg{multibbl}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}%
+\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{bibunits}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACstd@cite}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACstd@nocite}
+% \begin{macro}{\APACstd@lbibitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@bu}
+% Store the standard \pkg{apacite} definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \let\APACstd@cite\cite
+ \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite
+ \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Default definition, if \pkg{bibunits} is not loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To mimic \pkg{chapterbib} behavior (with flags etc.).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\APAC@bu{%
+ \ifx\cite\std@cite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Outside a bibunit. The ``|@APACbu|'' strings are intended to minimize
+% the possibility of wrong matches, such as |\b@ex11| = |ex11| from the
+% global aux or |\b@ex11| = |ex1| from bibunit~1. The last `|@|' is
+% similarly intended to avoid confusion if both \pkg{bibunits} and
+% \pkg{chapterbib} are loaded (``|11@1|'' = 11th bibunit, 1st
+% \pkg{chapterbib} unit; ``|1@11|'' = 1st bibunit, 11th
+% \pkg{chapterbib} unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would be
+% used at the same time, but safety first.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ @APACbu0@%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Within a bibunit: Use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @%
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Standard \pkg{apacite} definition of the \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\nocite}
+% commands. The latter is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect ``Citation
+% undefined'' warnings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite
+ \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore the \pkg{apacite} definition of \cmd{\bibitem}, mainly because of
+% the \cmd{\@newciteauxhandle} instead of \cmd{\@auxout}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{%
+ \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle
+ \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux
+ \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}%
+ \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To make sure everything works whether \pkg{bibunits} is loaded before or
+% after \pkg{apacite}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{bibtopic}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired error
+% message of \pkg{bibtopic}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These \pkg{bibtopic} hooks are included in the
+% \envirname{thebibliography} environment as generated by
+% \fname{apacite.bst}, so \pkg{bibtopic} should work correctly. If
+% \pkg{bibtopic} is not loaded, they should do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax}
+ \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax}
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{multibbl}}
+%
+% Almost all of \pkg{multibbl}'s code is redefined here, mainly because
+% \pkg{apacite} needs to distinguish which citation refers to which
+% bibliography, so that flags can be correctly set whether a citation
+% is the first citation to the work from the specific bibliography and
+% correctly includes the meta-analysis flags with the various
+% bibliographies.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@curr@aux}
+% Default flag definition if \pkg{multibbl} is not loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To mimic \pkg{chapterbib} behavior (with flags etc.).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\newbibliography}
+% Ditto. This puts the \cmd{\bibcite} commands in |#1.aux| instead of in
+% the main \fname{.aux} file, so that the flags can be differentiated.
+% This also means that the \fname{.aux} file has to be read by \LaTeX{}
+% before it is overwritten.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\newbibliography#1{%
+ \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+ \@input@{#1.aux}%
+ \begingroup
+ \if@filesw
+ \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\immediate\openout
+ \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax
+ \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@mbbl@bibliography}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% Add the flag to the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography
+ \def\bibliography#1#2#3{%
+ \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+ \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle
+ \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}%
+ \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp
+ \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout
+ }%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@orig@@cite}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@cite}
+% Add an extra argument to \cmd{\@@cite}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite
+ \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{%
+ \nocite{#3}{#4}%
+ \let\@temp@nocite\nocite
+ \let\nocite\@gobble
+ \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}%
+ \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}%
+ \let\nocite\@temp@nocite
+ \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined
+ }%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@orig@nocite}
+% \begin{macro}{\nocite}
+% Add an extra argument to \cmd{\nocite}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@orig@nocite\nocite
+ \def\nocite#1#2{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define a flag.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No flag-setting in \cmd{\nocite}: A no-cite is not a citation,
+% so a subsequent citation may be the first citation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@bsphack
+ \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since we are after |\begin{document}| we can do the citations:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\@newciteauxhandle} for compatibility with \pkg{multibib};
+% |#1@auxfile| for compatibility with \pkg{multibbl}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{%
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+ \fi
+ }{\if@filesw
+ \expandafter\immediate%
+ \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{%
+ \edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
+ \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy
+ \else
+ \G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+ \fi
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{apacite} has no compatibility problems with \LaTeX~2.09,
+% because it does not work with \LaTeX~2.09 anyway, so we can do the
+% following, suggested in \fname{ltbibl.dtx}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \@esphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For compatibility with \pkg{multibib}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@restore@auxhandle
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@orig@nocitemeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\nocitemeta}
+% Add an extra argument to \cmd{\nocitemeta}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta
+ \def\nocitemeta#1#2{%
+ \nocite{#1}{#2}%
+ \let\@temp@nocite\nocite
+ \let\nocite\@gobble
+ \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}%
+ \let\nocite\@temp@nocite
+ \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{multibib}}
+%
+% From the instructions in \fname{multibib.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}
+\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% List of citation commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@APAC@classic@cite
+\def\@mb@citenamelist{%
+ cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,%
+ citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,%
+ citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,%
+ citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta,%
+ maskcite,maskfullcite,maskshortcite,maskciteNP,maskfullciteNP,%
+ maskshortciteNP,maskciteA,maskfullciteA,maskshortciteA,%
+ maskciteauthor,maskfullciteauthor,maskshortciteauthor,%
+ maskciteauthorNP,maskfullciteauthorNP,maskshortciteauthorNP,%
+ maskciteauthorA,maskfullciteauthorA,maskshortciteauthorA,%
+ maskciteyear,maskciteyearNP,masknocite%
+}
+\fi
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkg{natbib} commands, if they haven't been declared already.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{@mb@citenamelist}{%
+ \def\@mb@citenamelist{%
+ nocite,citep,citealp,citet,citealt,citeauthor,citefullauthor,%
+ citeyearpar,citeyear,citetext,cite,shortcites,citetalias,%
+ citepalias,Citet,Citep,Citealt,Citealp,Citeauthor,citenum}%
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The commands \pkg{apacite} adds.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\orig@mb@citenamelist\@mb@citenamelist
+\edef\@mb@citenamelist{%
+ \orig@mb@citenamelist,%
+ citeauthort,citeauthorp,citefullauthort,citefullauthorp,Citeauthort,%
+ Citeauthorp,Citefullauthort,Citefullauthorp,%
+ masknocite,maskcitep,maskcitealp,maskcitet,maskcitealt,%
+ maskciteauthor,maskcitefullauthor,maskciteyearpar,maskciteyear,%
+ maskcite,maskcitetalias,maskcitepalias,maskCitet,maskCitep,%
+ maskCitealt,maskCitealp,maskCiteauthor,maskcitenum,maskciteauthort,%
+ maskciteauthorp,maskCitefullauthor,maskCiteauthort,maskCiteauthorp,%
+ nocitemeta%
+}
+}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Language-specific macros and loading of language file}
+% \label{sec:language-code}
+%
+% This section initializes a number of macros that are likely to be subject
+% to redefinition in the language-specific files. Most of these are fairly
+% obvious, particularly literal text strings, but some style issues are
+% language-specific as well, e.g., whether or not a comma should be inserted
+% before the last author. After initializing these macros, \pkg{apacite} tries
+% to infer which language-specific (\fname{.apc}) file must be loaded, if any,
+% and then loads this file.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Literal text strings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\onemaskedcitationmsg}
+% \begin{macro}{\maskedcitationsmsg}
+% Messages that are inserted in the text if citations are masked.
+% Put these messages in separate commands so that they're easily
+% changed; e.g., for different languages. We use \cmd{\emph} instead
+% of \cmd{\textit}, so that this is put upright if it's executed
+% within an italic surrounding, and the parentheses are included
+% within the \cmd{\emph}, which looks better if this is included in
+% another pair of parentheses. But all of this is easily changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}
+\newcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
+% \begin{macro}{\authorindexname}
+% The section/chapter headings to be used for the reference list and the
+% author index. One of the first two is typically already defined by the
+% document class (e.g., \fname{article.cls} defines \cmd{\refname},
+% \fname{book.cls} defines \cmd{\bibname}. When using \pkg{babel}, these are
+% both redefined at each \cmd{\selectlanguage} invocation. The
+% language-specific (\fname{.apc}) file typically should override that, because
+% the strings defined by \pkg{babel} are often not the same as the strings
+% prescribed by the style guides for Psychology. For example, the standard
+% definition of \cmd{\bibname} in English is ``Bibliography'', whereas the
+% APA insists on ``References'' (with a few exceptions). In other languages,
+% the \cmd{\refname} may also be defined differently from the \pkg{babel}
+% definition. See the various \fname{.apc} files for how \pkg{babel} is
+% overridden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+\newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACmetaprenote}
+% A note used just before the references in the reference list when a
+% meta-analysis is reported.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ References marked with an asterisk indicate studies included in
+ the meta-analysis.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibmessage}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputerprogram}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputersoftware}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibprogramminglanguage}
+% Commands for specific types of \entryname{@misc} entries. Besides the strings
+% themselves (as language-specific text), these are significant in that they
+% are recognized by \fname{apacite.bst} and used to modify the formatting of
+% the corresponding reference list entries.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}% Message, for internet forums and the like
+\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}
+\newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibnodate}
+% \begin{macro}{\BIP}
+% Two types of ``special'' years: ``no date'' and ``in press''. These are not
+% only text strings unlike normal years, but also are recognized by
+% \fname{apacite.bst} and treated differently there. Here and in many other
+% macros below, the \cmd{\hbox} ensures that \TeX{} does not interpret the
+% final period as a sentence-ending period, and thus does not insert the extra
+% space associated with that.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}% no date
+\newcommand{\BIP}{in press} % in press
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BOthers}
+% \begin{macro}{\BOthersPeriod}
+% ``and others''. The argument contains a period to suppress an additional one
+% in the reference list, i.e., it is used as |\BOthers{.}| and the period in the
+% argument is seen by \BibTeX{}, which does not insert an additional one, so
+% that we now correctly get |et al.| and not |et al..| in the reference list.
+% The difference between \cmd{\BOthers} and \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} is that the
+% latter is used in a context where there should always be a period at the
+% end. Given that \BibTeX{} does not insert it because of the mentioned usage
+% of a period in the argument, this explicit distinction is necessary here.
+% Hence, if an unabbreviated string is used to define these commands, their
+% definitions become different. For example,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \renewcommand{\BOthers}{and others}
+% \renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}{and others.}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This does not work perfectly if \cmd{\citeauthor} is used at the end of a
+% sentence. This is on the todo-list. For the moment, the user will have to
+% employ an explicit workaround, i.e., insert an additional period if
+% \cmd{\BOthers} does not contain one and omit this period if it does.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others''
+\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others.'', with a period
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BIn}
+% \begin{macro}{\Bby}
+% Used for ``In Editor (Ed.), \emph{Booktitle}'' and
+% ``by Editor, Ed., \emph{Booktitle}'', respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BIn}{In} % for ``In '' editor...
+\newcommand{\Bby}{by} % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BED}
+% \begin{macro}{\BEDS}
+% \begin{macro}{\BTRANS}
+% \begin{macro}{\BTRANSS}
+% \begin{macro}{\BTRANSL}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCHAIR}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCHAIRS}
+% Various types of non-author contributions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor
+\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors
+\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translator
+\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translators
+\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field
+\newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium
+\newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BVOL}
+% \begin{macro}{\BVOLS}
+% \begin{macro}{\BNUM}
+% \begin{macro}{\BNUMS}
+% \begin{macro}{\BEd}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCHAP}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCHAPS}
+% \begin{macro}{\BPG}
+% \begin{macro}{\BPGS}
+% Various strings that indicate what kind of number is given.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume (of a multi-volume book)
+\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes
+\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number (of a technical report)
+\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers
+\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition
+\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapter (for electronic documents)
+\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapters
+\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page
+\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BTR}
+% \begin{macro}{\BPhD}
+% \begin{macro}{\BUPhD}
+% \begin{macro}{\BMTh}
+% \begin{macro}{\BUMTh}
+% Various strings that indicate what kind of work is referenced.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}
+%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name.
+\newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}
+%% Default master's thesis type name.
+\newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}
+%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name.
+\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BAuthor}
+% ``Author'', the string used for the publisher if the publisher is also the
+% author of the work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BOWP}
+% \begin{macro}{\BREPR}
+% Two strings that are used for reprints and translations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}
+\newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BAvailFrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\BRetrieved}
+% \begin{macro}{\BRetrievedFrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\BMsgPostedTo}
+% Strings that indicate where on the internet the referenced document was
+% obtained.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\newcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Retrieved from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Punctuation}
+%
+% Most of this is more style-specific than language specific, but there are
+% some punctuation differences between different languages, or even
+% ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel}'s terminology) of the same ``language''.
+% Therefore, these are all included here and redefined in the \fname{.apc}
+% files.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BBOP}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBCP}
+% Opening and closing parentheses. Used to enclose the whole citation for a
+% parenthetical citation (e.g., \cmd{\cite}), only the year and post-note for
+% in-text citations (e.g., \cmd{\citeA}), and the year (and month and day, if
+% present) in the reference list. If different punctuation is desired for
+% the reference than used in citations, these commands can be redefined
+% immediately before the location of the \cmd{\bibliography} command. If
+% different punctuation is desired for parenthetical citations than for in-text
+% citations (seems unlikely), the citation commands themselves have to be
+% redefined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BBOP}{(} % opening parenthesis
+\newcommand{\BBCP}{)} % closing parenthesis
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BBOQ}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBCQ}
+% Opening and closing quotes for article-type titles in the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BBOQ}{} % opening quote for article title
+\newcommand{\BBCQ}{} % closing quote for article title
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BBAA}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBAB}
+% \begin{macro}{\BAnd}
+% Three forms of ``and''. Of course, the word ``and'' is a literal text string,
+% so this part could also have been allocated to the the section that handles
+% those.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BBAA}{\&} % between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\newcommand{\BBAB}{and} % between authors in in-text citation
+\newcommand{\BAnd}{\&} % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BPBI}
+% \begin{macro}{\BHBI}
+% Punctuation between initials. This is primarily used to reduce or eliminate
+% space between initials. Note that there is currently not a similar command
+% for the last period after the initials, so that removing the periods in these
+% macros will generally give undesirable results.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BAP}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBAY}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBYY}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBC}
+% \begin{macro}{\BBN}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCBT}
+% \begin{macro}{\BCBL}
+% \begin{macro}{\BDBL}
+% Punctuation between various parts of citations and reference list entries.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\BAP}{ } % after prefix, before first citation
+\newcommand{\BBAY}{, } % between author(s) and year
+\newcommand{\BBYY}{, } % between years of multiple citations with same author
+\newcommand{\BBC}{; } % between cites
+\newcommand{\BBN}{, } % before note
+\newcommand{\BCBT}{,} % comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\newcommand{\BCBL}{,} % comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+\newcommand{\BDBL}{, \dots{} }% dots before last author when no. of authors > 7
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Date formatting}
+%
+% This consists of literal strings (names of the months), relative ordering of
+% year, month, and day, and punctuation between the elements.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACmonth}
+% This takes one argument. If it is a number between 1 and 12, the name of
+% the corresponding month is produced (1 = January, \dots, 12 = December),
+% and 13--16 represent the seasons. Anything else is copied literally. In this
+% way, other kinds of dates can be handled as well, such as
+% ``August/September''. Note that this in its turn can be flexibly entered
+% as |\APACmonth{08}/\APACmonth{09}| in the \fname{.bib} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or
+ April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or
+ November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else
+ {#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACrefYearMonthDay}
+% Year, month, and day in the reference list. Often used for newspaper articles
+% and presentations at conferences. By default, this results in something like
+% ``(2005, July~5)''. The month and day should be seen as parenthetical
+% refinements of the year, so that in other languages, the year should be
+% named first as well, regardless of the conventions for representing dates in
+% such languages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#3}% day
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACdate}
+% A date in the ordinary form, like \cmd{\today}. This is needed for processing
+% the \fieldname{lastchecked} field. Should be able to handle dates in both
+% typical \LaTeX{} input format (|2005/07/05|) and ISO format
+% (|2005-07-05|, possibly with time after it, which will be ignored). Maybe
+% other formats as well; e.g., |20050705|, as in the Un*x |touch| command.
+% Not yet implemented.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Ordinal numbers}
+%
+% Some functions, for use with the \fieldname{edition} field, which transform
+% a (cardinal) number (``1'', ``2'', \dots) to an ordinal number (``1st'',
+% ``2nd'', \dots).
+%
+% I copied the functions here literally from \fname{amsrefs.dtx} (starting
+% with \cmd{\PrintEdition} there) and made only one slight adaptation: removing
+% \cmd{\editiontext}. In the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} version of
+% \pkg{apacite}, \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} and \cmd{\print@ordinal} were called
+% \cmd{\PrintCardinal} and \cmd{\print@cardinal}, respectively, and what is
+% called ``ordinal'' now was called ``cardinal''. This terminology was copied
+% from the documentation of \pkg{amsrefs}, but it is incorrect and has
+% therefore been changed in the current version. This causes a slight
+% incompatibility between versions of \pkg{apacite}. So in case users have
+% redefined one of these macros to fit their own needs, they should rename
+% these accordingly. Note, however, that the current version of \pkg{apacite}
+% redefines these macros in the language-specific files, so for most users,
+% this will presumably be sufficient.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xp}
+% Abbreviation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@xp\expandafter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintOrdinal}
+% \begin{macro}{\print@ordinal}
+% \begin{macro}{\CardinalNumeric}
+% \begin{macro}{\keep@last@digit}
+% |\PrintOrdinal{2}| gives ``2nd'', etc. If the argument is not an integer
+% number, it is copied literally to the output. At least, apparently, because
+% I do not really understand how it works. The \pkg{amsrefs} documentation
+% suggests that \cmd{\CardinalNumeric} already gives the ordinal number
+% (incorrectly called ``cardinal number'' there), and the name
+% \cmd{\CardinalNumeric} without `|@|' sign likewise suggests that it is a
+% user command, but some tests using this give garbage. Therefore,
+% \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} (a slight adaptation of \pkg{amsrefs}'
+% \cmd{\PrintEdition}) is the command that ultimately should be used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??th%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ th%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{%
+ \ifx\relax#2%
+ \@xp\@gobbletwo
+ \else
+ #1=#2\relax
+ \fi
+ \keep@last@digit#1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Load language dependent sections from an external file. Based on code by
+% Stefan Bj\"ork [2004/12/25], although heavily modified.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Both \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} use \cmd{\iflanguage} to check the main
+% language. They both also use \cmd{\languagename}, but that gives more
+% problems with ``dialects''. For example, if \cmd{\languagename} = |austrian|
+% then |\iflanguage{german}{Yes}{No}| gives Yes. This allows us to provide only
+% \fname{.apc} files for the language class without complicated code to check
+% whether a certain ``dialect'' is used.
+%
+% Check whether \cmd{\iflanguage} is defined. If not, no language support
+% is offered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{iflanguage}%
+ {\relax }%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some \TeX{} distributions automatically preload \pkg{babel} with default
+% language ``|nohyphenation|'', so this language should revert to doing
+% nothing. Strangely enough, \cmd{\iflanguage} does not work correctly, so
+% I'll use a trick. (Some trial and error, because \fname{babel.dtx} states
+% that there must be a ``\verb*+\string +'' before the ``|nohyphenation|'',
+% but apparently in this situation this is not the case.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}%
+ \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether $\langle$\cmd{\languagename}$\rangle$\fname{.apc} exists.
+% If so, load this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Else, i.e., $\langle$\cmd{\languagename}$\rangle$\fname{.apc} does not
+% exist. Try whether the current language is a dialect of one of the
+% known languages. This is not perfect, because languages for which no
+% hyphenation patterns have been found revert to the default language,
+% so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that case. Also,
+% |UKenglish| uses different hyphenation patterns from |english|. I have
+% to find a better way to solve this.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@iflang}
+% Define a modification of \cmd{\iflanguage} that executes the ``true''
+% code if the language is defined and equal to the current language and
+% does nothing otherwise. (Just \cmd{\iflanguage} gives an error if the
+% language is not loaded.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax
+ \else
+ \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language
+ {##2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APAC@apcfile}
+% Define the language support file. The \cmd{\def} instead of a direct
+% \cmd{\input} is done to provide a mechanism to check whether any
+% language file has been defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{french}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{french.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}%
+ \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The hyphenation patterns for UK English are different from
+% US English, so this needs to be accommodated explicitly to avoid a
+% warning. Australian, New Zealand, and Canadian all use either the
+% British or American hyphenation patterns, so do not need to be
+% treated separately here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APAC@iflang{UKenglish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The default English as the last one. If a language is loaded without
+% hyphenation patterns, the English hyphenation patterns are used by
+% default in \pkg{babel}. In such a case, both this particular
+% language and English give a hit. Having English as the last one
+% means that in such a case, \pkg{apacite} assigns English,
+% corresponding with \pkg{babel}'s default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Give a warning if the process so far has not resulted in a target
+% language file, or if the target language file cannot be found.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
+ No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}%
+ }{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
+ Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Clear up some macros that are no longer needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined
+ }%
+ \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined
+}
+%%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Documentation package (\fname{apacdoc.sty})}
+% The \pkg{apacdoc} package is written for generating the \pkg{apacite}
+% user's manual. But it also contains a few commands that are too
+% experimental or otherwise unsuitable to be included in \fname{apacite.sty},
+% but which are necessary to format some examples from the APA manual
+% correctly. As such, these commands may be useful for users if they
+% encounter similar citation problems. In such a case, it is probably
+% better to copy the definitions of the desired commands to the top
+% of your \fname{.tex} document (before \verb+\begin{document}+) or
+% to a tailor-made \fname{.sty} file, rather than loading the \pkg{apacdoc}
+% package.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*docpkg>
+%%
+%% apacdoc.sty : Style package that is used for the apacite documentation.
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Options}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@APACdoc@AX}
+% Generate author index?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@APACdoc@AX
+\DeclareOption{makeAX}{\@APACdoc@AXtrue}%
+\@APACdoc@AXfalse
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Document-specific definitions that may be useful for wider use}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliteral}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibinitial}
+% Echo argument literally. Can be used to define a certain author type
+% (``Producer'') in a place where \BibTeX{} expects a first name.
+% Using this command between a pair of braces makes sure that the text
+% is not abbreviated into an initial.
+% This is the result of lots of trial and error. If I change something
+% in another part, I typically have to change something here as well.
+% The \verb+\space+ is necessary because in the current setup, an additional
+% space is inserted in the bibliography, and \MakeIndex{} is space-sensitive.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \DeclareRobustCommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}}
+%% \newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1}
+%% \newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}}
+\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral\space{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibinitial}[1]{\string#1}
+%% \newcommand{\bibinitial}{\string\bibinitial\space}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibnodot}
+% If the argument is a period (`|.|'), \BibTeX{} puts no period after it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SwapArgs}
+% Reverse order of the two arguments. Can be used for various reasons,
+% mostly related to sorting in the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibreftext}
+% \begin{macro}{\Dutchvon}
+% The following macro is especially useful if the \fieldname{year}
+% field must be different in the text and the reference list,
+% e.g., ``1992/1993'' in the text and ``1992'' in reference list.
+% Then \fieldname{year} can be defined as |\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}|.
+% The definition below displays only the second argument (``text'').
+% Just before the reference list, this can then be redefined to
+% display only the first argument (``ref'').
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The same command, but now intended for Dutch-style ``von'' parts,
+% so in order to create some flexibility in formatting items from
+% a \fname{.bib} file, it is useful to have a separate macro for
+% this application.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACredefineOnce}
+% This macro takes two arguments: (1) the name of a command (without the
+% backslash) and (2) arbitrary \TeX{} code. It then redefines the
+% command (1) to the \TeX{} code (2) as a one-time change, so after the
+% command (1) has been invoked once, it reverts to its definition before
+% \cmd{\APACredefineOnce} was issued. This can be used to redefine, say,
+% \cmd{\BRetrievedFrom} from ``Retrieved from'' to ``Retrieved from
+% Poverty Alleviation website'' for a single reference but restore it
+% to ``Retrieved from'' immediately afterwards.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\APACredefineOnce[2]{%
+ \global
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname old#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\gdef
+ \csname #1\expandafter\endcsname
+ {{#2}%
+ \global
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname old#1\endcsname
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibeditortype}
+% \begin{macro}{\renewbibeditortype}
+% The following macro changes the definitions of the macros \cmd{\BED}
+% and \cmd{\BEDS} to the argument of this macro and then immediately
+% changes the definitions back to their old definitions. So it makes a
+% one-time change. Can be used to use ``Producer'' instead of ``Ed.''
+% etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax }%
+\def\renewbibeditortype{%
+ \def\oldBED{}%
+ \def\oldBEDS{}%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{%
+ \global\let\oldBED\BED
+ \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS
+ \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
+ \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibInstring}
+% \begin{macro}{\BOn}
+% The following macro changes the definition of the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the
+% argument and then immediately changes the definition back to the old
+% definition. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use ``On''
+% instead of ``In'' for a CD-track, for which \cmd{\BOn} is supplied.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{%
+ \global\let\oldBIn\BIn
+ \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}%
+}
+\newcommand{\BOn}{On}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BAbstractRetrieved}
+% \begin{macro}{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}
+% The following macros are used to change ``Retrieved'' into
+% ``Abstract retrieved''. They use the same principle as
+% \cmd{\renewbibeditortype}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\global\def\BAbstractRetrieved#1{Abstract retrieved {#1}, from\ }%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}{%
+ \global\def\oldBRetrieved{}%
+ \global\let\oldBRetrieved\BRetrieved
+ \global\def\BRetrieved##1{%
+ \BAbstractRetrieved{##1}%
+ \global\let\BRetrieved\oldBRetrieved%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noedition}
+% Suppress ``ed.'' to format ``Version 4.0'' in an \fieldname{edition}
+% field.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\noedition}{%
+ \global\def\oldBEd{}%
+ \global\let\oldBEd\BEd
+ \global\def\BEd{%
+ \unskip
+ \global\let\BEd\oldBEd
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\swallownext}
+% \begin{macro}{\swallowdot}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibskipbracenodot}
+% \begin{macro}{\indexskipbracenodot}
+% The \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot} macro suppresses the period after a
+% following closing brace. It does not work entirely well at the
+% moment. In particular, it works differently in an \cmd{\AX} macro
+% in text and an \cmd{\AX} macro in the reference list. This probably
+% has something to do with robust vs.\ fragile macros and/or expansion
+% of the macro. I have experimented a lot with many variations, but
+% don't seem to get it right. I don't understand these issues well yet.
+% \cmd{\swallownext} swallows its argument; \cmd{\swallowdot} swallows
+% the next character if it's a period.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\swallownext#1{\relax}
+\def\swallowdot{%
+ \@ifnextchar.%
+ {\swallownext}%
+ {\relax}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the above does not work, \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot} should reduce
+% to nothing. This is the current definition. Just before the
+% bibliography, it is redefined. \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} has the
+% same purpose, but for the author index instead of the reference list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \def\bibskipbracenodot{\string\bibskipbracenodot}
+%% \def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}
+%% \let\bibskipbracenodot\relax
+\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot}
+\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACmanBeforeBib}
+% Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeBib}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{##1}%
+ \renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{##1}%
+ \renewbibeditortype
+ \global\let\oldbibskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot
+ \global\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}%
+ \global\let\oldbibliteral\bibliteral
+ \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{##1}%
+ \global\let\oldbibinitial\bibinitial
+ \renewcommand{\bibinitial}[1]{##1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACbibstyle}
+% Dirty trick: request \fname{apacitex.bst} if \pkg{apacite} is loaded
+% with one of the index options, and request \fname{apacite.bst}
+% otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\APACbibstyle{%
+ \if@APAC@index
+ apacitex% with index option
+ \else
+ apacite% without index option
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACmanBeforeIndex}
+% Redefine commands that should be different in the author index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeIndex}{%
+ \clearpage
+ \renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}%
+ \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\unskip}%
+ \global\let\indexskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACmanAfterIndex}
+% Revert to the old definitions of commands after the index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\APACmanAfterIndex}{%
+ \global\let\bibskipbracenodot\oldbibskipbracenodot
+ \global\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}%
+ \APACdocindex
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetupAPACdocPrologues}
+% Redefine some indexing-related commands from \fname{doc.sty} and
+% \fname{ltxdoc.cls}. Unfortunately, I couldn't get the code index
+% and change history working with the \pkg{index} package, so I have
+% to tweak everything so that the \pkg{apacite} manual does not use the
+% \pkg{index} package (which is loaded by apacite when an
+% \pkgoption{index} option is requested).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\SetupAPACdocPrologues}{%
+ \@ifundefined{IndexPrologue}{}{%
+ \IndexPrologue{%
+ \clearpage\section*{{Code Index}}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Code Index}%
+ \markboth{{Code Index}}{{Code Index}}%
+ Numbers written in italic refer to the page where the corresponding
+ entry is described; numbers underlined refer to the
+ \ifcodeline@index
+ code line of the
+ \fi
+ definition; numbers in roman refer to the
+ \ifcodeline@index
+ code lines
+ \else
+ pages
+ \fi
+ where the entry is used.
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@ifundefined{GlossaryPrologue}{}{%
+ \GlossaryPrologue{\section{{Change History}}%
+ \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACdocindex}
+% From \fname{doc.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\APACdocindex{%
+ \ifhave@multicol
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}
+ {\begin{multicols}\c@IndexColumns[\index@prologue][\IndexMin]%
+ \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
+ {\end{multicols}}
+ \else
+ \typeout{Can't find multicol.sty -- will use normal index layout if
+ necessary.}
+ \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[\index@prologue]%
+ \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+ \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Citations to the Bible}
+% The \emph{APA manual} gives some rules how the Bible and other
+% classic works should be cited. These rules are not implemented
+% in standard \pkg{apacite}, so I provide a workaround here. This
+% needs to be fixed and generalized because the \emph{APA manual}
+% now also gives a Qur'an example.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibleversion}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibleversion}
+% To define which Bible version one has used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}}
+\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibleciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullbibleciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortbibleciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\biblecite}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullbiblecite}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortbiblecite}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibleciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullbibleciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortbibleciteNP}
+% The Bible citation commands follow the same names and syntax as the
+% ordinary citation commands, except that ``|bible|'' is inserted in
+% the command names.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibleciteA#1{%
+ {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+ {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}%
+ {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}%
+ }%
+}
+\def\fullbibleciteA#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Insert chapter and verse.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Add Bible version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Flag that the Bible has been cited.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+\def\shortbibleciteA#1{%
+ {#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Is this appropriate to flag that Bible has been cited, given that
+% we don't give the version here?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+\def\biblecite#1{%
+ {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+ {\fullbiblecite{#1}}%
+ {\shortbiblecite{#1}}%
+ }%
+}
+\def\fullbiblecite#1{%
+ {\BBOP}%
+ {#1}%
+ {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
+ {\BBCP}%
+ {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+\def\shortbiblecite#1{%
+ {\BBOP}%
+ {#1}%
+ {\BBCP}%
+ {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+\def\bibleciteNP#1{%
+ {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+ {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}%
+ {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}%
+ }%
+}
+\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{%
+ {#1}%
+ {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
+ {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{%
+ {#1}%
+ {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Citing songs}
+% The \emph{APA manual} gives some rules how songs should be cited.
+% These rules require some tweaking of standard \pkg{apacite}. This is
+% done here.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsong}
+% \begin{macro}{\citeAsong}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullciteAsong}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortciteAsong}
+% \begin{macro}{\citesong}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullcitesong}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcitesong}
+% \begin{macro}{\citesongNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\fullcitesongNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortcitesongNP}
+% The names of these macros are a bit internally inconsistent and
+% inconsistent with the \cmd{\biblecite} and \cmd{DSMcite} suites.
+% Fix this in a next version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{}
+\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+ }%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+ }%
+ \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+ }%
+ \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+ {\BBCP}%
+ }%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+ {\BBCP}%
+ }%
+ \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+ {\BBCP}%
+ }%
+ \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+ }%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+ }%
+ \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+ \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+ }%
+ \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+ \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Commands to cite the \emph{DSM}}
+% The \emph{APA manual} gives some rules how the \emph{DSM} should be
+% cited, which is a bit different from ordinary citations. These rules
+% are not implemented in standard \pkg{apacite}, so I provide a
+% workaround here.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibDSM}
+% \begin{macro}{\origbibDSM}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMfulltitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMshorttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMedition}
+% The \cmd{\bibDSM} macro has four arguments: (1) author, (2) full
+% title, (3) edition, (4) abbreviated title. The default definition
+% prints the author, so this gives something decent if an ordinary
+% citation command is used. The other macros extract the separate
+% arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibDSM}[4]{#1}
+\newcommand\origbibDSM{}
+\let\origbibDSM\bibDSM
+\newcommand{\DSMauthor}[1]{%
+ \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##1}%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMfulltitle}[1]{%
+ \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##2}%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMshorttitle}[1]{%
+ \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##4}%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMedition}[1]{%
+ \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##3}%
+ \citeauthor{#1}%
+ \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMfullciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMshortciteA}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMfullcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMshortcite}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMfullciteNP}
+% \begin{macro}{\DSMshortciteNP}
+% The \emph{DSM} citation commands follow the same names and syntax as the
+% ordinary citation commands, except that ``|DSM|'' is inserted in
+% the command names.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\DSMfullciteA{#1}}%
+ {\DSMshortciteA{#1}}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \emph{Full Title} (edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}
+ \BBOP
+ \DSMedition{#1};
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+ \citeNP{#1}%
+ \BBCP
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \emph{Short Title}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\DSMfullcite{#1}}%
+ {\DSMshortcite{#1}}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{%
+ \BBOP
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}},
+ \DSMedition{#1};
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+ \citeNP{#1}%
+ \BBCP
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{%
+ \BBOP\APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}\BBCP
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\DSMfullciteNP{#1}}%
+ {\DSMshortciteNP{#1}}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{%
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}},
+ \DSMedition{#1};
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+ \citeNP{#1}%
+}
+\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{%
+ \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Document-specific definitions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetupAPACdoc}
+% These are some commands that are used in the \pkg{apacite} manual,
+% but are presumably not especially relevant for users.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MiKTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\BibTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeIndex}
+% \begin{macro}{\latextohtml}
+% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXrtf}
+% \begin{macro}{\TeXht}
+% \begin{macro}{\Perl}
+% Names of programs and packages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\SetupAPACdoc}{%
+ \newcommand{\MiKTeX}{MiK\TeX}
+ \@ifundefined{BibTeX}{%
+ \def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
+ T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% from bibtex.web
+ }{}
+ \newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}}
+ \newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty
+ \newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}%
+ \newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}%
+ \newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\EM}
+% My comments accompanying the examples. To be removed with better
+% source code documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACversiondate}
+% The date of a version of \pkg{apacite}. Makes it easy to search the
+% document for these dates. The \cmd{\relax} is a safety measure
+% (probably not needed), which ensures that the square brackets are
+% never interpreted as an optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [##1]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LC}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\Y}
+% \begin{macro}{\A}
+% Some symbols that are used in the \pkg{apacite} manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion
+ \newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table
+ \newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table
+ \newcommand{\A}{\ensuremath{a}}% for one table
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pkg}
+% \begin{macro}{\fname}
+% \begin{macro}{\fieldname}
+% \begin{macro}{\entryname}
+% \begin{macro}{\pkgoption}
+% \begin{macro}{\envirname}
+% Formatting of package names, options, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{##1}}% package name
+ \newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{##1}}% file name
+ \newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{##1}}% field name
+ \newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{##1}}% entry type name
+ \newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{##1}}% package option
+ \newcommand{\envirname}[1]{\texttt{##1}}% environment name
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cmd}
+% \begin{macro}{\bs}
+% \begin{macro}{\opt}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmdtwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmdthree}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmdthreepre}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmdthreealt}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmdfour}
+% Formatting of macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{cmd}{%
+ \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string##1}}% command, incl. `\'
+ }{}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some trickery with backslashes and |@| signs.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash
+ \newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape ##1}$\rangle$}% generic text
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \cmdtwo{nocite}{keys}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{##1\{}\opt{##2}%
+ \texttt{\}}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \cmdthree{cite}{post}{keys}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{##1[}\opt{##2}%
+ \texttt{]\{}\opt{##3}%
+ \texttt{\}}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \cmdthreepre{cite}{pre}{keys}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{##1<}\opt{##2}%
+ \texttt{>\{}\opt{##3}%
+ \texttt{\}}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \cmdthreealt{usepackage}{options}{apacite}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{##1[}\opt{##2}%
+ \texttt{]\{##3\}}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For all \cmdfour{cite}{pre}{post}{keys} variants:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{##1<}\opt{##2}%
+ \texttt{>[}\opt{##3}%
+ \texttt{]\{}\opt{##4}%
+ \texttt{\}}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flqq}
+% \begin{macro}{\frqq}
+% \begin{macro}{\simpleguillemots}
+% It is not clear where and how the \cmd{\flqq} command is defined, so
+% provide an escape if it is not available. Use definitions from
+% \fname{fguill.sty} included here to avoid requiring a package that
+% may not be available. This can probably be improved by using
+% \cmd{\providecommand}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{flqq}{%
+ \newcommand{\flqq}{%
+ {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{19}}}%
+ \newcommand{\frqq}{%
+ {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{20}}}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \newcommand{\simpleguillemots}{%
+ \renewcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{%
+ \tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{<\!\!<}}}}}%
+ \renewcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{%
+ \tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{>\!\!>}}}}}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACdocPageLayout}
+% The basic page setup of the \pkg{apacite} manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\APACdocPageLayout}{%
+ \normalsize
+ \let\oldhoffset\hoffset
+ \let\oldvoffset\voffset
+ \let\oldoddsidemargin\oddsidemargin
+ \let\oldevensidemargin\evensidemargin
+ \let\oldtopmargin\topmargin
+ \let\oldheadheight\headheight
+ \let\oldheadsep\headsep
+ \let\oldtextheight\textheight
+ \let\oldfootskip\footskip
+ \let\oldtextwidth\textwidth
+ \let\oldlinewidth\linewidth
+ \let\oldmarginparsep\marginparsep
+ \let\oldmarginparwidth\marginparwidth
+ \let\oldmarginparpush\marginparpush
+ %%
+ %% \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in} % top-left reference point is
+ \setlength{\voffset}{-1in} % the top-left corner of the page
+ %% \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.3in}
+ %% \setlength{\evensidemargin}{1.3in}
+ \setlength{\topmargin}{1.35in}
+ %% %% \setlength{\headheight}{\baselineskip}
+ \setlength{\headheight}{0.12in}
+ \setlength{\headsep}{0.24in}
+ \setlength{\textheight}{7.9in}
+ \setlength{\footskip}{30pt}
+ %% \setlength{\textwidth}{5.9in}
+ %% \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth}
+ %% \setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt}
+ %% \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0pt}
+ %% \setlength{\marginparpush}{0pt}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACcodePageLayout}
+% The page setup of the source code documentation part of the
+% \pkg{apacite} manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newcommand{\APACcodePageLayout}{%
+ \let\hoffset\oldhoffset
+ \let\oddsidemargin\oldoddsidemargin
+ \let\evensidemargin\oldevensidemargin
+ \let\textwidth\oldtextwidth
+ \let\linewidth\oldlinewidth
+ \let\marginparsep\oldmarginparsep
+ \let\marginparwidth\oldmarginparwidth
+ \let\marginparpush\oldmarginparpush
+ }
+}
+%%
+%</docpkg>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Language definition files}
+%
+% This section describes the code for the language-specific files
+% supplied with \pkg{apacite}.
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{english.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the English language and its ``dialects'' in \pkg{babel}
+% terminology.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*english>
+%%
+%% english.apc - english version of apacite elements
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}%
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}%
+\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}% Name of Author Index
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+ included in the meta-analysis.}%
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}% % ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}% % ``in press''
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others''
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' with a period
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{by}% % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}% % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}% % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}% % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}% % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}% % edition
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % pages
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}
+%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}
+%% Default master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}
+%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}%
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Retrieved from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space.
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}% between authors in in-text citation
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or
+ April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or
+ November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#3}% day
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd')
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??th%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ th%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Differences between different versions of English, in particular British
+% and Australian vs.\ the default American.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\APAC@tempb{US}%
+\edef\APAC@tempa{\string UKenglish}%
+\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa
+ \def\APAC@tempb{UK}%
+\fi
+\edef\APAC@tempa{\string british}%
+\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa
+ \def\APAC@tempb{UK}%
+\fi
+\def\APAC@tempa{UK}
+\ifx\APAC@tempa\APAC@tempb
+ \renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma before `\&' in British
+ \renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before `\&' in British
+% \end{macrocode}
+% According to \pkg{babel}'s \fname{english.dtx}, in UK English, the date
+% is of the form 1st~January, although I thought January~1st was more common.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {\PrintOrdinal{#3}}% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+ }%
+\fi
+%%
+\edef\APAC@tempa{\string australian}%
+\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa
+ \def\APAC@tempb{AU}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% New Zealand is equivalent to Australian for our purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APAC@tempa{\string newzealand}%
+\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa
+ \def\APAC@tempb{AU}%
+\fi
+\def\APAC@tempa{AU}
+\ifx\APAC@tempa\APAC@tempb
+ \renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma before `\&' in AU/NZ (?)
+ \renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before `\&' in AU/NZ (?)
+% \end{macrocode}
+% According to \pkg{babel}'s \fname{english.dtx}, In Australian and New
+% Zealand, the date is of the form 1~January.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+ }%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Clear up some macros that are no longer needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\APAC@tempa\@undefined
+\let\APAC@tempb\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</english>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{dutch.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Dutch language. The \pkg{babel} package considers Afrikaans
+% as a ``dialect'' of Dutch, but my limited knowledge of Afrikaans
+% suggests that most words are spelt differently (though are phonetically
+% similar), and many other words are simply different. So I doubt whether
+% this file can be directly applied to Afrikaans.
+%
+% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were
+% used:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Instructions for the Dutch psychology journal ``De Psycholoog''
+% \cite{DePsych01}; indicated below as ``DP''.
+% \item Instructions for the Dutch psychology journal ``Nederlands Tijdschrift
+% voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden'' \cite{NTPG04};
+% indicated below as ``NTPG''.
+% \item Instructions from the well-known book
+% \APACcitebtitle{Schrijfwijzer} \cite[pp.~404--410]{Renk02};
+% indicated below as ``SW''.
+% \item The previous three all state that their rules are adapted from the
+% APA manual. For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in
+% these sources, I used the extensive reference list from \citeA{Schr04}.
+% \item Finally, I consulted the \emph{Van Dale} English-Dutch dictionary
+% \cite{VanDale89}.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*dutch>
+%%
+%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% DP = De Psycholoog
+%% NTPG = Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden
+%% SW = Schrijfwijzer
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Name of the reference list according to DP and NTPG.
+% SW gives the following general names:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification'']
+% \item
+% ``Literatuurlijst'' [literally ``Literature list'']
+% \end{itemize}
+% For more specific applications, SW gives the following names:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey
+% of publications in a certain area'']
+% \item
+% ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature'']
+% \item
+% ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature'']
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}% Name of author index
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+%%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de
+ meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}%
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.\hbox{}}% [SW] (``zonder jaartal'')
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}% % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP]
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP]
+%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants:
+%% \renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG]
+%% \renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG]
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}% % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% ``Editor(s)'' is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW
+% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on
+% the language in which the referenced work is written:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch
+% \item
+% ``Ed.''/``Eds.'' for referenced works in English
+% \item
+% ``Hrsg.'' for referenced works in German
+% \item
+% ``edt.'' for referenced works in French
+% \end{itemize}
+% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example
+% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used.
+%
+% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP.
+% NTPG does not explain how to format this.
+% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door:''
+% [``Translated by:''] followed by the name of the translator, or if the
+% translator is unknown: ``Vertaling van:'' [``Translation of:'']
+% followed by the original title. This is much too complicated, so I'll
+% choose a simple alternative.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}% translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}% translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}% chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}% chairs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% ``Volume'' according to SW. NTPG gives an example with ``Vol.'' but this is
+% presumably dependent on the language of the referenced work as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}% volume [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}% volumes [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% number [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% numbers [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}% edition [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% chapters
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% pages [SW]. DP gives ``p.'', NTPG both.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Literally translating ``Tech.'' as ``Technisch'' does not make sense.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There is no Dutch ``DAI'' and the distinction between ``published'' and
+% ``unpublished'' PhD theses would generally be interpreted as ``published as
+% a book with an official publisher'' vs.\ ``privately published''. All PhD
+% theses in the Netherlands are required to be published with an ISBN number.
+% Therefore, in my view it is better to use the same term for ``published''
+% and ``unpublished''. (\citeNP{Schr04} use ``dissertatie''.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% ``published''
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% ``unpublished''
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There is no official forum to publish abstracts of master's theses either,
+% but, unlike PhD theses, they are (generally) unpublished.
+% The term used here refers to the Dutch educational system until ca. 2003.
+% Since ca. 2004, universities are gradually converting to a
+% bachelor--master system, so it's likely that this term will have to be
+% adapted in the near future.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Default master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% ``published''
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% ``unpublished''
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+% \end{macrocode}
+% From DP. They also require the original title after the
+% \fieldname{originalyear}. This is not implemented here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}% Reprinted from
+%%
+%% THE NEXT FOUR ARE MY OWN TRANSLATIONS. CHECK!!!
+%% Websites and newsgroups; note the spaces.
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Verkrijgbaar van\ }%
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Op {#1} verkregen van\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Verkregen van\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Bericht geplaatst op\ }%
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}% between authors in in-text citation
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+%%
+%% No commas according to DP and SW. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or januari\or februari\or maart\or
+ april\or mei\or juni\or juli\or augustus\or september\or oktober\or
+ november\or december\or winter\or lente\or zomer\or herfst\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to a ordinal one (`2nd')
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??e%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Dutch ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply putting an `e' after
+% the number, so this (and perhaps the code above) can be significantly
+% simplified. However, because I have trouble understanding this code (from
+% the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and experimenting did not give the expected
+% results, I won't mess with the code too much and stay close to the
+% English code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ e%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1e\else e\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</dutch>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{finnish.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Finnish language. Based on \citeA[Appendix~E]{KLO05}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*finnish>
+%%
+%% finnish.apc - finnish version of apacite elements
+%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o, with some minor edits by Erik Meijer.
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}% Name of Author Index
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Viitteet merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen
+ sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}%
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%
+%% Msg
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Sanoma}%
+%%
+%% Computer program
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Tietokoneohjelma}%
+%%
+%% Computer program manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Tietokoneohjelman k\"asikirja}%
+%%
+%% Computer program and manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Tietokoneohjelma ja k\"asikirja}%
+%%
+%% Computer software
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ohjelmisto}%
+%%
+%% Computer software manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Ohjelmiston k\"asikirja}%
+%%
+%% Computer software and manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ohjelmisto ja k\"asikirja}%
+%%
+%% Programming language
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ohjelmointikieli}%
+%%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+%%
+%% n.d.
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}% ``no date'', ``sine anno''
+%%
+%% in press
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{painossa}% % used as year for in-press citations
+%%
+%% et al.: ``and others'', not necessarily with a period
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+%%
+%% et al.: ``and others'' with a period
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+%%
+%% In
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}% ``In'' editor...
+%%
+%% by
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{teoksesta}% ``by'' editor... (in reprints)
+%%
+%% Ed.
+\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}% editor
+%%
+%% Eds.
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}% editors
+%%
+%% Trans.
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator
+%%
+%% Trans.
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translators
+%%
+%% trans.
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field
+%%
+%% Chair
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}% chair of symposium
+%%
+%% Chairs
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}% chairs
+%%
+%% Vol.
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}% volume
+%%
+%% Vols.
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}% volumes
+%%
+%% No.
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}% number
+%%
+%% Nos.
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}% numbers
+%%
+%% ed.
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}% edition
+%%
+%% chap.
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku}% chapter
+%%
+%% chap.
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut}% chapters
+%%
+%% p.
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% page
+%%
+%% pp.
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% pages
+%%
+%% Tech.\ Rep.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name
+%%
+%% (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}%
+%%
+%% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Julkaisematon v\"ait\"oskirja}%
+%%
+%% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Pro gradu -tutkielma}%
+%%
+%% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Julkaisematon pro gradu -tutkielma}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Tekij\"a}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+%%
+%% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Alkuaan julk.\hbox{}}%
+%%
+%% Reprinted from
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Uudelleen julk.\hbox{}}%
+%%
+%% (websites) Available from; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Saatavilla\ }%
+%%
+%% (websites) Retrieved ... from; note the space.
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Lainattu {#1}, saatavilla\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Lainattu saatavilla\ }%
+%%
+%% (newsgroups \& forums) Message posted to; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Viesti l\"ahetetty\ }%
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+%%
+%% and
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}% between authors in text
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting, adapted from babel's finnish.dtx
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ tammikuuta\or helmikuuta\or maaliskuuta\or huhtikuuta\or
+ toukokuuta\or kes\"akuuta\or hein\"akuuta\or elokuuta\or
+ syyskuuta\or lokakuuta\or marraskuuta\or joulukuuta\or
+%% Winter Spring Summer Fall
+ talvea\or kev\"att\"a\or kes\"a\"a\or syksy\"a\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}.% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd')
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??.%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In Finnish, ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply
+% putting a period after the number. So I am reusing the German code here.
+% As mentioned in the section describing \fname{german.apc}, this (and perhaps
+% the code above) can then be significantly simplified, but, because I (EM)
+% have trouble understanding this code (from the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and
+% experimenting did not give the expected results, I won't mess with the code
+% too much and stay close to the English code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ .%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1.\else .\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</finnish>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{french.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the French language and its ``dialects'' in \pkg{babel}
+% terminology.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*french>
+%%
+%% french.apc - french version of apacite elements
+%% Adapted from english.apc by \'Eric Raufaste
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+%%
+\renewcommand{\refname}{R\'ef\'erences}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{R\'ef\'erences}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Index des auteurs}%
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Les r\'ef\'erences marqu\'ees d'un ast\'erisque indiquent des \'etudes
+ incluses dans la m\'eta-analyse.}%
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Logiciel}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manuel de logiciel}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Logiciel et manuel}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Logiciel}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manuel de logiciel}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Logiciel et manuel}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Langage de programmation}%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.~d.\hbox{}}% ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{sous presse}% ``in press''
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others''
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' with a period
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In'' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{par}% % for ``by'' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trad.\hbox{}}% % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trad.\hbox{}}% % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trad.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Pr\'es.\hbox{}}% % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Pr\'es}% % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{N\textsuperscript{o}}% % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{N\textsuperscript{os}}% numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{\'ed.\hbox{}}% % edition
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % pages
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport technique}%
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Th\`ese de doctorat}%
+%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Th\`ese de doctorat non publi\'ee}%
+%% Default master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{M\'emoire de Master}%
+%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{M\'emoire de Master non publi\'e}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}%% Used if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{\OE uvre originale publi\'ee en}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{R\'eimprim\'e \`a partir de}%
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Disponible sur\ }% Websites; note the space.
+%% Websites; note the space.
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Consult\'e le {#1}, sur\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Consult\'e sur\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message post\'e sur\ }% Messages; note the space.
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{et}% between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{~; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{~;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or
+ avril\or mai\or juin\or juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or
+ novembre\or d\'ecembre\or hiver\or printemps\or \'et\'e\or automne\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+%% Structure taken from definition of \today in frenchb.dtx
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \edef\APAC@tempa{#3}%
+ \edef\APAC@tempb{1}%
+ \ifx\APAC@tempa\APAC@tempb\@empty {\ier}\fi
+ \let\APAC@tempa\@undefined
+ \let\APAC@tempb\@undefined
+ %%
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd')
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Ordinal numbers should all be number + `\textsuperscript{e}',
+% except if number = 1, then it is ``1\textsuperscript{er}'' or
+% ``1\textsuperscript{re}''. \pkg{babel} provides the
+% commands \cmd{\ieme}, \cmd{\ier}, and \cmd{\iere} for formatting this.
+% We'll use these commands.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\APACfirst}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintOrdinalMale}
+% \pkg{apacite} only uses the ordinal numbers for edition numbers, and
+% the gender of ``\'edition'' is feminine, so we use the feminine form
+% ``1re'' by default. However, we put it in the macro \cmd{\APACfirst}.
+% Then we define \cmd{\PrintOrdinalMale} to redefine \cmd{\APACfirst}
+% to take the masculine form, then call \cmd{\PrintOrdinal}, and then
+% revert again, so that users can use this function for masculine words
+% (if desired).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\APACfirst}{1\iere}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\PrintOrdinalMale}[1]{%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\APACfirst}{1\ier}%
+ \PrintOrdinal{#1}%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\APACfirst}{1\iere}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\@ne
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ \ifnum1=\count@
+ {\APACfirst}%
+ \else
+ ??{\ieme}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ {\ieme}%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1{\ieme}\else {\ieme}\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%%
+%% In French, there should be a space before a colon `:', so we have to
+%% redefine a few macros that insert a colon.
+\renewcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ %% publisher
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ {#2}%
+ \fi
+ %%
+ \else
+ %% address
+ {#1}%
+ %% publisher
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip{} : {#2}%
+ \fi
+ %%
+ \fi
+}%
+\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher
+\renewcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ %% Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the
+ %% author.
+ {\BAuthor{}}%
+ %%
+ \else
+ %% Address and publisher. These are not empty.
+ {#1\unskip{} : \BAuthor{}}%
+ %%
+ \fi
+}%
+\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</french>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{german.apc} and \fname{ngerman.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the German language. These are based on the APA-inspired
+% instructions from the \citeA{DGPs07}. There is the traditional orthography
+% (`german') and the new orthography (`ngerman'), which are treated as
+% completely different languages by \pkg{babel} (unlike, e.g., the two
+% Norwegian languages), which presumably has technical reasons. We start
+% with `german'.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*german>
+%%
+%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente
+%% (German version of apacite elements)
+%% Written by Andreas Poege
+%% Some additions and adaptations by Erik Meijer.
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+%% Bezeichnung fuer das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}%
+%% Bezeichnung fuer das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}%
+%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}%
+%%
+%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen
+ Studien der Metaanalyse.}%
+%%
+%% Befehle fuer die speziellen @misc-Eintraege.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}%
+%%
+%% Weitere Labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"'
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}% % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken
+%%
+%% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
+%% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+%% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
+%% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken.
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{von}% % fuer "`von"' Herausgeber... (Nachdruck)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Hrsg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(in)
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hrsg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(innen)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}%% Uebersetzer(in)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzer(innen)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}% % Chair (bei Konferenzen)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}% % Chairs (bei Konferenzen)
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.\hbox{}}% % Band
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.\hbox{}}% % Baende
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummer
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummern
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.\hbox{}}% % Auflage
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seite
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seiten
+%%
+%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"'
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}%
+%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}%
+%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}%
+%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer Abschlussarbeit
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}%
+%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Autor}% % ``Autor'' falls publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}% Originalausgabe
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}% Nachdruck von
+%% Websites; note the spaces.
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Verf\"ugbar unter\ }%
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Zugriff am {#1} auf\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Zugriff auf\ }%
+%% Note that here the English phrase is left untranslated in German.
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }%
+%%
+%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% % Einleitende Klammer (default "(")
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")")
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "")
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "")
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}%% Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&")
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}% Zwischen Autoren im Text
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}%% Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&")
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen)
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ", ")
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default "; ")
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ", ")
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting, adapted from babel's germanb.dtx
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
+ Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\or
+ Winter\or Fr\"uhjahr\or Sommer\or Herbst\else {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}.% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd'),
+%% adapted from amsrefs.dtx
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??.%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% German ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply putting a period after
+% the number, so this (and perhaps the code above) can be significantly
+% simplified. However, because I (EM) have trouble understanding this code (from
+% the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and experimenting did not give the expected
+% results, I won't mess with the code too much and stay close to the
+% English code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ .%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1.\else .\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The DGPs puts a space between the volume and the issue number,
+% unlike the APA. So we have to slightly adapt this command.
+% (|#1| = journal, |#2| = volume, |#3| = number, |#4| = formatted pages).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{%
+ \Bem{#1}% journal
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, \Bem{#2}% volume
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip\ ({#3})% issue number, with the added leading space
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#4}% pages
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Presumably, for the original journal information of a reprint, a similar
+% space needs to be added.
+% Arguments: |#1| = year, |#2| = journal, |#3| = volume, |#4| = issue number,
+% |#5| = formatted pages, |#6| = note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{%
+ (\BREPR{} % ``(Reprinted from '' (note the space)
+ \Bem{#2}% Journal (should not be empty)
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#1}% , year
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, \Bem{#3}% , volume
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip\ {[#4]}% \ [issue number]
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#5\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#5}% , pages
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#6\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip; {#6}% ; note
+ \fi
+ )% Final parenthesis
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Differences between Austrian and German. (Apparently only the name of
+% January---``J\"anner'' vs.\ ``Januar''.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACaustrian{\string austrian}%
+\ifx\languagename\APACaustrian
+ \renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ J\"anner\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
+ Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\or
+ Winter\or Fr\"uhjahr\or Sommer\or Herbst\else {#1}\fi}%
+\fi
+\let\APACaustrian\undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</german>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Now, the file for the new orthography. Apparently, \fname{german.apc}
+% can also be used for the new orthography, so this is a very brief one:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngerman>
+%%
+%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography)
+%% Written by Erik Meijer, based on instructions of Andreas Poege.
+%%
+%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used
+%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this:
+%%
+\input{german.apc}%
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Differences between Austrian and German. (Apparently only the name of
+% January---``J\"anner'' vs.\ ``Januar''.) This is not picked up in
+% \fname{german.apc}, because that file only checks for ``austrian'',
+% not for ``naustrian'', so we have to copy it here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACaustrian{\string naustrian}%
+\ifx\languagename\APACaustrian
+ \renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ J\"anner\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
+ Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\or
+ Winter\or Fr\"uhjahr\or Sommer\or Herbst\else {#1}\fi}%
+\fi
+\let\APACaustrian\undefined
+%%
+%%
+%</ngerman>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{greek.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Greek language.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek>
+%%
+%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements
+%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas and Ioannis Dimakos
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+%% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\refname}{\textgreek{Bibliograf'ia}}%
+%% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{\textgreek{Bibliograf'ia}}%
+%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{\textgreek{Euret'hrio suggraf'ewn}}%
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ \textgreek{Oi ergas'iec pou sumperilamb'anontai sth meta-an'alush
+ shmei'wnontai me aster'isko}.}%
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{\textgreek{M'hnuma}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{\textgreek{Logismik'o}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{%
+ \textgreek{Egqeir'idio logismiko'u}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{%
+ \textgreek{Logismik'o kai egqeir'idio}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{\textgreek{Logismik'o}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{%
+ \textgreek{Egqeir'idio logismiko'u}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{%
+ \textgreek{Logismik'o kai egqeir'idio}}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{%
+ \textgreek{Gl'wssa programmatismo'u}}%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{\textgreek{qwr'ic hmeromhn'ia}}% ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{\textgreek{up'o 'ekdosh}}% % ``in press''
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{\textgreek{k.\ sun.\hbox{}}}% ``and others''
+%% ``and others'' with a period
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{\textgreek{k.\ sun.\hbox{}}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{\textgreek{Sto}}%% for ``In'' editor...
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The current command \cmd{\Bby} is problematic for application in Greek.
+% If it is followed by 1 male editor, then it should be ``|\textgreek{toy}|'';
+% in the case of 1 female editor, it should be ``|\textgreek{ths}|''; with
+% multiple editors, ``|\textgreek{twn}|'' is the correct translation. For
+% the moment, let's use the latter, which is gender-neutral and perhaps the
+% most common one. Note that a user can apply the sort of tricks that we
+% used in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} (Example~69) to make a one-time change to
+% the definition of \cmd{\Bby}. See the command \cmd{\bibInstring} in
+% section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{\textgreek{twn}}% for ``by'' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{\textgreek{Epim.\hbox{}}}% % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{\textgreek{Epim.\hbox{}}}% % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\textgreek{Mtf.\hbox{}}}% % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\textgreek{Mtf.\hbox{}}}%% translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\textgreek{mtf.\hbox{}}}%% translation
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{\textgreek{Pr'oedroc}}% % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{\textgreek{Pr'oedroi}}% % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{\textgreek{t.\hbox{}}}% % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{\textgreek{t.\hbox{}}}% % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{\textgreek{ar.\hbox{}}}% % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{\textgreek{ar.\hbox{}}}% % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{\textgreek{'ekd.\hbox{}}}% % edition
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{\textgreek{kef.\hbox{}}}% % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{\textgreek{kef.\hbox{}}}% % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{\textgreek{sel.\hbox{}}}% % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{\textgreek{sel.\hbox{}}}% % pages
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{\textgreek{Teq.\ 'ekj.\hbox{}}}%
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{\textgreek{Didaktorik'h diatrib'h}}%
+%% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{\textgreek{Adhmos'ieuth didaktorik'h diatrib'h}}%
+%% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{\textgreek{Metaptuqiak'h diplwmatik'h ergas'ia}}%
+%% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{%
+ \textgreek{Adhmos'ieuth metaptuqiak'h diplwmatik'h ergas'ia}}%
+%% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{\textgreek{Auto'ekdosh}}%
+%% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{\textgreek{'Ekdosh prwtot'upou}}%
+%% Reprinted from
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\textgreek{Anat'upwsh ap'o}}%
+%% Websites; note the explicit spaces.
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{\textgreek{Diaj'esimo ap'o}\ }% Available from
+%% Retrieved ... from
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+%% Correct only when ``date'' is full, not just month or year
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{%
+ \textgreek{Anakt'hjhke stis} {#1}, \textgreek{ap'o}\ }%
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{%
+ \textgreek{Anakt'hjhke stis} \textgreek{ap'o}\ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a URL follows without any leading words/phrase then this string
+% should be OK. If there is any other word before the URL then we
+% need to know its gender and number in order to produce the correct
+% translation. In the current \pkg{apacite} implementation, this is only
+% used with a URL immediately following, so we should be OK.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Newsgroups, forums, etc.; ``Message posted to ''; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{\textgreek{M'hnyma anarthm'eno se}\ }%
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{\textgreek{kai}}% between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting. Adapted from babel's greek.dtx
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\textgreek{\ifcase #1\or
+ Ianouar'iou\or Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or April'iou\or
+ Ma'"iou\or Ioun'iou\or Ioul'iou\or Augo'ustou\or
+ Septembr'iou\or Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\or
+ Qeim'wnas\or 'Anoixh\or Kaloka'iri\or Fjin'opwro\else
+ {#1}\fi}}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The ordinal numbers are used only for editions in the current version of
+% \pkg{apacite}. Hence, we simply tag a ``|\textgreek{h}|'' to the number.
+% We could provide alternative versions later on if desired (see, e.g.,
+% \fname{french.apc}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2h').
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??\textgreek{h}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ \textgreek{h}%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1\textgreek{h}\or \textgreek{h}\else \textgreek{h}\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</greek>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{norsk.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for both Norwegian languages (Bokm{\aa}l and Nynorsk). In \pkg{babel}'s
+% setup, `norsk' is Bokm{\aa}l and `nynorsk' is a dialect of `norsk'.
+% This does not seem to reflect the relation between these languages
+% very well, but for compatibility with \pkg{babel} we use the same
+% file structure, i.e., \fname{norsk.apc} defines both languages.
+%
+% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA style. Some ideas
+% for this translation have been taken from \citeA{UIB08} and \citeA{UiO06}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*norsk>
+%%
+%% norsk.apc - Norwegian Bokmal & Nynorsk versions of apacite elements.
+%% Version 1.1.
+%% Written by Karl Ove Hufthammer.
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister}%
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i
+ metaanalysen.}
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa ndbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa ndbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa ndbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa ndbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa k}%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}}% ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering}% ``in press''
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others''
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'', with a period
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% % for ``In'' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{av}% % for ``by'' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}}% % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}}% % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer}% % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere}% % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}}% % edition
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% % pages
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport}%
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling}%
+%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling}%
+%% Default master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}%
+%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Forfatter}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert}% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra}% Reprinted from
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Tilgjengelig fra\ }% Websites; note the space.
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Hentet {#1} fra\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Hentet fra\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Innlegg p\aa \ }% Messages; note the space.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation, a comma is never
+% used before `\&' or ``and'', and there is no space between initials.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og}% between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.}% Period between initials; no space
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting; adapted from babel's norsk.dtx
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or
+ juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember\or
+ vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommer\or h{\o}st\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}.% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~{#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd')
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??.%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Norwegian ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply putting a period
+% after the number, so this (and perhaps the code above) can be significantly
+% simplified. However, because I (EM) have trouble understanding this code (from
+% the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and experimenting did not give the expected
+% results, I won't mess with the code too much and stay close to the
+% English code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ .%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1.\else .\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%%
+%% Differences between norsk (bokmal) and nynorsk.
+\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk}%
+\ifx\languagename\APACnynorsk
+ \renewcommand{\refname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+ \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+ \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister}%
+ \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i
+ metaanalysen.}%
+ \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok}%
+ \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok}%
+ \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok}%
+ \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok}%
+ \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar}% % chair of symposium
+ \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar}% % chairs
+ %% Default master's thesis type name.
+ \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa ve}%
+ %% Default unpublished master's thesis type name.
+ \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa ve}%
+ \renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Forfattar}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+ \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa }% Reprinted from
+ \renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Tilgjengeleg fr\aa \ }% Websites; note the space.
+ \renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Henta {#1} fr\aa \ }% Websites; note the space.
+ \renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or
+ juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember\or
+ vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommar\or haust\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\fi
+\let\APACnynorsk\undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</norsk>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{spanish.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Spanish language. Note that \pkg{apacite}'s usage of |<| and
+% |>| for pre-notes, as in |\cite<e.g.,>{jones06}| (inherited from its
+% predecessor, \fname{theapa.sty}), conflicts with \pkg{babel}'s
+% \pkgoption{spanish} option, which makes |<| and |>| active characters.
+% Hence, either you must avoid using prenotes with \pkg{apacite}'s
+% construction or you must disable \pkg{babel}'s behavior by inserting
+% the command \cmd{\deactivatequoting} after loading \pkg{babel}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish>
+%%
+%% spanish.apc - Versi\'on espa\~nola de elementos en apacite
+%% Escrito por Jorge L\'opez Puga
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias
+%% Nombre de la lista de ref. si es una secci\'on.
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}%
+%% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un cap\'{\i}tulo.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}%
+%% El nombre (del encabezado) del \'Indice de Autores.
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{\'Indice de Autores}%
+%% Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un
+%% meta-an\'alisis es usado.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en
+ el meta-an\'alisis.}%
+%% Comandos para tipos espec\'{\i}ficos de entradas @misc.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msj}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa inform\'atico}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa inform\'atico}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa inform\'atico y manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software inform\'atico}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software inform\'atico}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software inform\'atico}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programaci\'on}%
+%%
+%% Otras etiquetas
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.f.\hbox{}}% ``sin fecha''
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa}% Usado como a\~no para citas ``en prensa''
+%%
+%% El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto, evita poner uno adicional en
+%% la lista de referencias. No obstante algunas revistas aceptan ``et al.''
+%% que es lo que aparece por defecto.
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``y colaboradores''
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``y colaboradores''
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{En}% Para ``En'' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{por}% ``by'' editor (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}}% traductor
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}}% traductores
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}}% traducci\'on, para el campo a\~no
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Presidente}% Presidente/a de congreso
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Presidencia}% Presidencia
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{n\sptext{o}}% number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{n\sptext{os}}% numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}% edition
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}}% cap\'{\i}tulo
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}}% cap\'{\i}tulos
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% pages
+%% Default technical report type name. --- Informe T\'ecnico
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Inf.\ T\'ec.\hbox{}}%
+%% (por defecto) PhD thesis type name --- Tesis Doctoral
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral}%
+%% (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis type name
+%% --- Tesis Doctoral no publicada
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis Doctoral no publicada}%
+%% (por defecto) master's thesis type name --- Tesis de Master
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de Master}%
+%% (por defecto) unpublished master's thesis type name
+%% --- Tesis de Master no publicada
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de Master no publicada}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Autor}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en}% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresi\'on de}% Reprinted from
+%%
+%% Websites and messages to newsgroups, forums, etc.; note the spaces.
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Disponible en\ }% Available from
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Descargado {#1}, de\ }% Retrieved ... from
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{Descargado de\ }% Retrieved from
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Mensaje colgado en\ }% Message posted to
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y}% Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y}% Entre autores en el texto
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{y}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting; adapted from babel's spanish.dtx
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or enero\or febrero\or
+ marzo\or abril\or mayo\or junio\or julio\or agosto\or
+ septiembre\or octubre\or noviembre\or diciembre\or
+ invierno\or primavera\or verano\or oto\~no\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#2}% month --- mes
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day --- d\'ia
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ \unskip~de {#2}% month --- mes
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd')
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??\sptext{a}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Spanish ordinal numbers are always obtained by putting
+% ``.\textsuperscript{a}'' after the number, at least for editions.
+% Therefore, the code here can be significantly simplified. However,
+% because I have trouble understanding this code (from the \pkg{amsrefs}
+% package) and experimenting did not give the expected results, I won't
+% mess with the code too much and stay close to the English code.
+% We use the \cmd{\sptext} command from \pkg{babel}'s \fname{spanish.dtx},
+% which formats the ``.\textsuperscript{a}'' slightly differently.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ \sptext{a}%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1\sptext{a}\else \sptext{a}\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some code for using `e' instead of `y' in Spanish if the following
+% name starts with `I'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usespanishe#1{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \@ifundefined{spanishe@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {\global\expandafter
+ \def\csname spanishe@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+ }%
+ {}%
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+}
+\def\APACinsertmetastar#1{%
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {}% skip
+ {{\APACmetastar}}%
+ \@ifundefined{spanishe@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {}% skip
+ {{% Use `e' instead of `y' in Spanish
+ \global\let\oldBBA\BBA
+ \global\def\BBA{e\global\let\BBA\oldBBA}%
+ }}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{%
+ \if@F@cite
+ \@F@citefalse
+ \else
+ \if@Y@cite
+ {\@BAY}%
+ \fi
+ {\@BBC}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\@cite@undefined{?}%
+ \def\BBA{\@BBA}%
+ \@ifundefined{spanishe@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+ {}% skip
+ {{% Use `e' instead of `y' in Spanish
+ \global\let\oldBBA\BBA
+ \global\def\BBA{e\global\let\BBA\oldBBA}%
+ }}%
+ \if@A@cite
+ \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+ {\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \hyper@natlinkend
+ \if@Y@cite
+ {\@BBAY}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@Y@cite
+ \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+ {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+ \hyper@natlinkend
+ \fi
+ \let\BBA\relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</spanish>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{swedish.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Swedish language. Translation of APA elements into Swedish
+% is not obvious. Ideas of which terms to use have been taken from
+% \citeA{Erik01}, \citeA{Johnsson}, and \citeA{GU94}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*swedish>
+%%
+%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements
+%% Written by Stefan Bjork.
+%% Small adaptations by Erik Meijer
+%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A fancy way to store and restore the category code of the |@| sign,
+% per Heiko Oberdiek.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\APACrestoreAtCode{%
+ \catcode`@=\the\catcode`@\relax
+}%
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\onemaskedcitationmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citation removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+\renewcommand{\maskedcitationsmsg}[1]{%
+ \emph{(#1\ citations removed for masked review)}}% !!! CHANGE
+%%
+%% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referenser}%
+%% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Litteraturf\"orteckning}%
+%% Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}%
+%%
+%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+ Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i
+ metaanalys.}%
+%%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{mjukvara och handbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr{\aa}k}%
+%%
+%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.~\aa{}.\hbox{}}% ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{i tryck}% ``in press''
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.~fl.\hbox{}}% ``and others''
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.~fl.\hbox{}}% ``and others'', with a period
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% for ``In'' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{av}% for ``by'' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}% chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"oranden}% chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg{\aa}van}% edition
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% chapters
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% pages
+%% Default technical report type name.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{forskningsrapport}%
+%% Default PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{doktorsavhandling}%
+%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad doktorsavhandling}%
+%% Default master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}%
+%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name.
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{F\"orfattare}% ``Author'' if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{{\AA}terutgivning fr{\aa}n}% Reprinted from
+\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Tillg\"anglig fr{\aa}n\ }% Websites; note the space.
+%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{H\"amtad {#1}, fr{\aa}n\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BRetrievedFrom}{H\"amtad fr{\aa}n\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Meddelande postat till\ }% Messages; note the space.
+%%
+%% Punctuation
+\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis
+\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}% between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{. }% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year
+\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author
+\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites
+\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma between authors in ref. list when no. of
+ %% authors = 2
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before last author when no. of authors > 2
+%% Remove excess space with the natbibapa option
+\if@APAC@natbib@apa
+ \renewcommand{\BBAY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBYY}{,}%
+ \renewcommand{\BBC}{;}%
+\fi
+%%
+%% Date formatting; adapted from babel's swedish.dtx
+\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or
+ januari\or februari\or mars\or april\or maj\or juni\or
+ juli\or augusti\or september\or oktober\or november\or
+ december\or
+ vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommar\or h\"ost\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+%% Numbered version, which is preferred in the form ``(2008, 21/2)''.
+\def\APACswedishnumberedmonth#1{\ifcase #1\or
+ 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or
+ 7\or 8\or 9\or 10\or 11\or 12\or
+ vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommar\or h\"ost\else
+ {#1}\fi}%
+\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+ {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty
+ \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ %% Use full month if there is no day.
+ \unskip, {#2}% month
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \unskip, {#3}% day
+ \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+ \else
+ %% Use numbered month if there is a day as well.
+ \let\APACorigmonth\APACmonth
+ \let\APACmonth\APACswedishnumberedmonth
+ \unskip{}/{#2}% month
+ \let\APACmonth\APACorigmonth
+ \let\APACorigmonth\@undefined
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis
+}%
+%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd')
+\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{%
+ \afterassignment\print@ordinal
+ \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}%
+\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \CardinalNumeric\count@
+ \else
+ ??:e%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+ #1#2\relax
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In swedish, ``1st'' = ``1:a'', ``2nd'' = ``2:a'', everything else =
+% ``:e''. From 20 onwards, if the last digit is 1 or 2, ``:a'' should
+% be used, and otherwise ``:e''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+ \number#1\relax
+ \if
+ \ifnum#1<14
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+ \else
+ F%
+ \fi
+ T%
+ :e%
+ \else
+ \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+ \ifcase#1:e\or :a\or :a\or :e\or :e\or :e\or :e\or :e\or :e\or
+ :e\else :e\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore category code of |@| sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\APACrestoreAtCode
+%</swedish>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Bibliography database (\fname{apa5ex.bib})}
+%
+% This file includes the reference entries of all examples in the
+% APA manual, which are all formatted in the \pkg{apacite} reference
+% manual. As such, it shows how ordinary and (especially) difficult
+% items can be formatted.
+%
+% \subsection{References from the 5th edition of the Publication Manual}
+%
+% This includes some additional references that test some rules that are
+% mentioned in the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bibdb>
+%%
+%% apa5ex.bib: References from the 5th edition of the Publication Manual
+%% of the APA, plus a few additional references
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+%% Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.)
+%% plus a sequence number within the section.
+
+@misc{3.94-1,
+ author = {Walker},
+ year = {2000},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-1,
+ author = {Wasserstein and Zappulla and Rosen and Gerstman and Rock},
+ year = {1994},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-2,
+ author = {Bradley and Ramirez and Soo},
+ year = {1994},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-3,
+ author = {Bradley and Soo and Ramirez and Brown},
+ year = {1994},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-4,
+ author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Barrett and Cave and Tang and Gabrieli},
+ year = {1996},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-5,
+ author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Gabrieli and Tang and Marsolek and Daly},
+ year = {1996},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-6,
+ author = {Nightlinger and Littlewood},
+ year = {1993},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@book{3.95-7,
+ author = {J{\"{o}}reskog, K[arl] G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, D[ag]},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {{LISREL} 7: {A} Guide to the Program and Applications},
+ edition = {2},
+ address = {Chicago},
+ publisher = {SPSS},
+}
+
+@misc{3.96-1,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+ firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}},
+ key = {{NIMH}},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.96-2,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Pittsburgh}}},
+ year = {1993},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@book{3.96-3,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+ firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}},
+ key = {{KNSB}},
+ year = {2003},
+ title = {Jaarverslag 2002},
+ englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002},
+ address = {Amsterdam},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+ same key, but with different firstkey.},
+}
+
+@book{3.96-4,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+ firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}},
+ key = {{KNSB}},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {Jaarverslag 2003},
+ englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003},
+ address = {Amsterdam},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+ same key, but with different firstkey.},
+}
+
+@book{3.96-5,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+ firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}},
+ key = {{KNSB}},
+ year = {2003},
+ title = {Jaarverslag 2002},
+ englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002},
+ address = {Amsterdam},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+ same key, but with different firstkey.},
+}
+
+@book{3.96-6,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+ firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}},
+ key = {{KNSB}},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {Jaarverslag 2003},
+ englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003},
+ address = {Amsterdam},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+ same key, but with different firstkey.},
+}
+
+@magazine{3.97-1,
+ key = {{\APACciteatitle{Study Finds}}},
+ year = {1982},
+ month = apr,
+ title = {Study Finds Free Care Used More},
+ journal = {{APA} Monitor},
+ pages = {14},
+}
+
+@book{3.97-2,
+ year = {1979},
+ title = {College Bound Seniors},
+ address = {Princeton, NJ},
+ publisher = {College Board Publications},
+}
+
+@misc{3.97-3,
+ author = {Anonymous},
+ year = {1998},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@newspaper{3.97-4,
+ year = {2002},
+ month = mar,
+ day = {3},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ journal = {The Edited Newspaper},
+ pages = {2},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without
+ author, but with the same title.},
+}
+
+@newspaper{3.97-5,
+ year = {2003},
+ month = feb,
+ day = {12},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ journal = {The Edited Newspaper},
+ pages = {2},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without
+ author, but with the same title.},
+}
+
+@newspaper{3.97-6,
+ year = {2003},
+ month = jan,
+ day = {24},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ journal = {The Edited Newspaper},
+ pages = {2},
+ note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without
+ author, but with the same title.},
+}
+
+@book{3.98-1,
+ author = {Luce, R. Duncan},
+ year = {1959},
+ title = {Individual Choice Behavior},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {Wiley},
+}
+
+@misc{3.98-2,
+ author = {Luce, P. A.},
+ year = {1986},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.98-3,
+ author = {Goldberg, J. M. and Neff},
+ year = {1961},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.98-4,
+ author = {Goldberg, M. E. and Wurtz},
+ year = {1972},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-1,
+ author = {Edeline and Weinberger},
+ year = {1991},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-2,
+ author = {Edeline and Weinberger},
+ year = {1993},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-3,
+ author = {Gogel},
+ year = {1984},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-4,
+ author = {Gogel},
+ year = {1990},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-5,
+ author = {Gogel},
+ year = {\BIP},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-6,
+ author = {Johnson},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Aaa},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-7,
+ author = {Johnson},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Bbb},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-8,
+ author = {Johnson},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Ccc},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-9,
+ author = {Singh},
+ year = {1983},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-10,
+ author = {Singh},
+ year = {\BIP},
+ title = {Aaa},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-11,
+ author = {Singh},
+ year = {\BIP},
+ title = {Bbb},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-12,
+ author = {Balda},
+ year = {1980},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-13,
+ author = {Kamil},
+ year = {1988},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-14,
+ author = {Pepperberg and Funk},
+ year = {1990},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-15,
+ author = {Minor},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-16,
+ author = {Adams},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-17,
+ author = {Storandt},
+ year = {1997},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.100-1,
+ author = {Author},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+ note = {no example, but rule given in text},
+}
+
+@misc{3.100-1b,
+ author = {Author},
+ year = {2003 version},
+ type = {Unknown},
+ note = {no example, but rule given in text},
+}
+
+@book{3.100-2,
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ year = {1931},
+ title = {Unknown},
+ translator = {Someone},
+ originalyear = {\bibnodate},
+}
+
+@book{3.100-3,
+ author = {James},
+ year = {1983},
+ title = {Unknown},
+ originalyear = {1890},
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-1,
+ author = {Cheek and Buss},
+ year = {1981},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-2,
+ author = {Shimamura},
+ year = {1989},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-3,
+ author = {Myers},
+ year = {2000},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-4,
+ author = {Beutler},
+ year = {2000},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{3.103-1,
+ author = {Hashtroudi and Chrosniak and Schwartz},
+ year = {1991},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t1,
+ author = {Brown, J. R.},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t2,
+ author = {Browning, A. R.},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t3,
+ author = {MacArthur},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t4,
+ author = {McAllister},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t5,
+ author = {MacNeil},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t6,
+ author = {M'Carthy},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t7,
+ author = {DeBase},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t8,
+ author = {De Vries, J.},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t9,
+ author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@article{4.04-t10,
+ year = {2003},
+ title = {{\APACSortNoop{Two-Thousand and Three}}2003 Hottest Summer Ever},
+ journal = {Journal of Meteorology},
+ note = {This is a fake entry, used for didactical purposes.},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-1,
+ author = {Hewlett, L. S.},
+ year = {1996},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-2,
+ author = {Hewlett, L. S.},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-3,
+ author = {Alleyne, R. L.},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-4,
+ author = {Alleyne, R. L. and Evans, A. J.},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-5,
+ author = {Gosling, J. R. and Jerald, K. and Belfar, S. F.},
+ year = {2000},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-6,
+ author = {Gosling, J. R. and Tevlin, D. F.},
+ year = {1996},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-7,
+ author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Brown, J.},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-8,
+ author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Smigel, J.},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-9,
+ author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.},
+ year = {2000},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-10,
+ author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@article{4.04-11,
+ author = {Baheti, J. R.},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Control {\ldots}},
+}
+
+@article{4.04-12,
+ author = {Baheti, J. R.},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Roles of {\ldots}},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-13,
+ author = {Mathur, A. L. and Wallston, J.},
+ year = {1999},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-14,
+ author = {Mathur, S. E. and Ahlers, R. J.},
+ year = {1998},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@book{4.05-1,
+ author = {Bandura, A. J.},
+ year = {1977},
+ title = {Social Learning Theory},
+ address = {Englewood Cliffs, NJ},
+ publisher = {Prentice Hall},
+}
+
+@article{4.05-2,
+ author = {Bretschneider, J. G. and McCoy, N. L.},
+ year = {1968},
+ title = {Sexual Interest and Behavior in Healthy
+ 80- to 102-Year-Olds},
+ journal = {Archives of Sexual Behavior},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {343--350},
+}
+
+@article{4.08-1,
+ author = {Kernis, M. H. and Cornell, D. P. and Sun, C.-R.
+ and Berry, A. and Harlow, T.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {There's More to Self-Esteem than Whether it is High
+ or Low: The Importance of Stability of Self-Esteem},
+ journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+ volume = {65},
+ pages = {1190--1204},
+}
+
+@book{4.08-2,
+ editor = {Robinson, D. N.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Social Discourse and Moral Judgment},
+ address = {San Diego, CA},
+ publisher = {Academic Press},
+}
+
+@misc{4.08-3,
+ author = {Bulatao, E. {\protect\bibliteral{(with
+ Winford, C.~A.)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ type = {Unknown},
+}
+
+@article{4.09-1,
+ author = {Fowers, B. J. and Olson, D. H.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {{ENRICH} {Marital} {Satisfaction} {Scale}:
+ A Brief Research and Clinical Tool},
+ journal = {Journal of Family Psychology},
+ volume = {7},
+ pages = {176--185},
+}
+
+@article{4.10-1,
+ author = {Deutsch, F. M. and Lussier, J. B. and Servis, L. J.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Husbands At Home: Predictors of Paternal Participation
+ in Childcare and Housework},
+ journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+ volume = {65},
+ pages = {1154--1166},
+}
+
+@incollection{4.10-2,
+ author = {O'Neil, J. M. and Egan, J.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Men's and Women's Gender Role Journeys:
+ Metaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation},
+ editor = {Wainrib, B. R.},
+ booktitle = {Gender Issues Across the Life Cycle},
+ pages = {107--123},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {Springer},
+}
+
+@article{4.11-1,
+ author = {Buss, D. M. and Schmitt, D. P.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Sexual Strategies Theory: An Evolutionary Perspective
+ on Human Mating},
+ journal = {Psychological Review},
+ volume = {100},
+ pages = {204--232},
+}
+
+@magazine{4.11-2,
+ author = {Henry, III, W. A.},
+ year = {1990},
+ month = apr,
+ day = {9},
+ title = {Beyond the Melting Pot},
+ journal = {Time},
+ volume = {135},
+ pages = {28--31},
+}
+
+@book{4.12-1,
+ author = {Saxe, G. B.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: Studies in
+ Mathematical Understanding},
+ address = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+ publisher = {Erlbaum},
+}
+
+@incollection{4.13-1,
+ author = {Baker, F. M. and Lightfoot, O. B.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Psychiatric Care of Ethnic Elders},
+ editor = {Gaw, A. C.},
+ booktitle = {Culture, Ethnicity, and Mental Illness},
+ pages = {517--552},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {American Psychiatric Press},
+}
+
+@incollection{4.13-2,
+ author = {Merikle, Philip M.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Subliminal Perception},
+ editor = {Kazdin, Alan E. and Blanchard, Edward B. and
+ Bootzin, Richard R. and Bower, Gordon and
+ Close Conoley, Jane and Deaux, Kay and Fox, Ronald E. and
+ Harmon, Lenore W. and Howell, William C. and
+ Marsella, Anthony J. and Price, Richard H. and
+ Roediger, III, Henry L. and Rosenthal, Robert and
+ Schmitt, Neal W. and Singer, Jerome L. and Squire, Larry R. and
+ Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn},
+ booktitle = {Encyclopedia of Psychology},
+ volume = {7},
+ pages = {497--499},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {Oxford University Press},
+}
+
+@misc{4.15-1,
+ key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}},
+ title = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the
+ {American} {Psychological} {Association}},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = oct,
+ day = {12},
+ lastchecked = {October 23, 2000},
+ URL = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html},
+}
+
+@article{4.15-2,
+ author = {Eid, M. and Langeheine, R.},
+ year = {1999},
+ title = {The Measurement of Consistency and Occasion Specificity
+ with Latent Class Models: A New Model and its
+ Application to the Measurement of Affect},
+ journal = {Psychological Methods},
+ volume = {4},
+ pages = {100--116},
+ howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database},
+}
+
+%
+% The rest is from section 4.16. Section number is omitted,
+% but A-I are used instead. For the numbered examples, these
+% letters are also omitted in favor of ``ex''.
+%
+
+@article{A-1,
+ author = {Herman, L. M. and Kuczaj, III, S. A. and Holder, M. D.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Responses to Anomalous Gestural Sequences by a
+ Language-Trained Dolphin: {E}vidence for Processing
+ of Semantic Relations and Syntactic Information},
+ journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology: General},
+ volume = {122},
+ pages = {184--194},
+}
+
+@article{ex1,
+ author = {Mellers, B. A.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Choice and the Relative Pleasure of Consequences},
+ journal = {Psychological Bulletin},
+ volume = {126},
+ pages = {910--924},
+}
+
+@article{ex2,
+ author = {Klimoski, R. and Palmer, S.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {The {ADA} and the Hiring Process in Organizations},
+ journal = {Consulting Psychology Journal: Practice and Research},
+ volume = {45},
+ number = {2},
+ pages = {10--36},
+}
+
+@article{ex3,
+ author = {Saywitz, K. J. and Mannarino, A. P. and Berliner, L.
+ and Cohen, J. A.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Treatment for Sexually Abused Children and Adolescents},
+ journal = {American Psychologist},
+ volume = {55},
+ pages = {1040--1049},
+}
+
+@article{ex4,
+ author = {Wolchik, S. A. and West, S. G. and Sandler, I. N. and
+ Tein, J. and Coatsworth, D. and Lengua, L. and others},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {An Experimental Evaluation of Theory-Based Mother and
+ Mother-Child Programs for Children of Divorce},
+ journal = {Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology},
+ volume = {68},
+ pages = {843--856},
+}
+
+@article{ex4-2,
+ author = {Swait, Joffre and Adamowicz, Wiktor and Hanemann, Michael
+ and Diederich, Adele and Krosnick, Jon and Layton, David
+ and Provencher, William and Schkade, David and Tourangeau, Roger},
+ year = {2002},
+ title = {Context Dependence and Aggregation
+ in Disaggregate Choice Analysis},
+ journal = {Marketing Letters},
+ volume = {13},
+ pages = {195--205},
+}
+
+@article{ex5,
+ author = {Zuckerman, M. and Kieffer, S. C.},
+ year = {\BIP},
+ title = {Race Differences in Face-ism: {D}oes Facial Prominence
+ Imply Dominance?},
+ journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+}
+
+@magazine{ex6,
+ author = {Kandel, E. R. and Squire, L. R.},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = nov,
+ day = {10},
+ title = {Neuroscience: {B}reaking Down Scientific Barriers to the
+ Study of Brain and Mind},
+ journal = {Science},
+ volume = {290},
+ pages = {1113--1120},
+}
+
+@article{ex7,
+ author = {Brown, L. S.},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = spring,
+ title = {Antidomination Training as a Central Component of
+ Diversity in Clinical Psychology Education},
+ journal = {The Clinical Psychologist},
+ volume = {46},
+ pages = {83--87},
+}
+
+@article{ex8,
+ year = {1993},
+ month = aug # "/" # sep,
+ title = {The New Health-Care Lexicon},
+ journal = {Copy Editor},
+ volume = {4},
+ pages = {1--2},
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex9,
+ key = {{\APACciteatitle{New Drug}}},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = jul,
+ day = {15},
+ title = {New Drug Appears to Sharply Cut Risk of Death from
+ Heart Failure},
+ journal = {The Washington Post},
+ pages = {A12},
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex10,
+ author = {Schwartz, J.},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = sep,
+ day = {30},
+ title = {Obesity Affects Economic, Social Status},
+ journal = {The Washington Post},
+ pages = {A1, A4},
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex11,
+ author = {Berkowitz, A. D.},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = nov,
+ day = {24},
+ title = {How to Tackle the Problem of Student Drinking},
+ type = {Letter to the editor},
+ journal = {The Chronicle of Higher Education},
+ pages = {B20},
+}
+
+@article{ex12,
+ editor = {Barlow, D. H.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Diagnoses, Dimensions, and \emph{DSM-IV}:
+ The Science of Classification},
+ type = {Special issue},
+ journal = {Journal of Abnormal Psychology},
+ volume = {100},
+ number = {3},
+}
+
+@article{ex13,
+ author = {Harris, P. L. and Kavanaugh, R. D.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Young Children's Understanding of Pretense},
+ journal = {Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development},
+ volume = {58},
+ number = {1, Serial No.~231},
+}
+
+@article{ex14,
+ author = {Battig, W. F. and Montague, W. E.},
+ year = {1969},
+ title = {Category Norms for Verbal Items in 56 Categories:
+ A Replication and Extension of the {Connecticut}
+ Category Norms},
+ journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs},
+ volume = {80},
+ number = {3, Pt.~2},
+}
+
+@article{ex15,
+ author = {Ganster, D. C. and Schaubroeck, J. and Sime, W. E.
+ and Mayes, B. T.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {The Nomological Validity of the {Type}~{A} Personality
+ Among Employed Adults},
+ type = {Monograph},
+ journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
+ volume = {76},
+ pages = {143--168},
+}
+
+@article{ex16,
+ author = {Woolf, N. J. and Young, S. L. and Fanselow, M. S. and
+ Butcher, L. L.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {{MAP}-2 Expression in Cholinoceptive Pyramidal Cells
+ of Rodent Cortex and Hippocampus is Altered by
+ {Pavlovian} Conditioning},
+ type = {Abstract},
+ journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts},
+ volume = {17},
+ pages = {480},
+}
+
+@article{ex17,
+ author = {Nakazato, K. and Shimonaka, Y. and Homma, A.},
+ year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}},
+ title = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: The {Tokyo}
+ {Metropolitan} {Centenarian} {Study}},
+ journal = {Japanese Journal of Developmental Psychology},
+ volume = {3},
+ pages = {9--16},
+ howpublished = {Abstract obtained from
+ {\APACcitebtitle{PsycSCAN: Neuropsychology}},
+ 1993, \emph{2}, Abstract No.~604},
+}
+
+@article{ex18,
+ author = {Regier, A. A. and Narrow, W. E. and Rae, D. S.},
+ year = {1990},
+ title = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: The Epidemiologic
+ Catchment Area ({ECA}) Experience},
+ journal = {Journal of Psychiatric Research},
+ volume = {24},
+ number = {Suppl.~2},
+ pages = {3--14},
+}
+
+@article{ex19,
+ author = {Fiske, S. T.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Social Cognition and Social Perception},
+ journal = {Annual Review of Psychology},
+ volume = {44},
+ pages = {155--194},
+}
+
+@article{ex20,
+ author = {Ising, M.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {Potenzial} im
+ {EEG}: Sind impulsive {Personen} {Augmenter} oder
+ {Reducer}?},
+ englishtitle = {Intensity Dependence in Event-Related {EEG} Potentials:
+ Are Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?},
+ journal = {Zeitschrift f{\"{u}}r Differentielle und Diagnostische
+ Psychologie},
+ volume = {21},
+ pages = {208--217},
+}
+
+@article{ex21,
+ author = {Stutte, H.},
+ year = {1972},
+ title = {Transcultural Child Psychiatry},
+ journal = {Acta Paedopsychiatrica},
+ volume = {38},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {229--231},
+}
+
+@article{ex22,
+ author = {Coltheart, M. and Curtis, B. and Atkins, P. and Haller, M.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Models of Reading Aloud: Dual-Route and
+ Parallel-Distributed-Processing Approaches},
+ journal = {Psychological Review},
+ volume = {100},
+ pages = {589--608},
+}
+
+@book{B-1,
+ author = {Beck, C. A. J. and Sales, B. D.},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Family Mediation: Facts, Myths, and Future Prospects},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {American Psychological Association},
+}
+
+@book{ex23,
+ author = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr.\hbox{}, J. R.},
+ year = {1987},
+ title = {People in Organizations: An Introduction to
+ Organizational Behavior},
+ edition = {3},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {McGraw-Hill},
+}
+
+@book{ex24,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Estimated Resident Population by Age and Sex in
+ Statistical Local Areas, {New} {South} {Wales},
+ {June} 1990},
+ number = {3209.1},
+ address = {Canberra, Australian Capital Territory},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}},
+}
+
+@book{ex25,
+ editor = {Gibbs, J. T. and Huang, L. N.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Children of Color: Psychological Interventions with
+ Minority Youth},
+ address = {San Francisco},
+ publisher = {Jossey-Bass},
+}
+
+@book{ex25-t1,
+ author = {Vygotsky, L. S.},
+ year = {1978},
+ title = {Mind in Society: {T}he Development of Higher Mental
+ Processes},
+ editor = {Rice, Edgar},
+ translator = {Rice, Edgar},
+ address = {Cambridge, MA},
+ publisher = {Harvard University Press},
+ originalyear = {1930, 1933, 1935},
+}
+
+@book{ex25-t2,
+ author = {J{\"{o}}reskog, Karl G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, Dag},
+ year = {1979},
+ title = {Advances in Factor Analysis
+ and Structural Equation Models},
+ editor = {Magidson, Jay},
+ address = {Cambridge, MA},
+ publisher = {Abt Books},
+}
+
+@book{ex26,
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Collegiate Dictionary},
+ edition = {10},
+ address = {Springfield, MA},
+ publisher = {Merriam-Webster},
+}
+
+@book{ex27,
+ author = {Rosenthal, R.},
+ year = {1987},
+ title = {Meta-Analytic Procedures for Social Research},
+ edition = {Rev.\hbox{}},
+ address = {Newbury Park, CA},
+ publisher = {Sage},
+}
+
+@book{ex28,
+ editor = {Koch, S.},
+ year = {1959--1963},
+ title = {Psychology: {A} Study of Science},
+ volume = {1--6},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {McGraw-Hill},
+}
+
+@book{ex29,
+ key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric
+ Association}{Diagnostic and Statistical Manual
+ of Mental Disorders}{4th ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}},
+ year = {1994},
+ title = {Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders},
+ edition = {4},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}},
+}
+
+@book{ex30,
+ editor = {Sadie, S.},
+ year = {1980},
+ title = {The New {G}rove Dictionary of Music and Musicians},
+ edition = {6},
+ volume = {1--20},
+ address = {London},
+ publisher = {Macmillan},
+}
+
+@book{ex30-2,
+ editor = {Kazdin, Alan E. and Blanchard, Edward B. and
+ Bootzin, Richard R. and Bower, Gordon and
+ Close Conoley, Jane and Deaux, Kay and Fox, Ronald E. and
+ Harmon, Lenore W. and Howell, William C. and
+ Marsella, Anthony J. and Price, Richard H. and
+ Roediger, III, Henry L. and Rosenthal, Robert and
+ Schmitt, Neal W. and Singer, Jerome L. and Squire, Larry R. and
+ Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Encyclopedia of Psychology},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {Oxford University Press},
+}
+
+@book{ex31,
+ author = {Piaget, J. and Inhelder, B.},
+ year = {1951},
+ title = {La Gen{\`{e}}se de l'Id{\'{e}}e de Hasard chez l'Enfant},
+ englishtitle = {The Origin of the Idea of Chance in the Child},
+ address = {Paris},
+ publisher = {Presses Universitaires de France},
+}
+
+@book{ex32,
+ author = {Laplace, P.-S.},
+ year = {1951},
+ title = {A Philosophical Essay on Probabilities},
+ translator = {Truscott, F. W. and Emory, F. L.},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {Dover},
+ originalyear = {1814},
+}
+
+@book{ex33,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on
+ Independent Living}}},
+ firstkey = {{Research and Training Center on Independent Living [RTCIL]}},
+ key = {RTCIL},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Guidelines for Reporting and Writing About People
+ with Disabilities},
+ edition = {4},
+ type = {Brochure},
+ address = {Lawrence, KS},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on
+ Independent Living}}},
+}
+
+@incollection{B-2,
+ author = {Massaro, D.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Broadening the Domain of the Fuzzy Logical Model of Perception},
+ editor = {Pick, Jr.\hbox{}, H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.},
+ booktitle = {Cognition: Conceptual and Methodological Issues},
+ pages = {51--84},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {American Psychological Association},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex34,
+ author = {Bjork, R. A.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {Retrieval Inhibition as an Adaptive Mechanism in Human Memory},
+ editor = {Roediger, III, H. L. and Craik, F. I. M.},
+ booktitle = {Varieties of Memory \& Consciousness},
+ pages = {309--330},
+ address = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+ publisher = {Erlbaum},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex35,
+ author = {Auerbach, J. S.},
+ year = {\BIP},
+ title = {The Origins of Narcissism and Narcissistic Personality
+ Disorder: A Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation},
+ editor = {Masling, J. M. and Bornstein, R. F.},
+ booktitle = {Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic Theories:
+ {Vol}.~4. {Psychoanalytic} Perspectives on Psychopathology},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {American Psychological Association},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex36,
+ author = {Maccoby, E. E. and Martin, J.},
+ year = {1983},
+ title = {Socialization in the Context of the Family:
+ Parent-Child Interaction},
+ editor = {Mussen (Series Ed.\hbox{}), P. H. and
+ Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.\hbox{}}}, E. M.},
+ booktitle = {Handbook of Child Psychology:
+ {Vol}.~4. {Socialization}, Personality, and Social Development},
+ edition = {4},
+ pages = {1--101},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {Wiley},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex37,
+ author = {Davydov, V. V.},
+ year = {1972},
+ title = {De Introductie van het Begrip Grootheid in de Eerste
+ Klas van de Basisschool: Een Experimenteel Onderzoek},
+ englishtitle = {The Introduction of the Concept of Quantity in the
+ First Grade of the Primary School: An Experimental Study},
+ editor = {Van Parreren, C. F. and Carpay, J. A. M.},
+ booktitle = {Sovjetpsychologen aan het Woord},
+ pages = {227--289},
+ address = {Groningen, The Netherlands},
+ publisher = {Wolters-Noordhoff},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex38,
+ author = {Bergmann, P. G.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Relativity},
+ booktitle = {The New Encyclopaedia {Britannica}},
+ volume = {26},
+ pages = {501--508},
+ address = {Chicago},
+ publisher = {Encyclopaedia Britannica},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex39,
+ author = {Freud, Sigmund},
+ year = {1961},
+ title = {The Ego and the Id},
+ editor = {Strachey, J.},
+ translator = {Strachey, J.},
+ booktitle = {The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological
+ Works of {Sigmund} {Freud}},
+ volume = {19},
+ pages = {3--66},
+ address = {London},
+ publisher = {Hogarth Press},
+ originalyear = {1923},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex40,
+ author = {Piaget, J.},
+ year = {1988},
+ title = {Extracts from {Piaget}'s Theory},
+ translator = {Gellerier, G. and Langer, J.},
+ editor = {Richardson, K. and Sheldon, S.},
+ booktitle = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: A Reader},
+ pages = {3--18},
+ address = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+ publisher = {Erlbaum},
+ originalbooktitle = {Manual of Child Psychology},
+ originalpages = {703--732},
+ originaleditor = {Mussen, P. H.},
+ originalyear = {1970},
+ originaladdress = {New York},
+ originalpublisher = {Wiley},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex40-t1,
+ author = {Browne, M[ichael] W.},
+ year = {1977},
+ title = {Generalized Least Squares Estimators in the Analysis
+ of Covariance Structures},
+ editor = {Aigner, D[ennis] J. and Goldberger, A[rthur] S.},
+ booktitle = {Latent Variables in Socio-Economic Models},
+ pages = {205--226},
+ address = {Amsterdam},
+ publisher = {North Holland},
+ originalyear = {1974},
+ originaljournal = {South African Statistical Journal},
+ originalvolume = {8},
+ originalpages = {1--24},
+}
+
+
+@techreport{C-1,
+ author = {Mazzeo, J. and Druesne, B. and Raffeld, P. C.
+ and Checketts, K. T. and Muhlstein, A.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Comparability of Computer and Paper-and-Pencil Scores
+ for Two {CLEP} General Examinations},
+ type = {College Board Rep.},
+ number = {91-5},
+ address = {Princeton, NJ},
+ institution = {Educational Testing Service},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex41,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+ firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}},
+ key = {{NIMH}},
+ year = {1990},
+ title = {Clinical Training in Serious Mental Illness},
+ type = {{DHHS} Publication},
+ number = {ADM 90-1679},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ institution = {U.S. Government Printing Office},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex42,
+ author = {Osgood, D. W. and Wilson, J. K.},
+ year = {1990},
+ title = {Covariation of Adolescent Health Problems},
+ type = {\bibnotype},
+ address = {Lincoln},
+ institution = {University of Nebraska},
+ note = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex43,
+ author = {Mead, J. V.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Looking at Old Photographs: Investigating the Teacher
+ Tales that Novice Teachers Bring with Them},
+ type = {Report},
+ number = {NCRTL-RR-92-4},
+ address = {East Lansing, MI},
+ institution = {National Center for Research on Teacher Learning},
+ note = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex44,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and
+ Human Services}}},
+ firstkey = {{U.S. Department of Health and Human Services [DHHS]}},
+ key = {{DHHS}},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: Prediction and Prevention},
+ type = {AHCPR Publication},
+ number = {92-0047},
+ address = {Rockville, MD},
+ institution = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and
+ Human Services}}},
+}
+
+@intechreport{ex45,
+ author = {Matthews, K. A.},
+ year = {1985},
+ title = {Assessment of {Type}~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility
+ in Epidemiologic Studies of Cardiovascular Disease},
+ editor = {Ostfield, A. M. and Eaker, E. D.},
+ booktitle = {Measuring Psychological Variables in Epidemiologic Studies
+ of Cardiovascular Disease},
+ type = {NIH Publication},
+ number = {85-2270},
+ pages = {153--183},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ institution = {U.S. Department of Health and Human Services},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex46,
+ author = {Broadhurst, R. G. and Maller, R. A.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {Sex Offending and Recidivism},
+ number = {3},
+ address = {Nedlands},
+ institution = {University of Western Australia, Crime Research Centre},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex47,
+ editor = {Shuker, R. and Openshaw, R. and Soler, J.},
+ year = {1990},
+ title = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {New} {Zealand}:
+ From Hooligans to Video Nasties},
+ type = {Delta Research Monograph},
+ number = {11},
+ address = {Palmerston North, New Zealand},
+ institution = {Massey University, Department of Education},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex48,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}},
+ firstkey = {{Employee Benefit Research Institute [EBRI]}},
+ key = {{EBRI}},
+ year = {1992},
+ month = feb,
+ title = {Sources of Health Insurance and Characteristics of the
+ Uninsured},
+ type = {Issue Brief},
+ number = {123},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex49,
+ author = {Deci, E. L. and Ryan, R. M.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {A Motivational Approach to Self:
+ Integration in Personality},
+ editor = {Dienstbier, R.},
+ booktitle = {Nebraska {Symposium} on {Motivation}: Vol.~38.
+ {Perspectives} on Motivation},
+ pages = {237--288},
+ address = {Lincoln},
+ publisher = {University of Nebraska Press},
+}
+
+@article{ex50,
+ author = {Cynx, J. and Williams, H. and Nottebohm, F.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Hemispheric Differences in Avian Song Discrimination},
+ journal = {Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, USA},
+ volume = {89},
+ pages = {1372--1375},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex51,
+ author = {Lichstein, K. L. and Johnson, R. S. and Womack, T. D.
+ and Dean, J. E. and Childers, C. K.},
+ year = {1990},
+ month = jun,
+ title = {Relaxation Therapy for Polypharmacy Use in Elderly
+ Insomniacs and Noninsomniacs},
+ chair = {Rosenthal, T. L.},
+ symposium = {Reducing Medication in Geriatric Populations},
+ howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the First
+ International Congress of Behavioral Medicine},
+ address = {Uppsala, Sweden},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex52,
+ author = {Lanktree, C. and Briere, J.},
+ year = {1991},
+ month = jan,
+ title = {Early Data on the {Trauma} {Symptom} {Checklist}
+ for {Children} ({TSC-C})},
+ howpublished = {Paper presented at the meeting of the American
+ Professional Society on the Abuse of Children},
+ address = {San Diego, CA},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex53,
+ author = {Ruby, J. and Fulton, C.},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = jun,
+ title = {Beyond Redlining: Editing Software that Works},
+ howpublished = {Poster session presented at the annual meeting of the
+ Society for Scholarly Publishing},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+}
+
+@phdthesis{ex54,
+ author = {Bower, D. L.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Employee Assistant Programs Supervisory Referrals:
+ Characteristics of Referring and Nonreferring
+ Supervisors},
+ journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International},
+ volume = {54},
+ number = {01},
+ pages = {534B},
+ note = {UMI No.~9315947},
+}
+
+@phdthesis{ex55,
+ author = {Ross, D. F.},
+ year = {1990},
+ title = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: When
+ a Witness Misidentifies a Familiar but Innocent Person
+ from a Lineup},
+ school = {Cornell University},
+ originalyear = {1990},
+ journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International},
+ volume = {51},
+ pages = {417},
+}
+
+@phdthesis{ex56,
+ author = {Wilfley, D. E.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: Normalweight
+ and Obese},
+ school = {University of Missouri},
+ address = {Columbia},
+}
+
+@mastersthesis{ex57,
+ author = {Almeida, D. M.},
+ year = {1990},
+ title = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences
+ for Fathers' Stress and Father--Child Relations},
+ school = {University of Victoria},
+ address = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada},
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex58,
+ author = {Stinson, C. and Milbrath, C. and Reidbord, S. and Bucci, W.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Thematic Segmentation of Psychotherapy Transcripts for
+ Convergent Analyses},
+ howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex59,
+ author = {D{\'{e}}pret, E. F. and Fiske, S. T.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Perceiving the Powerful: Intriguing Individuals Versus
+ Threatening Groups},
+ howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
+ organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst},
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex60,
+ author = {McIntosh, D. N.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Religion as Schema, with Implications for the Relation
+ Between Religion and Coping},
+ howpublished = {Manuscript submitted for publication},
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex61,
+ author = {Bordi, F. and LeDoux, J. E.},
+ year = {1993},
+ type = {Auditory response latencies in rat auditory cortex},
+ howpublished = {Unpublished raw data},
+}
+
+@misc{ex62,
+ editor = {Klombers, N.},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = spring,
+ title = {{ADAA} {Reporter}},
+ note = {Available from the Anxiety Disorders Association of
+ America, 6000 Executive Boulevard, Suite 513,
+ Rockville, MD 20852},
+}
+
+@article{G-1,
+ author = {Mroczek, D. K.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {The Emerging Study of Midlife},
+ type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle:
+ Psychological and social development in middle age}}},
+ journal = {Contemporary Psychology: APA Review of Books},
+ volume = {45},
+ pages = {482--485},
+}
+
+@article{ex63,
+ author = {Schatz, B. R.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Learning by Text or Context?},
+ type = {Review of the book
+ {\APACcitebtitle{The social life of information}}},
+ journal = {Science},
+ volume = {290},
+ pages = {1304},
+}
+
+@article{ex64,
+ author = {Kraus, S. J.},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Visions of Psychology: A Videotext of Classic Studies},
+ type = {Review of the motion picture
+ {\APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}}},
+ journal = {Contemporary Psychology},
+ volume = {37},
+ pages = {1146--1147},
+}
+
+@misc{ex65-1,
+ author = {Scorsese, M. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+ and Lonergan, K.
+ {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {You Can Count On Me},
+ type = {Motion picture},
+ address = {United States},
+ publisher = {Paramount Pictures},
+}
+
+@misc{ex65-2,
+ author = {Harrison, J. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+ and Schmiechen, R.
+ {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Changing Our Minds: The Story of {Evelyn} {Hooker}},
+ type = {Motion picture},
+ note = {Available from Changing Our Minds, Inc., 170 West End
+ Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023},
+}
+
+@misc{ex65-3,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association (Producer)}}},
+ firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+ key = {{APA}},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Responding Therapeutically to Patient Expressions of
+ Sexual Attraction: A Stimulus Training Tape},
+ type = {Motion picture},
+ note = {Available from the American Psychological Association,
+ 750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242},
+}
+
+@misc{ex66,
+ author = {Crystal, L. {\protect\bibliteral{(Executive
+ Producer)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = oct,
+ day = {11},
+ title = {The {MacNeil}/{Lehrer} News Hour},
+ type = {Television broadcast},
+ address = {New York and Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service},
+}
+
+@misc{ex67,
+ editor = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {The Mind},
+ type = {Television series},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {WNET},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex68,
+ author = {Hall, B. {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+ and Bender, J.
+ {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {The Rules of the Game},
+ type = {Television series episode},
+ editor = {Sander{\bibeditortype{Producer}}, J.},
+ booktitle = {I'll Fly Away},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {New York Broadcasting Company},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex69-1,
+ key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the
+ Waterfall}{track~5}}},
+ author = {Shocked, Michelle},
+ year = {1992},
+ title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
+ booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
+ address = {New York},
+ publisher = {PolyGram Music},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex69-2,
+ key = {{\protect\bibsong{Goodenough}{1982}{Tails
+ and Trotters}{track~5}}},
+ author = {Goodenough, J. B.},
+ year = {1982},
+ title = {Tails and Trotters{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
+ type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett},
+ booktitle = {And So Will We Yet {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
+ address = {Sharon, CT},
+ publisher = {Folk-Legacy Records},
+ note = {1990},
+}
+
+@misc{ex70,
+ author = {Costa, Jr.\hbox{} {\protect\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.},
+ year = {1988},
+ title = {Personality, Continuity, and Changes of Adult Life},
+ type = {Cassette Recording},
+ number = {207-433-88A-B},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {American Psychological Association},
+}
+
+@article{ex71-1,
+ author = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources
+ by Psychology Undergraduates},
+ type = {Electronic version},
+ journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research},
+ volume = {5},
+ pages = {117--123},
+}
+
+@article{ex71-2,
+ author = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources
+ by Psychology Undergraduates},
+ journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research},
+ volume = {5},
+ pages = {117--123},
+ lastchecked = {October 13, 2001},
+ url = {http://jbr.org/articles.html},
+}
+
+@article{ex72,
+ author = {Fredrickson, B. L.},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = mar,
+ day = {7},
+ title = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health
+ and Well-Being},
+ journal = {Prevention \& Treatment},
+ volume = {3},
+ pages = {Article 0001a},
+ lastchecked = {November 20, 2000},
+ url = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html},
+}
+
+@article{ex73,
+ author = {Crow, T. J.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the
+ {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?},
+ journal = {Psycoloquy},
+ volume = {11},
+ lastchecked = {March 25, 2001},
+ url = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/
+ 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001.
+ language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow},
+}
+
+@article{ex74,
+ author = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J.
+ and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others},
+ year = {1998},
+ month = jul,
+ title = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with
+ Epilepsy---{P}roject Update},
+ journal = {Telehealth News},
+ volume = {2},
+ number = {2},
+ lastchecked = {June 6, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1},
+}
+
+@misc{ex75,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy
+ Community 2000,
+ Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}},
+ firstkey = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000,
+ Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}},
+ key = {{TFTAI}},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ title = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {You} Do!},
+ lastchecked = {October 5, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.familymealtime.org},
+}
+
+@incollection{ex76,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}},
+ year = {1998},
+ month = jul,
+ day = {7},
+ title = {Barriers to Closing the Gap},
+ booktitle = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: Low-Income Communities in the
+ Information Age},
+ chapter = {2},
+ lastchecked = {August 18, 2001},
+ url = {http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/two.html},
+}
+
+@misc{ex77,
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ title = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey},
+ lastchecked = {August 8, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/},
+}
+
+@misc{ex78,
+ author = {Chou, L. and McClintock, R. and Moretti, F. and Nix, D. H.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Technology and Education: New Wine in New Bottles:
+ Choosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures},
+ howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University,
+ Institute for Learning Technologies Web site:
+ \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/
+ publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}},
+}
+
+@misc{ex79,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{University of California, San Francisco,
+ Institute for Health and Aging}}},
+ firstkey = {{University of California, San Francisco, Institute for
+ Health and Aging [UCSF-IHA]}},
+ key = {{UCSF-IHA}},
+ year = {1996},
+ month = nov,
+ title = {Chronic Care in {A}merica: {A} 21st Century Challenge},
+ howpublished = {Retrieved September 9, 2000, from the Robert Wood Johnson
+ Foundation Web site:
+ \url{http://www.rwjf.org/library/chrcare/}\bibnodot{.}},
+}
+
+@misc{ex80,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}},
+ firstkey = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}},
+ key = {{USSC}},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ title = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of
+ Federal Sentencing Statistics},
+ lastchecked = {December 8, 1999},
+ url = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm},
+}
+
+@misc{ex81,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}},
+ year = {1997},
+ month = sep,
+ day = {27},
+ title = {Towards a {Canadian} Health {IWAY}: Vision, Opportunities
+ and Future Steps},
+ lastchecked = {November 8, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/
+ health/healthvision.doc},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex82,
+ author = {Kruschke, J. K. and Bradley, A. L.},
+ year = {1995},
+ title = {Extensions to the Delta Rule of Associative Learning},
+ type = {Indiana University Cognitive Science Research Report},
+ number = {14\BmakeAbstractRetrieved},
+ lastchecked = {October 21, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/deltarule_abstract.html},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex83,
+ author = {Cutler, L. D. and Fr{\"{o}}lich, B. and Hanrahan, P.},
+ year = {1997},
+ month = jan,
+ day = {16},
+ title = {Two-Handed Direct Manipulation on the Responsive
+ Workbench},
+ howpublished = {Paper presented at the 1997 Symposium on Interactive 3D
+ Graphics\BmakeAbstractRetrieved},
+ lastchecked = {June 12, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/twohanded/},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex84,
+ author = {Tan, G. and Lewandowsky, S.},
+ year = {1996},
+ title = {A Comparison of Operator Trust in Humans Versus Machines},
+ howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference},
+ lastchecked = {May 16, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/
+ centre/outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan},
+}
+
+@misc{ex85,
+ author = {Chalmers, D.},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = nov,
+ day = {17},
+ title = {Seeing with Sound},
+ type = {\bibmessage},
+ number = {1},
+ url = {news://sci.psychology.consciousness}
+}
+
+@misc{ex86,
+ author = {Simons, D. J.},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = jul,
+ day = {14},
+ title = {News Resources for Visual Cognition},
+ type = {\bibmessage},
+ number = {31},
+ url = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31},
+}
+
+@misc{ex87,
+ author = {Hammond, T.},
+ year = {2000},
+ month = nov,
+ day = {20},
+ title = {{YAHC}: {Handle} {Parameters}, {DOI} {Genres}, etc.},
+ type = {\bibmessage},
+ howpublished = {Message posted to Ref-Links electronic mailing list,
+ archived at \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/
+ ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}},
+}
+
+@article{ex88,
+ author = {Borman, W. C. and Hanson, M. A. and Oppler, S. H. and
+ Pulakos, E. D. and White, L. A.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Role of Early Supervisory Experience in Supervisor Performance},
+ journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
+ volume = {78},
+ pages = {443--449},
+ howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database},
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex89,
+ author = {Hilts, P. J.},
+ year = {1999},
+ month = feb,
+ day = {16},
+ title = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out},
+ journal = {New York Times},
+ lastchecked = {November 21, 2000},
+ url = {http://www.nytimes.com},
+}
+
+@article{ex90,
+ author = {Fournier, M. and {\lowercase{D}}e Ridder, D. and Bensing, J.},
+ year = {1999},
+ title = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: What Does
+ Optimism Mean?},
+ journal = {Journal of Behavioral Medicine},
+ volume = {22},
+ pages = {303--326},
+ howpublished = {Abstract retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycINFO database},
+}
+
+@techreport{ex91,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. General Accounting Office}}},
+ year = {1997},
+ month = feb,
+ title = {Telemedicine: Federal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments},
+ type = {Publication},
+ number = {GAO/NSAID/HEHS-97-67},
+ howpublished = {Retrieved September 15, 2000, from General Accounting Office
+ Reports Online via GPO Access:
+ \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/
+ aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}},
+}
+
+@misc{ex92,
+ author = {Miller, M. E.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {The {Interactive} {Tester}},
+ edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces},
+ type = {\bibcomputersoftware},
+ address = {Westminster, CA},
+ publisher = {Psytek Services},
+}
+
+@misc{ex93,
+ author = {Schwarzer, R.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis},
+ type = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual},
+ lastchecked = {March 23, 2001},
+ url = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm},
+}
+
+@manual{ex93-t1,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{R Development Core Team}}},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing},
+ address = {Vienna, Austria},
+ publisher = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing},
+ url = {http://www.r-project.org},
+}
+
+@misc{ex94,
+ key = {{\APACcitebtitle{National Health Interview Survey}}},
+ title = {National {Health} {Interview} {Survey}---{Current} Health
+ Topics: 1991---{Longitudinal} Study of Aging},
+ edition = {Version~4\noedition\ignorespaces},
+ type = {Data file},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ address = {Hyattsville, MD},
+ publisher = {National Center for Health Statistics},
+}
+
+@misc{ex95,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Department of Health and Human Services,
+ National Center for Health Statistics}}},
+ firstkey = {{Department of Health and Human Services,
+ National Center for Health Statistics [DHHS-NCHS]}},
+ key = {{DHHS-NCHS}},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {National {Health} {Provider} {Inventory}: Home Health
+ Agencies and Hospices, 1991},
+ type = {Data file},
+ howpublished = {Available from National Technical Information Service
+ Web site, \url{http://www.ntis.gov}\bibnodot{.}},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The examples \LaTeX{} file (\fname{apacxmpl.tex})}
+%
+% The file \fname{apacxmpl.tex} contains the \LaTeX{} code for formatting
+% the examples from the APA manual. It can be studied to see how certain
+% nonstandard references can be formatted according to the APA rules,
+% to test \pkg{apacite}, and in particular to test compatibility with
+% other packages. We start with a standard head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{apacite}
+\usepackage{apacdoc}
+
+\title{Testing \textsf{apacite}: Examples from the APA manual}
+\author{Erik Meijer\\
+ \textsf{apacite at gmail.com}
+}
+\date{2013/07/21}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\begin{abstract}
+This document tests \textsf{apacite} [2013/07/21 v6.03]. See the
+\textsf{apacite} documentation for more information.
+\end{abstract}
+
+%</xmpl>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{References from the 6th edition of the Publication Manual}
+%
+% These examples are from chapter~7 of the 6th edition of the APA manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\section{Examples from chapter~7}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex1} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex1} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex1} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex1}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex2}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex1,
+ author = {Herbst-Damm, Kathryn L. and Kulik, James A.},
+ year = {2005},
+ title = {Volunteer Support, Marital Status, and the Survival Times of
+ Terminally Ill Patients},
+ journal = {Health Psychology},
+ volume = {24},
+ pages = {225--229},
+ doi = {10.1037/0278-6133.24.2.225},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex2,
+ author = {Gilbert, David G. and McClernon, F. Joseph and
+ Rabinovich, Norka E. and Sugai, Chihiro and
+ Plath, Louisette C. and Asgaard, Greg and Zuo, Yantao and
+ Huggenvik, Jodi and Botros, Nazeih},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {Effects of Quitting Smoking on {EEG} Activation and Attention
+ Last for More than 31 Days and are More Severe with Stress,
+ Dependence, {DRD2~A1} Allele, and Depressive Traits},
+ journal = {Nicotine \& Tobacco Research},
+ volume = {6},
+ pages = {249--267},
+ doi = {10.1080/14622200410001676305},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that the page heading of the article itself gives the journal name with
+% an ampersand (`\&': \emph{Nicotine \& Tobacco Research}) and not with ``and''
+% as in the APA manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex3-1} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex3-1} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex3-1} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex3-1}\\
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex3-2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex3-2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex3-2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex3-2}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex3-1,
+ author = {Sillick, Tamra J. and Schutte, Nicola S.},
+ year = {2006},
+ title = {Emotional Intelligence and Self-Esteem Mediate Between Perceived
+ Early Parental Love and Adult Happiness},
+ journal = {E-Journal of Applied Psychology: Emotional Intelligence},
+ volume = {2},
+ number = {2},
+ pages = {38--48},
+ url = {http://ojs.lib.swin.edu.au/index.php/ejab},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex3-2,
+ author = {Light, Matthew A. and Light, Ivan H.},
+ year = {2008},
+ title = {The Geographic Expansion of {Mexican} Immigration in the
+ {United} {States} and its Implications for Local Law
+ Enforcement},
+ journal = {Law Enforcement Executive Forum},
+ volume = {8},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {73--82},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This journal appears to prefer the name \emph{Law Enforcement Executive
+% Forum} over \emph{Law Enforcement Executive Forum Journal} (see
+% \url{http://www.iletsbei.com/lee_forum/}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex4} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex4} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex4} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex4}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex5} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex5} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex5} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex5}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex4,
+ author = {Guimard, Philippe and Florin, Agn\`es},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {Les \'Evaluations des Enseignants en Grande Section de
+ Maternelle Sont-Elles Pr\'edictives des Difficult\'es de
+ Lecture au Cours Pr\'eparatoire?},
+ englishtitle = {Are Teacher Ratings in Kindergarten Predictive of
+ Reading Difficulties in First Grade?},
+ journal = {Approche Neuropsychologique des Apprentissages chez l'Enfant},
+ volume = {19},
+ pages = {5--17},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex5,
+ author = {Von Ledebur, Sidonia C.},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {Optimizing Knowledge Transfer by New Employees in Companies},
+ journal = {Knowledge Management Research \& Practice},
+ howpublished = {Advance online publication},
+ doi = {10.1057/palgrave.kmrp.8500141},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here again the page heading of the article itself gives the journal name with
+% an ampersand (`\&') and not with ``and''. Note that the APA explicitly
+% changes ``von'' to ``Von'' to satisfy U.S. conventions of names. In
+% other languages, ``von'' would be retained. See elsewhere in this manual
+% for a discussion of how to treat von-parts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex6} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex6} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex6} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex6}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex7} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex7} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex7} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex7}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex6,
+ author = {Briscoe, Robert},
+ year = {\BIP},
+ title = {Egocentric Spatial Representation in Action and Perception},
+ journal = {Philosophy and Phenomenological Research},
+ url = {http://cogprints.org/5780/1/ECSRAP.F07.pdf},
+}
+
+@magazine{apa6:ch7-ex7,
+ author = {Chamberlin, J. and Novotney, A. and Packard, E.
+ and Price, M.},
+ year = {2008},
+ month = may,
+ title = {Enhancing Worker Well-Being: Occupational Health
+ Psychologists Convene to Share Their Research on Work,
+ Stress, and Health},
+ journal = {Monitor on Psychology},
+ volume = {39},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {26--29},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The online version (\url{http://www.apa.org/monitor/2008/05/workstress.aspx})
+% does not have a comma in the title before the ``and''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex8} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex8} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex8} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex8}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@magazine{apa6:ch7-ex8,
+ author = {Clay, Rebecca},
+ year = {2008},
+ month = jun,
+ title = {Science vs.\ Ideology: Psychologists Fight Back Against
+ the Misuse of Research},
+ journal = {Monitor on Psychology},
+ volume = {39},
+ number = {6},
+ url = {http://www.apa.org/monitor/},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The APA manual incorrectly says ``about'' instead of ``against''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex9} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex9} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex9} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex9}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex10} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex10} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex10} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex10}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex11} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex11} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex11} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex11}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex12-1} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex12-1} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex12-1} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex12-1}\\
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex12-2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex12-2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex12-2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex12-2}\\
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex9,
+ key = {{\APACciteatitle{Six Sites Meet}}},
+ title = {Six Sites Meet for Comprehensive Anti-Gang
+ Initiative Conference},
+ year = {2006},
+ month = nov # "/" # dec,
+ journal = {OJJDP News @ a Glance},
+ url =
+ {http://www.ncjrs.gov/html/ojjdp/news_at_glance/216684/topstory.html},
+}
+
+@newspaper{apa6:ch7-ex10,
+ author = {Schwartz, John},
+ year = {1993},
+ month = sep,
+ day = {30},
+ title = {Obesity Affects Economic, Social Status},
+ journal = {The Washington Post},
+ pages = {A1, A4},
+}
+
+@newspaper{apa6:ch7-ex11,
+ author = {Brody, Jane E.},
+ year = {2007},
+ month = dec,
+ day = {11},
+ title = {Mental Reserves Keep Brain Agile},
+ journal = {The New York Times},
+ url = {http://www.nytimes.com},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex12-1,
+ editor = {Haney, Craig and Wiener, Richard L.},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {Capital Punishment in the {United} {States}},
+ type = {Special issue},
+ journal = {Psychology, Public Policy, and Law},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {4},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex12-2,
+ editor = {Yan, Zheng and Greenfield, Patricia},
+ year = {2006},
+ title = {Children, Adolescents, and the {Internet}},
+ type = {Special section},
+ journal = {Developmental Psychology},
+ volume = {42},
+ pages = {391--458},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The journal lists the editors as Yan and Greenfield (in this order),
+% although the first article (editorial introduction/overview) has
+% Greenfield and Yan.
+%
+% The following is an implementation of the second bullet point: a special
+% issue with no editors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex12-3} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex12-3} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex12-3} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex12-3}
+
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex13-1} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex13-1} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex13-1} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex13-1}\\
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex12-3,
+ key = {{\APACciteatitle{Capital Punishment}}},
+ title = {Capital Punishment in the {United} {States}},
+ year = {2004},
+ type = {Special issue},
+ journal = {Psychology, Public Policy, and Law},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {4},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex13-1,
+ author = {Ganster, Daniel C. and Schaubroeck, John and
+ Sime, Wesley E. and Mayes, Bronston T.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {The Nomological Validity of the {Type~A} Personality Among
+ Employed Adults},
+ type = {Monograph},
+ journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
+ volume = {76},
+ pages = {143--168},
+ doi = {10.1037/0021-9010.76.1.143},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The bullet points given here were explicit examples in the 5th edition.
+% We have to be liberal with what goes in the \fieldname{number} field
+% for these:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex13-2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex13-2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex13-2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex13-2}\\
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex13-3} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex13-3} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex13-3} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex13-3}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex13-2,
+ author = {Harris, Paul L. and Kavanaugh, Robert D.},
+ year = {1993},
+ title = {Young Children's Understanding of Pretense},
+ journal = {Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development},
+ volume = {58},
+ number = {1, Serial No.~231},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex13-3,
+ author = {Battig, William F. and Montague, William E.},
+ year = {1969},
+ title = {Category Norms for Verbal Items in 56 Categories:
+ A Replication and Extension of the {Connecticut}
+ Category Norms},
+ journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs},
+ volume = {80},
+ number = {3, Pt.~2},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The 5th edition gives the journal as ``Journal of Experimental
+% Psychology Monographs'' and its front cover says ``Journal of Experimental
+% Psychology Monograph'', but the volume and issue number and online
+% categorization (on JSTOR) suggests that this is just a special issue
+% of \emph{Journal of Experimental Psychology}, which would argue in
+% favor of dropping the ``Monographs''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex14} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex14} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex14} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex14}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex14,
+ key = {{\APACciteatitle{Editorial}}},
+ title = {Editorial: ``{What} Is a Disaster'' and Why Does This
+ Question Matter?},
+ year = {2006},
+ type = {Editorial},
+ journal = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1--2},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The doi is \doi{10.1111/j.1468-5973.2006.00475.x}; normally this would
+% be added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex15} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex15} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex15} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex15}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex15,
+ author = {Marshall-Pescini, Sarah and Whiten, Andrew},
+ year = {2008},
+ title = {Social Learning of Nut-Cracking Behavior in {East} {African}
+ Sanctuary-Living Chimpanzees (\emph{Pan troglodytes
+ schweinfurthii})},
+ type = {Supplemental material},
+ journal = {Journal of Comparative Psychology},
+ volume = {122},
+ pages = {186--194},
+ doi = {10.1037/0735-7036.122.2.186.supp},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Enclosing ``\verb+Pan troglodytes schweinfurthii+'' in exactly one pair of
+% braces (which happen to also be the delimiters for the \cmd{\emph} command)
+% ensures that the correct capitalization is output.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex16-1} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex16-1} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex16-1} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex16-1} \\
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex16-2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex16-2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex16-2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex16-2}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex16-1,
+ author = {Woolf, Nancy J. and Young, Stacey L. and Fanselow, Michael S.
+ and Butcher, Larry L.},
+ year = {1991},
+ title = {{MAP-2} Expression in Cholinoceptive Pyramidal Cells of
+ Rodent Cortex and Hippocampus is Altered by {Pavlovian}
+ Conditioning},
+ type = {Abstract},
+ journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts},
+ volume = {17},
+ pages = {480},
+}
+
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex16-2,
+ author = {Lassen, Stephen R. and Steele, Michael M. and Sailor, Wayne},
+ year = {2006},
+ title = {The Relationship of School-Wide {Positive} {Behavior}
+ {Support} to Academic Achievement in an Urban Middle School},
+ journal = {Psychology in the Schools},
+ volume = {43},
+ pages = {701--712},
+ url = {http://www.interscience.wiley.com},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The doi is \doi{10.1002/pits.20177}; normally this would be added. In
+% the title and the abstract, ``Positive Behavior Support'' is capitalized,
+% so presumably this is the proper name of an experimental program.
+% Therefore I have enclosed it in braces here as well, so that this
+% capitalization is preserved.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex17} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex17} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex17} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex17}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex17,
+ author = {Hare, Linda R. and O'Neill, Kevin},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Effectiveness and Efficiency in Small Academic Peer Groups:
+ A Case Study},
+ journal = {Small Group Research},
+ volume = {31},
+ pages = {24--53},
+ howpublished = {Abstract retrieved from {Sociological} {Abstracts}
+ database},
+ note = {(Accession No.\ 200010185)},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The construction using the \fieldname{howpublished} and \fieldname{note}
+% fields does the job, but is not very elegant.
+% The doi (of the whole article) is \doi{10.1177/104649640003100102}, which
+% presumably normally would be added. The abstract is also freely available
+% on the Sage website (\url{http://sgr.sagepub.com/content/31/1/24} on
+% July 10, 2010), which is a lot more accessible than this database.
+% Note that the APA manual omits the subtitle. It is remarkable how
+% many such small errors there are in the APA manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex18} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex18} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex18} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex18}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex18,
+ author = {Shotton, Margaret A.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {Computer Addiction? {A} Study of Computer Dependency},
+ address = {London, England},
+ publisher = {Taylor \& Francis},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% I am puzzled by ``England''; ``UK'' seems more appropriate to me and that's
+% what I'm always using.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex19-1} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex19-1} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex19-1} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex19-1} \\
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex19-2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex19-2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex19-2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex19-2}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex19-1,
+ author = {Shotton, Margaret A.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {Computer Addiction? {A} Study of Computer Dependency},
+ type = {DX Reader version},
+ url = {http://www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk/html/index.asp},
+}
+
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex19-2,
+ author = {Schiraldi, Glenn R.},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {The Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder Sourcebook:
+ A Guide to Healing, Recovery, and Growth},
+ type = {Adobe Digital Editions version},
+ doi = {10.1036/0071393722},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The website that this doi refers to gives the publication date as 2000,
+% so that's what I'm using here. (The APA uses 2001.) This is supposed to
+% be a ``free eBook'', but even after installing the Adobe software, the
+% link to the actual content gives a ``page not found'' error for me.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex20} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex20} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex20} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex20}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex20,
+ author = {O'Keeffe, Elton},
+ year = {\bibnodate},
+ title = {Egoism \& the Crisis in {Western} Values},
+ url = {http://www.onlineoriginals.com/showitem.asp?itemID=135},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note the typo in the last name of the author in the APA manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex21} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex21} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex21} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex21}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex21,
+ author = {Freud, Sigmund},
+ year = {1953},
+ title = {The Method of Interpreting Dreams:
+ An Analysis of a Specimen Dream},
+ editor = {Strachey, James},
+ translator = {Strachey, James},
+ booktitle = {The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological
+ Works of {Sigmund} {Freud}},
+ volume = {4},
+ pages = {96--121},
+ originalyear = {1900},
+ url = {http://books.google.com/books},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This url did not bring me very far. It took me quite some time and different
+% search strings to find the volume referred to. Search for author =
+% ``Strachey'', year = 1953, and then select ``The interpretation of dreams,
+% first part (1900)''; this leads in my case to
+% \url{http://books.google.com/books?id=moN_OQAACAAJ&
+% dq=inauthor:%22James+Strachey%22&hl=en&ei=9E1FTOyVOsHflgems_DrAw&
+% sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=8&ved=0CEcQ6AEwBw}, but there is
+% no preview available, and there is no useful information other than the
+% title and the author, so exactly what is ``retrieved'' is not clear to
+% me. After some internet searching, I did find
+% \url{http://www.pep-web.org/static.php?page=standardedition}, which has
+% a clickable table of contents, and presumably if you have a registered
+% IP address, the actual content. Apparently, my IP address is not registered,
+% so I had no access to the actual content.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex22} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex22} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex22} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex22}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex22,
+ editor = {Thomas, Noreen},
+ year = {2002},
+ title = {Perspectives on the Community College: A Journey of Discovery},
+ type = {Monograph},
+ url = {http://eric.ed.gov},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The ERIC document number is ED\,463\,808.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex23} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex23} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex23} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex23}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex23,
+ editor = {Koch, Sigmund},
+ year = {1959--1963},
+ title = {Psychology: A Study of a Science},
+ volume = {1--6},
+ address = {New York, NY},
+ publisher = {McGraw-Hill},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that the correct title has ``a'' before ``science''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex24} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex24} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex24} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex24}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex24,
+ author = {Strong, Edward K., Jr. and Uhrbrock, Richard S.},
+ year = {1923},
+ title = {Bibliography on Job Analysis},
+ editor = {Outhwaite{\bibeditortype{Series Ed.\hbox{}}}, Leonard},
+ booktitle = {Personnel {Research} {Series}: Vol.~1. {Job} Analysis and the
+ Curriculum},
+ pages = {140--146},
+ doi = {10.1037/10762-000},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There are several notable things with this reference: (1) The whole book is
+% written by the same authors, so I'd think we'd normally list the book title
+% in the \fieldname{title} field and in the text refer to the specific chapter
+% or pages, rather than single out the chapter in the reference list. (2)
+% The doi of the chapter is \doi{10.1037/10762-006}; the doi given here
+% is the one for the whole book. (3) It is unclear why we would mention the
+% series in which the book appears or the series editor. My impression from
+% earlier versions of the \emph{APA manual} is that this is only done if the
+% ``series'' is to be considered a joint work (like an encyclopedia) where
+% different volumes have different editors and there is a series editor. It is
+% my impression that the current work is just a book in a series of books, like
+% every publisher has its various series with their series editors. (Note that
+% the series title has to be capitalized.) So in summary, I would normally
+% format this example as
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% @book{apa6:ch7-ex24,
+% author = {Strong, Edward K., Jr. and Uhrbrock, Richard S.},
+% year = {1923},
+% title = {Job Analysis and the Curriculum},
+% doi = {10.1037/10762-000},
+% }
+% \end{verbatim}
+% where I'm using the url for the whole book, because I refer to the whole book.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex25} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex25} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex25} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex25}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex25,
+ author = {Haybron, Daniel M.},
+ year = {2008},
+ title = {Philosophy and the Science of Subjective Well-Being},
+ editor = {Eid, Michael and Larsen, Randy J.},
+ booktitle = {The Science of Subjective Well-Being},
+ pages = {17--43},
+ address = {New York, NY},
+ publisher = {Guilford Press},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In previous versions of the \emph{APA manual} (e.g., 5th ed., p.~217), the
+% states or countries of a list of cities ``well known for publishing'',
+% including New York, were not given, but this has been abandoned in the 6th
+% ed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex26} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex26} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex26} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex26}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex26,
+ author = {Piaget, Jean},
+ year = {1988},
+ title = {Extracts from {Piaget}'s Theory},
+ translator = {Gellerier, Guy and Langer, Jonas},
+ editor = {Richardson, Ken and Sheldon, Sue},
+ booktitle = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: A Reader},
+ pages = {3--18},
+ address = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+ publisher = {Erlbaum},
+ originalbooktitle = {Manual of Child Psychology},
+ originalpages = {703--732},
+ originaleditor = {Mussen, Paul H.},
+ originalyear = {1970},
+ originaladdress = {New York, NY},
+ originalpublisher = {Wiley},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It looks like the title of the Mussen book should be
+% \emph{Carmichael's Manual of Child Psychology} and it's the third edition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex27} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex27} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex27} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex27}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex27,
+ editor = {VandenBos, Gary R.},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {{APA} Dictionary of Psychology},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {American Psychological Association},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex28} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex28} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex28} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex28}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{apa6:ch7-ex28,
+author = {{\bibcorporate{Real Academia Espa\~{n}ola}}},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Diccionario de la Lengua Espa\~{n}ola},
+ englishtitle = {Dictionary of the {Spanish} Language},
+ edition = {22},
+ address = {Madrid, Spain},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Real Academia Espa\~{n}ola}}},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex29} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex29} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex29} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex29}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex29,
+ author = {Graham, George},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {Behaviorism},
+ editor = {Zalta, Edward N.},
+ booktitle = {The {Stanford} Encyclopedia of Philosophy},
+ edition = {Fall 2007},
+ url = {http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/behaviorism/},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the time of this writing (June 2011), this url contains the Fall 2010
+% version. The Fall 2007 version can be found at
+% \url{http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/fall2007/entries/behaviorism/}.
+% This is what the website itself says about citation:
+% \begin{quote}
+% Please note that you are being asked to cite a URL that is in a fixed,
+% archived edition of the encyclopedia. The reason for this is that the
+% Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy recommends that readers use a stable
+% citation for scholarly purposes. You should not cite the dynamic portion
+% of the encyclopedia.
+% \end{quote}
+% Furthermore,
+% \begin{quote}
+% There are over 50 \BibTeX{} styles and no standard format that is
+% guaranteed to work for all 50. So, we suggest you use our string as a
+% `useful suggestion' that might need to be adapted for your particular
+% \BibTeX{} file.
+% \end{quote}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% @InCollection{sep-behaviorism,
+% author = {Graham, George},
+% title = {Behaviorism},
+% booktitle = {The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy},
+% editor = {Edward N. Zalta},
+% howpublished = {\url{http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/fall2007/entries/behaviorism/}},
+% year = {2007},
+% edition = {Fall 2007},
+% }
+% \end{verbatim}
+% which is pretty similar to what I did above. The only big difference is that
+% that they put the url in the \fieldname{howpublished} field, which should
+% work fine with \pkg{apacite}, except that the APA wants the ``Retrieved from''
+% string, which is generated by \pkg{apacite} if you put the url in the
+% \fieldname{url} field but not if you put it in the \fieldname{howpublished}
+% field, so you'll have to insert it yourself in the \fieldname{howpublished}
+% field if you want to use that.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex30} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex30} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex30} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex30}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex30,
+ title = {Heuristic},
+ booktitle = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Online Dictionary},
+ edition = {11},
+ url = {http://www.m-w.com/dictionary/heuristic},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% One could argue that if the online edition refers to the 11th edition of
+% the print version, the year should also be the year of the print version,
+% instead of ``n.d.''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex31} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex31} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex31} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex31}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@techreport{apa6:ch7-ex31,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and Human
+ Services, National Institutes of Health, National Heart,
+ Lung, and Blood Institute}}},
+ firstkey = {{U.S. Department of Health and Human
+ Services, National Institutes of Health, National Heart,
+ Lung, and Blood Institute [NHLBI]}},
+ key = {{NHLBI}},
+ year = {2003},
+ title = {Managing Asthma: A Guide for Schools},
+ type = {NIH Publication},
+ number = {02-2650},
+ url = {http://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/prof/lung/asthma/asth_sch.pdf},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is an awfully long author name. In the 5th edition,
+% section~3.96, example~1, only ``National Institute of Mental Health''
+% was used, without all the higher levels in the hierarchy.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex32} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex32} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex32} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex32}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@techreport{apa6:ch7-ex32,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association, Task
+ Force on the Sexualization of Girls}}},
+ firstkey = {{American Psychological Association, Task
+ Force on the Sexualization of Girls [APA]}},
+ key = {{APA}},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {Report of the {APA} {Task} {Force} on the {Sexualization}
+ of {Girls}},
+ type = {\bibnotype},
+ url = {http://www.apa.org/pi/wpo/sexualization.html},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex33} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex33} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex33} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex33}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@techreport{apa6:ch7-ex33,
+ author = {Kessy, Severine S. A. and Urio, Fratern M.},
+ year = {2006},
+ title = {The Contribution of Microfinance Institutions to
+ Poverty Reduction in {Tanzania}},
+ type = {Research Report\APACredefineOnce{BRetrievedFrom}
+ {Retrieved from Research on Poverty Alleviation
+ website:\ }},
+ number = {06.3},
+ url = {http://www.repoa.or.tz/documents_storage/Publications/Reports/06.3_Kessy_and_Urio.pdf},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note the use of \cmd{\APACredefineOnce} from the \pkg{apacdoc}
+% package to make a one-time change of the \cmd{\BRetrievedFrom}
+% command to accommodate the ``Research on Poverty Alleviation
+% website''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex34} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex34} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex34} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex34}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@techreport{apa6:ch7-ex34,
+ author = {McDaniel, Julie E. and Miskel, Cecil G.},
+ year = {2002},
+ title = {The Effect of Groups and Individuals on National
+ Decisionmaking: Influence and Domination in the
+ Reading Policymaking Environment},
+ type = {CIERA Report\APACredefineOnce{BRetrievedFrom}
+ {Retrieved from University of Michigan, Center for
+ Improvement of Early Reading Achievement website:\ }},
+ number = {3-025},
+ url = {http://www.ciera.org/library/reports/inquiry-3/3-025/3-025.pdf},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The APA manual does not have a ``No.'' after ``CIERA Report'',
+% which seems like an error in the manual to me.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex35} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex35} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex35} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex35}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@techreport{apa6:ch7-ex35,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}},
+ firstkey = {{Employee Benefit Research Institute [EBRI]}},
+ key = {{EBRI}},
+ year = {1992},
+ month = feb,
+ title = {Sources of Health Insurance and Characteristics of the
+ Uninsured, Analysis of the {March} 1991 {Current}
+ {Population} {Survey}},
+ type = {Issue Brief},
+ number = {123},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The APA manual does not include a url, perhaps for the sake of
+% an example that shows address and publisher, but I was able to
+% retrieve it from \url{http://www.ebri.org/publications/ib/}
+% Also, the APA manual does not list the full title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex36} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex36} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex36} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex36}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@lecture{apa6:ch7-ex36,
+ author = {Muellbauer, John},
+ year = {2007},
+ month = sep,
+ title = {Housing, Credit and Consumer Expenditure},
+ chair = {Ludvigson, Sydney C.},
+ symposium = {Housing and Consumer Behavior},
+ howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the {Federal}
+ {Reserve} {Bank} of {Kansas} {City}},
+ address = {Jackson Hole, WY},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There are several things not right about this entry. A minor point is
+% that the title does not have a comma after ``Credit''. More
+% importantly, the entry seems to misrepresent the symposium. On the
+% website
+% \url{http://www.kc.frb.org/publications/research/escp/escp-2007.cfm},
+% the symposium is listed as ``Housing, Housing Finance, \& Monetary
+% Policy, a symposium sponsored by the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas
+% City''. So the title of the symposium is different and it is not a
+% ``meeting of'' but a ``symposium sponsored by''. ``Housing and
+% Consumer Behavior'' is the title of the session, in which
+% Muellbauer's paper is the only paper, so it appears this was simply
+% a provisional title of the paper. Ludvigson is the discussant, which
+% is not generally the same as the chair, and in fact Martin Feldstein
+% is listed as the chair of the general discussion, who also gives the
+% ``Overview and concluding remarks'' at the end of the symposium. The
+% Kansas City Fed's website posts two versions of the paper (neither of
+% which is listed in the APA manual): one downloadable from the website
+% mentioned above, which is nicely typeset and starts at page 267, and
+% thus looks like an edited published version, and one at
+% \url{http://www.kc.frb.org/publicat/sympos/2007/pdf/2007.09.17.muellbauer.pdf},
+% which looks like the accepted version from the author. The former
+% lists the middle initial ``N.'' of the author, whereas the latter
+% does not. Normally, one would cite the published version, but for the
+% sake of this example, we cite the paper presented. Nevertheless, the
+% description in the APA manual seems grossly inaccurate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex37} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex37} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex37} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex37}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@lecture{apa6:ch7-ex37,
+ author = {Liu, Shuhua},
+ year = {2005},
+ month = may,
+ title = {Defending Against Business Crises with the Help of
+ Intelligent Agent Based Early Warning Solutions},
+ howpublished = {Paper presented at the Seventh International
+ Conference on Enterprise Information Systems},
+ address = {Miami, FL\APACredefineOnce{BRetrievedFrom}{Abstract
+ retrieved from\ }},
+ url = {http://www.iceis.org/iceis2005/abstracts_2005.htm},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The website itself uses ``7th'' instead of ``Seventh''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex38} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex38} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex38} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex38}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@article{apa6:ch7-ex38,
+ author = {Herculano-Houzel, Suzana and Collins, Christine E.
+ and Wong, Peiyan and Kaas, Jon H. and Lent, Roberto},
+ year = {2008},
+ title = {The Basic Nonuniformity of the Cerebral Cortex},
+ journal = {Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, USA},
+ volume = {105},
+ pages = {12593--12598},
+ doi = {10.1073/pnas.0805417105},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Despite the name ``Proceedings'', this is an ordinary journal and
+% thus there is nothing special about this reference. It is
+% noteworthy, though, that in the first printing of the 6th edition
+% of the APA manual, ``, USA,'' was missing, and this addition is
+% listed as a correction in the errata on the APA website. Still this
+% is an interesting case where the APA departs from its policy of not
+% abbreviating journal titles: PNAS's website lists the name of the
+% journal as ``Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the
+% United States of America'', and abbreviates it to PNAS.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex39} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex39} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex39} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex39}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@incollection{apa6:ch7-ex39,
+ author = {Katz, Itai and Gabayan, Kevin and Aghajan, Hamid},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {A Multi-touch Surface Using Multiple Cameras},
+ editor = {Blanc-Talon, Jacques and Philips, Wilfried
+ and Popescu, Dan and Scheunders, Paul},
+ booktitle = {{Lecture} {Notes} in {Computer} {Science}: Vol.~4678.
+ {Advanced} Concepts for Intelligent Vision Systems},
+ pages = {97--108},
+ doi = {10.1007/978-3-540-74607-2_9},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For references with a doi or url, the general rule in the 6th edition
+% is to omit the publisher and its address, so this is what I did, and
+% the example in the APA manual seems incorrect. Also, the
+% capitalization of the book title seems incorrect (cf.\ example~24).
+% From previous versions of the APA manual, I got the impression that
+% ``series'' in APA speak was the title of a coherent multivolume work
+% with possibly different volume editors, and not the name of a book
+% series with unrelated works. Because the \fieldname{series} field in
+% \BibTeX{} is intended for the latter, which would not normally be
+% included in a reference in psychology, \pkg{apacite} has ignored it
+% thus far. This example, however, falls in the latter category, and
+% thus I may need to reconsider how \pkg{apacite} deals with this,
+% especially because it seems more natural then to split what is now
+% in the \fieldname{booktitle} field into \fieldname{series},
+% \fieldname{volume}, and \fieldname{booktitle}. Note that the example
+% does not mention the series editors, unlike series examples in
+% previous editions of the APA manual.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex40} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex40} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex40} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex40} \\
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@mastersthesis{apa6:ch7-ex40,
+ author = {McNiel, Donita S.},
+ year = {2006},
+ title = {Meaning Through Narrative: A Personal Narrative
+ Discussing Growing Up with an Alcoholic Mother},
+ howpublished = {Available from ProQuest Dissertations and Theses
+ database},
+ note = {UMI No.\ 1434728},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The APA manual gives rules for unpublished theses, but provides no
+% explicit examples. So let's reuse two examples from the 5th edition
+% here. Note, however, that I obtained this information and the
+% abstracts, though not the full text, from ProQuest, and it says that
+% these are abstracted in \emph{DAI} (Series~B, Vol.~50, No.~11,
+% p.~5303, 1990) and \emph{MAI} (Vol.~30, No.~3, p.~906, 1992),
+% respectively. This also lists the title of the first one and the year
+% of the second one differently from the 5th edition of the APA manual.
+% I used the ProQuest information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex40-2} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex40-2} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex40-2} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex40-2} \\
+\mbox{}\\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex40-3} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex40-3} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex40-3} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex40-3}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@phdthesis{apa6:ch7-ex40-2,
+ author = {Wilfley, Denise E.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {An Analysis of Psychological Distress, Self-concept,
+ and Patterns of Family Interactions in Two Subgroups
+ of Bulimia--Normal Weight and Obese},
+ school = {University of Missouri},
+ address = {Columbia},
+}
+@mastersthesis{apa6:ch7-ex40-3,
+ author = {Almeida, David M.},
+ year = {1989},
+ title = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences
+ for Fathers' Stress and Father-Child Relations},
+ school = {University of Victoria},
+ address = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex41} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex41} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex41} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex41}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@phdthesis{apa6:ch7-ex41,
+ author = {Adams, Ronald Jerry},
+ year = {1973},
+ title = {Building a Foundation for Evaluation of Instruction in
+ Higher Education and Continuing Education},
+ url = {http://www.ohiolink.edu/etd/},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex42} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex42} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex42} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex42}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@phdthesis{apa6:ch7-ex42,
+ author = {Bruckman, Amy},
+ year = {1997},
+ title = {{MOOSE} Crossing: Construction, Community, and
+ Learning in a Networked Virtual World for Kids},
+ school = {Massachusetts Institute of Technology},
+ url = {http://www-static.cc.gatech.edu/~asb/thesis/},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% On the thesis, the author's given names are listed as ``Amy Susan'',
+% but the APA manual only lists the first initial and the author cites
+% only her first given name in her reference list as well. The format
+% with MIT listed in parentheses fits neither rule on p.~207 of the
+% APA manual. Presumably, this was done because of a combination of
+% factors: thesis obtained from the web, but not a stable database,
+% and from the author's website at her current affiliation, not the
+% university where the degree was obtained.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex43} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex43} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex43} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex43}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@phdthesis{apa6:ch7-ex43,
+ author = {Appelbaum, Lawrence G.},
+ year = {2005},
+ title = {Three Studies of Human Information Processing:
+ Texture Amplification, Motion Representation, and
+ Figure-Ground Segregation},
+ journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International: Section B.
+ Sciences and Engineering},
+ volume = {65},
+ number = {10},
+ pages = {5428},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Unlike previous versions of the APA manual, where DAI abstracts had a
+% parenthetical part like ``(Doctoral dissertation, University of
+% California, Irvine, 2004)'', this is now formatted purely as a
+% journal article, so I could have simply used the \entryname{@article}
+% entry type. The \fieldname{school} and in particular
+% \fieldname{originalyear} fields should now be omitted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\item
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex44} \\
+\cite{apa6:ch7-ex44} \\
+\fullciteA{apa6:ch7-ex44} \\
+\citeA{apa6:ch7-ex44}
+%</xmpl>
+%<*bibdb>
+@phdthesis{apa6:ch7-ex44,
+ author = {Carlbom, Pelle},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Carbody and Passengers in Rail Vehicle Dynamics},
+ type = {Doctoral thesis},
+ school = {Royal Institute of Technology},
+ address = {Stockholm, Sweden},
+ url = {http://urn.kb.se/resolve?urn=urn:nbn:se:kth:diva-3029},
+}
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This follows the same pattern as example~42. ``Doctoral thesis'' is
+% presumably an error; it should be ``Doctoral dissertation''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xmpl>
+\end{enumerate}
+\bibliographystyle{apacite}
+\bibliography{apa5ex}
+\end{document}
+%</xmpl>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Additional references}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bibdb>
+@book{APAManual3,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+ firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+ key = {{APA}},
+ year = {1984},
+ title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+ {Association}},
+ edition = {3},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+ note = {with revisions},
+}
+
+@book{APAManual5,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+ firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+ key = {{APA}},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+ {Association}},
+ edition = {5},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+}
+
+@book{APAManual6,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+ firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+ key = {{APA}},
+ year = {2009},
+ title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+ {Association}},
+ edition = {6},
+ address = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+}
+
+@book{chicago,
+ title = {The {Chicago} Manual of Style},
+ edition = {15},
+ year = {2003},
+ address = {Chicago},
+ publisher = {The University of Chicago Press},
+}
+
+@misc{Pata88,
+ author = {Patashnik, Oren},
+ year = {1988},
+ title = {{\BibTeX ing}},
+ url = {http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/
+ bibtex/distribs/doc/btxdoc.tex},
+ lastchecked = {October 4, 2008},
+}
+
+@book{LaTeXbook,
+ author = {Lamport, Leslie},
+ year = {1994},
+ title = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System.
+ {User}'s Guide and Reference Manual},
+ edition = {2},
+ address = {Reading, MA},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{KoDa04,
+ author = {Kopka, Helmut and Daly, Patrick W.},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {Guide To {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}},
+ edition = {4},
+ address = {Boston, MA},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{TLC2,
+ author = {Mittelbach, Frank and Goossens, Michel},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {The {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX} Companion},
+ edition = {2},
+ address = {Boston, MA},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{dLMe08a,
+ editor = {De Leeuw, Jan and Meijer, Erik},
+ year = {2008},
+ title = {Handbook of Multilevel Analysis},
+ address = {New York, NY},
+ publisher = {Springer},
+}
+
+@book{meijer1998,
+ author = {Meijer, Erik},
+ year = {1998},
+ title = {Structural Equation Models for Nonnormal Data},
+ address = {Leiden, Netherlands},
+ publisher = {DSWO Press},
+}
+
+@article{meijer07,
+ author = {Meijer, Erik},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {Citations, Reference List, and Author Index with
+ \textsf{apacite}},
+ journal = {Eutypon},
+ volume = {16--19},
+ pages = {1--31},
+ url = {http://www.eutypon.gr/eutypon/e-cont-16-19.html},
+}
+
+@book{WaMe00,
+ author = {Wansbeek, Tom and Meijer, Erik},
+ year = {2000},
+ title = {Measurement Error and Latent Variables in Econometrics},
+ address = {Amsterdam, Netherlands},
+ publisher = {North-Holland},
+}
+
+@unpublished{APA-3rd-ed-ex53,
+ author = {Gottfredson, G. D.},
+ year = {1978},
+ title = {Why Don't Vocational Interests Predict Job
+ Satisfaction Better Than They Do?},
+ howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
+ organization = {Johns Hopkins University, Center for Social
+ Organization of Schools},
+ address = {Baltimore},
+}
+
+@misc{DePsych01,
+ key = {{\APACciteatitle{Uitgebreide Richtlijnen}}},
+ title = {Uitgebreide Richtlijnen voor het Aanleveren van Kopij},
+ englishtitle = {Detailed Guidelines for the Submission of Manuscripts},
+ year = {2001},
+ lastchecked = {January~3, 2005},
+ url = {http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf},
+}
+
+@article{NTPG04,
+ title = {Aanwijzingen voor Auteurs},
+ englishtitle = {Instructions for Authors},
+ year = {2004},
+ journal = {Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar
+ Grensgebieden},
+ volume = {59},
+ pages = {inside back cover},
+}
+
+@book{Renk02,
+ author = {Renkema, J.},
+ year = {2002},
+ title = {Schrijfwijzer},
+ englishtitle = {Writing Indicator},
+ edition = {4},
+ address = {Den Haag, The Netherlands},
+ publisher = {Sdu},
+}
+
+@article{Schr04,
+ author = {Schrooten, M. G. S. and Smulders, F. T. Y.},
+ year = {2004},
+ title = {Een Experimentele Kijk op Angst: Aandacht en Automatisme
+ in de Verwerking van Bedreigende Stimuli},
+ englishtitle = {Anxiety from an Experimental Point of View: Attention and
+ Automaticity in the Processing of Threatening Stimuli},
+ journal = {Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar
+ Grensgebieden},
+ volume = {59},
+ pages = {135--149},
+}
+
+@book{VanDale89,
+ key = {{\APACcitebtitle{van Dale}}},
+ title = {van {Dale} Groot Woordenboek {Engels}-{Nederlands}},
+ englishtitle = {van {Dale}'s Large Dictionary {English}-{Dutch}},
+ edition = {2},
+ year = {1989},
+ address = {Utrecht, The Netherlands},
+ publisher = {Van Dale},
+}
+
+@book{KLO05,
+ author = {Haapam\"aki, Tuula and Hedman, Arne
+ and H\"am\"al\"ainen, Esa and Kurvinen, Birgitta
+ and Lager, Lassi and Lindegren, Yrj\"o
+ and Murtomaa, Eeva and Vainikka, Eila},
+ year = {2005},
+ title = {Monografioiden kuvailu},
+ englishtitle = {Description for Monographic Publications},
+ address = {Helsinki, Finland},
+ publisher = {Helsingin yliopiston kirjasto},
+ url = {http://www.kansalliskirjasto.fi/kirjastoala/
+ luettelointisaannot/Files/liitetiedosto2/
+ monografioiden_kuvailu.pdf},
+ lastchecked = {January 19, 2009},
+}
+
+@book{DGPs07,
+ firstkey = {Deutsche Gesellschaft f\"ur Psychologie [DGPs]},
+ key = {DGPs},
+ author = {\bibcorporate{Deutsche Gesellschaft f\"ur Psychologie}},
+ year = {2007},
+ title = {Richtlinien zur {Manuskriptgestaltung}},
+ englishtitle = {Guidelines for Manuscript Preparation},
+ edition = {3},
+ address = {G\"ottingen, Germany},
+ publisher = {Hogrefe-Verlag},
+}
+
+@misc{UIB08,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Bergen}}},
+ year = {2008},
+ title = {American {Psychological} {Association} ({APA})},
+ url = {http://www.sokogskriv.no/norsk/basis/sitering-etikk/APA.pdf},
+ lastchecked = {October 12, 2008},
+ address = {Bergen, Norway},
+ publisher = {University of Bergen, University Library},
+}
+%% Referenced from
+%% \url{http://www.sokogskriv.no/norsk/basis/sitering-etikk/4-stiler.html}
+%%
+%% Original version:
+%% \url{http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf}
+%% but this page does not exist anymore on 2008/10/12.
+%%
+%% Norwegian name:
+%% Universitetsbiblioteket, Universitetet I Bergen, 2008
+
+@misc{UiO06,
+ author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Oslo}}},
+ year = {2006},
+ title = {Normer for skriftlig arbeid},
+ englishtitle = {Standards for Written Works},
+ url = {http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/
+ REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf},
+ lastchecked = {October 12, 2008},
+ address = {Oslo, Norway},
+ publisher = {University of Oslo, Institute of Nursing and Health Sciences},
+}
+%% Referenced from
+%% \url{http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/}
+%%
+%% Norwegian name:
+%% Universitetet i Oslo, Sykepleievitenskap, 28.06.06
+
+
+@misc{Erik01,
+ author = {Erikson, Martin G.},
+ year = {2001},
+ title = {Att Skriva Litteraturreferenser Enligt {Harvard}-Systemet},
+ englishtitle = {Citations According to the {Harvard} System},
+ url = {http://www.his.se/upload/10631/referenser.pdf},
+ lastchecked = {October 18, 2008},
+ Eriksremark = {Originally downloaded December 9, 2004, from
+ \url{http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf},
+ but this site does not exist anymore.},
+}
+
+@misc{Johnsson,
+ author = {Johnsson, Mattias},
+ title = {Lathund for Referensskrivning},
+ englishtitle = {Cheat Sheet for Formatting of References},
+ url = {http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html},
+ lastchecked = {October 18, 2008},
+ Eriksremark = {Originally downloaded December 9, 2004},
+}
+
+@misc{GU94,
+ title = {Referensskrivning},
+ englishtitle = {Formatting of References},
+ year = {1994},
+ url = {http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm},
+ lastchecked = {October 18, 2008},
+ Eriksremark = {Originally downloaded December 9, 2004.
+ Site is Gothenburg University Web site, but reference seems
+ specific enough. Authors may be (?)
+ Informatorn/Dahlgren/Ottosson, but I don't know first
+ names.},
+}
+
+%%
+%</bibdb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{\BibTeX\ style (\fname{apacite.bst} and its siblings)}
+% The program in \BibTeX's language that formats the reference list.
+% Currently, this supplies four files: \fname{apacite.bst}, \fname{apacitex.bst}
+% \fname{apacann.bst}, and \fname{apacannx.bst}.
+% These files are almost identical, but \fname{apacitex.bst} and
+% \fname{apacannx.bst} generate information that can be used to generate an
+% author index, and \fname{apacann.bst} and \fname{apacannx.bst} use annotation
+% when available for annotated bibliographies.
+%
+% We start with file headers and a function that prints the version number in
+% the \fname{.blg} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!annotated>
+%<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst : reference list according to APA manual
+%<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst : reference list according to APA manual
+%<xbibstyle>%% with author indexing information
+%</!annotated>
+%<*annotated>
+%<bibstyle>%% apacann.bst : reference list according to APA manual
+%<bibstyle>%% with annotations
+%<xbibstyle>%% apacannx.bst : reference list according to APA manual
+%<xbibstyle>%% with annotations and author indexing information
+%</annotated>
+%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version}
+{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file
+%</bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%<*!annotated>
+%<bibstyle> "apacite.bst"
+%<xbibstyle> "apacitex.bst"
+%<bibstyle> " [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA bibliography style]"
+%<xbibstyle> " [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA bibl. style with author index info]"
+%</!annotated>
+%<*annotated>
+%<bibstyle> "apacann.bst"
+%<xbibstyle> "apacannx.bst"
+%<bibstyle> " [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA annotated bibliography style]"
+%<*xbibstyle>
+" [2013/07/21 v6.03 APA annotated bibl. style with author index info]"
+%</xbibstyle>
+%</annotated>
+%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+ * top$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declaration of fields, integers, and strings for each entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ENTRY
+ { address
+ annote
+ annotate
+ author
+ booktitle
+ chair
+ chapter
+ day
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ englishtitle
+ firstkey
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ journal
+ key
+ lastchecked
+ month
+ nihms
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ originaladdress
+ originalbooktitle
+ originaledition
+ originaleditor
+ originaljournal
+ originalnumber
+ originalpages
+ originalpublisher
+ originalvolume
+ originalyear
+ pages
+ pmcid
+ publisher
+ school
+ series
+ symposium
+ text
+ title
+ translator
+ type
+ url
+ urldate
+ volume
+ year
+ }
+ { cite.order %% order of first citation
+ title.number %% for sorting titles
+ cite.initials %% dummy (0-1) indicating whether or not
+ %% initials of the 1st author must
+ %% be used for citing
+ cite.num.names.full %% number of names to be cited for full and
+ cite.num.names.short %% short cite
+ add.to.year %% For a, b, c, etc. after year
+ %% in multiple citations with same author-year
+ }
+ { year.label %% For sorting entries by year
+ author.year.sort.label %% For sorting entries and checking whether
+ %% initials should be added, how many authors
+ %% should be cited and whether a, b, etc.
+ %% after year is necessary
+ title.sort.label %% for sorting titles
+ citeorder.sort.label %% for sorting by citation order
+ type.2 %% Replacement for type with misc entries and
+ %% entries that revert to misc.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declaration of global integers and strings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { len pos name.max old.number numnames numnames.old
+ nameptr lastname format.num.names cite.initials.old
+ cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old forward
+ multiresult dot brace.level
+ }
+
+STRINGS { s t u old.label field
+ aut1f aut1s aut1f.old aut1s.old
+ aut2 aut2.old
+ aut3 aut3.old
+ aut4 aut4.old
+ aut5 aut5.old
+ aut6 aut6.old
+ year.label.old
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Two functions that can be used for testing purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {test} { #0 }
+FUNCTION {dump.stack}
+{ "---- STACK {" cite$ * "} ----" * top$
+ stack$
+ "---- END STACK {" cite$ * "} ----" * top$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A small function that indicates whether index entries must be generated.
+% This is the only line that is different between \fname{apacite.bst} and
+% \fname{apacitex.bst} (and between \fname{apacann.bst} and
+% \fname{apacannx.bst}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%<bibstyle>FUNCTION {make.index} { #0 }
+%<xbibstyle>FUNCTION {make.index} { #1 }
+%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A small function that indicates whether the reference list must be
+% sorted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {unsorted} { #0 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Month macros. We use numbers, along with a \LaTeX{} function, which
+% translates them into words. This allows language-specific deviations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+MACRO {jan} {"{\APACmonth{01}}"}
+MACRO {feb} {"{\APACmonth{02}}"}
+MACRO {mar} {"{\APACmonth{03}}"}
+MACRO {apr} {"{\APACmonth{04}}"}
+MACRO {may} {"{\APACmonth{05}}"}
+MACRO {jun} {"{\APACmonth{06}}"}
+MACRO {jul} {"{\APACmonth{07}}"}
+MACRO {aug} {"{\APACmonth{08}}"}
+MACRO {sep} {"{\APACmonth{09}}"}
+MACRO {oct} {"{\APACmonth{10}}"}
+MACRO {nov} {"{\APACmonth{11}}"}
+MACRO {dec} {"{\APACmonth{12}}"}
+MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"}
+MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"}
+MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"}
+MACRO {fall} {"{\APACmonth{16}}"}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Logical ``not'': If the top element on the stack is $A$ then this function
+% does the following:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% push { #0 }
+% push { #1 }
+% \end{verbatim}
+% So now the first three elements of the stack are
+% \verb+{ #1 }+ \verb+{ #0 }+ $A$.
+% These are popped and subjected to ``if'':
+% If $A > 0$ then \verb+{ #0 }+ is executed, else \verb+{ #1 }+ is executed:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% if A > 0
+% then 0
+% else 1
+% \end{verbatim}
+% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
+% then this does
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% (if A then false else true)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% which is a logical ``not''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Logical 'and':
+% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
+% then this function does the following:
+% push 'skip$
+% push { pop$ #0 }
+% So now first 4 elements are
+% { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B
+% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
+% the stack):
+% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed:
+% if A > 0
+% then (B stays on top of stack)
+% else (B is popped and #0 is pushed)
+% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
+% then this does
+% (if A then B else false)
+% which is a logical 'and'.
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Logical 'or':
+% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
+% then this function does the following:
+% push { pop$ #1 }
+% push 'skip$
+% So now first 4 elements are
+% 'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B
+% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
+% the stack):
+% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed:
+% if A > 0
+% then (B is popped and #1 is pushed)
+% else (B stays on top of stack)
+% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
+% then this does
+% (if A then true else B)
+% which is a logical 'or'.
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ % issues warning if field is empty
+ % call with
+ % "field" field warning.if.empty
+ % Note that the first field must be between quotes
+ % because it is the fieldname for use in the warning message.
+ %
+FUNCTION {warning.if.empty}
+{ empty$
+ { "No " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty
+ %
+FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields}
+{ title empty$
+ type empty$ and
+ howpublished empty$ and
+ { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator
+ % not empty and not equal to each other)
+ % 0 if (editor or translator empty) or
+ % (editor = translator)
+ %
+FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans}
+{ translator empty$
+ { #0 }
+ { editor empty$
+ { #0 }
+ { translator editor =
+ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000
+
+FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str}
+{ duplicate$ #10 <
+ { "0000" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+ { duplicate$ #100 <
+ { "000" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+ { duplicate$ #1000 <
+ { "00" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+ { duplicate$ #10000 <
+ { "0" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+ { int.to.str$ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position
+% 2 if editor not in author position
+% 3 if not applicable: use key
+% 0 if unknown type
+
+FUNCTION {ref.type}
+{ type$ "article" =
+ type$ "magazine" =
+ type$ "newspaper" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "techreport" =
+ type$ "unpublished" =
+ type$ "misc" =
+ type$ "booklet" =
+ type$ "manual" =
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ { #1 }
+ { type$ "incollection" =
+ type$ "phdthesis" =
+ type$ "mastersthesis" =
+ type$ "lecture" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ type$ "inproceedings" =
+ type$ "conference" =
+ type$ "intechreport" =
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ { #2 }
+ { type$ "literal" =
+ { #3 }
+ { #0 }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type,
+% 0 otherwise
+
+FUNCTION {is.atype}
+{ type$ "article" =
+ type$ "magazine" =
+ type$ "newspaper" =
+ type$ "incollection" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ type$ "inproceedings" =
+ type$ "conference" =
+ type$ "intechreport" =
+ type$ "manual" =
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ { #1 }
+ { journal empty$ not
+ %
+ type$ "phdthesis" =
+ type$ "mastersthesis" =
+ or
+ %
+ and
+ { #1 }
+ { type$ "misc" =
+ type empty$ not and
+ { type "\bibmessage" =
+ type "\bibcomputerprogram" =
+ type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" =
+ type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" =
+ type "\bibcomputersoftware" =
+ type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" =
+ type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" =
+ type "\bibprogramminglanguage" =
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ or
+ { #1 }
+ { #0 }
+ if$
+ }
+ { #0 }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % connects two strings with connect string
+ % if one of them empty, then connect string
+ % is left out
+ %
+ % call with S1 S2 connectstring connect.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {connect.check}
+{ 'u :=
+ %
+ % if S2 = ""
+ %
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ %
+ % then remove S2
+ %
+ { pop$
+ %
+ % S1 is on top of stack.
+ % if it is empty, it is replaced by the empty string ""
+ %
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % else swap S1 and S2 so that S1 can be checked
+ %
+ { swap$
+ %
+ % if S1 is empty, remove S1 so that S2 is left on the
+ % stack and is the result is given
+ %
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ %
+ % now the real work starts:
+ % push the connect string "C"
+ % so that top of stack is "C" "S1" "S2"
+ % concatenate, so that top of stack is
+ % "S1+C" "S2"
+ %
+ { u *
+ %
+ % swap and concatenate
+ %
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
+ % if length of second is 4 or larger,
+ % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~")
+ % if length of second smaller than 4
+ %
+ % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect
+ % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2"
+ %
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 <
+ { "~" }
+ { "\ " }
+ if$
+ swap$ * *
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % connects two strings with comma (", ")
+ % if one of them is empty, the comma is left out
+ %
+ % call with S1 S2 connect.with.comma.check
+ % result: "S1, S2"
+ %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.comma.check}
+{ ", " connect.check }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % connects two strings with semicolon ("; ")
+ % if one of them is empty, semicolon is left out
+ %
+ % call with S1 S2 connect.with.semicolon.check
+ % result: "S1; S2"
+ %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check}
+{ "; " connect.check }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % connects two strings with colon (": ")
+ % if one of them is empty, colon is left out
+ %
+ % call with S1 S2 connect.with.colon.check
+ % result: "S1: S2"
+ %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check}
+{ ": " connect.check }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
+ %
+ % call with S1 S2 connect.with.space.check
+ % result: "S1\ S2"
+ %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check}
+{ "\ " connect.check }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % encloses string in pre- and postfix string
+ % call with
+ % prefix postfix S enclose.check
+ % delivers empty string if S empty
+ %
+FUNCTION {enclose.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ pop$
+ ""
+ }
+ { swap$ * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % emphasizes top of stack
+ % call with
+ % "string" emphasize.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {emphasize.check}
+{ "\Bem{" swap$
+ "}" swap$
+ enclose.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % brackets top of stack
+ % call with
+ % "string" bracket
+ %
+FUNCTION {bracket.check}
+{ "[" swap$
+ "]" swap$
+ enclose.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % parenthesizes top of stack
+ % call with
+ % "string" parenthesize
+ %
+FUNCTION {parenthesize.check}
+{ "(" swap$
+ ")" swap$
+ enclose.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % checks whether argument is "multiresult":
+ % whether it contains '-', '+', or ',' characters
+ % used with pages to check whether pp. or p. must be used
+ %
+FUNCTION {multi.result.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ %
+ % while (not multiresult) and (length(t) > 1) do
+ %
+ { multiresult not
+ t text.length$ #1 >
+ and
+ }
+ %
+ % if t(1-2) = "--" or t(1) = "+" or ","
+ % then multiresult = 1
+ % else t = t(2-last)
+ %
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ 's :=
+ "--" s =
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ 's :=
+ "+" s =
+ "," s =
+ or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e.,
+ % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate".
+ % Call with
+ % field is.bibcorporate
+ %
+FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate}
+{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove non-alphanumeric characters
+% and change to lower case .
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting.
+%
+% Call with
+% string remove.spaces
+%
+% E.g.,
+% "fine old day" remove.spaces
+% gives "fineoldday" .
+
+FUNCTION {remove.spaces}
+{ % Remove spaces from string.
+ % Works best if string only contains alphanumeric characters and spaces.
+ 's := % The original string
+ s text.length$ 'len := % Its length (no. of characters)
+ "" 't := % Initialize the transformed string
+ #0 'pos :=
+ %
+ % while (pos < len) do
+ %
+ { pos len < }
+ { pos #1 + 'pos :=
+ s pos #1 substring$ 'u :=
+ %
+ % u is the pos-th character in s
+ % If it is a space, move to next character,
+ % else copy character to output.
+ %
+ u " " =
+ 'skip$
+ { t u * 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ %
+ % Now push the result back on the stack
+ t
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % end block by writing what's left on the stack and
+ % starting a new line
+ %
+FUNCTION {output.end.block}
+{ write$
+ newline$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % end block by adding a period and writing what's left
+ % on the stack and starting a new line
+ %
+FUNCTION {output.dot.end.block}
+{ add.period$
+ output.end.block
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
+ % starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+ % whatever is more defined in \newblock
+ %
+FUNCTION {output.new.block}
+{ output.end.block
+ "\newblock" write$ newline$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
+ % starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+ % whatever is more defined in \newblock
+ %
+FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block}
+{ add.period$
+ output.new.block
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty.
+% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+% whatever is more defined in \newblock
+
+FUNCTION {start.new.block}
+{ "\unskip\ " write$ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$ newline$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Functions for sorting by author (or substitute),
+% year, title}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The ``classic'' versions are the ones with the von part
+% treated a in ``Beethoven, L. van'', whereas the nonclassic ones
+% have the new approach with the von part always before the last
+% name. The ``classic'' versions are not used in this version,
+% but I keep them defined so it's easy to switch, and perhaps
+% define an option in the future.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.name.format.classic} { "{ll{}}{ f{}}{ vv{}}{ jj{}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.format.classic} { "{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {author.name.format.classic} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {index.name.format.classic} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{vv{}}{ll{}}{ f{}}{ jj{}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{, jj}" }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (1).
+% Initialization.
+
+FUNCTION {init.initials}
+{ "yyyyy" 'aut1f.old :=
+ "yyyyy" 'aut1s.old :=
+ #0 'cite.initials.old :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (2).
+% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used.
+%
+% Call with
+% field update.no.initials
+
+FUNCTION {update.no.initials}
+{ 'field :=
+ field 'aut1f.old :=
+ field 'aut1s.old :=
+ #0 'cite.initials.old :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (3).
+
+FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut}
+{ %
+ % If last name is equal to previous last name
+ % but initials are different, then initials should
+ % be cited. If initials are also the same, initials
+ % should be cited if that is the case for the previous
+ % author .
+ %
+ aut1s aut1s.old =
+ { aut1f aut1f.old =
+ { cite.initials.old 'cite.initials := }
+ { #1 'cite.initials :=
+ aut1f 'aut1f.old :=
+ aut1s 'aut1s.old :=
+ cite.initials 'cite.initials.old :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different last name.
+ aut1f 'aut1f.old :=
+ aut1s 'aut1s.old :=
+ cite.initials 'cite.initials.old :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (4).
+% Call with
+% field check.add.initials.field
+
+FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field}
+{ 'field :=
+ field #1 cite.initials.name.format format.name$ 'aut1f :=
+ field #1 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut1s :=
+ %
+ % Now do the actual work
+ %
+ check.add.initials.aut
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (4).
+
+FUNCTION {check.add.initials}
+{ %
+ % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author.
+ % Initials are only relevant with author or editor.
+ %
+ firstkey empty$ not
+ { key empty$ not
+ { %
+ % Both key and firstkey are nonempty.
+ % Then, key is treated as last name of first author,
+ % and firstkey is treated as last name + initials of
+ % first author .
+ %
+ firstkey sortify remove.spaces 'aut1f :=
+ key sortify remove.spaces 'aut1s :=
+ check.add.initials.aut
+ }
+ { firstkey sortify remove.spaces update.no.initials }
+ if$
+ }
+ { key empty$ not
+ { key sortify remove.spaces update.no.initials }
+ { %
+ % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+ % to use as author.
+ %
+ % Check reference type:
+ % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+ % 2 then editor does not act as author
+ % 3 then key should have been used
+ % 0 then unknown reference type
+ ref.type #2 =
+ { %
+ % Format first author with and without initials
+ author empty$
+ { title.sort.label update.no.initials }
+ { author check.add.initials.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Format first author with and without initials
+ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { title.sort.label update.no.initials }
+ { editor check.add.initials.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author check.add.initials.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1).
+% Call with
+% field tentative.cite.num.names.field
+
+FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field}
+{ 'field :=
+ field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames #3 <
+ { %
+ % 1 or 2 names: always cite all of them.
+ numnames 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ numnames 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { numnames #6 <
+ { %
+ % 3-5 names: cite all of them the first time,
+ % only the first name later times
+ numnames 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { %
+ % 6 or more names: cite only the first name
+ #1 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2).
+
+FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names}
+{ %
+ % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author.
+ % Number of names is only relevant with author or editor.
+ %
+ firstkey empty$ not
+ {
+ #1 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { key empty$ not
+ {
+ #1 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { %
+ % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+ % to use as author.
+ %
+ % Check reference type:
+ % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+ % 2 then editor does not act as author
+ % 3 then key should have been used
+ % 0 then unknown reference type
+ ref.type #2 =
+ { %
+ % Format first author with and without initials
+ author empty$
+ {
+ #1 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { author tentative.cite.num.names.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Format first author with and without initials
+ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ {
+ #1 'cite.num.names.full :=
+ #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { editor tentative.cite.num.names.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author tentative.cite.num.names.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before
+% looping over entries.
+
+FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names}
+{ #0 'cite.num.names.old :=
+ #0 'numnames.old :=
+ "yyyy" 'year.label.old :=
+ #0 'add.to.year.old :=
+ "" 'aut1f.old :=
+ "" 'aut2.old :=
+ "" 'aut3.old :=
+ "" 'aut4.old :=
+ "" 'aut5.old :=
+ "" 'aut6.old :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Update "number of names to be cited" .
+
+FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names}
+{ cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.old :=
+ numnames 'numnames.old :=
+ year.label 'year.label.old :=
+ add.to.year 'add.to.year.old :=
+ aut1f 'aut1f.old :=
+ aut2 'aut2.old :=
+ aut3 'aut3.old :=
+ aut4 'aut4.old :=
+ aut5 'aut5.old :=
+ aut6 'aut6.old :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues
+% to determine number of authors that must be cited.
+% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables
+% have already been defined.
+
+FUNCTION {format.6.authors}
+{ %
+ % First author: with initials.
+ %
+ field #1 cite.initials.name.format format.name$ 'aut1f :=
+ %
+ % Second and later authors: without initials.
+ %
+ numnames #1 >
+ name.max #1 >
+ and
+ { %
+ % 2nd author
+ field #2 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut2 :=
+ %
+ numnames #2 >
+ name.max #2 >
+ and
+ { %
+ % 3nd author
+ field #3 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut3 :=
+ %
+ numnames #3 >
+ name.max #3 >
+ and
+ { %
+ % 4th author
+ field #4 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut4 :=
+ %
+ numnames #4 >
+ name.max #4 >
+ and
+ { %
+ % 5th author
+ field #5 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut5 :=
+ %
+ numnames #5 >
+ name.max #5 >
+ and
+ { %
+ % 6th author
+ field #6 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut6 :=
+ }
+ { %
+ % 5 authors: 6 is empty
+ %
+ "" 'aut6 :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % 4 authors: 5-6 are empty
+ %
+ "" 'aut5 :=
+ "" 'aut6 :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % 3 authors: 4-6 are empty
+ %
+ "" 'aut4 :=
+ "" 'aut5 :=
+ "" 'aut6 :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % 2 authors: 3-6 are empty
+ %
+ "" 'aut3 :=
+ "" 'aut4 :=
+ "" 'aut5 :=
+ "" 'aut6 :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Only 1 author: 2-6 are empty
+ %
+ "" 'aut2 :=
+ "" 'aut3 :=
+ "" 'aut4 :=
+ "" 'aut5 :=
+ "" 'aut6 :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
+% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable
+
+FUNCTION {change.add.to.year}
+{
+ forward #1 =
+ { %
+ % Moving forward: this add.to.year number must be 1 higher than
+ % previous.
+ %
+ add.to.year.old #0 >
+ { add.to.year.old #1 + 'add.to.year := }
+ { #2 'add.to.year := }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Moving backward: this add.to.year number must be 1 lower than
+ % previous.
+ %
+ add.to.year.old #1 - 'add.to.year :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
+% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors
+% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
+% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed
+% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary.
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2}
+{ %
+ numnames numnames.old =
+ { %
+ % Same number of names: ambiguity could arise. Check whether current
+ % and previous have the same author(s).
+ %
+ aut1f aut1f.old =
+ { %
+ % Same first author: if the second author is also the same or if
+ % there is only one author, a's and b's should be added.
+ %
+ aut2 aut2.old =
+ numnames #2 =
+ and
+ %
+ numnames #1 =
+ or
+ { %
+ % Same author(s): add to year.
+ %
+ change.add.to.year
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different second author: no ambiguity possible.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different first author: no ambiguity possible.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different number of names: no ambiguity possible.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2).
+% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors
+% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
+% same year.
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more}
+{ %
+ % Check whether current and previous have the same first author.
+ %
+ aut1f aut1f.old =
+ { %
+ % Same first author: check second author
+ %
+ aut2 aut2.old =
+ { %
+ % Same 1st & 2nd author: check 3rd.
+ %
+ aut3 aut3.old =
+ { %
+ % Same 1st-3rd authors: check 4th.
+ %
+ numnames.old #3 =
+ { numnames #3 =
+ { %
+ % Both current and previous have 3 authors, which are
+ % the same, so both have identical author-year
+ % combinations, so ambiguity should be resolved by
+ % a's and b's. Check whether more authors were
+ % necessary for previous one.
+ %
+ change.add.to.year
+ cite.num.names.short cite.num.names.old <
+ { cite.num.names.old
+ 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Previous has 3 authors, current has more, with same
+ % first 3, so at least 4 must be used for current to
+ % make a difference.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #4 <
+ { #4 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { numnames #3 =
+ { %
+ % Current has 3 authors, previous has more, with same
+ % first 3, so all 3 of current must be used.
+ %
+ numnames 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { %
+ % Same 1st-3rd author and both current and previous
+ % have at least 4 authors: check 4th.
+ %
+ aut4 aut4.old =
+ { %
+ % Same 1st-4th authors: check 5th.
+ %
+ numnames.old #4 =
+ { numnames #4 =
+ { %
+ % Both current and previous have 4 authors,
+ % which are the same, so both have
+ % identical author-year combinations, so
+ % ambiguity should be resolved by a's and
+ % b's. Check whether more authors were
+ % necessary for previous one.
+ %
+ change.add.to.year
+ cite.num.names.short cite.num.names.old <
+ { cite.num.names.old
+ 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Previous has 4 authors, current has more,
+ % with same first 4, so at least 5 must be
+ % used for current to make a difference.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #5 <
+ { #5 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { numnames #4 =
+ { %
+ % Current has 4 authors, previous has more,
+ % with same first 4, so all 4 of current
+ % must be used.
+ %
+ numnames 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { %
+ % Same 1st-4th author and both current and
+ % previous have at least 5 authors: check
+ % 5th.
+ %
+ aut5 aut5.old =
+ { %
+ % Same 1st-5th authors: check 6th.
+ %
+ numnames.old #5 =
+ { numnames #5 =
+ { %
+ % Both current and previous
+ % have 5 authors, which are the
+ % same, so both have identical
+ % author-year combinations, so
+ % ambiguity should be resolved
+ % by a's and b's. Check whether
+ % more authors were necessary
+ % for previous one.
+ %
+ change.add.to.year
+ cite.num.names.short
+ cite.num.names.old <
+ { cite.num.names.old
+ 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Previous has 5 authors,
+ % current has more, with same
+ % first 5, so at least 6 must
+ % be used for current to make
+ % a difference.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #6 <
+ { #6 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { numnames #5 =
+ { %
+ % Current has 5 authors,
+ % previous has more, with same
+ % first 5, so all 5 of current
+ % must be used.
+ %
+ numnames 'cite.num.names.short :=
+ }
+ { %
+ % Same 1st-5th author and both
+ % current and previous have at
+ % least 6 authors. If one has
+ % 6 authors and the other has
+ % more or the 6th is different,
+ % 6 should be used (which is
+ % the maximum).
+ %
+ numnames #6 >
+ numnames.old #6 =
+ and
+ %
+ numnames #6 =
+ numnames.old #6 >
+ and
+ %
+ or
+ %
+ aut6 aut6.old =
+ not
+ %
+ or
+ { #6 cite.num.names.short <
+ { #6
+ 'cite.num.names.short
+ :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % The first 6 authors are
+ % the same and either both
+ % have 6 or both have more.
+ % So for all practical
+ % purposes they have
+ % identical author-year
+ % combination, so ambiguity
+ % should be resolved by a's
+ % and b's. Check whether
+ % more authors were
+ % necessary for previous
+ % one.
+ %
+ change.add.to.year
+ cite.num.names.short
+ cite.num.names.old
+ <
+ { cite.num.names.old
+ 'cite.num.names.short
+ :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different 5th author: citing 5 authors is
+ % sufficient for this comparison.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #5 <
+ { #5 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different 4th author: citing 4 authors is
+ % sufficient for this comparison.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #4 <
+ { #4 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different 3rd author: citing 3 authors is sufficient for this
+ % comparison.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #3 <
+ { #3 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different 2nd author: citing 2 authors is sufficient for this
+ % comparison.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short #2 <
+ { #2 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different first author: no ambiguity, move to next entry.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3).
+% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author.
+%
+% Call with
+% field definitive.cite.num.names.field
+%
+% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored.
+% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user
+% should have added additional author names.
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field}
+{ 'field :=
+ field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ %
+ % Format authors
+ %
+ format.6.authors
+ %
+ % Now compare authors with authors of previous entry.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short numnames.old >
+ { %
+ % The previous entry has less authors than already defined
+ % necessary to be cited. No ambiguity is possible and we're ready.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Both previous and current entry have at least one author .
+ %
+ year.label year.label.old =
+ { %
+ % Same year label: possibly ambiguous citation.
+ %
+ % First check: current and/or previous have 1 or
+ % 2 authors.
+ %
+ numnames #3 <
+ numnames.old #3 <
+ or
+ %
+ { definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2 }
+ { definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different year label: everything's fine,
+ % move to next entry.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % If during the previous process the name maximum is exceeded
+ % (which was not checked), correct this. NOTE: If the name
+ % maximum is smaller than 6, this could lead to ambiguous
+ % citations if, e.g., the year and the first 5 authors are
+ % the same, but the 6th author is different.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.short name.max >
+ { name.max 'cite.num.names.short := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ % For a "full" cite, the number of names should always be at least
+ % as large as for a "short" cite.
+ %
+ cite.num.names.full cite.num.names.short <
+ { cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.full := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ % Update "old" variables for next entry.
+ %
+ update.cite.num.names
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4)
+% and especially whether a's and b's should be added.
+% This function is for the situation when author or editor
+% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is
+% used to cite the referenced work.
+%
+% Call with
+% formatted.field definitive.cite.no.names
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names}
+{ %
+ % The formatted field that acts as author is on top
+ % of the stack.
+ 'aut1f :=
+ "" 'aut2 :=
+ "" 'aut3 :=
+ "" 'aut4 :=
+ "" 'aut5 :=
+ "" 'aut6 :=
+ #1 'numnames :=
+ %
+ year.label year.label.old =
+ { %
+ % Same year label: possibly ambiguous citation.
+ %
+ definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2
+ }
+ { %
+ % Different year label: everything's fine,
+ % move to next entry.
+ %
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % Update "old" variables for next entry.
+ %
+ update.cite.num.names
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5).
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names}
+{ %
+ % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author.
+ % Number of names is only relevant with author or editor.
+ %
+ firstkey empty$ not
+ { firstkey sortify remove.spaces definitive.cite.no.names }
+ { key empty$ not
+ { key sortify remove.spaces definitive.cite.no.names }
+ { %
+ % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+ % to use as author.
+ %
+ % Check reference type:
+ % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+ % 2 then editor does not act as author
+ % 3 then key should have been used
+ % 0 then unknown reference type
+ ref.type #2 =
+ { %
+ % Format first author with and without initials
+ author empty$
+ { title.sort.label definitive.cite.no.names }
+ { author definitive.cite.num.names.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % Format first author with and without initials
+ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { title.sort.label definitive.cite.no.names }
+ { editor definitive.cite.num.names.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author definitive.cite.num.names.field }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b').
+
+FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label}
+{ %
+ % Implicit or explicit ``no date'' is put at the front
+ % (the year zero; years B.C. will imply complications)
+ % because these are possibly old works.
+ % ``In press'' is put at the end.
+ %
+ year empty$
+ { "0000" 'year.label := }
+ { year "\bibnodate" =
+ year "l" change.case$ "no date" = or
+ year "l" change.case$ "n.d." = or
+ { "0000" 'year.label := }
+ { year "\BIP" =
+ year "l" change.case$ "in press" = or
+ year "l" change.case$ "forthcoming" = or
+ { "9999" 'year.label := }
+ { % It is not checked whether the year field
+ % makes sense.
+ year sortify remove.spaces 'year.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % Push year sort label on the stack
+ year.label
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Give month and day when available.
+
+FUNCTION {month.number.day}
+{ month empty$
+ { "" }
+ { month sortify remove.spaces
+ %
+ % Add the day when available.
+ day empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "/" *
+ day sortify remove.spaces *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of
+% the stack.
+%
+% Call with
+% field make.name.sort.label
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
+
+FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label}
+{ %
+ % Author or editor-acting-as-author available.
+ % => Make tentative "short cite with initials" author
+ % label (L1) of one of the forms
+ % "Last1 F1"
+ % "Last1 F1 Last2"
+ % "Last1 F1 zzzz" ("zzzz" representing et al.)
+ % => If more than 2 'authors': make label (L2) for 2nd-6th authors
+ % of one of the forms
+ % "Last2 Last3"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6 zzzz"
+ %
+ % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms:
+ % "0000" (missing year or explicit 'no date')
+ % "9999" ('in press')
+ % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+ %
+ % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+ % to string, which gives title label (L4) .
+ %
+ % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+ % concatenation of
+ % L1
+ % " "
+ % L3
+ % " "
+ % L2
+ % " "
+ % L4
+ %
+ % The name field is on top of the stack.
+ 'field :=
+ %
+ % numnames is the total number of names contained in field
+ field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ %
+ % Format first author
+ field #1 sort.name.format format.name$
+ %
+ % Format the second author if there are two, or else "zzzz" = et al.
+ numnames #1 =
+ 'skip$
+ { numnames #2 =
+ { %
+ % Two authors: format second author
+ field #2 "{ll{}}" format.name$ 's :=
+ s "others" =
+ { " zzzz" * } % Add "et al."-substitute
+ { " " * s * } % Add second author
+ if$
+ }
+ { " zzzz" * } % 3 or more authors: add "et al."-substitute
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ make.tentative.year.sort.label * % Add year (L3).
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ %
+ % Now build up L2 if applicable
+ numnames #3 <
+ 'skip$
+ { %
+ % Treat last author slightly differently
+ numnames name.max >
+ { name.max 'lastname :=
+ " zzzz" % Push "et al."-substitute on stack
+ }
+ { numnames 'lastname :=
+ "" % Push empty string on stack
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % Names 2 to "last" - 1
+ "" % Push empty string on stack
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ { nameptr lastname < }
+ { % Add name no. nameptr
+ field nameptr "{ll{}}" format.name$ *
+ " " *
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ }
+ while$
+ %
+ % "Last" author
+ field lastname "{ll{}}" format.name$ 's :=
+ s "others" =
+ { "zzzz" * } % Add "et al."-substitute
+ { s * } % Add last author
+ if$
+ %
+ swap$ * % Add the previously formatted empty string or
+ % "et al."-substitute if there are many authors.
+ * % Add L2 to the earlier labels.
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number (L4).
+ sortify % Clean up and convert to lowercase
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ month.number.day * % Add month and day when available
+ 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
+% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and
+% editor are empty or unusable.
+%
+% Call with
+% field make.field.year.sort.label
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
+% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
+% beginning.
+
+FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label}
+{ %
+ % 'field' acts as first author (L1), subsequent authors
+ % are empty (L2).
+ %
+ % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms:
+ % "0000" (missing year or explicit 'no date')
+ % "9999" ('in press')
+ % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+ %
+ % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+ % to string, which gives title label (L4) .
+ %
+ % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+ % concatenation of
+ % L1
+ % " "
+ % L3
+ % " "
+ % L2
+ % " "
+ % L4
+ %
+ % 'field' is on top of the stack. It is already supposed to be cleaned
+ % (i.e., sortified and space-removed), so this is already L1.
+ " " * % Add spaces to L1
+ make.tentative.year.sort.label * % Add year (L3).
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ " " * % L2 is empty, add spaces
+ title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number (L4).
+ sortify % Clean up and convert to lowercase
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ month.number.day * % Add month and day when available
+ 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
+% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
+% author or editor may be used
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { %
+ % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+ % as author substitute .
+ title.sort.label make.field.year.sort.label
+ }
+ { editor make.name.sort.label }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author make.name.sort.label }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
+% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
+% author (but not editor) may be used
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { %
+ % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+ % as author substitute .
+ title.sort.label make.field.year.sort.label
+ }
+ { author make.name.sort.label }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some
+% preprocessing.
+
+FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label}
+{ %
+ %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ % General strategy:
+ %
+ % Ordinary situation: author or editor-acting-as-author
+ % available.
+ % => Make tentative "short cite with initials" author
+ % label (L1) of one of the forms
+ % "Last1 F1"
+ % "Last1 F1 Last2"
+ % "Last1 F1 zzzz" ("zzzz" representing et al.)
+ % => If more than 2 'authors': make label (L2) for 2nd-6th authors
+ % of one of the forms
+ % "Last2 Last3"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6"
+ % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6 zzzz"
+ % When key is available (overrules author and editor fields):
+ % => L1 = key, L2 = ""
+ % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as key
+ % and format as key.
+ %
+ % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms:
+ % "0000" (missing year or explicit 'no date')
+ % "9999" ('in press')
+ % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+ %
+ % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+ % to string, which gives title label (L4) .
+ %
+ % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+ % concatenation of
+ % L1
+ % " "
+ % L3
+ % " "
+ % L2
+ % " "
+ % L4
+ %
+ % This can then be sorted, from which it can be derived
+ % whether initials are necessary, how many names must
+ % be used for short and full citations, and whether "a"'s and
+ % "b"'s etc. are necessary behind the year labels.
+ %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % key and firstkey overrule author information
+ %
+ firstkey empty$ not
+ { key empty$ not
+ { %
+ % Both key and firstkey available:
+ % for sorting and checking initials, treat key as last
+ % name and firstkey as initials.
+ %
+ key sortify remove.spaces
+ " " *
+ firstkey sortify remove.spaces *
+ make.field.year.sort.label
+ }
+ { firstkey sortify remove.spaces make.field.year.sort.label }
+ if$
+ }
+ { key empty$ not
+ { key sortify remove.spaces make.field.year.sort.label }
+ { %
+ % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+ % to use as author.
+ %
+ % Check reference type:
+ % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+ % 2 then editor does not act as author
+ % 3 then key should have been used
+ % 0 then unknown reference type
+ ref.type
+ duplicate$ #1 =
+ { pop$
+ make.author.editor.sort.label
+ }
+ { duplicate$ #2 =
+ { pop$
+ make.author.sort.label
+ }
+ { #3 =
+ { "no key in " cite$ * warning$
+ make.author.editor.sort.label
+ }
+ { make.author.editor.sort.label }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make final sort label with names in field on top of
+% the stack.
+%
+% Call with
+% field make.definitive.name.sort.label
+%
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
+{ %
+ % Author or editor-acting-as-author available.
+ % => Make author-with-initials label (L1) of one of the forms
+ % "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... LastN FN"
+ % "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... Last6 F6 zzzz"
+ % (where N <= 6 is the total number of authors, and
+ % "zzzz" represents et al. if there are more than 6 authors)
+ % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as sort key.
+ %
+ % The name field is on top of the stack.
+ 'field :=
+ %
+ % numnames is the total number of names contained in field
+ field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ %
+ % If there are more than 6 authors, only 6 are mentioned.
+ numnames name.max >
+ { name.max 'format.num.names := }
+ { numnames 'format.num.names := }
+ if$
+ % Initialize stack with empty string
+ ""
+ %
+ % Cycle over authors.
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ { nameptr format.num.names < }
+ { % Format author and add spaces
+ field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ *
+ " " *
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ }
+ while$
+ % Format last author that must be formatted
+ field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ *
+ % Add et al. if necessary
+ nameptr numnames <
+ { " zzzz" * }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ sortify % Clean up and change case
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ year.label * % Add year
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ month.number.day * % Add month and day when available
+ 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called to make definitive sort label if author and
+% editor are empty or unusable.
+%
+% Call with
+% field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
+% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
+% beginning.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label}
+{ %
+ % 'field' acts as author (L1).
+ %
+ % Then format year label (L2) of one of the forms:
+ % "0000" (missing year or explicit `no date')
+ % "9999" (`in press')
+ % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+ %
+ % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+ % to string, which gives title label (L3) .
+ %
+ % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+ % concatenation of
+ % L1
+ % " "
+ % L2
+ % " "
+ % L3
+ %
+ % 'field' is on top of the stack. It is already supposed to be cleaned
+ % (i.e., sortified and space-removed), so this is already L1.
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ year.label * % Add year
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number
+ " " * % Add spaces
+ month.number.day * % Add month and day when available
+ 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor
+% may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { %
+ % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+ % as author substitute .
+ title.sort.label make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
+ }
+ { editor make.definitive.name.sort.label }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author make.definitive.name.sort.label }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor
+% may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { %
+ % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+ % as author substitute .
+ title.sort.label make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
+ }
+ { author make.definitive.name.sort.label }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make the final sort key. The general strategy is the following. The
+% ordinary situation is that an author or editor-acting-as-author
+% is available. In this case, make an author-with-initials label (L1)
+% of one of the forms
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... LastN FN"
+% "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... Last6 F6 zzzz"
+% \end{verbatim}
+% where $N \leq 6$ is the total number of authors, and ``|zzzz|''
+% represents et al.\ if there are more than 6 authors. If there is
+% no author, editor, and key, define the title or its substitute as a
+% sort key. Note that there are two spaces between last name and first
+% name and three spaces between authors.
+%
+% Next format a year label (L2) that is equal to the \fieldname{year}
+% field, unless that is missing or an explicit ``no date'', in which
+% case it is |0000| (and thus comes first) or if it is an explicit
+% in press (|\BIP|), in which case the year label is |9999| (and thus
+% it comes last). We don't use the \fieldname{originalyear} field here
+% yet. We add |/|\fieldname{month}|/|\fieldname{day} to the year label
+% when available.
+%
+% From earlier sorting of titles, we have the sorted title number. This
+% is converted to a string, which gives title label (L3).
+%
+% Then the final sorting label (|author.year.sort.label|) is a
+% concatenation of L1, L2, and L3, with four spaces between them. This
+% can then be sorted.
+%
+% If the reference type is 1, then possibly the editor acts as author;
+% if it is 2, then editor does not act as author; if it is 3, then the
+% \fieldname{key} field should have been used; if it is 0, this is an
+% unknown reference type.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key}
+{ ref.type #2 =
+ { make.definitive.author.sort.label }
+ { make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With the \pkgoption{unsorted} option, the reference listed is sorted
+% in the order in which \BibTeX{} reads the references, that is, in
+% order of first citation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ unsorted
+ { citeorder.sort.label 'sort.key$ := }
+ { author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to
+% teststring .
+%
+% Call with
+% teststring N string chop.word
+%
+% E.g.,
+% "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word
+% gives "fine old day"
+% and
+% "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word
+% gives "The fine old day".
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ { s }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string.
+%
+% Call with
+% string chop.articles
+
+FUNCTION {chop.articles}
+{ 's :=
+ "a " #2
+ "an " #3
+ "the " #4
+ s
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key.
+%
+% Call with
+% field format.sort.title
+%
+% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here!
+
+FUNCTION {format.sort.title}
+{ %
+ % Remove non-alphanumeric characters and change to lower case .
+ sortify
+ %
+ % Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from the front .
+ chop.articles #1 entry.max$ substring$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make title sorting label or substitute.
+
+FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
+{ title empty$
+ { text empty$
+ { type empty$
+ { howpublished empty$
+ { note empty$
+ { url empty$
+ { " " }
+ { url format.sort.title }
+ if$
+ }
+ { note format.sort.title }
+ if$
+ }
+ { howpublished format.sort.title }
+ if$
+ }
+ { type format.sort.title }
+ if$
+ }
+ { text format.sort.title }
+ if$
+ }
+ { title format.sort.title }
+ if$
+ remove.spaces
+ 'title.sort.label :=
+ title.sort.label 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make title number: rank number of sorted title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {make.title.number}
+{ title.sort.label old.label =
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A tie: old and new label are the same.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ old.number 'title.number :=
+ }
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The usual situation: titles are different.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ old.number #1 + 'title.number :=
+ title.number 'old.number :=
+ title.sort.label 'old.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Order in which reference was first cited (integer and conversion to string).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {make.citeorder.number}
+{ old.number #1 + 'cite.order :=
+ cite.order 'old.number :=
+ cite.order conv.int.to.str 'citeorder.sort.label :=
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Name formatting}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% In order to support removal of spaces between the initials,
+% we have to split the formatting of the constituent parts,
+% because something like |"{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}"| removes
+% the hyphens between initials as well. The ``classic'' versions
+% treat the von part differently. They were used in pervious versions
+% of \pkg{apacite}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+FUNCTION {last.part.name.format.classic} { "{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format.classic} { "{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% text.length$ views "special characters" as 1, whereas
+% substring$ looks at the number of actual characters.
+% So
+% "{\TeX}" text.length$ = 1
+% "{TeX}" text.length$ = 3
+% but
+% "{\TeX}" #4 #2 substring$ = "eX"
+% "{TeX}" #4 #2 substring$ = "X}"
+% Therefore, it is convenient to have a string length function
+% that uses the same numbering as substring$:
+% "{\TeX}" string.length = 6
+% "{TeX}" string.length = 5
+
+FUNCTION {string.length}
+{ #0 'pos :=
+ % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty,
+ % add 1 to the string length.
+ % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true.
+ { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not }
+ { pos #1 + 'pos := }
+ while$
+ pop$ pos
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Replace ". " and ".~" with "\BPBI " (period between initials)
+% and ".-" with "\BHBI " (hyphen between initials)
+% but only at brace level 0.
+
+FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens}
+{ 's := % The original string
+ s string.length 'len := % Its length (no. of characters)
+ "" 't := % Initialize the transformed string
+ #1 'pos :=
+ #0 'brace.level :=
+ %
+ % while (pos < len) do
+ %
+ { pos len < }
+ { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0
+ brace.level #0 =
+ {
+ % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-".
+ % If so, replace and shift two positions.
+ s pos #2 substring$ ". " =
+ s pos #2 substring$ ".~" = or
+ { t "\BPBI " * 't :=
+ pos #2 + 'pos :=
+ }
+ { s pos #2 substring$ ".-" =
+ { t "\BHBI " * 't :=
+ pos #2 + 'pos :=
+ }
+ { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position
+ t s pos #1 substring$ * 't :=
+ % Check whether we need to increase brace level.
+ % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+ % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+ % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems.
+ s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+ { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ pos #1 + 'pos :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally
+ t s pos #1 substring$ * 't :=
+ % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level.
+ % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+ % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+ s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+ { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+ { s pos #1 substring$ "}" =
+ { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ pos #1 + 'pos :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ %
+ pos len =
+ { % Last character, copy
+ t s pos #1 substring$ * 't :=
+ }
+ { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-"
+ % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it.
+ % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-".
+ s len #1 - #2 substring$
+ % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t
+ t text.length$ 'len := % Length of t (no. of characters)
+ t #1 len #6 - substring$
+ % Concatenate and assign to t
+ swap$ * 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % Now push the result back on the stack
+ t
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format only the initials of a name, retaining hyphens, but
+% removing spaces between first names. So "Jean Pierre" becomes "J.P."
+% and "Jean-Pierre" becomes "J.-P.".
+
+FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen}
+{ % Format initials.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ %
+ % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces
+ % and hyphens.
+ initials.with.space.name.format format.name$
+ transform.spaces.and.hyphens
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.last.part.name}
+{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format,
+ % as part of more complicated things.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.last.part.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.last.part.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ last.part.name.format format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+ % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ von.last.junior.name.format format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+ % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.von.junior.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.von.junior.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ von.junior.name.format format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name}
+{ % Format a name for citing with initials.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.cite.initials.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.cite.initials.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ %
+ % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+ % and push on the stack.
+ one.complete.name.format format.name$
+ %
+ % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+ duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+ %
+ % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack.
+ swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+ %
+ % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty).
+ "~" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.author.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the reference list.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.author.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.author.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ %
+ % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+ % and push on the stack.
+ one.complete.name.format format.name$
+ %
+ % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack.
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name
+ %
+ % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+ swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+ %
+ % Connect with last name.
+ connect.with.comma.check
+ %
+ % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials.
+ swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.name}
+{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.editor.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.editor.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ %
+ format.cite.initials.name
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.index.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the index.
+ % Call with
+ % field authornumber format.index.name
+ % e.g.
+ % author #1 format.index.name
+ % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+ %
+ format.author.name
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% CITATION LABELS %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{comma.between.two}
+% \begin{macro}{comma.between.names}
+% \begin{macro}{comma.before.last}
+% \begin{macro}{dots.before.last}
+% \begin{macro}{and.before.last}
+% \begin{macro}{et.al.string.cite}
+% \begin{macro}{et.al.string}
+% \begin{macro}{et.al.string.period}
+% Some macro strings about commas etc.\ between authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT {}" }
+
+FUNCTION {comma.between.names} { ", " }
+
+FUNCTION {comma.before.last} { "\BCBL {}" }
+
+FUNCTION {dots.before.last} { "\BDBL {}" }
+
+FUNCTION {and.before.last} { "\ \BBA {} " }
+
+FUNCTION {et.al.string.cite} { "\ \protect \BOthers {.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers {.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod {.}" }
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Add author index entry when desired.
+% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the
+% contents of the relevant author field.
+% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the
+% number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is
+% #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.)
+% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written
+% to the .bbl file.
+
+FUNCTION {add.name.index}
+{ %
+ %
+ make.index
+ { "%" * write$ newline$
+ % Check for corporate author
+ field is.bibcorporate
+ { "\corporateAX{" }
+ { "\AX{" }
+ if$
+ write$
+ field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ sortify write$ newline$
+ "@" write$
+ field nameptr format.index.name
+ "}%" * write$ newline$
+ }
+ { "%" * write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
+% Field is on top of the stack.
+%
+% Call with
+% format.num.names field make.name.cite.label
+
+FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
+{ 'field :=
+ 'format.num.names :=
+ %
+ field num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames is the total number of names
+ % contained in field
+ %
+ % It is implicit in the APA manual that if "et al." would refer
+ % to exactly one author, then this author should be named
+ % instead of "et al."
+ %
+ format.num.names numnames #1 - =
+ { numnames 'format.num.names := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ % Format first author: with or without initials
+ %
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ cite.initials #1 =
+ { field nameptr format.cite.initials.name }
+ { field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ }
+ if$
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ %
+ numnames #1 =
+ 'skip$
+ { format.num.names #1 =
+ { %
+ % First author et al.
+ %
+ et.al.string.cite write$
+ }
+ { numnames #2 =
+ { %
+ % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
+ % Format second author.
+ %
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ 's :=
+ %
+ % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others".
+ % If so, insert "et al." string.
+ %
+ s "others" =
+ { et.al.string.cite write$ } % First et al.
+ { %
+ % First \& Second
+ %
+ and.before.last write$
+ s
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited
+ %
+ % for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do
+ %
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ { nameptr format.num.names < }
+ { %
+ % Put comma between consecutive authors
+ %
+ comma.between.names write$
+ %
+ % Format and add next author
+ %
+ field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ %
+ % Move to next author
+ %
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ }
+ while$
+ %
+ % nameptr = format.num.names
+ % Format this author.
+ %
+ field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ 's :=
+ %
+ format.num.names numnames =
+ { %
+ % This is also the last author. Add (optional) comma.
+ %
+ comma.before.last write$
+ %
+ % Check if this author is explicit "others".
+ % If so, insert "et al." string.
+ %
+ s "others" =
+ { et.al.string.cite write$ }
+ { and.before.last write$
+ s
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % This is not the last author.
+ % Add comma, author name, and "et al."
+ %
+ comma.between.names write$
+ s
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ %
+ comma.before.last et.al.string.cite * write$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key
+% is available.
+
+FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
+{ %
+ % Formatting: check if formatted as article title or
+ % as book title, and insert this formatting.
+ %
+ is.atype
+ { "\APACciteatitle {" }
+ { "\APACcitebtitle {" }
+ if$
+ %
+ title empty$
+ { text empty$
+ { type empty$
+ { howpublished empty$
+ { note empty$
+ { url empty$
+ { cite$ }
+ { url }
+ if$
+ }
+ { note }
+ if$
+ }
+ { howpublished }
+ if$
+ }
+ { type }
+ if$
+ }
+ { text }
+ if$
+ }
+ { title }
+ if$
+ %
+ % Connect with formatting.
+ %
+ * "}" *
+ %
+ % Write to output
+ %
+ write$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { %
+ % No author or editor:
+ % Use title or other description as citation label.
+ %
+ make.title.cite.label
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ make.title.cite.label
+ }
+ { cite.num.names.full editor make.name.cite.label
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ cite.num.names.short editor make.name.cite.label
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { cite.num.names.full author make.name.cite.label
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ cite.num.names.short author make.name.cite.label
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { %
+ % No author:
+ % Use title or other description as citation label.
+ %
+ make.title.cite.label
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ make.title.cite.label
+ }
+ { cite.num.names.full author make.name.cite.label
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ cite.num.names.short author make.name.cite.label
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement}
+{ %
+ % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+ %
+ add.to.year #0 =
+ { "" }
+ { "{\protect "
+ year empty$
+ { "\BCntND " * }
+ { year "\bibnodate" =
+ year "l" change.case$ "no date" = or
+ year "l" change.case$ "n.d." = or
+ { "\BCntND " * }
+ { year "\BIP" =
+ year "l" change.case$ "in press" = or
+ year "l" change.case$ "forthcoming" = or
+ { "\BCntIP " * }
+ { "\BCnt " * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * add.to.year int.to.str$ * "}}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate.
+
+FUNCTION {protect.year}
+{ year empty$
+ { "{\protect \bibnodate {}}" }
+ { year "\bibnodate" =
+ year "l" change.case$ "no date" = or
+ year "l" change.case$ "n.d." = or
+ { "{\protect \bibnodate {}}" }
+ { year "\BIP" =
+ year "l" change.case$ "in press" = or
+ year "l" change.case$ "forthcoming" = or
+ { "{\protect \BIP {}}" }
+ { year }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make year label that is used for citations in text.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label}
+{ "{\protect \APACyear {"
+ originalyear empty$
+ { protect.year }
+ { originalyear "\bibnodate" = % date of original publication unknown
+ originalyear "l" change.case$ "no date" = or
+ originalyear "l" change.case$ "n.d." = or
+ { translator empty$
+ { protect.year }
+ { "{\protect \BTRANSL {}}~" protect.year * }
+ if$
+ }
+ { year empty$
+ { originalyear "/{\protect \bibnodate {}}" * } % 1923/n.d.
+ { originalyear year =
+ { protect.year }
+ { originalyear "/" * protect.year * } % 1923/1961
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ * "}}%" * write$ newline$
+ %
+ % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+ %
+ "{\protect \APACexlab {" "}}"
+ make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make citation labels:
+% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author
+% available) for first citation;
+% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent
+% citations;
+% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b"
+% etc. addendum when necessary.
+
+FUNCTION {make.cite.labels}
+{ newline$
+ %
+ % Write a few lines for testing purposes.
+ %
+ test
+ { "\bibitem [] {} \fullciteA {" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$
+ "\bibitem [] {} \citeA {" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ "\bibitem [\protect \citeauthoryear {%" write$ newline$
+ %
+ % When key or firstkey is available, this takes precedence.
+ %
+ firstkey empty$ not
+ { %
+ % Full cite: firstkey.
+ %
+ firstkey write$
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ %
+ % Short cite: if key is not empty and cite.initials is 0,
+ % then key, else firstkey.
+ %
+ cite.initials #0 =
+ key empty$ not
+ and
+ { key }
+ { firstkey }
+ if$
+ write$
+ }
+ { key empty$ not
+ { %
+ % No firstkey, but key available:
+ % Both full and short labels are key.
+ %
+ key write$
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ key write$
+ }
+ { % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+ % to use as author.
+ %
+ % Check reference type:
+ % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+ % 2 then editor does not act as author
+ % 3 then key should have been used
+ % 0 then unknown reference type
+ ref.type #2 =
+ { make.author.cite.label }
+ { make.author.editor.cite.label }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "}{%" write$ newline$
+ %
+ % Make year label that's used for citations
+ %
+ make.definitive.year.label write$
+ "}]{%" write$ newline$
+ cite$ write$
+ "} " write$ newline$
+ % author.year.sort.label write$ newline$ % for testing purposes
+ % year.label write$ newline$ % for testing purposes
+ %
+ % If the item is used in a meta-analysis, indicate this with
+ % a star.
+ %
+ "\APACinsertmetastar {%" write$ newline$
+ cite$ write$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix.
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {editor.postfix}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 >
+ { "(\BEDS)" }
+ { "(\BED)" }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 >
+ { "(\BEDS{} \BAnd{} \BTRANSS)" }
+ { "(\BED{} \BAnd{} \BTRANS)" }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % "(Trans.)" postfix
+ % translator must not be empty
+ %
+FUNCTION {trans.postfix}
+{ translator num.names$ #1 >
+ { "(\BTRANSS)" }
+ { "(\BTRANS)" }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for the
+% reference list, according to APA 5th ed. rules.
+%
+% Call with
+% dot field authors.editors.reflist.apa5
+% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors
+% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and
+% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end
+% the formatting.
+
+FUNCTION {authors.editors.reflist.apa5}
+{ 'field :=
+ 'dot :=
+ %
+ field num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames is the total number of names
+ % contained in field
+ numnames 'format.num.names := % Format all authors
+ format.num.names name.max > % Unless this exceeds the maximum of 6.
+ { dot
+ { name.max 'format.num.names := } % Format 6 authors
+ { cite.num.names.full 'format.num.names := } % Format 1 editor
+ if$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ % Enclose authors in APACrefauthors environment to allow crude style
+ % options in \LaTeX.
+ "\begin{APACrefauthors}%"
+ write$ newline$
+ %
+ % It is kind of explicit in the APA manual that if "et al." would
+ % refer to exactly one author (the 7th), then this author should
+ % still be replaced by "et al.", unlike with citations.
+ % So format.num.names is not adapted.
+ %
+ % Format first author
+ %
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ field nameptr format.author.name
+ %
+ % Add period if required and if this is the only author.
+ %
+ numnames #1 =
+ dot
+ and
+ { add.period$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ %
+ numnames #1 =
+ 'skip$
+ { format.num.names #1 =
+ { %
+ % First author et al.
+ %
+ comma.between.two
+ %
+ % Add period if required.
+ %
+ dot
+ { et.al.string.period * }
+ { et.al.string * }
+ if$
+ write$
+ }
+ { numnames #2 =
+ { %
+ % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
+ %
+ comma.between.two write$
+ %
+ % Format second author.
+ %
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ field nameptr format.author.name 's :=
+ %
+ % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others".
+ % If so, insert "et al." string.
+ %
+ s "others" =
+ { %
+ % First et al.
+ % Add period if required.
+ %
+ dot
+ { et.al.string.period }
+ { et.al.string }
+ if$
+ write$
+ }
+ { %
+ % First \& Second
+ %
+ and.before.last write$
+ %
+ % Add period if required.
+ %
+ dot
+ { s add.period$ }
+ { s }
+ if$
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited
+ %
+ % for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do
+ %
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ { nameptr format.num.names < }
+ { %
+ % Put comma between consecutive authors
+ %
+ comma.between.names write$
+ %
+ % Format and add next author
+ %
+ field nameptr format.author.name
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ %
+ % Move to next author
+ %
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ }
+ while$
+ %
+ % nameptr = format.num.names
+ % Format this author.
+ %
+ field nameptr format.author.name 's :=
+ %
+ format.num.names numnames =
+ { %
+ % This is also the last author. Add (optional) comma.
+ %
+ comma.before.last write$
+ %
+ % Check if this author is explicit "others".
+ % If so, insert "et al." string.
+ %
+ s "others" =
+ { %
+ % Add period if required.
+ %
+ dot
+ { et.al.string.period }
+ { et.al.string }
+ if$
+ write$
+ }
+ { and.before.last write$
+ %
+ % Add period if required.
+ %
+ dot
+ { s add.period$ }
+ { s }
+ if$
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % This is not the last author.
+ % Add comma, author name, and "et al."
+ %
+ comma.between.names write$
+ s
+ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired.
+ %
+ comma.before.last
+ %
+ % Add period if required.
+ %
+ dot
+ { et.al.string.period * }
+ { et.al.string * }
+ if$
+ write$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % End APACrefauthors environment.
+ "\end{APACrefauthors}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+%
+% \begin{macro}{authors.reflist.apa6}
+% Format authors for the reference list according to the rules of the
+% 6th edition of the \emph{APA Manual}, i.e., if there are more than 7
+% authors, list the first 6, then dots, and then the last.
+% Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% dot field authors.reflist.apa6
+% \end{verbatim}
+% where \texttt{field} is the field (string) that contains the authors
+% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and \texttt{dot}
+% is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end the formatting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {authors.reflist.apa6}
+{ 'field :=
+ 'dot :=
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \texttt{numnames} is the total number of names in the \texttt{field}.
+% \texttt{format.num.names} is the number of names to be formatted,
+% which is \texttt{numnames} or 7, whichever is smaller
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames #7 >
+ { #7 'format.num.names := }
+ { numnames 'format.num.names := }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Enclose authors in \envirname{APACrefauthors} environment to allow crude
+% style options in \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ "\begin{APACrefauthors}%"
+ write$ newline$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format first author.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ field nameptr format.author.name
+ numnames #1 =
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Add period if required and if this is the only author, and add index
+% entry when desired.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { dot
+ { add.period$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ add.name.index
+ }
+ { add.name.index
+ numnames #2 =
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Optional comma between two authors; format second author and store in
+% \texttt{s}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { comma.between.two write$
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ field nameptr format.author.name 's :=
+ s "others" =
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Second author is explicit ``|others|''. Therefore, insert
+% ``et al.'' string. Note that this does not correspond with the
+% 6th edition of the \emph{APA manual}, so give a warning here,
+% but after that format the authors as in the 5th edition:
+% ``First, et al.''. Add a period if required.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { "`others' not consistent with 6th ed. of the APA Manual"
+ warning$
+ dot
+ { et.al.string.period }
+ { et.al.string }
+ if$
+ write$ newline$
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There really are two authors: ``First, \& Second'', with a period
+% after the latter if required.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { and.before.last write$
+ dot
+ { s add.period$ }
+ { s }
+ if$
+ add.name.index
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Three or more authors, Format all the ones that need to be formatted,
+% except the last one, which needs special treatment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { %% for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ { nameptr format.num.names < }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Put comma between consecutive authors and format and add the next
+% author and the optional index entry, and increase the loop variable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { comma.between.names write$
+ field nameptr format.author.name
+ add.name.index
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ }
+ while$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format the last author. If all authors are formatted, add an
+% ampersand; otherwise, add dots (new in 6th ed.).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ field numnames format.author.name 's :=
+ format.num.names numnames =
+ { comma.before.last write$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check if this author is an explicit ``|others|''. If so, insert
+% ``et al.'' string. Note that this does not correspond with the
+% 6th edition of the \emph{APA manual}, so give a warning here. Add
+% a period if required.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ s "others" =
+ { "`others' not consistent with 6th ed. of the APA "
+ "Manual" *
+ warning$
+ dot
+ { et.al.string.period }
+ { et.al.string }
+ if$
+ write$
+ }
+ { and.before.last write$
+ dot
+ { s add.period$ }
+ { s }
+ if$
+ add.name.index
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We skipped some authors. Indicate by dots.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { dots.before.last write$
+ s
+ add.name.index
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End \envirname{APACrefauthors} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ "\end{APACrefauthors}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{format.author.names}
+% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for the reference list.
+% Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% dot field format.author.names
+% \end{verbatim}
+% where \texttt{field} is the field (string) that contains the authors
+% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and \texttt{dot}
+% is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end the formatting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.author.names}
+{ 'field :=
+ 'dot :=
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is a temporary trick, which needs to be cleaned up. We
+% now check whether |dot| is 1, which indicates it's an author
+% field. If it's not, it's an editor field. In the former case,
+% if there are more than 7 authors, the first 6 plus dots plus
+% the last author must be given, whereas in the latter case,
+% only the first and ``et al.'' needs to be given. The latter
+% is the same behavior as in the 5th edition, so we use that
+% function, whereas we use an adapted function for authors in
+% the 6th edition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ dot
+ { dot field authors.reflist.apa6 }
+ { dot field authors.editors.reflist.apa5 }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that
+% the author field is not empty.
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ #1 author format.author.names }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as
+% authors (such as reference to entire edited book)
+%
+% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.).
+% or
+% Letheridge, S. (Ed.). (if only 1 editor)
+%
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors}
+{ #0 editor format.author.names
+ "\ " editor.postfix * add.period$ write$ newline$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also
+% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire
+% edited book of translated articles)
+%
+% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.).
+% or
+% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.). (if only 1 editor)
+%
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors}
+{ #0 editor format.author.names
+ "\ " editor.trans.postfix * add.period$ write$ newline$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format a list of names with the initials before the
+% last names (i.e., names in the editor position),
+% commas between names (not between 2),
+% and ampersand (\&) before last name.
+% These names are not put in the author index.
+%
+% Call with
+% field format.editor.names
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
+{ 'field :=
+ %
+ field num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames is the total number of names
+ % contained in field
+ numnames 'format.num.names := % Format all authors
+ format.num.names name.max > % Unless this exceeds the maximum of 6.
+ { #1 'format.num.names := } % Then it becomes 1 (First et al.)
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ % Format first editor
+ %
+ field #1 format.editor.name
+ %
+ numnames #1 =
+ 'skip$
+ { format.num.names #1 =
+ { et.al.string * } % First editor et al., no comma.
+ { numnames #2 =
+ { %
+ % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
+ % No comma. Format second editor.
+ %
+ field #2 format.editor.name 's :=
+ %
+ % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others".
+ % If so, insert "et al." string.
+ %
+ s "others" =
+ { et.al.string * } % First et al.
+ { and.before.last * s * } % First \& Second
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited
+ %
+ % for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do
+ %
+ #2 'nameptr :=
+ { nameptr format.num.names < }
+ { %
+ % Put comma between consecutive editors
+ %
+ comma.between.names *
+ %
+ % Format and add next editor
+ %
+ field nameptr format.editor.name *
+ %
+ % Move to next editor
+ %
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ }
+ while$
+ %
+ % nameptr = format.num.names
+ % Format this editor.
+ %
+ field nameptr format.editor.name 's :=
+ %
+ format.num.names numnames =
+ { %
+ % This is also the last editor. Add (optional) comma.
+ %
+ comma.before.last *
+ %
+ % Check if this editor is explicit "others".
+ % If so, insert "et al." string.
+ %
+ s "others" =
+ { et.al.string * }
+ { and.before.last * s * }
+ if$
+ }
+ { %
+ % This is not the last editor.
+ % Add comma, editor name, and "et al."
+ %
+ comma.between.names * s *
+ comma.before.last * et.al.string *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format editors in case editors do not act as authors
+ % (such as reference to chapter in edited book)
+ %
+ % L. W. Poon (Ed.) (1 editor)
+ % or
+ % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Eds.) (2 editors)
+ % or
+ % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Eds.) (>2 editors)
+ %
+ % editor must not be empty
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line}
+{ editor format.editor.names
+ editor.postfix connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format editors in case editors are also translators
+ % and do not act as authors
+ % (such as reference to chapter in edited book
+ % of translated articles)
+ %
+ % L. W. Poon (Ed. and Trans.) (1 editor)
+ % or
+ % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Eds. and Trans.) (2 editors)
+ % or
+ % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Eds. and Trans.) (>2 editors)
+ %
+ % editor must not be empty
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line}
+{ editor format.editor.names
+ editor.trans.postfix connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format translators in case translators act as editors
+ % (such as reference to chapter in translated book)
+ %
+ % L. W. Poon (Trans.) (1 translator)
+ % or
+ % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Trans.) (2 translators)
+ % or
+ % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Trans.) (>2 translators)
+ %
+ % translator must not be empty
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line}
+{ translator format.editor.names
+ trans.postfix connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format translators in case translator does not act as editor
+ % (such as reference to translated book)
+ %
+ % L. Solotaroff, Trans.
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.translators.in.paren.check}
+{ translator empty$
+ { "" }
+ { translator format.editor.names
+ translator num.names$ #1 >
+ { ", \BTRANSS{}" * }
+ { ", \BTRANS{}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format editors and translators in case neither act as editor
+ % (such as reference to edited or translated book with a
+ % a single author)
+ %
+ % L. Solotaroff, Ed.
+ % L. Solotaroff, Ed. \& Trans.
+ % L. Solotaroff, Trans.
+ % L. Solotaroff, Ed. \& S. Prokofieff, Trans.
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check}
+{ editor empty$
+ { translator empty$
+ { "" }
+ { translator format.editor.names
+ translator num.names$ #1 >
+ { ", \BTRANSS{}" * }
+ { ", \BTRANS{}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.editor.names
+ editor num.names$ #1 >
+ { ", \BEDS{}" * }
+ { ", \BED{}" * }
+ if$
+ translator empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { editor translator =
+ { editor num.names$ #1 >
+ { " \BAnd{} \BTRANSS" * }
+ { " \BAnd{} \BTRANS" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ { " \BAnd{} " *
+ translator format.editor.names *
+ translator num.names$ #1 >
+ { ", \BTRANSS{}" * }
+ { ", \BTRANS{}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % translator of article
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.atrans.check}
+{ format.translators.in.paren.check parenthesize.check }
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format "In editor (Ed.), "
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.in.editors}
+{ "\BIn{} "
+ editor empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { format.editors.in.line * ", " * }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format "In translator (Trans.),"
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.in.trans}
+{ "\BIn{} "
+ translator empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { format.translators.in.line * ", " * }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)"
+ % or "In editor (Ed.)" if editor not equal to translator
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans}
+{ "\BIn{} "
+ editor empty$
+ { translator empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { format.translators.in.line * ", " * }
+ if$
+ }
+ { translator empty$
+ { format.editors.in.line * }
+ { editor translator =
+ { format.editors.trans.in.line * }
+ { format.editors.in.line * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% DATE %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which
+% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
+% Extra label can be used for
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1>
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2>
+
+FUNCTION {format.year.check}
+{ "\APACrefYear{"
+ protect.year *
+ %
+ % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+ %
+ make.definitive.year.supplement *
+ "}" *
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Formats year (+ extra label) + month + day between
+% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
+% Extra label can be used for
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7) <article 1>
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2>
+
+FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check}
+{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{"
+ protect.year *
+ %
+ % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+ %
+ make.definitive.year.supplement *
+ "}{" *
+ %
+ % Add month and day when present.
+ %
+ month empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { month * }
+ if$
+ "}{" *
+ day empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { day * }
+ if$
+ "}" *
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Title formatting}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \begin{macro}{format.atitle.no.dot}
+% Title of article in journal or book, without finishing period.
+% The field must be on top of stack (so \fieldname{englishtitle} can
+% be handled as well).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot}
+{ "{\BBOQ}" swap$
+ "{\BBCQ}" swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$
+ % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+ "\APACrefatitle {" swap$ * "} {" * swap$
+ "t" change.case$
+ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ enclose.check
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{format.atitle.dot}
+% Title of article in journal or book, with finishing period.
+% The field must be on top of stack (so \fieldname{englishtitle} can
+% be handled as well).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot}
+{ "{\BBOQ}" swap$
+ "{\BBCQ}" swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$
+ % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+ "\APACrefatitle {" swap$ * "} {" * swap$
+ "t" change.case$
+ * "}" * add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ enclose.check
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{format.atitle.connect}
+% Title of article in journal or book. The field must be on top of stack.
+% The second element on stack must be connected: if that is empty, then
+% |format.atitle.dot|, else |format.atitle.no.dot|, connect, and add a
+% period.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ format.atitle.dot
+ }
+ { swap$
+ format.atitle.no.dot
+ swap$ connect.with.space.check
+ add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{format.btitle.no.dot}
+% Title of a book or so, without period. Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% field format.btitle.no.dot
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ ""
+ }
+ { duplicate$
+ % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+ "\APACrefbtitle {" swap$ * "} {" * swap$
+ "t" change.case$
+ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{format.btitle.dot}
+% Title of book or so, with period. Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% field format.btitle.dot
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ ""
+ }
+ { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title of book and similar
+ % field must be on top of stack
+ % second element on stack must be connected:
+ % if that is empty, then btitle.dot
+ % else btitle.no.dot, connect, and add period
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ format.btitle.dot
+ }
+ { swap$
+ format.btitle.no.dot
+ swap$ connect.with.space.check
+ add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title of book and similar
+ % field must be on top of stack
+ % second element on stack must be connected
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ format.btitle.no.dot
+ }
+ { swap$
+ format.btitle.no.dot
+ swap$ connect.with.space.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check}
+{ englishtitle empty$
+ { "" }
+ { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+ "\APACrefaetitle {" englishtitle * "} {" *
+ englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.betitle.check}
+{ englishtitle empty$
+ { "" }
+ { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+ "\APACrefbetitle {" englishtitle * "} {" *
+ englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format type (of article, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.atype.check}
+{ type bracket.check }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+ title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format title, englishtitle, and type
+ % (of article, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+ format.atype.check connect.with.space.check
+ title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format title, englishtitle,
+ % and translator (of article, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+ format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check
+ title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format title, englishtitle, type,
+ % and translator (of article, etc.)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+ format.atype.check connect.with.space.check
+ format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check
+ title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% JOURNAL FORMATTING %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format journal, volume, number and pages
+ % call with
+ % formatted.pages format.journal.vol.num.pages.check
+ %
+FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check }
+{ "journal" journal warning.if.empty
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ journal empty$ and
+ volume empty$ and
+ number empty$ and
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check
+ "}{" * volume "" connect.check
+ "}{" * number "" connect.check
+ "}{" * swap$ "" connect.check
+ "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% BOOK VOLUME, EDITION, AND OTHER SUPPLEMENTARY INFO %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % volume of book, checks whether
+ % "Volume" or "Volumes"
+ %
+ % call with
+ % field format.bvolume.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+ { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % edition of book, must not be empty
+ % call with
+ % field format.edition.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.edition.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "\PrintOrdinal{" swap$ * "}" *
+ "\BEd" connect.with.space.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % volume and edition of book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check}
+{ edition format.edition.check
+ volume format.bvolume.check
+ connect.with.comma.check
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % volume and edition of book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+ parenthesize.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % volume and edition and translator of translated book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.trans}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+ format.translators.in.paren.check connect.with.semicolon.check
+ parenthesize.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % volume, edition, editor, and translator of (translated) book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.editor.trans}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+ format.editors.translators.in.paren.check connect.with.semicolon.check
+ parenthesize.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % formats pages by first checking if 1 or more pages
+ % and prefixing pages with "p." or "pp." (these strings
+ % are given in the commands \BPG and \BPGS, respectively),
+ % whichever is applicable, and do a tie or space connect
+ %
+ % call with
+ % field format.bpages.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bpages.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+ { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ { "\BPG~" swap$ * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % formats chapters by first checking if 1 or more chapters
+ % and prefixing pages with "chap." (this string
+ % is given in the commands \BCHAP and \BCHAPS, respectively),
+ % whichever is applicable, and do a tie or space connect
+ %
+ % call with
+ % field format.bchapter.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+ { "\BCHAPS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ { "\BCHAP" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc.
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+ pages empty$
+ { chapter format.bchapter.check connect.with.comma.check }
+ { pages format.bpages.check connect.with.comma.check }
+ if$
+ parenthesize.check
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title, volume, edition of book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition}
+{ format.betitle.check
+ format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check
+ title format.btitle.connect.no.dot
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title, volume, edition, and translator of book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans}
+{ format.betitle.check
+ format.bvol.edition.trans connect.with.space.check
+ title format.btitle.connect.no.dot
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans}
+{ format.betitle.check
+ format.bvol.edition.editor.trans connect.with.space.check
+ title format.btitle.connect.no.dot
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% ADDRESS AND PUBLISHER %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format address and publisher of book etc.
+ %
+ % New York: Wiley
+ % or
+ % Wiley (if address empty)
+ % or
+ % New York (if publisher empty)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.address.publisher}
+{ %
+ % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author"
+ % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX.
+ % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does
+ % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in
+ % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.)
+ %
+ author empty$
+ publisher empty$ or
+ { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" }
+ { author publisher =
+ "author" publisher = or
+ "Author" publisher = or
+ { author "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" }
+ { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ address "" connect.check "}{" *
+ % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+ swap$ "" connect.check "}" *
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{format.address.publisher.check}
+% Format \fieldname{address} and \fieldname{publisher} of a book etc.:
+% ``New York, NY: Wiley'' or ``Wiley'' (if \fieldname{address} is empty)
+% or ``New York, NY'' (if \fieldname{publisher} is empty), or do nothing
+% if both are empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check}
+{ publisher empty$
+ address empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Clear the stack.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.address.publisher
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% TYPE AND NUMBER OF A REPORT %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format number as in reports: No. 2017
+ % call with
+ % field format.rnumber.check
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+ { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format type and number of a standalone item
+ % call with
+ % format.type.number
+ %
+FUNCTION { format.type.number }
+{ type empty$
+ { type.2 }
+ { type }
+ if$
+ number empty$
+ { bracket.check }
+ { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
+ parenthesize.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \paragraph{Howpublished formatting functions}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The third function is a cleaner version. The first one is used with
+% various entry types; the second one with \entryname{@misc}, the
+% third one in v6.03 only with theses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.howpublished}
+{ howpublished empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { output.dot.new.block }
+ if$
+ "\APAChowpublished {" howpublished * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+FUNCTION {output.howpublished}
+{ howpublished empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "\APAChowpublished {" howpublished * "}" *
+ output.dot.new.block
+ }
+ if$
+}
+FUNCTION {howpublished.block}
+{ howpublished empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { start.new.block
+ "\APAChowpublished {" howpublished * "}" *
+ output.dot.end.block
+ }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{URL and DOI formatting functions}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \begin{macro}{begin.end.url.env}
+% Begin and end of a URL environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env}
+{ "\begin{APACrefURL} "
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For ``Retrieved $\langle$\textit{date}$\rangle$, from''
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ lastchecked empty$
+ { urldate empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "[{" * urldate * "}]" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * }
+ if$
+ " \end{APACrefURL} "
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{begin.end.doi.env}
+% Begin and end of a DOI environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {begin.end.doi.env}
+{ "\begin{APACrefDOI} "
+ " \end{APACrefDOI} "
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{begin.end.msg.env}
+% Begin and end of a message environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env}
+{ "\begin{APACrefURLmsg} "
+ " \end{APACrefURLmsg} "
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Format \fieldname{url} given that it is not empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First format begin and end of the enclosing environment.
+% With posted messages, a different environment is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{ type.2 empty$
+ { begin.end.url.env }
+ { type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+ { begin.end.msg.env }
+ { begin.end.url.env }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "\url{" url * "}" *
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Enclose url string in begin and end environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ enclose.check
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Process a whole url block. Skip if a \fieldname{doi} is also present
+% because then \fieldname{doi} has precedence.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {url.block}
+{ doi empty$
+ { url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { start.new.block
+ format.url
+ output.end.block
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format \fieldname{doi} given that it is not empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.doi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format begin and end of the enclosing environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{ begin.end.doi.env
+ "\doi{" doi * "}" *
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Enclose doi string in begin and end environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ enclose.check
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Process a whole doi block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {doi.block}
+{ doi empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { start.new.block
+ format.doi
+ output.end.block
+ }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Note formatting functions}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format optional note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{ "\APACrefnote{" "}" note enclose.check }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Process a whole note block (only \fieldname{note}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {note.block}
+{ note empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { start.new.block
+ format.note
+ output.end.block
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format original year of publication and note
+ % (reprint or translation)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note}
+{ originalyear empty$
+ { format.note }
+ { "\APACorigyearnote{"
+ originalyear "" connect.check "}{" *
+ note "" connect.check "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format original journal of publication and note
+ % (reprint or translation)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note}
+{ "\APACorigjournalnote{"
+ originalyear "" connect.check "}{" *
+ originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" *
+ originalvolume "" connect.check "}{" *
+ originalnumber "" connect.check "}{" *
+ originalpages "" connect.check "}{" *
+ note "" connect.check "}" *
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format original book of publication and note
+ % (reprint or translation)
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note}
+{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear "" connect.check "}{" *
+ %
+ originaleditor empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { originaleditor num.names$ #1 >
+ { "\APACorigEDS {" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
+ { "\APACorigED {" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ "}{" *
+ originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "} {" *
+ originaledition format.edition.check "" connect.check "} {" *
+ originalvolume format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "} {" *
+ originalpages format.bpages.check "" connect.check "} {" *
+ originaladdress "" connect.check "} {" *
+ originalpublisher "" connect.check "} {" *
+ note "" connect.check "}" *
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format information about original publication of reprint
+ % and format optional note
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.note}
+{ originaljournal empty$
+ { originalbooktitle empty$
+ { note empty$
+ { originalyear empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { originalyear "\bibnodate" =
+ originalyear "l" change.case$ "no date" = or
+ originalyear "l" change.case$ "n.d." = or
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block
+ format.orig.year.note
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { output.new.block
+ format.orig.year.note
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { output.new.block
+ format.orig.book.note
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { output.new.block
+ format.orig.journal.note
+ }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finish current entry by writing what's left on the stack and starting
+% a new line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{ doi empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block
+ format.doi
+ }
+ if$
+ output.end.block
+ "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$
+ test
+ { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+%<*annotated>
+ %
+ % According to TLC2, pp. 810-811, both annote and annotate fields are
+ % known, so support them both, but do not print them both, in case
+ % someone wants to make a file that is compatible with both the annotate
+ % and annotation styles and thus duplicates the information. Instead, we
+ % give annote priority.
+ %
+ annote empty$
+ {% Try annotate
+ annotate empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % add annotation
+ "\begin{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ annotate write$ newline$
+ "\end{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { % add annotation
+ "\begin{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ annote write$ newline$
+ "\end{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ }
+ if$
+%</annotated>
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finish current entry: process \fieldname{doi}, back references, and
+% annotation if requested.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {fin.entry.2}
+{ doi.block
+ "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$
+ test
+ { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+%<*annotated>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% According to TLC2, pp. 810--811, both \fieldname{annote} and
+% \fieldname{annotate} fields are known, so support them both, but do
+% not print them both, in case someone wants to make a \fname{.bib}
+% file that is compatible with both the \pkg{annotate} and
+% and \pkg{annotation} styles and thus duplicates the information.
+% Instead, we give \fieldname{annote} priority.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ annote empty$
+ {% Try annotate
+ annotate empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % add annotation
+ "\begin{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ annotate write$ newline$
+ "\end{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { % add annotation
+ "\begin{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ annote write$ newline$
+ "\end{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$
+ }
+ if$
+%</annotated>
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Top-level and near-top level functions for formatting complete
+% entries}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Article in periodical: \entryname{journal}, \entryname{magazine},
+% \entryname{newspaper}. Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% formatted.pages formatted.date periodical
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {periodical}
+{
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fieldname{author} or \fieldname{editor}, \fieldname{year},
+% \fieldname{title}, \fieldname{englishtitle}, \fieldname{type}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ author empty$
+ %
+ % no author: possibly special issue with editors as authors
+ % (APA manual, ex. 11, p. 121)
+ %
+ { editor empty$
+ %
+ % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+ % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this,
+ % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and
+ % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title)
+ %
+ { format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block
+ %
+ % now formatted date on top of stack
+ %
+ output.dot.new.block
+ }
+ %
+ % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+ % format article title and check if title or type present
+ %
+ { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block
+ %
+ % now formatted date on top of stack
+ %
+ output.dot.new.block
+ format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % format author and year, and check if year is present
+ % format article title and check if title or type present
+ %
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ %
+ % now formatted date on top of stack
+ %
+ output.dot.new.block
+ format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format journal name, volume and issue number, and pages
+ % and check if journal not empty
+ %
+ format.journal.vol.num.pages.check
+ %
+ % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+ % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
+ %
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % possible reprint and optional note
+ %
+ format.orig.note
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % journal article
+ %
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ pages format.year.month.day.check periodical }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % magazine article
+ %
+FUNCTION {magazine}
+{ pages format.year.month.day.check periodical }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % newspaper article
+ %
+FUNCTION {newspaper}
+{ pages format.bpages.check format.year.month.day.check periodical }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % (translation of) entire book
+ %
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ %
+ % author or editor,
+ % year, title, englishtitle, translator
+ %
+ author empty$
+ %
+ % no author: possibly edited book with editors as authors
+ %
+ { editor empty$
+ %
+ % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+ % title formatted as book title
+ %
+ { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans
+ format.type.number connect.with.space.check
+ output.dot.new.block
+ format.year.check add.period$
+ }
+ %
+ % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+ % format booktitle, volume, and edition and check if title present
+ %
+ { translator empty$
+ { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.btitle.vol.edition
+ }
+ %
+ % format translator correctly
+ %
+ { translator editor =
+ not
+ { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.btitle.vol.edition.trans
+ }
+ { format.ed.trans.as.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.btitle.vol.edition
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ format.type.number connect.with.space.check
+ add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % format author and year, and check if year is present
+ % format booktitle, volume, and edition and check if title present
+ %
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans
+ format.type.number connect.with.space.check
+ add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format address and publisher
+ %
+ format.address.publisher.check
+ %
+ % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+ % (used if book is retrieved from the internet)
+ %
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
+ % and optional note
+ %
+ format.orig.note
+ fin.entry
+}
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Article or chapter in edited book.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ author empty$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No \fieldname{author}: \fieldname{title} serves as author. The title is
+% formatted as an article title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { editor.ne.trans
+ { format.atitle.type.trans.check }
+ { format.atitle.type.check }
+ if$
+ output.new.block
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format \fieldname{month} and \fieldname{day} as well when available,
+% esp.\ for ``collections'' that are not books, such as parts of internet
+% documents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ format.year.month.day.check add.period$
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format \fieldname{author} and \fieldname{year}, and check whether
+% \fieldname{year} is present. Format article title and check whether
+% \fieldname{title} or \fieldname{type} are present.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ editor.ne.trans
+ { format.atitle.type.trans.check }
+ { format.atitle.type.check }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format ``In '' \fieldname{editor} `` (Ed.\ \& Trans.), ''
+% \fieldname{booktitle}, \fieldname{volume}, \fieldname{edition},
+% \fieldname{pages}. Leave empty if all these fields are missing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ editor empty$
+ translator empty$ and
+ edition empty$ and
+ volume empty$ and
+ pages empty$ and
+ chapter empty$ and
+ booktitle empty$ and
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.new.block
+ format.in.editors.trans
+ format.bvol.edition.pages
+ booktitle format.btitle.connect * add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format \fieldname{address} and \fieldname{publisher}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ format.address.publisher.check
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If not empty, insert \fieldname{howpublished}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format \fieldname{url}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Clear the stack.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format original publication (of reprint/translation) and optional note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ format.orig.note
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% REPORTS %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % technical report number
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ type empty$
+ { "\BTR{}" }
+ { type "\bibnotype" =
+ { "" }
+ { type }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title, volume, edition, report number
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number}
+{ format.betitle.check
+ % Single out the situation in which there is no number
+ % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well.
+ % (Why not use book then?)
+ type empty$
+ { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+ % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+ "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+ format.tr.number * "}" *
+ }
+ { type "\bibnotype" =
+ number empty$
+ volume empty$
+ edition empty$
+ and
+ and
+ and
+ { "" }
+ { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+ % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+ "\APACbVolEdTR {" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+ format.tr.number * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ connect.with.space.check
+ title format.btitle.connect
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % format address and institution of reports etc.
+ %
+ % Washington, DC: National Institute of Education
+ % or
+ % National Institute of Education (if address empty)
+ %
+ % warning if no institution
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check}
+{ url empty$
+ doi empty$ and
+ { "institution" institution warning.if.empty
+ "address" address warning.if.empty
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ institution empty$
+ address empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ %
+ % If institution = author or institution = "author"
+ % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to
+ % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher
+ %
+ author empty$
+ institution empty$ or
+ { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" }
+ { author institution =
+ "author" institution = or
+ "Author" institution = or
+ { author "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" }
+ { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ address "" connect.check "}{" *
+ % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+ swap$ "" connect.check "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % reports
+ %
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ author empty$
+ %
+ % no author: possibly edited report with editors as authors
+ %
+ { editor empty$
+ %
+ % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+ % title formatted as book title
+ %
+ { format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check add.period$
+ }
+ %
+ % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+ % format report title and check if title present
+ % format volume, edition, type, and number
+ %
+ { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.tr.title.number add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % format author and year, and check if year is present
+ % format report title and check if title present
+ % format volume, edition, type, and number
+ %
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.tr.title.number add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format address and institution, check if institution present
+ %
+ format.address.institution.check
+ %
+ % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+ % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
+ %
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format optional note
+ %
+ note empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.note
+ }
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % (translated) article or chapter in report
+ %
+FUNCTION {intechreport}
+{ author empty$
+ %
+ % no author: title serves as author.
+ % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this,
+ % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and
+ % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title)
+ %
+ { editor.ne.trans
+ { format.atitle.trans.check }
+ { format.atitle.check }
+ if$
+ output.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ }
+ %
+ % format author and year, and check if year is present
+ % format article title and check if title or type present
+ %
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ editor.ne.trans
+ { format.atitle.trans.check }
+ { format.atitle.check }
+ if$
+ output.new.block
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), "
+ % booktitle, volume, edition, pages
+ %
+ format.in.editors.trans
+ %
+ % volume, edition, report type and number, pages
+ %
+ "\APACbVolEdTRpgs {" format.bvol.edition.check * "} {" *
+ format.tr.number *
+ "} {" * pages format.bpages.check *
+ "}" *
+ %
+ booktitle format.btitle.connect *
+ add.period$
+ %
+ % format address and publisher
+ %
+ format.address.institution.check
+ %
+ % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+ % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
+ %
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
+ % and optional note
+ %
+ format.orig.note
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % papers presented at conferences etc.
+ %
+FUNCTION {lecture}
+{ author empty$
+ { "author" author warning.if.empty }
+ { format.authors start.new.block }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format year, month, and day, and check if year present
+ % format title and check if title present
+ % format howpublished and check if howpublished present
+ %
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ symposium empty$
+ { format.betitle.check
+ title format.btitle.connect output.new.block
+ howpublished empty$
+ { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { "\APAChowpublished {" howpublished * "}" * }
+ if$
+ address connect.with.comma.check
+ }
+ { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block
+ "\BIn{} "
+ chair empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { chair format.editor.names
+ chair num.names$ #1 >
+ { "(\BCHAIRS)" }
+ { "(\BCHAIR)" }
+ if$
+ connect.with.space.check * ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ symposium format.btitle.no.dot *
+ format.howpublished
+ address connect.with.comma.check
+ }
+ if$
+ add.period$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format optional note
+ %
+ note empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.note
+ }
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \paragraph{Theses}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format thesis title, with \fieldname{type} and \fieldname{school},
+% if necessary. Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% "default.published.thesis" "default.unpublished.thesis" format.ttitle.type.school
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The type now needs to be done here, and the school as well if the
+% dissertation was retrieved from the internet, which we'll take to
+% be the same as \fieldname{url} non-empty. Note that \pkg{apacite}
+% cannot distinguish between institutional databases (ex.~41 in the
+% 6th ed.\ of the APA manual) and ordinary websites (ex.~42), so the
+% user should provide the \fieldname{school} if it's necessary but
+% not otherwise. If both \fieldname{url} and \fieldname{howpublished}
+% are empty, the type is taken to be the unpublished thesis type
+% (unless overridden by the \fieldname{type} field); otherwise, the
+% published type is used (unless overridden).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.ttitle.type.school}
+{ doi empty$ not
+ url empty$ not or
+ howpublished empty$ not or
+ { pop$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Single out the situation in which |type = {\bibnotype}|, i.e.,
+% no type.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ type empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { type "\bibnotype" =
+ { pop$
+ ""
+ }
+ { pop$
+ type
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The desired type is on top of the stack. Build \LaTeX{} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ doi empty$
+ url empty$ and
+ howpublished empty$ and
+ address empty$
+ school empty$ and or and
+ { 'pop$
+ title empty$ not
+ englishtitle empty$ not or
+ { start.new.block }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ ""
+ }
+ { start.new.block
+ "\APACtypeAddressSchool {" swap$ * "}{" *
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If unpublished, school and location are listed in the next block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ doi empty$
+ url empty$ and
+ howpublished empty$ and
+ { "}{}" * }
+ { address "" connect.check "}{" *
+ school "" connect.check "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format english translation of title, if present, title itself, and
+% connect everything.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ format.betitle.check swap$
+ connect.with.space.check
+ "title" title warning.if.empty
+ title format.btitle.connect
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Block that indicates school and location for unpublished theses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {unpub.address.school.block}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Determine whether this is an unpublished thesis (no \fieldname{url},
+% \fieldname{doi}, or \fieldname{howpublished}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{ doi empty$
+ url empty$ and
+ howpublished empty$ and
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so, there should be a \fieldname{school}, so issue a warning if
+% it's empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { "school" school warning.if.empty
+ school empty$
+ address empty$ and
+ 'skip$
+ { start.new.block
+ "\APACaddressSchool {" address "" connect.check "}{" *
+ school "" connect.check "}" *
+ output.dot.end.block
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Do nothing if it's not an unpublished thesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format theses. Call with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% "default.published.thesis" "default.unpublished.thesis" thesis
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {thesis}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% DAI and similar are now formatted purely as articles, so remove
+% the two default types on top of the stack and redirect to the
+% |article| function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{ journal empty$ not
+ { pop$ pop$
+ article
+ }
+ { author empty$
+ { "author" author warning.if.empty }
+ { format.authors start.new.block }
+ if$
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check if \fieldname{year} is present and format year. Ditto for
+% \fieldname{title} with \fieldname{type} (and \fieldname{school}
+% if the dissertation was obtained from a website).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ format.year.check output.dot.end.block
+ format.ttitle.type.school output.dot.end.block
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Put name of institution (\fieldname{school}) and its address here if
+% it's an unpublished thesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ unpub.address.school.block
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If not empty, insert \fieldname{howpublished}. This is used if the
+% thesis was retrieved from a database.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ howpublished.block
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format \fieldname{url}, in case the thesis was downloaded from a
+% webpage, optional \fieldname{note}, and finalize with the standard
+% parts (\fieldname{doi}, back references).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ url.block
+ note.block
+ fin.entry.2
+ }
+ if$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% PhD theses and master's these, respectively. These set the default
+% published and unpublished thesis types and then call |thesis|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ "\BPhD" "\BUPhD" thesis }
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ "\BMTh" "\BUMTh" thesis }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% OTHER %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title of something (used in unpublished and misc)
+ % english translation of title
+ % type and number of something
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num}
+{ format.betitle.check
+ format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check
+ format.type.number
+ connect.with.space.check
+ title empty$
+ { add.period$ }
+ { title format.btitle.connect }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title of message or software-related thing (used in misc)
+ % english translation of title
+ % type and number of something
+ %
+FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+ format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check
+ type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+ { number empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect
+ bracket.check
+ connect.with.space.check
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { format.type.number
+ connect.with.space.check
+ }
+ if$
+ title empty$
+ { add.period$ }
+ { title format.atitle.connect }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % title, english translation of title,
+ % type and number of something (used in misc)
+ %
+FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num}
+{ type.2 empty$
+ { format.btitle.type.num }
+ { type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+ type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram" = or
+ type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = or
+ type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = or
+ type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware" = or
+ type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = or
+ type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = or
+ type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage" = or
+ { format.mtitle.type.num }
+ { format.btitle.type.num }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % unpublished manuscripts, etc.
+ %
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ check.relevant.fields
+ author empty$
+ %
+ % no author: possibly edited book with editors as authors
+ %
+ { editor empty$
+ %
+ % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+ % title formatted as book title
+ %
+ { format.btitle.type.num output.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check add.period$
+ }
+ %
+ % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+ % format book title, volume, and edition and check if title present
+ %
+ { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.btitle.type.num
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % format author and year, and check if year is present
+ % format book title, volume, and edition
+ % and check if title or type present
+ %
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ format.btitle.type.num
+ }
+ if$
+ howpublished empty$
+ organization empty$ and
+ address empty$ and
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block
+ "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check
+ organization connect.with.comma.check
+ address connect.with.comma.check
+ add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format optional note
+ %
+ note empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.note
+ }
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % nonprint media and other things that don't fit
+ %
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ %
+ % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type.
+ type.2 empty$
+ type empty$ not and
+ { type 'type.2 := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ %
+ author empty$
+ %
+ % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors
+ %
+ { editor empty$
+ %
+ % no author or editor: title/type serves as author.
+ % title formatted as book title
+ %
+ % if no title and no type, howpublished is title
+ %
+ { title empty$
+ type.2 empty$ and
+ { howpublished empty$
+ { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in "
+ cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ }
+ if$
+ format.year.month.day.check add.period$
+ }
+ { output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check add.period$
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+ % format book title, volume, and edition and check if title present
+ %
+ { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ output.misctitle.type.num
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ %
+ % format author and year, and check if year is present
+ % format book title, volume, and edition
+ % and check if title or type present
+ %
+ { format.authors start.new.block
+ format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+ output.misctitle.type.num
+ format.howpublished add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ address empty$
+ publisher empty$ and
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.address.publisher add.period$
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format url
+ %
+ url empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.url
+ }
+ if$
+ %
+ % format optional note
+ %
+ note empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { % Clear the stack
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { output.new.block }
+ if$
+ format.note
+ }
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % for legal cases and other cases that need to be
+ % done by hand
+ %
+FUNCTION {literal}
+{ "key" key warning.if.empty
+ "text" text warning.if.empty
+ text empty$
+ { "" }
+ { text }
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % technical documentation
+ %
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ %
+ % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual.
+ %
+ type empty$
+ { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" 'type.2 := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ misc
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % booklet
+ %
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ misc }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % part of a book
+ %
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ incollection }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % article in proceedings
+ %
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ incollection }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230)
+ %
+FUNCTION {conference}
+{ inproceedings }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % proceedings
+ %
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ misc }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %
+ % unknown types
+ %
+FUNCTION {default.type}
+{ misc }
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Initialization functions}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% This currently only defines the maximum number of names to be
+% formatted and this is not even used. This is something that I may
+% want to revisit in order to make it more flexible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {initialize}
+{
+ #6 'name.max :=
+%% #250 'entry.max$ :=
+%% #5000 'global.max$ :=
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For numbering the entries according to current sorting order.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {init.old.number}
+{ #0 'old.number := }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For comparing labels across entries.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {init.old.label}
+{ "zzzzzz" 'old.label := }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For all entries, initialize flags whether initials must be cited and
+% whether an `a', `b', etc.\ needs to be added to the year. Both are
+% initialized as not needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {init.cite.initials.add.to.year}
+{ #0 'cite.initials :=
+ #0 'add.to.year :=
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Functions that indicate whether we're moving forward (|ITERATE|) or
+% backward (|REVERSE|) through the entry list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {move.forward}
+{ #1 'forward := }
+FUNCTION {move.backward}
+{ #0 'forward := }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Basic bibliography output functions}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Beginning of the \envirname{thebibliography} environment: Write
+% preamble if there is one, write |\begin| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write |\end{thebibliography}| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to the
+% \fname{.bbl} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry}
+{
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Output \cmd{\bibitem} and \cmd{\citeauthoryear} commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ make.cite.labels
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Format and output reference list entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ call.type$
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Read and process entries and make the bibliography}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Read citations from \fname{.aux} file and extract corresponding
+% entries from \fname{.bib} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+READ
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write version info to \fname{.blg} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some initializations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE { initialize }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Store the citation order in an integer variable, and a corresponding
+% string variable that can be used for sorting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE { init.old.number }
+ITERATE { make.citeorder.number }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by its number in
+% later sorting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE { make.sort.title }
+SORT
+EXECUTE { init.old.number }
+EXECUTE { init.old.label }
+ITERATE { make.title.number }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Generate some tentative author-year labels and do some
+% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year labels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label }
+SORT
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether initials must be added to first author, how many
+% authors must be formatted, whether an `a', `b', etc., must be added
+% to the year label.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year }
+EXECUTE { init.initials }
+ITERATE { check.add.initials }
+EXECUTE { init.initials }
+REVERSE { check.add.initials }
+ITERATE { tentative.cite.num.names }
+EXECUTE { init.cite.num.names }
+EXECUTE { move.forward }
+ITERATE { definitive.cite.num.names }
+EXECUTE { init.cite.num.names }
+EXECUTE { move.backward }
+REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE { make.final.sort.key }
+SORT
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write preamble and |\begin{thebibliography}{}| statement.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE { begin.bib }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry, and write to
+% \fname{.bbl} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE { write.bbl.entry }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Write |\end{thebibliography}| statement.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE { end.bib }
+
+%</bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+%
diff --git a/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.ins b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.ins
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1328acc3a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version. The latest version of this license is in:
+%%
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+%% apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+%% apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+%% german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+%% spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in:
+
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\declarepreamble\drvpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in:
+
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacdoc.sty, apacite.drv,
+apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst,
+apa5ex.bib, apacxmpl.tex,
+english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc,
+german.apc, ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc,
+spanish.apc, swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate
+the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose
+whether or not to include the documented source code). Please
+do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\edef\noendinputpostamble{%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.%
+}
+
+\askonceonly
+\generate{%
+ \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+ \file{apacite.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{package}}
+ \file{apacdoc.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{docpkg}}
+ \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}}
+ \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}}
+ \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}}
+ \file{french.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{french}}
+ \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}}
+ \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}}
+ \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}}
+ \file{norsk.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{norsk}}
+ \file{spanish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{spanish}}
+ \file{swedish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{swedish}}
+ \file{apacxmpl.tex}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xmpl}}
+ \usepreamble\drvpreamble
+ \file{apacite.drv}{\from{apacite.dtx}{driver}}
+ \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+ \usepostamble\noendinputpostamble
+ \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}}
+ \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}}
+ \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}}
+ \file{apacann.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle,annotated}}
+ \file{apacannx.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle,annotated}}
+}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the *}
+\Msg{* following files into a directory searched by TeX: *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* All *.apc, *.sty *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* and to move the following files into a directory *}
+\Msg{* searched by BibTeX: *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* All *.bib, *.bst *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation, run the following *}
+\Msg{* script (or something similar, depending on your *}
+\Msg{* operating system): *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* bibtex apacite *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* See the README file for a brief explanation and *}
+\Msg{* the file apacite.drv for how to customize the *}
+\Msg{* manual (e.g., to include the documented source *}
+\Msg{* code. *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *}
+\Msg{* *}
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.pdf b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9420e5f8b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/biblio/bibtex/contrib/apacite/apacite.pdf
Binary files differ
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.39.1) at 2024-11-10 09:25:03 +0000